File loading please wait...
Citation preview
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 1/386
TK-50 Commissioning Manual Rev 1.3
Apr 1, 2010 Field Support Team
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 2/386
Contents 1.
Supervisory Panel
------------------------
3
2.
CTCM PCB wiring and SET UP
------------------------
13
3.
TK50G “YJ” TYPE MOTOR Inspection ------------------------
17
peed operation 4.
TK50G “BW” TYPE MOTOR Inspection ------------------------
19
peed operation 5.
TK50P3
------------------------
21
6.
TK50S
------------------------
30
7.
TK50M1
------------------------
41
8.
TK50M3
------------------------
48
9.
TSVAN & BSVAN / SDT & SDB
------------------------
55
10.
ETSD
------------------------
58
11.
CWIK-1C
------------------------
64
12.
GROUP (2CAR above)
------------------------
67
13.
Apartment Indoor button
------------------------
72
14.
TK50G FLAT CP
------------------------
75
15.
TOUCH-SCREEN
------------------------
83
16
APPLICATION MAP
------------------------
89
17.
Car Error Code & Adjustment
------------------------
111
18
Group Adjustment & Error Code
------------------------
185
19
CPIK
------------------------
208
20
Technical document
------------------------
269
21
TK50G(FLAT)/TK50P3 diagram
------------------------
315
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 3/386 1. Ways to work in control part 1-1. Matters of Conformation before work of connection in control part 1) Conformation about version of CTCR PCB: Over REV 1.2 2) Confirmation about existence of MAP for control part on IMS IO MAP - Confirm only when it is simplified control part, there is no relevant matters to CRT control part.
MAP of Control part
Version of CTCR 1-2. Work of connection 1-2.1 Connection in machinery room (CTCR) SH1
CON2
CON1)
CON5
Before connecting CTCR, confirm version and
JUMPER. (JUMPER3, 4, 8, SH2) When there is only housing CRT control part, Open JP4 . JP4 ON : A speed of communication 50 ㎑ JP4 OFF : A speed of communication 20 2) Connect CON2 to IOC PCB CNL2 in order as CCH, CCL, SHCC 3) CON5 confirms whether the connection of P24, G24 in Power line is accurately done or not. J 4) When there is SURGE FILTER, connect CON4 to first FILTER and communication line flowed to control part in side of second FILTER. When there is no SGRGE FILTER, connect CON4 directly to communication line C
CON2 CON5
1
CCH
P24
1
2
CCL
G24
2
3
SHCC
IOC PCB(CNLC2)
CON4
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
1
CCHX
2
CCLX
SURGE FILTER
CCHX
3
SHCCX
( for communication)
CCLX
control part
SHCCX
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 4/386 1-2.2 Connection of control part(CN-4A) 1) Using CN-4A to simplified control part, all connection is equipped in PCB itself and communication line connecting to machinery room and CTCR is intended to be connected to TB terminal zone. CCH, CCL in communication line do not convert each other. 2) Confirm JUMPER of CN-4A - When chapter 1 of CN PCB is used to COP of CAR, Jumper JP4 of CN-4A, and when chapter 2 is used, Jumper JP5 (Refer CN-4A PCB JUMPER TABLE) JP11 has to be JUMPER at all time ※ CN-4A PCB JUMPER TABLE CN order
JP7
JP6
JP5
JP4
CN1(0)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CN2(1)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CN3(2)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
CN4(3)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CN5(4)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
∥ CN12(11)
3) Use connection of P24V and G24 for each appliance in machinery room as power in simplified control part 4) After completion of all connection, check operation of communication by doing TECCR, TECC in Remote fast screen in machinery room. - Ways to check communication by the naked eye. CTCR PCB : If power is normal, LED D1 ON, on an off on D2 . If communication is normal, LED D4, D5, D6 would turns on and off with a regular speed. CN-4A PCB : Like CN PCB in COP, STAT LED turns on and off in a low speed. 5) If all communication condition is normally operated, check a function of control in control part. 6) If communication in control part is not normal - Check JUMPER in CTCR and CN4A PCB. - Check power of communication and existence of the snapping of a wire in communication line connected to control part from machinery room - Check GENERIC FILE and JOB FILE. Input “TECCR” and “TECC” on IMS REMOTE FAST screen. And check that SVP Ctrl indicates “I” when “DCN” is entered. If it does not be indicated, check communication condition of CN4APCB in control part
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 5/386 1-3. A system map in simplified control part (CN-4A) TSVPI - 1A(Control part) CN4 HIROSE 10P
CN-4A(Control part)
DISPLAY for a floor
CN5 HIROSE 10P CON3 1 2
P24
1
UP
2
DN
CN2
3
STAT1
1
4
STAT2
2
5
STAT3
3
G24
3
CON1
4
A
4
P24
1
5
B
G24
2
6
6 7
SPARE SPARE
5
8
SPARE
6
9
P24
10
G24
Machinery room CON2 CCH
1
CCL
2
SHCC
3
UTP CABLE is applied(under100M) CON4 1
PAK(HM1)
2
Fire-control(emergency)driving sign(FSH1)
3
Confirmation sign of output of power by Korean Electricity (EPNPI)
4
Independent power control sign (EPA)
5
Independent power RUN (no return) (EPCS1)
6
VIP CALL Input sign(CBx)
7
Earthquake-controlsign(SEIS)
8
Earthquake-control RESET(SEISR)
) CON5 PAK LAMP(HM1I) 2 3
Fire(emergency)driving lamp(FSMLI)
4
Indicating condition (INS) (INSI)
5
Completion of return sign for an appliance (EPLDI)
6 7 8
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
Lamp for break down(FALI)
Indicating condition(Automatic) (AUTOI) Confirmation sign for output of Independent poser (EPAI) Confirmation sign for output of Earthquake(SEISI)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 6/386 1-4. Work on simplified control part by using CN4B 1-4.1 Connection way in communication lines 1) Way needed communication lines as numbers of control parts, it is a way of connecting directly to CN4B through CTCR from control parts.. The numbers of Control parts: the numbers of communication lines = 1:1 → It is applied mainly to 186C System.(refer the picture 1) ① CN4B PCB J20 Jumper OFF ② Basically, sing of input and output is used as established function . but in case it does not be standardized, it used by adjusting sign of I/O at one’s option as specification of connector in scenes by IMS. ③ Control sing used to CN-4B can be monitored to I/O in IMS ④ Explanation of J-1 ~ J8 Jumper Pin Set up as the numbers of CN Board connected to Control parts. CN4B is set up to connected for the last time among CN Boards connected to control parts..
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
CN BOARD 0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CN BOARD 1
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
CN BOARD 2
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
CN BOARD 3
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CN BOARD 4
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
CN BOARD 5
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CN BOARD 6
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
CN BOARD 7
ON
ON
ON
OFF
CN BOARD 8
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CN BOARD 9
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CN BOARD 10
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CN BOARD 11
ON
ON
OFF
ON
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
JP5 ~ JP8
J10
J20
J21
Not Used
ON : Terminal resistor
Off
Not Used
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 7/386
2) Map of System of lines(Use of CTCR PCB)
Picture 1
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 8/386 3) Through CTCM in control parts, as way of N : 1 (N= maximum 8, the umbers of control parts), communication line is connected to CN-4B.(Mainly it is applied to CPUA Syste) ① CN-4B PCB J20 JUMPER ON ② Input/output sign is used as fixed function for each connector, and I/O sign can be adjusted at option by IMS as specification of a connector in scenes in which it is not standardized.. ③ Control signs used to CN-4B can not be monitored to I/O in IMS ④ Description about J1 ~ J8 Jumper Pin : In scenes in which many elevators is established, independent CN-4B board is added in BOX of simplified control parts for each elevator. Set up values same with Address values of S/W set up on CTCM of control parts by using Jumper Pin on CN-4B board
Jumper Pin
Description
JP1
Lift Number 2^0
JP2
Lift Number 2^1
JP3
Lift Number 2^2
JP4
Lift Number 2^3
JP5
Lift Number 2^4
JP6
Lift Number 2^5
JP7
Lift Number 2^6
JP8
Lift Number 2^7
JP10
ON : Terminal resistor
JP20
OFF : 186C is applied ON : CPUA is applied
JP21
Not Used
4) Map of simplified control parts of CN-4B ① When CN-4Bis applied to simplified control parts of 186C System, use it by set up relevant IMS MAP with I/O below to FILE.(Watch alteration of CN-4A and I/O MAP) ② When it is applied to simplified control parts of CPUA System, separate set up of I/O MAP is not needed.
PORT NO. 0 1
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
BIT7
BIT6
BIT5
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
BIT0
HM2 CN4-8 FDBZ CN5-8
HML CN4-7 EPAI CN5-7
EPA CN4-6 AUTOI CN5-6
SFLS CN4-5 EPEPI CN5-5
FDBZR CN4-4 INSI CN5-4
FSH1 CN4-3 FSI CN5-3
HM1 CN4-2 FALI CN5-2
ISC CN4-1 HM1I CN5-1
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 9/386 5) Map of system of lines(Use of CTCM PCB)
Picture 2
6) Map of circuit CN-4B A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 10/386
CN4B PCB(Control parts) PAK LAMP(HM1)(82M) -Failure lamp(FALI))(81T) -Fire(emergency)driving lamp(FSI)(89R)(89U) -Indicating(INS)(INSI0(84G)(84K) -Completion of return sign for each appliance(EPLD)()(86) -Indicating condition(Automatic) Sign
of
Independent
output
IND driving sign (ISC) (84Y) -FAKING driving sign (HN1) -Fire control driving sign (emergency)(FSH1) (84Y)
-BUZZER RESET sign (FDBZR)
-Stop driving to a certain floor (SFLS) (86)(85A)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
-Independent power
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 11/386 1-5. Connection of panels of an emergency driving Panels of an emergency driving is connected directly to IOC PCB of CP in machinery room, not by using CN1A PCB, and then it is operated emergency driving. 1) Connection of panels - Lines for panels of an emergency driving are needed four units for each appliance of P24, G24, FSM Sign of Fire), FSI (Lamp sign of an emergency driving) . When Lines are connected, it must not be connected to PIT bottom, but to machinery room (CP). - When KEY S/W panel of an emergency driving is used simplified control parts, CN4A PCB, connect them by using communication lines. It has not to connect lines of an emergency driving separately. - FSM Sign is sign of Fire input as CNL9-3 of IOC PCB by passing a terminal zone TB3 of machinery room CP through KEY S/W from the room of prevention of disasters. - FSI sign is output sing of Fire lamp indicating that an elevator is operating as Fire driving when Fire sign is input, it is output as IOC PCB CN2-A11 and supplying (-) power of FS Relay and then be connected to lamp of an emergency driving of a panel of an emergency driving in the room of prevention of disaster through contacts a(number 6, 10) again. - P24 and G24 are connected directly to a panel of an emergency driving the room of prevention of disaster from machinery room. -
FSM
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
FSI
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 12/386
2) Connection map of panels of an emergency driving
Machinery room
Terminal zone of TB3
Panel for emergency driving
Machinery room
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 13/386 2. Connection of CTCM PCB and Ways for SET UP - In scenes of tool of 3BL 4 and 5 of An area for composition of Yongin, way for connection of communication lines is a type of 1:N, not a type of 1:1 and CTCR PCB does not be used and CTCM PCB is used. ※ N can be used to 8 units. In An area for composition of Yongin, circuit 1 is connected as 9 units - Refer 186C Generic File Updated History. 2-1. CTCM PCB Switches 1) JUMPER - SH1 : Select to earth the shield line of CON2 communication or not. Make it shorten then it is earthed. (ON) - SH2 : Select to earth the shield line of CON4 communication or not. Make it shorten then it is earthed. (ON) - J1 : For extension of functions (OFF) - J2 : For Test of boards (OFF) - J3 : Only when change PCB PROGRAM, Use it by turns it OFF (ON) - J4 : Set up existence of application of terminal resistance in side of CON2 Make it shorten, then 120 Ω is applied. (OFF) - J5 : Set up existence of application of terminal resistance in side of CON4 Make it shorten, then 120 Ω is applied. Shorten an appliance in the end (most far from the room of prevention of disasters) and open others. 2) DIP S/W - CTCM PCB can set up ID of PCB by using DIP SW and set up a speed of communication. ① DIP SW1 It sets up own number of an Elevator, and set up is possible from 1 to 255 units. ID can be given at option without relation with numbered appliance of an Elevator. For example, when an appliance of an Elevator is 23 and it’s order in lines is 12th, set up as below. (it is same with way of set up of LHIB DIP SW in sorts of DY30) Dip sw1 Dip sw2 ON
1
KSD08H
2
3
4
5
ON
6
7
8
1
KSD08H
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
② DIP S/W2 - 8(BIT7) : Set up MODE of operation(1 : for CAN Repeater, 0 : for control parts(TAC50K 32bit control parts Interface)) - 7(BIT6) : TEST(1 : operation of a function of TEST, 0 : operation of a function of MODE, It is always 0 at scenes.) - 6(BIT5) : The number of interface of communication 1 Control parts in case of composition - 5(BIT4) : The number of interface of communication 0 area of yongin: 50Kbps - 4(BIT3) : Communication speed of observing parts and CTCM 1 - 3(BIT2) : Communication speed of observing parts and CTCM 0 - 2(BIT1) : Communication speed of control parts and CTCM 1 - 1(BIT0) : Communication speed of control parts and CTCM 0
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 14/386 ■ communication speed in side of control parts. applied(○), not applied(×)
DIP Sw2
as set up of operation MODE
Repeater
Observing parts
Number 1
Set up communication speed
Repeater
0 ○ ○ ○ 1 ○ ○ ○ 0 ○ ○ ○ 1 ○ ○ ○ ■ communication speed in side of observing parts. applied(○), not applied(×) as set up of operation DIP Sw2 MODE Observing Repeater Number 3 Repeater part 0 ○ ○ ○ 1 ○ ○ ○ 0 ○ ○ ○ 1 ○ ○ ○ ■ The numbers of communication interface applied(○), not applied(×) as set up of operation DIP Sw2 MODE Observing Repeater Number 3 Repeater part ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ■ TEST MODE applied(○), not applied(×) as set up of operation MODE Observing Repeater part × ○ × ○ ■ Operation MODE applied(○), not applied(×) as set up of operation MODE Observing Repeater part × ○
○ ×
○ ○ ○ ○
0 1 0 1
DIP Sw2
Observing parts
○ ○ ○ ○
Set up communication speed. Observing part
○ ○ ○ ○
Set up communication speed. Observing part
○ ○ ○ ○
TEST about board Repeater
Number 7 0 1
× ×
DIP Sw2
Set up a function of board by operation MODE
Number 8 0 1
Repeater × ○
2-2 Way for work of CTCM A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 15/386 2-2.1 Way for connection IOC PCB(CNLC2)
CCH CCL SHCC
G24 P24
SHCC CCL CCH
H
CCH appliance 1 SHCC CCL
S L SURGE FILTER (for communication) H S L CCL SHCC` CCH
appliance “N” or control part
1) Confirmation of JUMPER of CTCM PCB. A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 16/386 - J3 : always ON - J4 : always OFF - J5 : Only last appliance (most far from the room of prevention of disaster) ON, others OFF 2) Confirm DIP S/W. - DIP S/W1 : Give CTCM ID - DIP S/W2 : Set up a communication speed “In case ofAn area for composition of Yongin, It is set up as 50kps for a speed of control part, and as 20Kbps for observing parts now.” 3) Confirm connection of lines. - CON1: When a Program is changed, it is used. - CON2: Communication Port (Connect to control part IOC-CNLC2) - CON4: Communication Port (it is connected to observing part through passing SURGE FILTEL in control part.) - CON5: Power (P24, G24) 4) When all connection is completed, confirm condition of control operation and indicating condition after confirming condition of communication of CAN MUX of observing part. Confirm accordance of E/L appliance with a scene.
When an appliance is not fixed, confirm that KO on an observing program is the same with ID of CTCM.
3. Driving of TK50G “YJ” TYPE MOTOR at a low speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 17/386 3-1. Connection work of a machinery room 1) Connection of MOTOR BRAKE - The numbers of terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 are signs for contact (BSLE) of confirmation about opening of BRAKE. Connect number 1 and 6 after jumper number 2 and 5 each other and connect them to G24 and BSLE in terminal zone of CP and TB - The numbers of terminals 3 and 4 are terminal zone of BRAKE COIL. Connect them to BM1 and BM2 of terminal zone of TB and CP each other Contact of confirmation about opening of Brake (use of yellow as NO, red as COM ) Brake Coil
2) Additional connection of safety lines - When connecting safety lines in machinery room (governor S/W), Connect it by connecting switch in the picture in a row
Contact in side of MOTOR GOV S/W
Contact of GOV S/W
101
102
3-2. CPI Data A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 18/386
( P/W:NAT, Error contents :F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm ((rpm + (rpm×10%)) P3: Direction of a rotation of a motor P4: Direction of a rotation of motor PG P8: TAC50K P13 : Refer application map [Gear Ratio] P14 : Refer application map [Sheave diameter] P15 : 1 [roping] P40: A type of a motor (P/W: SHIFT # => GEHEIM) / [over CPI ROM Ver 18.1c] P96: 1024 S (Storage): If it is asked (Y/N), it is Y 3-3. CPUA(186C) Data M16 = 53 (INS speed _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148,60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 1024 M51 = rpm M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 255 M61 = 100 P16 = Refer application map D26 = 1 (disregard for a door:1, Approval to a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(A switch of run bug) = ON (Red LED on)
4. Driving of TK50G “BW” TYPE MOTOR at a low speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 19/386 4-1. Connection work of a machinery room 1) Connection of BRAKE and U/V/W
Brake coil
Sensor of temperatur e
< A brake coil in type of BW1491 >
2) Way of connection of a brake coil in a type of BW249 Type
- In cover of a box for a terminal connecting of COIL, connection map as above picture is appended. - In case of BW249 Type, Input power of BRAKE COIL is DC90V. Therefore, connection above is connected way of “PARALLEL”
4-2. Nameplate of a motor A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 20/386
4-3. CPI Data ( P/W:NAT, Error Content: F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm ((rpm + (rpm×10%)) P3 : Direction of rotation of a motor P4 : Direction of rotation of motor PG P8 : TAC50K P13 : Refer application map [Gear Ratio] P14 : Refer application map [Sheave diameter] P15 : 1 [roping] / [ for goods => Refer application map ] P40 : A type of a motor (P/W : SHIFT # => GEHEIM) / [over CPI ROM Ver 18.1b] P96 : 1024 S(Storage) : If it is asked (Y/N), it is Y 4-4. CPUA (186C) Data M16 = 53 (INS speed _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148,60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 1024 M51 = rpm M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 255 M61 = 100 P16 = Refer application map D26 = 1 (disregard for a door:1, Approval to a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(A switch of run bug) = ON (Red LED on)
5. TK50P3 A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 21/386
5-1. A trial run with a low speed 1) Description about U/V/W & MTH & BM1, BM2
Brake coil Sensor temperature
of
- Brake coil: is connected to BM1/BM2 of TB terminal (F1/F2) - Sensor of temperature: is connected to CPI (P1/P2) - U/V/W : is connected to CPI 2) Connection map of U/V/W & MTH & BM1,2
3) Description about connection of Brake S/W A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 22/386
Contact A Before open Contact B After open
Contact A Before open Contact B After open
- BSLE: is connected to G24 / BSLE of TB terminal zone of the lower part of C/P - BSLM: is connected to G24 / BSLE of TB terminal zone of the lower part of C/P 4) Connection map of Brake S/W
5) Connection of connector PG ↔ CPI of a MOTOR 6) Safety Line Jumper CNHV3 - 1(123A), 2(123) Jumper CNHV4 – 1(202_CDCF), 2(215_HDIF), 3(DLT), 4(DLB), 7(AC1B) Jumper CNHV4 – 6(DZB), 8(DZC) Jumper CHRT =>101-102-103-109-113-120 Jumper 7) CPI Data A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 23/386
( P/W:NAT, ErrorContent:F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm (rpm+(rpm×10%)) P3 : Direction of a rotation P5 : 6 (is adjusted as scenes) P6 : 70 (is adjusted as scenes) P8 : TAC50K P13 : 1 P14 : 330 [Sheave diameter] P15 : 2 P40 : A type of a motor 0 (When there is no type of a motor, push [SHIFT and #] at the same time and input GEHEIM to P/W, and find a type of a motor again. Then, many types of motors is output.) / [CPI ROM Ver 8.1c] P96 : 2048 P97 : 10 S(Storage) : If (Y/N) is asked, it is Y 8) CPUA(186C) Data M16 = 53 (INS speed _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 2048 M51 = 116 [rpm] M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 255 M61 = 100 P16 = 4757 D26 = 1 (Disregard for a door: 1, use of a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(a switch of run bug) = ON (red LED on) 9) Operation of UP/DN in C/P 10) Connection of a remote control COM[CNL2-1], UP[CNL2-3], DOWN[CNL2-4]
5-2. DATA for main confirmation of driving at high speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 24/386
ㄴㄴ CEF(voice
massage)=111111111111 D12(Front Door Type)=7 D24(Car Call Door Time)=100 D25(Hall Call Door Time)=110 D35=100 D26(Use of Door yes/no)=0 (1=Door disregard for a door, 0=Use of a door) D27=0 J23(Controller type_only CPUA is applied)=8 (7=USA, 8=Korea IOC) F16(Fire service type)=0 H10(Parking fool)= xx (When a parking floor is first floor in B2, B1, 1, 2, 3, 4 set up as 3) H16(door open time after Parking)=70 M16(INS Speed)=53 M30(Regular speed)= (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M31(Cleep Speed)=6~7 M32(when pulse is lost, hunt speed)=50 M35(value of Jerk)=120 M50=2048 M51(RPM of a motor)= 116 {value of a nameplate(Refer application Map & a nameplate)} M52(A speed of a contract)= (45M=>148,60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M60(Check of overlap of a speed in encoder of motor& governor)=255 M61(Check of a speed on Motor encoder)=50 M88(Brake type_only CPUA is applied)=1 (0=Regulator_USA, 1=Discrete_KOR) M92(Trick call)=250 M94(Overload setting)=100 M99(Over valance rate)=48 O10(When it is get into under 150Kg, numbers registered car call)=4 O25(Refer materials)=0 O26(Refer materials)=1 035(Fan/Light Time) = 180 O43(Refer materials)=11 O51(Car call toggle_Only CPUA is applied)=1 (0=no Toggle, 1=set up of Toggle) P16(a constants for change of encoder of situation)=4757 X11(indication of direction)=2 X22(a buzzer for penetrating a floor)=0 Z21(lamp1 of condition in Hall)=16(Fire), 64(80%) Z22(lamp2 of condition in Hall)=4(diversion) Z24(lamp3 of condition in Hall)=41(testing) WRT
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 25/386 5-3. Way for adjustment of load Content Input valance to a car after end of high speed driving a) Set valance in a car and counter by confirming a flow of electricity through a number of P107 of inverter data. E.g. ON=>+2.5AUP=>-2.5A, it is valance (error span under± 1A)(+,- indicates direction of UP/DN, standard of check a flow of electricity is middle of lifting road )
b) delete wait after complete of valance
Do setting potential meta as 3.5V(Put tester and COM of CLW board in DC) Mover to the lowest floor by a car(high speed) D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) NLD(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Enter FLD and Confirm a message SUCCESSFUL
Mover to the highest floor by a car(high speed) NLD(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Enter FLD and Confirm a message SUCCESSFUL
Mover to the lowest floor by a car(high speed) D26=0(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Turn on IND on COP in a car FLD(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Enter FLD and Confirm a message SUCCESSFUL
Turn on IND on COP in a car D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) FLD(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Enter FLD and Confirm a message SUCCESSFUL
WRT(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) D26=0(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) Confirm Over lode(do not drive at high speed) by riding a Delete load(100%) of a car D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and remote fast) In operation of INS UP/DN in C/P, Confirm change of Pos Count (actual pulse value) of Motion Diagnostics(screen of confirming Error) of IMS CPI data P50=1
a) In opeartion of INS UP/ON, Adjust CPI data P54 value to point of invariable Pos Count (actual pulse value) of IMS(P54=65 setting value of factory forwarding)
b) Adjustment range of P54 is from –200~+200 c) if load data have many wrong things, it can be occurred a sudden rise d) After adjusting, store (S) it on a screen of CPI command languages a) Turn to automatic C/P and ride in, operate accurate adjustment of roll back with driving b) After accurate adjusting, store (S) it on a screen of CPI command languages
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 26/386
5-4.. Ways for CLW Setting
Adjusted content
Remark
Put tester on DC and Connect lead stick in tester to COM and VO in CLW
Do setting to DC 3.5V by moving potential meta in the lower part of a car
Move a car to the lowest floor and it is automatically maintained C/P
Input D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and
When input DLW in screen of IMS command languages (remote fast screen,, It indicates Avg and Loo values
Value of Avg has to be ‘over 50’, this
value
is
variable, indicating change of potential meta
FSD(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote fast). After enter FLD, Confirm a massage successful
Move to highest floor by a car (high speed) FSD(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote fast). After enter FLD, Confirm a massage successful
After 3 seconds of implant of a car to highest floor, input a command language.
Move to lowest floor by a car (high speed) When input DLW in screen of IMS command languages (remote fast screen,, It indicates Avg and Loo values
Loo: Setting value after
input
of
NLD.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 27/386
D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote Turn on IND S/W in COP Inject 100% in a car Turn off IND in COP D26=1(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote FSD(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote fast). After enter FLD, Limited
Confirm a massage successful
value
of
Avg: 970
When input DLW in screen of IMS command languages(remote fast screen, It indicates list like below
Limited value of Avg is 970 in Full Lode state
It
indicate
values
like
Loo/loo/Slo/Slo/SL/Sl
and
Out
put
like
Sat=0/State:LW_CAL/Pre-Torque Enable means normal CLW Setting)
WRT(Screen of IMS command languages and Remote fast)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 28/386 5-5. Tuning of stimulating situation of a motor of motivation (ZEROING) Using a motor of motivation, when it is replaced an encoder or it is not tuned stimulating situation at start (forwarding from factory), it is operated tuning on stimulating situation. 1.
IMS DATA 1) M16=0 enter 2) D26=1 enter
2.
CPI DATA 1) shift+# enter 2) PW is GEHEIM enter 3) P160=50 enter (Confirm existing value and convert it to 50) 4) P86 enter 5) P86 = 1 enter Confirm OFF/ ON of sign for READY in TMI When UP or DN sign on C/P operation board is maintained, a motor splashes about inside and then maintain UP or DN sign until when it is disappeared. When it is disappeared, stop that sign.
3.
4.
5.
CPI DATA 1) P86=2 enter Confirm OFF/ON of sign for READY in TMI 2) P86=0 enter 3) Prior value before it is altered to P160=50 4) Select Y in (Y/N) after enter S CPUA(186C) DATA 1) M16=53 enter 2) WRT enter Make a trial run of INS UP/DN. Operate works when it is driven normally.
♣ Precaution) 1] Call with an adjustment team certainly before tune of stimulating situation of a motor of motivation 2] Tune after confirm balance unless tune of stimulating situation before roping. 3] Confirm certainly off/on of sing for READY in TMI. 4] Operate Zeroing after confirm it is necessary situation like as over electric current or a sudden rise etc. 5-6. Auto tuning of parameter When select other motor because there is no information of sorts of a motor in parameter p40(selecting a motor) of Inverter, operate auto tuning to adjust automatically gain of P,I of controller of electric current. 1. Condition of tuning ① Turn on (up side) the switch of Run-Bug(DIPSW) in upward-ring side of IOC board of a control part. ② Separate connector of brake and Make controller switches of control part in mode of testing drive. ③ Set up in control part: Using IMS, set up (set up a speed of testing) “M16 = 0”.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 29/386 2. Set up of parameter in Inverter ① If there is a sort of a motor in P40 (selecting a motor), select the sort or Other Motor. ② Set up value of a nameplate of a motor to use in P60 ~ P64 (Do not input of a motor of motivation). P60: Regular frequency of a motor P61: Regular voltage of a motor P62: Regular speed of a motor P63: Regular electric currency of a motor P64: Cos (phi) of a motor ③Set up as Tuning Start in P80 and push Enter twice. 3. Driving of tuning In mode of testing driving, when it is pushed down a switch UP, then tuning driving is operated in state of hold of a brake. Flowed with excitation currency, a motor is tuned. At this time, a motor does not be rotated. ① Hold down switch UP in control part. (Start of tuning driving) ② Continue to push down UP, driving is automatically ended.(about 10 seconds). ③ Turn loose switch UP in control part. (End of tuning driving) ④ When Enter P 80, Confirm reset (auto) by mode of normal operation. ⑤ Indicate measured value(R, L) on P81 and indicate this value on Inverter and panel of C/P. ⑥ Indicate measured value(P,I Current) on P82,P83, and indicate this value on Inverter and panel of C/P. ⑦Select Y in (Y/N) after enter S
4. After end of tuning ① Set up of control part: Using IMS, set up “M16=53” (set up a testing speed), Enter WRT. ②Push down switch of Run-Bug(DIPSW) off(down side) in upward-right side of IOC board in control part ③ Connect a connector of brake. ④ A switch of control part operates INS driving after confirm a mode of testing driving.
♣ Precaution) 1] Operate auto- tuning of parameter of a motor of motivation, certainly after ask to adjustment team. 2] After end of tuning, work after confirm INS driving in normal
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 30/386 6. TK50S 6-1. Driving at low speed 1) MOTOR U/V/W & A sensor of temperature
Motor PG
Sensor of temperature
Motor
1)-1. Connection of U/V/W
Inverter box
-Connect U/V/W from a motor to U/N/W in a terminal zone of Inverter.
1)-2.Connection of a sensor of temperature A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 31/386
Sensor of temperature
Inverter box
-Connect a sensor of temperature from a motor of CPN3-number 1,4. -Checked resistance of a sensor of temperature is about 100Ω 2 )Brake coil and a contact
Brake coil in the left side
Brake contact in the left side (B contact=BSLE)
Brake coil in the right side
Brake contact in the right side (B contact=BSLE)
2)-1. Brake coil of CPI BOX and a terminal of a contact A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 32/386
Inverter box
Brake coil
Brake contact Checked resistance of brake coil is left 60Ω /right 60Ω and between number 1 and number 4 of CPN4 is 120Ω. -A contact of Brake is B contact in unmoved state. 2)-2.Connection of brake coil and a contact
Inverter box
- Connect brake coil from a motor to CPN4-number 1,2(left coil)/CPN4-3,4(right coil) - Connect brake coil from a motor to CPN3-7,8(BSLM)/CPN3-9,10(BSLE). 3) Connection of motor PG A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 33/386
Inverter box
4)CPI X906 ÅÆ IOC CNL4 Connect a connector
Inverter box
5)C/P CPN1,CPN2 ÅÆ Connect CPI BOX CPN1B,CPN2B A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 34/386
6)Safety Line Jumper IOC CNHV3 - 1(123A), 2(123) Jumper IOC CNHV4 – 1(202_CDCF), 2(215_HDIF), 3(DLT), 4(DLB), 7(AC1B) Jumper CHRT =>MS-DESTP-CESTP Jumper CHRT =>101-104-111-113-117-120-121-202-215 Jumper CHRT =>GOV21-GOV22 Jumper 7)CPI Data ( P/W:NAT, Error:Content:F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm of a nameplate+(rpm of a nameplate×10%)) P3 : a direction of rotation P5 : 3 (adjusted as scenes) P6 : 70 (adjusted as scenes) P8 : TAC50K P13 : 1 P14 : 240 [Sheave diameter] P15 : 2 P40 : A type of a motor 0 (If there is not a type of a motor, push [SHIFT and #] at the same time and input GEHEIM to P/W, and fine a type of a motor again. Then many types of a motor is output.) P96 : 2048 S(Storage) : If it is asked (Y/N), it is Y
8) CPUA(186C) Data A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 35/386 M16 = 53 (A speed of INS _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 2048 M51 = rpm of a nameplate M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 0 M61 = 100 M88 = 1 (Brake Type) O51 = 1 (Car call toggle) J23 = 8 (Controller Type_IOC) P16 = 6513 (SG-200=6513, GDY-1B=482) D26 = 1 (disregard for a door:1, Use of a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(Run bug switch) = ON (Red LED on) 9) Operation of UP/DN on C/P 10) Connection of remote controller COM[CNL2-1], UP[CNL2-3], DOWN[CNL2-4] 6-2. Driving at high speed 1) Description about main connection 1)-1. Connection of PIT and lifting road CNH1-1(101),2(104) : PIT S/W, governor hanging S/W CNH1-2(104),3(108) : 1LS,2LS,CLS(60M/MIN), Car Buffer S/W(90M/MIN), Counter Buffer S/W(90M/MIN) CNH1-4(R-AC2),5(DLT),6(R-AC2),7(DLB) : Confirmation of connection of 3LS,4LS CNH1-16(10LS),17(P24) : IRTL CNH1-8(H202),9(H215) : Confirmation of a contact of Hall Door 1)-2.Connectin of upward of a car -All safety line is contact B Car Duct => 111-113 : SOLS 113-114 : CFS(Safety stick S/W) 114-115 : CSTP(Remote controller E-STOP S/W) 115-116 : MLS(Emergency exit S/W) 116-117 : ESTP(COP E-STOP S/W) 117-118A : Jumper 118B-119 : Jumper T-Cable=> Connection of CNK1,CNK2, CNK3 Connection of CNCC1 (Car communication) 1)-3.Connection of C/P T-Cable=> Connection of CNK1,CNK 2,CNK3 Connection of IOC CNCC1 (Car communication) CHRT-G24,SDB : 5LS CHRT-G24,SDT :6LS
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 36/386 1)-4.Connectino of governor in upward 가)Governor machine (SG-200)
Terminal box
Trim coil Governor contact
나)Connection of governor machine (SG-200) -C/P CHRT-108,111 (Connection of governor S/W in upward) -C/P CHRT-G24,TRP : Connection of governor trip G24,RST : Reset of governor (Except synergy _It is automatically returned when INS is UP)
Governor contactor
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
Power of trim coil
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 37/386 2) DATA to be mainly confirmed in driving at high speed CEF(voice massage)=111111111111 D12(Front Door Type)=7 D24(Car Call Door Time)=100 D25(Hall Call Door Time)=110 D35=100 D26(Use of a Door yes/no)=0 (1=disregard for Door, 0=Door use) D27=0 23(Controller type_Only CPUA is applied)=8 (7=USA, 8=Korea IOC) F16(Fire service type)=0 H10(Parking fool)= xx (In Floor of B2, B1, 1, 2, 3, 4, set up as 1, and In Parking floor set up as 3) 16(after Parking, door open time)=70 M16(INS Speed)=53 M30(Regular speed)= (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M31(Cleep Speed)=6~7 M32(In loss of pulse, hunt speed)=50 M35(Jerk value)=120 M50=2048 M51(RPM of a motor)= A nameplate value 52(A speed of a contract)= (45M=>148,60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M60(Check overlap of a speed in governor encoder& a motor)=255 M61(Check a speed of encoder of a motor)=50 M88(Brake type_Only CPUA is applied)=1 (0=Regulator_USA, 1=Discrete_KOR) M92(Trick call)=250 M94(Overload setting)=100 M99(over balance rate)=45 O10(When it is get into under 150Kg, the numbers of registration of car call)=4 O25(Refer materials)=0 O26(Refer materials)=1 035(Fan/Light Time) = 180 O43(Refer materials)=11 O51(Car call toggle_Only CPUA is applied)=1 (0=no Toggle, 1=set up of Toggle) P16(A constant of change in encoder of situation)= 6513 (SG-200=6513, GDY-1B=482) X11(Indicating of direction)=2 X22(buzzer for penetration of a floor)=0 Z21(Hall condition lamp1)=16(Fire), 64(80%) Z22(Hall condition lamp2)=4(diversion) Z24(Hall condition lamp3)=41(testing) WRT
3) Adjustment of load Refer TK50P3 4) Ways of CLW Setting Refer TK50P3
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 38/386 3)-1. Description about board of load Delete JUMPER in terminal
Sensor of load
-Confirm OPEN of terminal Jumper of CLW. -Connect a sensor of load to CON5-1(COM_red), 2(OUT_white), 3(V.SRC_black). -Adjust VO,GND to DC 3.5V by adjusting a sensor of load 4) Connection of Light in lifting roads 4)-1. Description about connectors of Light board
4)-2. Injection of power of Light Board in lifting roads A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 39/386
4)-3. Composition map of Light in lifting roads
Down part of PIT
Around the TM
5) Connection of emergency battery A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 40/386
-Blue line: P12V -Black line: G12V
7. TK50M1 7-1. Driving of TK50M1 at low speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 41/386 1) MOTOR U/V/W & a sensor of temperature
Sensor of temperature
Motor PG 1)-1.Connection of U/V/W
Inverter box
-Connect U/V/W from a motor to U/V/W of terminal zone in Inverter.
1)-2.Description about terminal zone of a motor
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 42/386
Sensor of temperat ure(about 1Ω)
Brake
Brake
contact the
in left
contact the
in
right
side(Bconta
side(Bconta
ct=BSLE)
ct=BSLE)
Brake coil in the left side (about 50Ω)
Brake coil in the right side (about 50Ω)
-Confirm certainly switch & coil & sensor of temperature by checking resistance 1)-3.Connectino of a sensor of temperature
Sensor of temperature
Inverter box -Connect a sensor of temperature from a motor to CPN3-number 1,4. -Checking resistance of a sensor of temperature is about 1Ω
2) Brake coil and contact A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 43/386
Brake coil in the left side
Brake coil in the right side
Brake contact in the left side (B contact=BSLE)
Brake contact in the right side (B contact=BSLE)
2)-1. Brake coil and contact terminal of CPI BOX Inverter box
Brake coil
Brake contact
Checking resistance of brake coil is about left 50Ω /right 50Ω and between number 1 and 4 of CPN4 is about 100Ω. -A contact of brake is contact B at state unmoved.
2)-2. Connection of brake coil and contact A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 44/386
Inverter box
- Connect brake coil from a motor to CPN4-1,2(coil in left side)/CPN4-3,4(coil in right side) - Connect brake contactfrom a motor to CPN3-7,8(BSLM)/CPN3-9,10(BSLE). 3) Connection of motor PG
Inverter box
4)CPI X906 ÅÆ IOC CNL4 Connect a connector A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 45/386
Inverter box
5)C/P CPN1,CPN2 ÅÆ Connect CPI BOX CPN1B,CPN2B
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 46/386
6) Safety Line Jumper IOC CNHV3 - 1(123A), 2(123) Jumper IOC CNHV4 – 1(202_CDCF), 2(215_HDIF), 3(DLT), 4(DLB), 7(AC1B) Jumper CHRT =>MS-DESTP-CESTP Jumper CHRT =>101-104-111-113-117-120-121-202-215 Jumper CHRT =>GOV21-GOV22 Jumper 7) CPI Data ( P/W:NAT, Error content: F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm of a nameplate+(rpm of a nameplate×10%)) P3 : A direction of a rotation P5 : 3 (adjust as scenes) P6 : 70 (adjust as scenes) P8 : TAC50K P13 : 1 P14 : 400 [Sheave diameter] P15 : 2 P40 : A type of a motor P96 : 2048 S(Storage) : If it is asked (Y/N), it is Y 8) CPUA(186C) Data M16 = 53 (A speed of INS _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 2048 M51 = rpm of a nameplate M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 0 M61 = 100 M88 = 1 (Brake Type) O51 = 1 (Car call toggle) J23 = 8 (Controller Type_IOC) P16 = 482 (GDY-1B=482) D26 = 1 (disregard of a door:1, use of a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(Run bug switch) = ON (Red LED on) 9) Operation of UP/DN in C/P 10) Connection of remote controller COM[CNL2-1], UP[CNL2-3], DOWN[CNL2-4]
7-2. Driving at high speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 47/386 1) Description about main connection –refer materials of synergy 1)-4. Connection of governor in upward (GDY-1B)
Reset of governor S/w of governor
Trim of governor
-C/P CHRT-108,111 (Connect governor S/W in upward) -C/P CHRT-V203,TRP : Connection of governor trip V203,RST : Connection of governor reset
S/w of governor
Reset of governor
Trim of governor
2) DATA to be confirmed at driving with a high speed -Refer materials of Synergy 3) Adjustment of load –refer materials of synergy 4) Connection of Light in lifting roads - Refer materials of Synergy 5) Connection of emergency battery - Refer materials of Synergy
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 48/386
8. TK50M3 8-1.Driving at low speed 1) MOTOR U/V/W & sensor of temperature
Motor PG
Sensor of temperature 1)-1.Connection of U/V/W
Inverter box
-Connect U/V/W from a motor to U/V/M of terminal zone of Inverter.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 49/386 1)-2.Connection of a sensor of temperature
Sensor of temperature
Inverter box -Connect sensor of temperature from a motor to CPN3-number 1,4. -Checking resistance of a sensor of temperature is about 235Ω 2) Brake coil and contact
Coil in the right side(270Ω) Contact in the right side (B contact=BSLE)
Coil in the side(270Ω)
left
Contact in the left side (B contact=BSLE)
2)-1. Brake coil of CPI BOX and contact terminal A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 50/386 Inverter box
Brake coil
Brake contact -Checking resistance of brake coil is left side 270Ω /right side 270Ω. -Brake contact is contact B in state unmoved. 2)-2.Connection of brake coil and contact
Inverter box
- Connect brake coil from a motor to CPN4-1,2(coil in left side)/CPN4-3,4(coil in right side) - Connect brake contact from a motor to CPN3-7,8(BSLM)/CPN3-9,10(BSLE)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 51/386 3) Connection of a motor PG
Inverter box
4)CPI X906 ÅÆ IOC CNL4 Connect a connector
Inverter Inverterbox box
5)C/P CPN1,CPN2 ÅÆ Connect CPI BOX CPN1B,CPN2B A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 52/386
6)Safety Line Jumper IOC CNHV3 - 1(123A), 2(123) Jumper IOC CNHV4 – 1(202_CDCF), 2(215_HDIF), 3(DLT), 4(DLB), 7(AC1B) Jumper CHRT =>MS-DESTP-CESTP Jumper CHRT =>101-104-111-113-117-120-121-202-215 Jumper CHRT =>GOV21-GOV22 Jumper 7)CPI Data ( P/W:NAT, Error content:F, SAVE:S, Error Clear:C ) P2 : rpm of a nameplate+(rpm of a nameplate×10%)) P3 : Direction of a rotation P5 : 3 (adjust as scenes) P6 : 70 (adjust as scenes)) P8 : TAC50K P13 : 1 P14 : 330 [Sheave diameter] P15 : 2 P40 : A type of a motor 0 (If there is no type of a motor, push down [SHIFT and #] at the same time and input GEHEIM in P/W and fine a type of a motor again. Then many types of a motor is output.) P96 : 2048 S(Storage) : If it is asked (Y/N), it is Y
8) CPUA(186C) Data A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 53/386 M16 = 53 (A speed of INS _ 16M=>53) M30 = Regular speed (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) M50 = 2048 M51 = rpm of a nameplate M52 = A speed of a contract (same with M30) M60 = 0 M61 = 100 M88 = 1 (Brake Type) O51 = 1 (Car call toggle) J23 = 8 (Controller Type_IOC) P16 = 482 (Use of GDY-1B ) D26 = 1 (disregard of a door:1, Use of a door:0) WRT # DIP S/W(A switch of run bug) = ON (Red LED on) 9) Operation of UP/DN in C/P 10) Connection of remote controller COM[CNL2-1], UP[CNL2-3], DOWN[CNL2-4] 6-2. Driving at a high speed 1) Description about main connection 1)-1.Connection in lifting roads and PIT CNH1-1(101),2(104) : PIT S/W, hanged governor S/W CNH1-2(104),3(108) : 1LS,2LS,CLS(60M/MIN), Car Buffer S/W(90M/MIN), Counter Buffer S/W(90M/MIN) CNH1-4(R-AC2),5(DLT),6(R-AC2),7(DLB) : confirmation of connection in 3LS,4LS CNH1-16(10LS),17(P24) : IRTL CNH1-8(H202),9(H215) : Confirmation of contacts in Hall Door 1)-2.Connection in upward of a car -All safety line is contact B Car Duct => 111-113 : SOLS 113-114 : CFS(Safety stick S/W) 114-115 : CSTP(Remote controller E-STOP S/W) 115-116 : MLS(Emergency exit S/W) 116-117 : ESTP(COP E-STOP S/W) 117-118A : Jumper 118B-119 : Jumper T-Cable=> Connection of CNK1,CNK2,CNK3 Connection of CNCC1(Car communication) 1)-3.Connection of C/P T-Cable=> Connection of CNK1,CNK2,CNK3 Connection of IOC CNCC1(Car communication) CHRT-G24,SDB : 5LS CHRT-G24,SDT :6LS
1)-4.Connection of governor in upward (GDY-1B) A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 54/386 CHRT-G24,SDB : 5LS CHRT-G24,SDT :6LS
Reset of Governor S/W of Governor
Trim of Governor
-C/P CHRT-108,111 (Connection of governor S/W in upward) -C/P CHRT-V203,TRP : Connection of governor trip V203,RST : Connection of governor reset
S/W of Governor
Reset of Governor
Trim of Governor
2) DATA to be confirmed at driving in high speed–Refer materials of synergy 3) Adjustment of load - Refer materials of synergy 4) Connection of Light in lifting roads - Refer materials of synergy 5) Connection of emergency battery - Refer materials of synergy
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 55/386 9.Composition of TSVAN & BSVAN / SDT & SDB 9-1 TSVAN & BSVAN / SDT & SDB MAP
1) In map without restriction about speed of two-stage, inactivate TSVAN & BSVAN as XTSVAN & XBSVAN. 2) Confirm M89=0.
9-2. Composition of SDT & SDB
1) Output of a speed of a car at point of Z28=1 : SDB or SDT (IMS Remote Fast Screen)
9-3. Composition of SVAN & BSVAN A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 56/386
1) M30= Regular speed (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) 2) M89= Speed controlled by two-stage (45M=>148, 60M=>197, 90M=>295, 105M=>344, 120M=>393, 150M=>492) 3) Work is possible after driving with a high speed
9-4. Connection map of TSVAN & BSVAN / SDT & SDB A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 57/386
Prior 6LS
Prior 5LS
Lifting road
10. A system detecting terminal floors A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 58/386
A system detecting a speed in terminal floor of TKEK uses detecting equipment as two sorts of below based on regular speed. a. A system detecting a speed in terminal floor of ETSD: over 120m/min b. A switch of limit of SDx (5LS, 6LS): under 105m/min ※ Precaution : Image files in which ETSD system have ever been established ETSD can be used only when relevant data of set up is reset. 10-1. A system of ETSD 10-1.1 Establishment of ETSD Vane (It is only applied to over 120m/min) 1. Examine a system of ETSD in upward. 1) Examine an interval between each ETSD vane in upward and sensor parts of ETSD (Refer picture of 4-1) 2) Set a car to level of highest floor. 3) Confirm that a distance between terminal parts of ETSD Vane in most upward of ETSD sensor is same with a distance in picture 4-2 4) Confirm a distance between ETSD Vanes near upward like picture 4-4. 2. Confirm a system in the lower part of ETSD 1) Examine an interval between each ETSD vane in the lower part and ETSD sensor part. (Refer picture 4-1) 2) Set a car to level of the lowest floor. 3) Confirm that a distance between terminal parts of ETSD Vane in the lowest parts of ETSD Sensor is same with a distance of picture 4-3. 4) Confirm a distance between ETSD Vanes near in the lower part like picture 4-4.
Sensor bracket of ETSD
Picture 4-1. Picture of ETSD Vane and sensor combination
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 59/386
Echelon of a car Level to highest floor
Picture
Terminal ETSD Vane in upper part and sensor part
Echelon of a car Picture
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
Terminal ETSD Vane in the lower part and sensor part
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 60/386
2134 mm
2057 mm
838 mm
ECNT vane
ECNT SLOTS
Picture 4-4
10-1.2 Adjustment of ETSD A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 61/386 1. Examination/Automatic a switch is automatically situated. 2. Move a car to the lowest floor and confirms it is D26=1. (Precaution: Confirm certainly that D26=1 is set up that people can not be get into for safety.) 3. Select a car and a group to be set up in control part (control Panel) in IMS 4. Delete an error stored by input a command RFL. 5. Operate like below as manual set up of ETSD. a. Input command TBS on IMS Remote Fast. b. Read and record M39, M40 values. Input values M 39, M 40[stored values +30] at option. (If it was 137, set up 167.) c. Input a call of highest floor and Operate driving in high speed. Confirm that an error is occurred. d. Operate driving in high speed to the lowest floor by input a call of the lowest floor. Confirm that an error is occurred. Refer table 4-1. (If there is no error then it means that ETSD set up is success. At this moment, Massage like “NTSD/ETSD Set-up” is indicated on Remote Fast screen) e. Restore M39, M40 values to their original values. ※Precaution : during set up, If ETSD error like 1516 is occurred, a massage like “ETSD SET–UP FAILED (ETSD set up failure)” is indicated. Refer parts diagnosing a car of an error code of a book in about matters related to error codes. Operate step of 1-4 again and reset up ETSD again after solving problems ETSD speed for
5 2 3 3 3 3 3
5 2 3 3 3 3 3
picture 4-5 – commnand language
Confirmation of a command language of ETS
ETS?
Confirmation of standard value of the lower parts of ETS
ETSB
Confirmation of standard value of the upper parts of ETS
ETST
Confirmation of Software version of ETS
ETSV
Confirmation of system parameter of ETS
ETSP
Confirmation of an error of ETS
ETSF
Deletion of ETS error
ETSC
NV_FAULT
1 – An error of Flash ROM
EVEL_FAULT
2 - Not enough EVEL counts when crossing a vane
INV_CMD_FAULT
3 – An error of a command language
OVERSPEED_FAULT
4 – Occurrence of over speed
BAD_PARM_FAULT
5 – Above one of parameter error [table 4-1]
10-1.3 Points for examination of ETSD A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 62/386 1. Input a command language ‘ETSB’ on Car Remote Fast. Confirm that points for examination of terminal ETSD of the lower parts show information about situation. Refer picture 4-5. 2. Input a command language ‘ETST’ on Car Remote Fast. Confirm that points for examination of terminal ETSD of the upper parts show information about situation. 3. Confirm that the numbers of vanes established are same with the numbers of values scanned 10-2 TEST for ETSD SYSTEM (It is applied to only things over 120 m/min) Confirm that whether situation values are established in ETSD table by input a command language of ETSB and ETST before test of ETSD. Confirm lighting of EGOOD LED and Delete certainly jumper between pin 123A and 123 of connector CNHV3 of IOC board. ※ Precaution : Operate certainly a test of driving in direction of down at first. If a driving in direction of up is operated at first, when a problem occurred in a system, it can pass highest floor and a safety gear can be operated by over run of overhead. 1. Input D26=1. Confirm again that whether a jumper between a pin123A and 123 of IOC board. 2. Input a command language TST2 in Remote Fast. Input a car call to the lowest floor. Precaution: If TST command is input, this test is stopped. 3. Driving of a car to the lowest floor and stopping in emergency, an error (1516) of ETSD would indicated on Remote Fast screen of IMS. (Safety lines would be intercepted by operation of relay SAFETSX of IOC board) 4. Confirm that whether RED EBAD LED is turned on of 186 boards. Precaution: It is turned to mode of automatic driving from mode of ETSD test after a car is stopped. 5. Confirm an error of ETS by Input a command of ETSF. 6. Reset 186C board. 7. Delete an error of ETSD by input a command of ETSC. 8. Situate a car to the lowest floor after complete a test of driving in direction of down successfully. Operate article 2 (input of a car call to the highest floor) and article 3 above for test of driving in direction of up. 9. If INIT SHDN is occurred after completion of a test, input a command ETSC twice. Although it is done and it does not be cancelled, make it INS and turn to NOR again. (If a problem is occurred, reset 186C.) 10. Reset 186C board. 11. Delete ETSD error by input a command of RFL. Confirm normal operation of load equipments by input DLW after operate a test of ETSD
IMPORTANT
successfully.(It is applied only to MRL and sorts of gearless) Operate final adjustment of sensors in load equipments after operate TST3 and TST4.
The numbers of vane for speed
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
Discrimination of vane
Situation of vane
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 63/386
Regular speed
The numbers of
fpm(m/m)(m/s)
vane
A number of vane)
69¾ (1772)
196 (60) (1)
196 (60) (1)
2
595/8 (1514)
295(90) (1.5)
295(90) (1.5)
4
between
fpm(mm) at
at 1200)
vanes
250
1&2=
84 (2134)
84
8,9, & 10
2&3=
81 (2057)
81
11
3&4=
33
(838)
33
12
4&5=
36
(914)
36
ECNT Slot
1
3
1600fpm(mm)
Inch(mm)
147(45) (0.75)
246(75) (1.25)
1000
Group of
147(45) (0.75)
246(75) (1.25)
A distance
Length of vane
5
15 /8 (397) 7
16 /8 (429) 1
1,2,3,4,5,6, &7
344(105) (1.75)
344(105) (1.75)
5
18 /8 (460)
13
5&6=
39 (991)
39
393 (120) (2)
393 (120) (2)
6
193/8 (492)
14
6&7=
42 (1067)
42
442(135) (2.25)
442(135) (2.25)
7
205/8 (524)
492 (150) (2.5) 590 (180) (3)
492 (150) (2.5) 590 (180) (3)
8 9
15
7&8=
45 (1143)
45
7
16
8&9=
48 (1219)
48
1
17
9 & 10 =
51 (1295)
51
3
21 /8 (556) 23 /8 (587)
688 (210) (3.5)
688 (210) (3.5)
10
24 /8 (619)
18
10 & 11 =
54 (1372)
54
787 (240) (4)
787 (240) (4)
11
255/8 (651)
19
11 & 12 =
57 (1448)
57
984 (300) (5)
984 (300) (5)
12
267/8 (683)
1181(360)(6) 1377(420)(7) 1574(480)(8)
1181(360)(6) 1377(420)(7) 1574(480)(8)
13 14
20
12 & 13 =
60 (1524)
60
1
21
13 & 14 =
63 (1600)
63
3
22
14 & 15 =
N/A
66 (1676)
5
28 /8 (714) 29 /8 (746)
15
30 /8 (778)
23
15 & 16 =
N/A
69 (1753)
16
317/8 (810)
24
16 & 17 =
N/A
72 (1829)
17
331/8 (841)
25
17 & 18 =
N/A
75 (1905)
18
343/8 (873)
19 20
26
18 & 19 =
N/A
78 (1981)
5
27
19 & 20 =
N/A
81 (2057)
7
28
20 & 21 =
N/A
84 (2134)
1
35 /8 (905) 36 /8 (937)
21
38 /8 (968)
29
21 & 22 =
N/A
87 (2210)
22
393/8 (1000)
30
22 & 23 =
N/A
90 (2286)
23
401/8 (1032)
31
23 & 24 =
N/A
93 (2362)
24
7
41 /8 (1064)
32
Table 4-2 Establishment of ETSD vanes in the lower parts and the upper parts
11. CWIK-1C 11-1. Description about CWIK-1C picture and JP A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 64/386 1) Picture of CWIK-1C(general appliance and emergency appliance)
For general
For emergency
2) Description about Jumper Function -Set up JP for terminal resistance -Terminal resistance is set up when JP is connected -Now, TK50G AC DOOR equipment is set up terminal resistance -JP for intercepting operation of FAN when it is emergency app -JP is opened when it is operated an emergency app -JP for confirmation of CSTOM signs -Connection of JP at all time -JP for operation of circuit detecting AC 220V -If it is opened, emergency lamp operate even on normal driving -JP is opened when battery charger applied with DY-20/30 (If it does not be applied, JP shot)
11-2. A sign of a connector of CWIK
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 65/386 1) Description about CNT1, CNT2, CND1, CND2
Safety line input to CAGE Safety line in emergency driving of machine room BY PASS
Safety line T-cable
on
Composing sign for U/Dsafeyline of test-driving in upper parts of CAR
Composing sign for U/Dsafeyline of test-driving in upper parts of CAR
Power (P24) Sign of LEVEL ZONE (UP) Sign of LEVEL ZONE (DN) Sign of DOOR ZONE1 (UP) Sign of DOOR ZONE2 Forced stop sign (Detect) Forced stop sign (Detect) Power like inter-phone, emergency T-cable sensor
Connect to DUCT in upper part of a car
Connect to DUCT in upper part of a car
2) Description about CND3, CON401, CNP1, CNP2, CN1, CN2, CON404, CNT8 reversed phase loss A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 66/386
12. Ways for work of GROUP over 2 cars A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 67/386 12-1. Connection of lines and alteration of DATA
12-1.1 Connection of CP and lines of HALL BUTTON A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 68/386 1) Line of IOC PCB CNGC1 of CAR1, passing terminal zones of GWRT2 and GWRT2 of CAR(appliance #2), is connected to IOC PCB CNGC1. 2) Do jumper line of SHHC1 of number CNGC1-3 to line of an earth. 3) Connect HC1H, HC1L, SHHC1 in terminal zone of GWRT2 of CAR1 to HC1H, HC1L, SHHC1 in terminal zone of GWRT2 of CAR2 each other. Lines HC1H, HC1L, SHHC1 in GWRT terminal zones of CAR1, CAR2 are connected to HC1H,HC1L,SHHC of IOC PCB CNHC1 and to CON2 of CTCR each other. ※CNLC1 of IOC PCB is connected to a connector of CNHC1 by pattern in PCB itself. 4) In case of hall button lines, Connect P24, G24, TCH1 to CNHC1 of IOC PCB, in case of communication lines, connect to HHX, HLX, SHCC in terminal zone of GWRT2 5) In a Group over 2 cars, CTCR JUMPER does jumper to J3, J4, J8, SH2. 5) 186C JUMPER TABLE 6) Name of JUMP CANBT
CANBC
Use HALL CAN Terminal resistor In case over 3 cars, JUMP only to 186C at the end of both HALL CAN SHIELD In case over 3 cars, JUMP only to 186C at the end of both
JUMPER
Jump/open
Jump/open
CANCT
CAR CAN Terminal resistor
Jump
CANCC
CAR CAN SHIELD
Jump
GCT
JP2
Group Terminal resistor In case over 3 cars, JUMP only to 186C at the end of both Boot block Write Protect
Remark
Jump/open
open
12-1.2 Alteration of DATA 1) Alter DATA in state unconnected lines of 2CAR. 1) Appliance #1 In screen of IMS GROUP REMOT FAST, Input MID=20 enter, MXD=20 enter, REE=1 enter, SPE=18 enter, REE=2 enter, SPE=18 enter and store it by do WRT. 2) Appliance #2 In screen of IMS GROUP REMOT FAST, input MID=20 enter, MXD=20 enter, REE=1 enter, SPE=18 enter, REE=2 enter, SPE=18 enter and store it by do WRT.
12-1.3 CTCR(CAN to CAN repeater)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 69/386
Way for shield and matching of lifting roads for a group over 2 cars
CAR1 186C Rt=120 (CANBT)
CAR2 186C
CAR1 186C Rt=120 (CANBT)
CTCR Rt=120 (J3)
CTCR Rt=120 (J3)
HN #n
HN #2
HN #n
HN #2
HN #1 Rt=120
HN #1 Rt=120
J1 : x J2 : x J3 : o J4 : o SH1 : x SH2 : o J8 : o x: do not jump, o: jump
12-2. Separation of appliance for Handicapped and work of HALL CHIME, LANTERN 12-2.1 Work separating appliance for Handicapped A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 70/386
U3
U2
U1
1) First of all, Confirm whether there is U3 a component in HN PCB(TLHPI, TLHIB) in each floor like a picture above. 2) Number 1 of number CN4: D(DOWN CALL), number 2: U(UP CALL), number 3: DL(DOWN LAMP), number 4: UL(UP LAMP) Connect lines by moving them to number 1(HD), number 2 (HU), number 3(HDL), number 4(HUL) of number CN5. 3) Adjust IO MAP of IMS
- EUI2(UP CALL for Handicapped in a second floor), EDI2(DOWN CALL for Handicapped in a second floor), EUO2(UP LAMP for Handicapped in a second floor), -EDO2(DOWN LAMP for Handicapped in a second floor) - HG1(a chime bell of hall in first floor) - HLU3(UP HALL LANTERN in third floor), HLD3(DOWN HALL LANTERN in third floor) 4) Confirm condition of operation after operate HN SCAN and complete all operations. - TECCR, TECF, TECC 12-2.2 Ways for work of HALL CHIME, LANTERN
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 71/386
HG1
HG2
HG3
HG4
HG5
HG6
HG7
1) Work of HALL CHIME - Confirm IO MAP. HG1(CHIME in the first floor), HG2(CHIME in the second floor)…………HGn(CHIME in the ‘n’ floor) - Connection in lifting roads Connect I/01 of HN PCB and G24 to HALL CHIME. - Operate HN SCAN.(TECCR, TECF, TECC) 2) Work of HALL LANTERN - Confirm IO MAP. HLU2(UP LANTERN in the second floor), HLD2(DOWN LANTERN in the second floor) HLUn(UP LANTERN in ‘n’ floor), HLDn(n DOWN LANTERN in ‘n’ floor) - Confirm 186C DATA. Number Z23 0 = lamp implanted 1= directly assignment & Implanting on/ off Input Z23=1.
13. Buttons in establishments
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 72/386 There is two ways used now to establish buttons in establishments. Actually, First way is to establish buttons and indicating floor linking with down hall button of an elevator and second way is to register (Dumy call) of a HALL CALL linking with CRT control part by using network in establishments. That is home network a type, it can be operated after GENERIC FILE Rev. 2.01f in 186C PCB. 13-1. Work of buttons in establishments DIP S/W(1CAR) ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
Terminal DIP S/W (GROUP over 2 cars) ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
1) Confirm the Version of HN PCB in overall Hall before operate word of buttons in establishments. -When it is injected that power of HN PCB, it has to be over V06b. -Confirm whether that 485communication Port (485RX, 485TX) in HN PCB. (FTP 4P CATⅩ5) 2) Confirm condition of connection in establishments. - 485 Communication line(RX, TX) for each establishment : FTP 4P CATⅩ5 Or ESEV0.75 ㎟Ⅹ4C - Down call and lamp line (DHC, DHL), line of Power(P24V, GND) : UTP 4P CATⅩ5 3) When line of communication is last establishment, 2) Turn on terminal JUMPER, and Turn off other JUMPER in other establishments. 3) When an elevator is a group over 2CAR, Turn on DIP S/W number 2, When it is 1CAR, Turn off DIP S/W.
5) Ways for work of connection A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 73/386
The inside of First establishment
The second establishment
FTP
UTP
FTP
UTP
FTP
FTP
UTP
UTP
Lifting roads
In case of lines of communication, 485RX in HN PCB of lifting roads and 485TX have to be connected to buttons of establishment in first establishment, and to communication lines(RX, TX) of buttons in second establishments from buttons in first establishments. 13-2 Ways for checking operation of buttons in establishments A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 74/386 1) When connection of lines is completed, and communication in buttons of establishments is normally operated there’re is no sign in segments in buttons of establishments. 2) When CALL of buttons in establishments is pushed down, situation of 1CAR is indicated on a segment in case of 1CAR and situation of assigned appliance is indicated on it in case of a group over 2CAR. -3) When CALL of buttons in establishments is pushed down and things like below are indicated on a segment, Check communication line with condition un-communicated of a board in buttons of establishment in the present. - Confirm whether RX and TX are converted - Confirm that communication of 485 is output in HN PCB 4) When CALL button is pushed down and things as below are indicated, Check version of HN PCB. When the power of HN PCB is turned OFF and turned ON, it has to be over V06.
14. CP for a type of Flat of TK50G A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 75/386 14-1. Division according to application for a type of TK50G Flat Controller
Code
Applied sorts
TK-50G Flat
KS/JIS TK-50G/55G/50P/50P3 KS/JIS TK-50G/55G/50P/50P3 TK-50G Integrate KS/JIS TK-55L all model EN TK-50G/55G/50P/50P3/55L 14-2. Various factors of control part in a type of TK50G Flat Items
Various factor
Size of Control part
650*300*1100
CP Door
Side 1
Application of CPIK
CPIK 11M/G1 ~ 48M/G1
Return resistance
Iron, chrome
A type of repair
A type of repair of the front and the backside
Applied CODE
KS/JIS
CPIK To CPIK-48G/M1 CPIK-60/105M1(CPI) CPIK all model CPIK all model Remark
Integration type : 800*400*1600
CPIK60/105, TK55L is applied separate control part Basic equipment of FAN protected against heat of return resistance
Is applied to EN and CPIK 60/105, TK55L is applied with separate control part. There is no separate restriction on numbers of GROUP.
GROUP
15CAR
Only, general 2CAR use Ethernet Port and does not be applied to CTCR. After this, all connection of Group in control parts uses Ethernet Cable.
Power of input Temporary Jumper
Regular type: three phases 4 lines Temporary Jumper for a trial run
Un-regular type (7T Trans is applied) Delete certainly after this connection
36Core
Regular type
48Core
Un-regular type (for view, DC Door)
T-Cable
IOC
is applied to over IOC V1.7
Terminal zone
Widmuller
Alteration matters for main circuits
TB terminal / MIC
MCP
Is not applied
MC1
Is applied to assistance contact of 4NO
BRK
Is applied to 220V Relay (control sign)
BRKE Controller SMPS, BR1/2 Detector of temperature in machinery room
Is applied to BCHB (B5IT) 26V PCB Type (TDR-50) Is not an united type
Main parts in the backside
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
Regular (AC Reactor, EMI Filter, SMPS, AC Filter)
Option (7T, Group Wiring, Detector of temperature in machinery room, Protector against the falling of a tunderbolt, 40T, 43T, Detector of an electric current of housing construction)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 76/386 14-3. Composition of TK50G Flat
- The front -
- The backside –
14-3.1. Description about PCB 1) IOC V1.7 - Alteration of CDCF, HDIF Relay and application of Relay Socket : It is applied with Relay socket, and so it can be replaced at scenes, and it is raised reliablity by applying Relay in high reliability. - Supplement of DLB, DLT circuits : When a lifting road is long, Sink resistance is inserted to prevent an error by voltage inducted to Hoistway Cable. - It is supplemented Temporary remocon circuit used at establishment. - It is added CN3-CN8(Pin1=24, Pin2=G24). - It is applie to second firefighting, ETSX(2B, 3B) Relay at all time.
2) Brake Controller A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 77/386
PARALLEL
14-4. Connection work for a driving at low speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 78/386 14-4.1 Connection in machinery room 1) Connectin of MOTOR - Connect contacts(BSLE, BSLM) to confrim operation of Brake, Brake Coil and electric power lines (U, V, W, G). In case of “PS” DIANA Motor, Connet Motor Brake Coil in a row(Parallel). 2) Connection of CP - JUMPER of Safety lines
CNMV4
CNHV2
*Precaution) All has to be connected white color
① Do JUMPER to number CNHV4 and number CNHV2 of IOC PCB like a piecture above. - A connector for JUPER in CP is connected. - After competion of work, Delete a connector and Connect a normal connector at work of a driving with a high speed.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 79/386
① Do JUMPER to 101, 103, 109, 111, 120 on terminal zone of TBS JUMPER.(Safety lines) ☞ Refer 13, 20Page in a map. ② Do JUMPER 102B, 102C, contatcs of relay reversed phase loss, only when there is no relay reversed phase loss. DO JUMPER 102C, 103, contacts for use of manual handle of a motor, only when there is no therm. ③ When all connection is ended, Confrim that safety line is established by connecting to IMS and Input basic DATA and Confirm condition of a driving. ☞ Input DATA of IMS and CPIK is same with existing things, and ways of input is also same.
14-5. Connection work for a driving with a high speed A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 80/386 14-5.1 Connection work 1) Connectin of Cable in lifting road and T-CABLE
- Any change is in T-Cable and electric wires in lifting roads is altered to MIC connectors. 2) Connection of TOB-1A/2A and TCDU
- TOB-1A/2A -
- TCDU -
- CWIK PCB in CIP is deleted and TOB-1A/2A PCB is developed, TCDU PCB is added in CAR DUCT and terminal zone in DUCT is deleted. Also, T-Cable does not be connected to COP and is connected to DUCT in the upper part of a CAR. - Confrim establishment of safety line by connecting to IMS after completion of connection. - After establishment of safety lines, Input DATA as an existing way and Operate a driving with a high speed.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 81/386
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 82/386
Note1:opation table Both/penetra
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 83/386
15. Work of Touch - Screen 15-1. Confirm PROGRAM and Lines 1) Confirm lines of COP and a car in upper part - Lines for work of Touch Screen use line of communication (CAN-H, CAN-L, SHCC), line of power(P5, G5D, P24, G24) and P5, G5D use AVR in COP. - Confirm first that Line (CNPW) for input power (AC220V) in COP is created. - When Touch Screen is applied to SUB COP, Confirm that line of CN27 is created.
Note) Add to others except both, penetrate
option/Touch
Screen
Note) Touch Screen Main/Sub Cop for supplying power (LCE (TCCU-1A)SMPS)
COP/when there is SUB COP in 10 key COP. Two gate. Through gate Touch Screen COP/10key COP + SOB COP
2) Confirmation of PROGRAM - Confirm that whether “TouchCOP” is set up by do “DCN” on Remote Fast screen. - Change DATA into IMS “O51=1”. Number O51 : CAR CALL toggle(is only applied to CPUA )
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 84/386
15-2 Establishment and Connection work
Inter phone
COP
TCCU
15-2.1 Connection of COP Main Power
CPI
SUB COP
1) Connectin of MAIN POWER -Number 1 : P24, number 2 : G24 2) Connection of CPI - Number 1 : RX+, number 2 : RX-, number 3 : P24, number 4 : G24, number 5 : TX+, number 6 : TXCPI J2 NO
RJ11 CN-A1
PIN NAME
NO
PIN NAME
1
RX-
1
2
RX+
2
P24
3
P24
3
G24
4
G24
4
485RX
5
5
485TX
6
6
3) Connection of SUB COP -number 1 : TX+, number 2 : TX-, number 3 : RX+, number 4 : RXA3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 85/386
15-2.2 Connection and Setting of TCCU
J6 J3
CN1
J4
1) Connection of connectors(dommunication) of number J5 - CAN H, CANL, SHLD 2) Connection of connector(Power) of number J6 - Confrim connection of forwording from fatory at first and connect connectors - Originally number 1: P5(white), number 2: G5(blue), number 4: P24(Red), number 5: G24(White) , But in actual Connection, it can be forwarded as numbe 1: G24(white), numbe 2: P24(Red), numbe 4:G5(Blue), numbe 5: P5(White).
G24 P24
G5 P5
P5 G5
- Normal connection -
P24 G24 - Wrong connection -
3) Connection of CN1 - CN1-A13 : DOB, CN1-B13 : DCB 4) TCCU Setting ① SW2 Setting
Switch (SW2)
1
2
3
Car No.
Off
Off
Off
1
On
Off
Off
2
Off On Off On Off On
On On Off Off On On
Off Off On On On On
3 4 5 6 7 8
Switch (SW2)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
4
Off On
Door Front Rear
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 86/386 ② CAN Jumper Setting
JP2 JP4 JP5
JP2
ON OFF OFF
JP4 JP5
15-3. Problems 1) When words ”Excess the number limit” is indicated after making“ IND” of a car on LCD screen indicating of a floor. ☞ It is a problem with a program of a Cheonjo system . 2) When registration of a CALL and 2Touch Cancel does not be operated well. ☞ It is a problem with TCCU PCB on Touch Screen.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 87/386
15-3 Map of CPI and COP 15-3.1 Map of COP
Inter phone
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 88/386
15-3.2 Map of CPI
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 94/148
Application Map
Test & Commissioning
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 95/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 96/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 97/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 98/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 99/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 100/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 101/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 102/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 103/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 104/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 105/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 106/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 107/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 108/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 109/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 110/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 111/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 112/148
TK55L(ELEJET2) SC300,SC400 적용 속도
120m/min
150m/min
인승
P13 ~ P20 P24
Φ440
Φ440
P40=SC300M005
P40=SC300M006
Φ440
Φ560
P40=SC300M005
P40=SC400S005
TK50L(SC300, SC400 Series) 속도
120m/min
150m/min
180m/min
210m/min
240m/min
300m/min
인승
P11 ~ P15
186rpm Φ410
233rpm Φ410
187rpm Φ440
239rpm Φ560
273rpm Φ560
341rpm Φ560
P40=SC300S004
P40=SC300S004
P40=SC300M005
P40=SC400S005
P40=SC400S003
P40=SC400M014
P16=482 P2=205
P16=482 P2=256
P16=482 P2=261
P16=482 P2=263
P16=482 P2=300
P16=1021 P2=375
174rpm Φ440
217rpm Φ440
187rpm Φ440
239rpm Φ560
273rpm Φ560
341rpm Φ560
P17
P40=SC300M001
P40=SC300M002
P40=SC300M005
P40=SC400S005
P40=SC400S003
P40=SC400M014
P16=482 P2=191
P16=482 P2=239
P16=482 P2=261
P16=482 P2=263
P16=482 P2=300
P16=1021 P2=375
P20
P24
P30
174rpm Φ440
217rpm Φ440
205rpm Φ560
239rpm Φ560
273rpm Φ560
341rpm Φ560
P40=SC300M001
P40=SC300M002
P40=SC400S007
P40=SC400S005
P40=SC400S003
P40=SC400M014
P16=482 P2=191
P16=482 P2=239
P16=482 P2=226
P16=482 P2=263
P16=482 P2=300
P16=1021 P2=375
174rpm Φ440
171rpm Φ560
205rpm Φ560
239rpm Φ560
273rpm Φ560
341rpm Φ560
P40=SC300M001
P40=SC400S007
P40=SC400S007
P40=SC400M010
P40=SC400M010
P40=SC400M014
P16=482 P2=191
P16=482 P2=188
P16=482 P2=226
P16=482 P2=263
P16=482 P2=300
P16=1021 P2=375
136rpm Φ560
171rpm Φ560
205rpm Φ560
239rpm Φ560
273rpm Φ560
341rpm Φ560
P40=SC400S004
P40=SC400M012
P40=SC400S009
P40=SC400M010
P40=SC400M010
P40=SC400M014
P16=482 P2=191
P16=482 P2=188
P16=482 P2=226
P16=482 P2=263
P16=482 P2=300
P16=1021 P2=375
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 113/148
TK50L(ELEJET) 2009.2.24. 속도
120m/min
150m/min
180m/min
210m/min
240m/min
300m/min
인승
P11 ~ P17 P20
P24
P30
Φ440
Φ440
Φ440
Φ550
Φ550
Φ560
P40=SC300M001
P40=SC300M002
P40=SC300M005
P40=KTFC-35
P40=KTFC-40
P40=SC400M014
Φ440
Φ440
Φ550
Φ550
Φ550
Φ560
P40=SC300M001
P40=SC300M002
P40=KTFC-30
P40=KTFC-35
P40=KTFC-40
P40=SC400M014
Φ440
Φ550
Φ550
Φ550
Φ550
Φ560
P40=SC300M001
P40=KTFC-25
P40=KTFC-30
P40=KTFC-35
P40=KTFC-40
P40=SC400M014
Φ560
Φ560
Φ560
Φ560
Φ560
P40=SC400S004
P40=SC400M012
P40=SC400M009
P40=SC400M010
P40=SC400M010
TK50M1 (WIN3000)
TMI2 의 P5=10, P6=20
186C 의 M37~M40=120
속도
45m/min
60m/min
90m/min
105m/min
120m/min
150m/min
인승
P10
P11
P13
P15
P17
72rpm Φ400
96rpm Φ400
143rpm Φ400
167rpm Φ400
P40=WIN3000C
P40=WIN3000C
P40=WIN3000D
P40=WIN3000D
P16=482 P2=80
P16=482 P2=106
P16=482 P2=157
P16=482 P2=184
72rpm Φ400
96rpm Φ400
143rpm Φ400
167rpm Φ400
P40=WIN3000C
P40=WIN3000C
P40=WIN3000D
P40=WIN3000D
P16=482 P2=80
P16=482 P2=106
P16=482 P2=157
P16=482 P2=184 167rpm Φ400
72rpm Φ400
96rpm Φ400
143rpm Φ400
P40=WIN3000E
P40=WIN3000E
P40=WIN3000F
P40=WIN3000F
P16=482 P2=80
P16=482 P2=106
P16=482 P2=157
P16=482 P2=184 167rpm Φ400
72rpm Φ400
96rpm Φ400
143rpm Φ400
P40=WIN3000E
P40=WIN3000E
P40=WIN3000F
P40=WIN3000F
P16=482 P2=80
P16=482 P2=106
P16=482 P2=157
P16=482 P2=184
72rpm Φ400
96rpm Φ400
143rpm Φ400
167rpm Φ400
P40=WIN3000G
P40=WIN3000G
P40=WIN3000H
P40=WIN3000H
P16=482 P2=80
P16=482 P2=106
P16=482 P2=157
P16=482 P2=184
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 114/148
TK50S
TMI2 의 P5=3, P6=20
186C 의 M37~M40=120
속도
45m/min
60m/min
90m/min
105m/min
120m/min
150m/min
90m/min
105m/min
120m/min
150m/min
인승
P8
P9 P10 ~ P15
119rpm Φ240
159rpm Φ240
P40=PMC145M002
P40=PMC145M002
P16=238 P2=131
P16=238 P2=175
119rpm Φ240
159rpm Φ240
P40=PMC145M002
P40=PMC145M002
P16=238 P2=131
P16=238 P2=175
119rpm Φ240
159rpm Φ240
P40=PMS145L005
P40=PMS145L005
P16=238 P2=131
P16=238 P2=175
45m/min
60m/min
TK50S 속도 인승
P8
P9 P10 ~ P15
Φ240 P40=EMC29-102
Φ240
Φ240
P40=EMC29-102
P40=EMC29-153
Φ240
Φ240
Φ240
P40=EMC29-102
P40=EMC29-102
P40=EMC29-153
Φ240
Φ240
Φ240
Φ240
P40=EME29-182
P40=EME29-182
P40=EME29-203
P40=EME29-203
TK50M(DAF***)
186C 의 M37~M40=120
속도
45m/min
60m/min
90m/min
105m/min
인승
P8 ~ P9
79.5rpm Φ360
106rpm Φ360
159.4rpm Φ360
186rpm Φ360
P40=DAF210M201
P40=DAF210M201
P40=DAF210M203
P40=DAF210M203
P16=482 P2=87
P16=482 P2=117
P16=482 P2=175
P16=482 P2=205
P10 ~ P15
79.5rpm Φ360
106rpm Φ360
159.4rpm Φ360
186rpm Φ360
P40=DAF210L202
P40=DAF210L202
P40=DAF210L204
P40=DAF210L206
P16=482 P2=87
P16=482 P2=117
P16=482 P2=175
P16=482 P2=205
P17 ~ P24
65rpm Φ440
87rpm Φ440
130rpm Φ440
152rpm Φ440
P40=DAF270M000
P40=DAF270M000
P40=DAF270M002
P40=DAF270M002
P16=482 P2=72
P16=482 P2=96
P16=482 P2=143
P16=482 P2=167
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
문서번호 : TCA – 09006 작성일자 : 2009.3.2. 페 이 지 : 115/148
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3
*. Mini G/L ((EleXess3)) [ MiddleMiddle-Low speed p Gearless E/L for Passenger g ]
Prepared
Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 1 / 2
Checked
J H LIM J.H.LIM
승인 必
Application Map (2:1S)
Capa Capa.
60m/min (1 1.0m/s 0m/s )
90m/min (1 1.5m/s 5m/s )
105m/min ( 1.75m/s 1 75m/s )
P6 (450kg)
DIANA-10-800-2S Φ8*4 5.5kW 320V 11.7A 116rpm CPIK 15M
P8 (550kg)
DIANA-10-800-2S Φ8*4 Φ8 4 5 5.5kW 5kW 320V 11.7A 116rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-16-800-2S Φ8*4 Φ8 4 8 8.7kW 7kW 320V 18.3A 174rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-17.5-800-2S Φ8*4 Φ8 4 9 9.6kW 6kW 320V 19.9A 203rpm CPIK 15M
P9 (600kg)
DIANA-10-800-2S Φ8*4 5.5kW 320V 11.7A 116rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-16-800-2S Φ8*5 8.7kW 320V 18.3A 174rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-17.5-800-2S Φ8*5 9.6kW 320V 19.9A 203rpm CPIK 15M
P10 (680kg)
DIANA-10-800-2S Φ8*5 5.5kW 320V 11.7A 116rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-16-800-2S Φ8*5 8.7kW 320V 18.3A 174rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-17.5-800-2S Φ8*5 9.6kW 320V 19.9A 203rpm CPIK 15M
P11 (750kg)
DIANA-10-800-2S Φ8*5 5.5kW 320V 11.7A 11 7A 116rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-16-800-2S Φ8*5 8.7kW 320V 18.3A 18 3A 174rpm CPIK 15M
DIANA-17.5-800-2S Φ8*5 9.6kW 320V 19.9A 19 9A 203rpm CPIK 15M
P13 (900kg)
PMS280.02 - 6.8 Φ8*7 6.8kW 360V 16.5A 116rpm CPIK 15M
PMS280.02 – 10.2 Φ8*7 10.2kW 310V 24.8A 174rpm CPIK 32M
PMS280.02 – 11.9 Φ8*7 11.9kW 360V 24.8A 203rpm CPIK 32M
P15 (1000kg)
PMS280.02 - 6.8 Φ8*7 6.8kW 360V 16.5A 116rpm CPIK 15M
PMS280.02 – 10.2 Φ8*7 10.2kW 310V 24.8A 174rpm CPIK 32M
PMS280.02 – 11.9 Φ8*7 11.9kW 360V 24.8A 203rpm CPIK 32M
P17 (1150kg)
PMS280.02 - 7.5 Φ8*7 7.5kW 360V 18.2A 116rpm CPIK 15M
PMS280.02 – 11.3 Φ8*7 11.3kW 310V 27.5A 174rpm CPIK 32M
PMS280.02 – 13.2 Φ8*7 13.2kW 360V 27.5A 203rpm CPIK 32M
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Shape p DIANA (Ningbo Xinda)
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
PMS280 (TECSJ)
* Main Sheave : Φ330 mm * Main Rope : 8*19S + IWR * 가감속기울기 : 100 FPM/S 0 5 m/s² m/s = 0.5
ThyssenKrupp
Speed
Approved
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3
Prepared
*. Mini G/L ((EleXess3)) [ MiddleMiddle-Low speed p Gearless E/L for Passenger g ]
Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 2 / 2
Checked
J H LIM J.H.LIM
승인 必
Application Map (2:1D)
Capa Capa.
60m/min (1 1.0m/s 0m/s )
P8 (550kg)
MR-A Φ8*4 4.6kW 282V 12.5A CPIK 15M
P9 (600kg)
MR-A Φ8*4 4.6kW 282V 12.5A CPIK 15M
P10 (680kg)
MR-A Φ8*4 4.6kW 282V 12.5A CPIK 15M
P11 (750kg)
MR-A Φ8*4 4.6kW 282V 12.5A CPIK 15M
P13 (900kg)
MR-B1 Φ8*5 6.2kW 270V 17.4A CPIK 15M
P15 (1000kg)
MR-B1 Φ8*5 Φ8 5 6 6.2kW 2kW 270V 17.4A CPIK 15M
P17 (1150kg)
MR-B2 Φ8*5 7.1kW 272V 19.9A CPIK 15M
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
116rpm
116rpm
116rpm
116rpm
116rpm
116rpm
116rpm
90m/min (1 1.5m/s 5m/s ) MR-A Φ8*4 6.9kW 254V 20.2A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 6.9kW 254V 20.2A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 6.9kW 254V 20.2A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 6.9kW 254V 20.2A CPIK 15M MR-B1 Φ8*5 9.2kW 253V 26.9A CPIK 32M MR-B1 Φ8*5 Φ8 5 9 9.2kW 2kW 253V 26.9A CPIK 32M
174rpm
174rpm
174rpm
174rpm
174rpm
174rpm
MR-B2 Φ8*6 10.6kW 255V 31A 174rpm CPIK 32M
105m/min ( 1.75m/s 1 75m/s ) MR-A Φ8*4 8.1kW 295V 20.4A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 8.1kW 295V 20.4A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 8.1kW 295V 20.4A CPIK 15M MR-A Φ8*4 8.1kW 295V 20.4A CPIK 15M MR-B1 Φ8*5 11kW 294V 27.8A CPIK 32M MR-B1 Φ8*5 Φ8 5 11kW 294V 27.8A CPIK 32M
202rpm
MR (Nawootec)
202rpm
202rpm
202rpm
202rpm
* Shaft Load 202rpm
MR-B2 Φ8*6 12.5kW 296V 31.5A 202rpm CPIK 32M
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Shape Sh
: 4,000 kg (MR-A) 5,500 kg (MR-B) * Main Sheave : Φ330 mm * Main Rope : 8*19S + IWR * 가감속기울기 : 100~120 FPM/S = 0.5~06 m/s²
ThyssenKrupp
Speed
Approved
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3
Prepared
1. Geared TM for Passenger g E/L [ 합 합성유 XMP460 적 적용 ] Application Map (1:1)
Capa.
45m/min ( 0.75m/s )
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 3 / 2
Checked
Approved
J H LIM J.H.LIM
EN81 지역 이외 60m/min ( 1.0m/s )
90m/min ( 1.5m/s )
105m/min ( 1.75m/s )
120m/min ( 2.0m/s )
150m/min ( 2.5m/s )
P6 (450kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1
P8 (550kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 15 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 29:1
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2
P9 (600kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5 5kW 340V 1450rpm 5.5kW Φ570 57:1
BW1491 (Φ12*3) CPIK 11 5 5kW 340V 1450rpm 5.5kW Φ570 45:1
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 15 7 5kW 340V 1450rpm 7.5kW Φ570 29:1
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 15 9 5kW 340V 1450rpm 9.5kW Φ610 53:2
P10 (680kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 15 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 32 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2
P11 (750kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 11 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1
BW1491 (Φ12*4) CPIK 15 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) CPIK 32 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2
P13 (900kg)
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 13.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 13.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 15kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P15 (1000kg)
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 13.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2
TM40E (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 15kW 340V 960rpm Φ580 53:3
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P17 (1150kg)
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61 61:1 1
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 32 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47 47:1 1
TM40E (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 32 15kW 340V 960rpm Φ580 41 41:2 2
TM40E (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 48 18.5kW 340V 960rpm Φ580 53 53:3 3
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3 81 3
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 60 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3 73 3
P20 (1350kg)
BW215 (Φ12*7 ) CPIK 32 13kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 53:1
BW215 (Φ12*7 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1200rpm Φ720 61:2
BW215 (Φ12*7 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 61:2
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P24 (1600kg)
BW249 (Φ12*7 ) CPIK 48 15kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 63:2
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 57:2
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P27 (1800kg)
TM90D (Φ16 (Φ16*6 6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1
TM90D (Φ16 (Φ16*6 6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1250rpm Φ750 65:2
TM90D (Φ16 (Φ16*6 6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 65:2
TM90D (Φ16 (Φ16*6 6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 57:2
BW320F (Φ16 (Φ16*7 7 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P30 (2000kg)
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1250rpm Φ750 65:2
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 65:2
BW320F (Φ16*7 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 91:3
BW320F (Φ16*7 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 73:3
P38 (2500kg)
BW320F (Φ16*7 ) CPIK 60 30kW 340V 1400rpm Φ800 59:1
BW320F (Φ16*7 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
BW320F (Φ16*7 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 69:2
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
B I YOO B.I.YOO
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Speed
Date
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3 Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 4 / 2
2. Geared TM for Observation E/L [ 합성유 XMP460 적용 ]
Speed
EN81 지역 이외
45m/min (0.75m/s) (0 75 / )
60m/min (1 0 / ) (1.0m/s)
90m/min (1 5 / ) (1.5m/s)
105m/min (1 75 / ) (1.75m/s)
P6 (450kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*3) 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1 CPIK 11
BW1491 (Φ12*3) 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1 CPIK 11
P8 (550kg)) (550k
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1 CPIK 11
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1 CPIK 11
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 29:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2 CPIK 15
P9 (600kg)
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 5.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 57:1 CPIK 11
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 45:1 CPIK 15
BW1491 (Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ570 29:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*4 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2 CPIK 15
P10 (680kg)
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2 CPIK 32
P11 (750kg)
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:2 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 53:2 CPIK 32
P13 ((900kg) g)
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1 CPIK 32
BW215 (Φ12*6 ) 13kW 340V 1200rpm Φ720 61:2 CPIK 32
BW215 (Φ12*6 ) 15kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 61:2 CPIK 48
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3 CPIK 48
P15 (1000kg)
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1 CPIK 15
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1 CPIK 32
BW215 (Φ12*6 ) 13kW 340V 1200rpm Φ720 61:2 CPIK 32
BW215 (Φ12*6 ) 15kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 61:2 CPIK 48
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3 CPIK 48
P17 (1150kg)
BW249 (Φ12*7 ) 13kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1 CPIK 32
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2 CPIK 48
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 63:2 CPIK 48
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3 CPIK 48
P20 (1350kg)
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) 15kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1 CPIK 48
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 22kW 340V 1250rpm Φ750 65:2 CPIK 48
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 65:2 CPIK 48
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 57:2 CPIK 60
P24 (1600kg)
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1 CPIK 48
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 30kW 340V 1250rpm Φ750 65:2 CPIK 60
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 65:2 CPIK 60
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 57:2 CPIK 60
Capa.
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
120m/min (2 0 / ) (2.0m/s)
Shape BW1491
* Weight g : 370kg g * Shaft load : 4000kg
BW215
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
* Weight : 720kg * Shaft load : 6500kg
HS180K
* Weight g : 500kg g * Shaft load : 6000kg
BW249
* Weight : 820kg * Shaft load : 7500kg
ThyssenKrupp
Application Map (1:1)
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3 Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 5 / 2
3. Geared TM for Freight g E/L [ 합 합성유 XMP460 적 적용 ]
45m/min ( 0.75m/sec )
60m/min ( 1.0m/sec )
750 kg (1:1 roping)
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1
HS180K (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1
1000 kg (1:1 roping)
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 15 9.5kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 61:1
HS180K (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 32 11kW 340V 1450rpm Φ610 47:1
Speed Capa.
30m/min ( 0.5m/sec )
EN81 지역 이외
1500 kg
BW249 (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 11kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1
BW249 (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 32 13kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2
BW249 (Φ12*5 ) CPIK 48 15kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
2000 kg
BW249 (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 32 13kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1
BW249 (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 48 15kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2
BW249 (Φ12*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
2500 kg
BW249 (Φ12 (Φ12*6 6 ) CPIK 48 15kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1
BW249 (Φ12 (Φ12*6 6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2
BW249 (Φ12 (Φ12*6 6 ) CPIK 60 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 81:3
3000 kg
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 48 19kW 340V 1400rpm Φ720 52:1
BW249 (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 60 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ720 75:2
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 57:2
3500 kg
TM90D (Φ14*6 ) CPIK 60 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 91:3
4000 kg
TM90D (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 60 22kW 340V 1450rpm Φ750 56:1
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 91:3
4500 kg
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1400rpm Φ800 59:1
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
5000 kg
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 30kW 340V 1400rpm Φ800 59:1
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
7500 kg (3:1 roping)
BW320F (Φ16*6 ) CPIK 105 37kW 340V 1450rpm Φ800 83:2
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Shape HS180K
* Weight : 500kg * Shaft load : 6000kg
TM90D
* Weight : 1100kg * Shaft load : 9000kg
BW249
* Weight : 820kg * Shaft load : 7500kg
BW320F
* Weight : 1200kg * Shaft load : 15000kg
ThyssenKrupp
Application Map (2:1)
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3
Rev3
Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 6 / 2
◈ Application pp map p for Geared TM ((Passenger g E/L ) Speed Capa Capa.
EN81적용지역포함. 60m/min ((1.0m/s) 0 s)
90m/min ((1.5m/s) 5 s)
A grade rope
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
P8 (550kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ160B-1 (Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1400rpm Φ570 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 18934
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
P9 (600kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ160B-1 (Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1400rpm Φ570 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 18934
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
P10 (680kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ240B-I (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P11 (750kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ240B-I (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P13 (900kg)
YJ240C-II (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-III (Φ12*5 ) 13kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-V (Φ12*5 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P15 (1000kg)
YJ240C-II (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-III (Φ12*5 ) 13kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-V (Φ12*5 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P17 (1150kg)
YJ240C-V (Φ12*6 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 32 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-VIII (Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
YJ240B(Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 17407
P20 (1350kg)
YJ360A-II (Φ12*7 ) 18.5kW 380V 1465rpm Φ800 61:1 CPIK 32 P16 = 29923
YJ360B-I(Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 1400rpm Φ800 78:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 19132
YJ360D-II (Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 970rpm Φ800 73:3 CPIK 48 P16 = 11937
P24 (1600kg)
YJ360A-II (Φ12*7 ) 18.5kW 380V 1465rpm Φ800 61:1 CPIK 48 P16 = 29923
YJ360B-I(Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 1400rpm Φ800 78:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 19132
YJ360D-II (Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 970rpm Φ800 73:3 CPIK 48 P16 = 11937
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
YJ240
105m/min ((1.75m/s) 5 s)
P6 (450kg)
* 45 m/min의 m/min의 경우 60m/min 60m/min의 의 TM 및 CPIK 적용할것 적용할것..
Shape
* Weight : 700kg * Shaft load : 6000kg * Sh.dia. 620 mm
YJ160
* Weight : 475kg * Shaft load : 3700kg * Sh.dia. 570 mm
YJ360
* Weight : 1500kg *Shaft load :7200kg * Sh.dia. 800 mm
* 국내현장의 경우 YJ360 대신 BW249(Nawootec) 적용할것 적용할것.. ( cost 저감 저감))
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Application Map (1:1)
File No.: DMA-08043 Rev. No.: 3
Rev3
Date
: 2008.12.26
Page
: 7 / 2
◈ Application pp map p for Geared TM ((간이전망용 간이전망용 이 ) Application Map (1:1)
Shape EN81적용지역포함.
A grade rope
Speed S d
90m/min (1.5m/s)
105m/min (1.75m/s)
P6 (450kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
P8 (550kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ240B-I (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
P9 (600kg)
YJ160A-II(Φ12*4) 7.5kW 340V 1455rpm Φ570 43:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 29605
YJ240B-I (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-II (Φ12*4 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
P10 (680kg)
YJ240C-II (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-III (Φ12*5 ) 13kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-V (Φ12*5 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P11 (750kg)
YJ240C-II (Φ12*5 ) 9.5kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 15 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-III (Φ12*5 ) 13kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 15 P16 = 17407
YJ240B-V (Φ12*5 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
P13 (900kg)
YJ240C-V (Φ12*6 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 32 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-VIII (Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
YJ240B(Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 17407
P15 (1000kg)
YJ240C-V (Φ12*6 ) 11kW 380V 1459rpm Φ620 49:1 CPIK 32 P16 = 31015
YJ240B-VIII (Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1300rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 32 P16 = 17407
YJ240B(Φ12*6 ) 15kW 380V 1465rpm Φ620 55:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 17407
P17 (1150kg)
YJ360A-II (Φ12*7 ) 18.5kW 380V 1465rpm Φ800 61:1 CPIK 32 P16 = 29923
YJ360B-I(Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 1400rpm Φ800 78:2 CPIK 48 P16 = 19132
YJ360D-II (Φ12*7 ) 22kW 380V 970rpm Φ800 73:3 CPIK 48 P16 = 11937
* 45 m/min의 m/min의 경우 60m/min 60m/min의 의 TM 및 CPIK 적용할것 적용할것..
A Company of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
* 국내현장의 경우 YJ360 대신 BW249(Nawootec) 적용할것 적용할것.. ( cost 저감 저감))
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
60m/min (1.0m/s)
Capa.
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 1/386 17-1. Car Error Code P 129 CODE
DEFINITION
1695
Occurrence of forced stop due to wrong in a speed of a CAR at highest floor Æ Alteration to “1702”
1696
Occurrence of forced stop due to wrong in a speed of a CAR at lowest floor ÆAlteration to ”1703”.
1701
Detection of overspeed (Cancellation of TFR )
1854
LU/LD stuck Error (1110)
2005
Detection of break down of ARD system
P 130 CODE
DEFINITION
2006
It did not be implanted in 6 minutes after ARD driving.(permanent break down)
2007
Power of battery does not be turn off in 4 seconds after den of ARD driving. (Permanent break down) Occurrence of break down of CPI DRIVE (when SAF2 is ‘true’ and SAF3I is ‘false’).
2008
If break down being caused by CPI, it is cut off safety line. Æ It is established to make a point of contact of SAF3 in a safety line open with hardware and to be managed in software. ※ It is applied to a model without a contact for SAF3 in drive like as CPI50R and CPI100R.
2009
An error of an examination about rationality of i/o in Car door Lock(CDL) error(delaying time: 2sec)
2010
An error of an examination about rationality of i/o in DZP contactor.(delaying time: 1.5sec, critical – Automatic operation after stop at near floor.)
2011
An error of an examination about rationality of i/o in CDXF/CDXR contactor.(delaying time: 1.5sec, noncritical)
2012
A break down of wrong in door-open detected by Hoistway Interlock. (delaying time: 2sec, critical – Permanent break down)
2013
If fault code is occurred in CPI, TAC50K records information taken through CAN communication. Massage: "Drive fault via CAN"
2014
An occurrence of wrong in control of Door zone bypass, although it is made DZC be in active, DZECM sign is input continuously.
2015
An occurrence of wrong in DZC contactor (or relay), DZECM sign does not be input outside of Door zone. (RUN MONITOR)
2016
Detection of opening of rescue hole on upper part of a Car. (MLS1) - RUN MONITOR
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 2/386 17-2. Car Adjustments P 133 ADJ.
UNIT
RANGE DEFAULT DEFINITION Back up for memory tubes with in-volatility. format : BKP[A/R] A –Storage of memory tubes with in-volatility. Move adjusted values of batterybacked memory in the present to flash memory tubes with in-volatility. R – Restore memory tubes with in-volatility. Restore adjusted values from flash memory tubes with in-volatility.
BKP
P 134 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
DEFINITION Adjust contents of announcement for registration/cancellation of a car call in units of Bit. 1) Values (unit of bit) 0 – Inactivate content of announcement of relevant bit. 1 – Activate content of announcement of relevant bit. 2) Form CCV=bbbbbbbb ※ The order is Bit0, Bit1 … Bit7 from the left.
CCV
1101000 0
3) Contents of announcement BitNo Contents 0 Announcement for handicapped car-call – “floor xx” (Note) 1 Announcement for general car-call - “floor xx” 2 Announcement for registration of a call - “Registration” 3 Announcement for cancellation of a call - “Cancellation” 4 Announcement in direction of door for registration and cancellation of a call - “forward” or “backward” 5 Announcement for cancellation of all calls - “All calls are cancelled” 6 (reservation) 7 (reservation) (Note) Contents for announcement adjusted by CCV has to be set 0-bit as base. Programs (both of CPU and ROM) of announcement equipments have to over Rev3.0. (At this time, it has to be that O43=9)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 3/386 P 138 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
DEFINITION
D36
sec
Sabbath door open time
5-900
100
P 142 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
DSCSR*
Cancel settings of all floors.
DSV
EAD
DEFINITION
-
-
fpm/ 75-300 sec
-
100
Activation/inactivation of daylight saving time. When an interior clock is operated daylight saving time, this adjusted values readjust automatically time. 0 =Inactivation function for adjusting automatically time in daylight saving time. (adjusted values of factory) >0 = activation function for adjusting automatically time in daylight saving time Set up addition and subtraction of a speed in case of Emergency Power(EP).
P 152 ADJ.
INI
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
-
-
UNIT
RANGE
-
DEFINITION Initialize. –Reset adjusted values and store values of factory to memory.. I An item same with time of a door is reset. But, an item same with a drive, have to be set for each JOB accurately, is not reset.
P 153 ADJ.
DEFAULT
DEFINITION Controller type (applied only to CPUA) 7: USA IOC, 8: KOREA IOC
J23
P 158 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
M88
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
DEFINITION Brake type (applied only to CPUA) 0: Regulator Brake (USA), 1: Discrete Brake (KOREA)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 4/386
P 159 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
PIT
-
-
-
DEFINITION It is a command language to reset set up of free talk. It is a function of setting by predicting a free talk for quick adjustment of zero in an early point.
P 162 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
DEFINITION CAR call toggle(applied only to CPUA) 0: no Toggle 1: set up of Toggle
O51
O52
OVT
0-1
0
Pubel compliance type 0 – no application
-
-
Over Travel. (it makes a car go more to down) When E/L is INS, this command language can toggle an ability of control part limited by hardware. A command language is deleted by off/on of power.
-
1 – application
P 164 ADJ.
PCL
UNIT
-
RANGE DEFAULT
-
-
DEFINITION Details altered of permission. – Last 5 items of details altered of permission is shown. Functions permitted is prior to Functions are not permitted.
P 165 ADJ.
UNIT
RANGE DEFAULT
DEFINITION Command. – This is a command language for group remote fast. Input telephone number by using PDA equipments for remote observation.
PHN
-
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
-
-
Input in form of PHN1 = 1234567890. When PHN1 is input to see numbers, it shows numbers and numbers can be input to 3 units. This information can be shown at Event view in IMS.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 5/386 P 167 ADJ.
R23
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
-
0-1
0
DEFINITION Independent Service serves Group landings only. Operation of IND Service during operating IR is limited to lending. Value: 0 = IND service is not limited to group lending 1 = IND service is not limited to group lending
P 169 ADJ.
RSC
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
-
-
0
DEFINITION Resynchronize LON Channel. All LON channels are re-motivated.
P 182 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
X25 0.1sec 0-100
0
DEFINITION Adjustment of time for output of announcement of a floor 0: Output at a place settled set up in Generic. 1-100: Output of an announcement of arrival of a floor after established time.
P 183 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
Z20
0
DEFINITION If there is no EXPRESS, it is 0, if there is EXPRESS, it is a number of a floor in EXPRESS ZONE.
P 184 ADJ.
UNIT RANGE DEFAULT
DEFINITION
Z26
sec
(Driving at attendance) Register a car call, having no connection with load, and then start with closing a door after established time on Z26.
Z27
sec
(Driving at attendance) If Load is over 45%, register a Car Call and then start sign closing a door after established time on Z27.
Z41
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
0 1400
0
Set up a speed of a driving with quietness at night. 0: In driving with quietness at night, drive with a regular speed. 1 - 1400: A speed of driving at night
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 6/386 18.1 Group Adjustments P 187 ADJ. UNIT RANGE DEFAULT decim al or 0– CS1 hexa FFFF(h) decim al
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
0H Æ 0400H
DEFINITION
Control State – 1 If Bit10: ‘1’, (Automatic Service protection Time) AST does not be activated.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 7/386 18.5 Group Function Check List Items Allocation
Inspection
Forecast
method
Explanation
Remarks
When Hall call register, Hall Lantern of allocated lift has to be ON immediately
IMS Car Remote Fast, Z23=
and Chime has to be ON only 1(one) time.
0: Direction and Arrival Lantern function.
Arrival
Inspection
Notice
method
Before the lift arrive at floor (Deceleration time), Hall Lantern which has to go
1: Allocation forecast and Arrival
next floor must flicker and Hall Chime has to be ON and OFF 2(two) times.
Lantern/Chime function. X18 = (Unit: 0.1sec)
But the lift was arrived by Car Call and there is no Car Call and no response of
X19 = (Unit: 0.1sec)
Hall Call allocation, Hall Lantern and Chime must to be doesn’t operated.
X18,19: When Lantern flickering, On/Off time adjustment.
Operating condition Door Reopen
Function
Priority Register
While Door closing, push Hall Call which same direction with Car moving
explanation
direction base upon Hall Lantern flickering direction to reopen the Door.
Inspection
When Door closing and if push Hall Call with same direction, Door will be
method Car Call
When Door closing to start the lift, push Hall Call with same direction.
Inspection method
reopened and number of Reopen in Group is limit by only 1(one) time. Check whether the lift will respond for Hall Call allocation which has a Car Call with same Hall Call preferentially. The terms of Allocation forecast changing are as follows.
Operating condition
Allocation Changing
Function explanation
Inspection method Operating Zoning operation at Lobby
condition Function explanation Inspection method
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
1) In case of allocated lift will be out of Group. IMS Group Remote Fast,
(IND, INS, FIR, Parking, FD(Fault detection), Rescue operation, VIP) 2) In case of allocated lift will be passed due to Fuall load.
MID= 20(sec)
3) Other lift arrived at Hall Call registered floor more faster than allocated lift.
MXD= 20(sec)
After Hall Call registered, if other lift arrived at Hall Call registered floor more faster than allocated lift, lift has to be Allocation changing to reduce passengers waiting time.
SPE= 18(sec) If set MID and MXD to 100(sec), case No. 3 of operating condition
Check whether the lift will be Allocation Changing as above operation conditions.
can not be Allocation changing.
If there is Allocation Changing frequently without above operation conditions, check the Parameter MID, MXD and SPE. IMS Group Remote Fast,
In case of there is no Hall/Car Call with standby mode.
LBY= Lobby floor set.
At least more than 1(one) lift must standby at Lobby (LBY) floor.
LER=
If there is no Hall/Car call, the standby lift has to move at Lobby floor. Lifts will
Lift numbers which has to be move
be moved which set to LER numbers.
to Lobby floor.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 8/386 Items
Explanation Operating condition
Remarks
The time when register Handicap Hall button.
1) Check whether Handicap Hall Call Lamp is ON when register Handicap Hall button. Handicap operation
Inspection method
2) Normal Hall Call Lamp should not ON.
IMS Car Remote Fast,
3) When register Handicap Hall button, Handicap lift must respond and check
D35= (0.1sec)
whether Door open waiting time is more than 10sec.
Door open time when register
4) When register Handicap Hall button and respond Handicap lift, forecast
Hadicap Hall/Car Call Button.
Lantern and Chime should not operated and check whether when arrive the lift, Arrival Lantern and Chime are operated. 5) During Handicap operation, it is still in Group mode, therefore check whether it is respond for normal Hall Call, forecast Lantern and Chime. Operating condition Function explanation
IMS Car Remote Fast,
When input CRT & VIP Button signal and set VIP lift and Door open time.
Z13=
Saperate specific lift from Group mode to respond VIP call and it is only accept
0: VIP service impossible 1: VIP service set
for Car Call.
IMS Group Remote Fast, CB1∼CB8=
1) When starting VIP operation, existed Car Call should not cancel.
set VIP lift
2) Existed Hall Call will cancel and re-allocate existed Hall Call to other lifts. VIP
3) Arrive at VIP call floor and waiting for VIP Car Call during setting time (CBH)
operation
CB1∼CB7=0 set and
with Door open. Inspection method
Ex) If VIP lift is No. 8,
4) If VIP Car Call was registered, the lift will door close and start to move to
CB8 = 1set
destination floor immediately. 5) After finishing VIP Car Call service, VIP mode will release and goes into Group
CBH= (sec) Door open time when register VIP
mode automatically. 6) If there is no VIP Car Call at VIP call floor during certain time, VIP mode will
Hall Call Button.
release and goes into Group mode automatically. Note) Do not set VIP and Hadicap lift by same lift. Operating condition
IMS Group Remote Fast, There is no Hall/Car Call during certain time (PFT).
ZN1∼ZN6= Set Zone floor PFT= (2sec) Free time before Zoning operation
Zoning operation
1) If there is no Hall/Car Call during certain time (PFT), the lift must move to Inspection method
specific floor to Zoning operation.
NZN =
2) Door should not open after arriving Zoning floor.
The total number of standby Zone
3) During Zoning operation, check whether Hall Call is accept or not.
(Max 6) CSW = 30H Should be set Bit4 and 5.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 9/386 Items
Explaination Operating condition
Remarks
The time when peoples coming office for work. When Punch-in time and there is signal from Supervisor Panel (CRT) or "UPK" Description I/O input signal, Punch-in time Operation will be operated.
1) Check whether Supervisor Panel (CRT) has a Punch-in time signal and lamp and in case of using "UPK" Description I/O, "UPKJ" signal should active. 2) Check whether all lifts in Group move to Lobby (LBY) floor. 3) After arriving the lifts at Lobby, check whether it will be set Priority Car, Sceond Car and Non-priority Car. 4) Priority Car must respond for up Hall Call at LBY floor and Non-priority Car must respond for down Hall Call at LBY floor and up/down Hall Call at other floor.
5) Priority Car 5-1) Hall Latern: Flickering. 5-2) Standby with Door open. 5-3) After Car Call register and Z26 setting time, Door will close and the lift will start. 5-4) If Load is more than 45%, Door will close and the lift will start after Z27 setting time with Car Call. 5-5) If Load is more than 80%, Door will close and the lift will start immediately. 5-6) Door Close Button does not work.
Punch-in
Z26= (sec) Z27= (sec)
5-7) Priority Car must respond for up Hall Call only at LBY floor.
time Operation
IMS Car Remote Fast,
Inspection method
5-8) After Door close and move lift from Lobby floor, the authority of Priority Car will handover to Sceond Car.
IMS Group Remote Fast, LBY= (Floor) Starting floor
6) Sceond Car 6-1) Hall Latern: Flickering. 6-2) Standby with Door open. 6-3) After Car Call register and Z26 setting time, Door will close and the lift will start. 6-4) If Load is more than 45%, Door will close and the lift will start after Z26 setting time with Car Call. 6-5) If Load is more than 80%, Door will close and the lift will start immediately. 6-6) Door Close Button does not work. 6-7) Sceond Car must respond for up Hall Call only at LBY floor. 6-8) When Door close and start to move or change to Priority Car, the authority of Sceond Car will handover to Non-Priority Car.
7) Non-Priority Car 7-1) All lifts move to LBY floor with Door close and standby. 7-2) Non-Priority Car must respond for Down Hall Call at LBY floor and other floor Hall Call.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 10/386
Items
Explanation
Operating condition
Remarks
The time when peoples leaving office for lunch. When Beginning of Lunch time and there is signal from Supervisor Panel (CRT) or "LCH1" Description I/O input signal, Beginning of Lunch time Operation will be operated.
IMS Group Remote Fast, LH1∼LH6= (Floor) Set standby floor
Beginning of Lunch
1) Check whether Supervisor Panel (CRT) has a Beginning of Lunch time signal and lamp
Time Operation
"LCH1"and in case of using " LCH1J " Description I/O, " LCH1J " signal should active. Inspection method
2) Set standby floor (LH1∼LH6) except Restaurant floor (LCH) and check whether lifts move to standby floors.
The time when peoples coming office after lunch. When End of Lunch time and there is signal from Supervisor Panel (CRT) or "LCH2" Description I/O input signal, End of Lunch time Operation will be operated.
End of
IMS Group Remote Fast,
Lunch Time Operation
to standby floor.
Restaurant floor set
4) During the lifts moving to standby floor, must accept Hall Call allocation.
condition
Free time before moving
LCH= (Floor)
3) After arriving standby floor, Door should not open.
Operating
PFT= (2sec)
1) Check whether Supervisor Panel (CRT) has a End of Lunch time signal and lamp Inspection method
"LCH2"and in case of using " LCH2J " Description I/O, " LCH2J " signal should active.
LCH= (floor) Restaurant floor set
2) Check whether 2(two) lifts standby at Restaurant floor (LCH). 3) After arriving standby floor, Door should not open. 4) During the lifts moving to standby floor, must accept Hall Call allocation.
Operating condition
The time when peoples leaving office after work. When Punch-out time and there is signal from Supervisor Panel (CRT) or "DPK"
IMS Group Remote Fast,
Description I/O input signal, Punch-out time Operation will be operated.
DP1∼DP6= (Floor) Set standby floor
Punchout time
1) Check whether Supervisor Panel (CRT) has a Punch-out time signal and lamp and in
Operation Inspection method
PFT= (2sec) Free time before moving
case of using "DPK" Description I/O, "DPKJ" signal should active. 2) Set standby floor (DP1∼DP6) except Lobby floor (LBY) and check whether lifts
to standby floor.
move to standby floors. 3) After arriving standby floor, Door should not open.
LBY= (Floor)
4) During the lifts moving to standby floor, must accept Hall Call allocation.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
CPIKFrequencyInverter OperatingManual
Non-Regenerative 11M1 15M1 32M1 48M1 60M1 105M1 15RM 32RM 48RM Regenerative 25R 33R 50R 100R 150R Control voltage use AC220V
Revised : 2009-06-24
Acompanyof ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
Printer’s imprint All rights reserved © Copyright by ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. 55-30, Oryu-dong, Kuro-Ku, Seoul Printed in Korea, June 2009
The right of reprint or reproduction, even in the case of only partly exploitation, is subject to express, written permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.. Any reproduction, copying or storing in data processing machines in any form or by any means without prior permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. is regarded as infringement of the current Copyright Act and will be prosecuted. Technical modifications for reasons of improvement or higher safety standard are subject to decisions of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. without prior notice.
The responsibility for the content lies with the editor: ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
Preface We are pleased that you decided to purchase a quality product from ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
This operating manual assists you in getting familiar with the frequency inverter and its intended possibilities of use. Important information concerning safety and hazards helps you to safely use the frequency inverter as intended. Subject to technical alteration.
i
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL TABLEOFCONTENT 1.SAFETY................................................................................................................................................
1
1.1Explanationofsymbolsused.........................................................................................
1
1.2Generalsafetyinformation............................................................................................
2
2.PRODUCTDESCRIPTIONANDINSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS...................................................
5
2.1RepresentationoffrequencyinverterCPIK.......................................................................
5
2.2DescriptionoffrequencyinverterCPIK............................................................................
6
2.2.1Warnings..............................................................................................................
6
2.2.2Mountinginstructions.............................................................................................
7
2.2.3Technicaldata......................................................................................................
8
2.2.3.1Generaldata...................................................................................................
8
2.2.3.2Typespecification...........................................................................................
9
2.2.3.3Externalmodules............................................................................................
10
2.2.3.4Derating........................................................................................................
10
2.2.4Generalinstructions...............................................................................................
10
2.2.4.1Mainsvoltage.................................................................................................
10
2.2.4.2Systemconfiguration.......................................................................................
11
2.2.4.3Mainsconnection...........................................................................................
11
2.2.4.4Isolationoffrequencyinverter...........................................................................
11
2.2.4.5Leakagecurrent..............................................................................................
11
2.2.4.6Faultcurrent...................................................................................................
11
2.2.4.7DischargetimeofDClinkcapacitors..................................................................
11
2.2.4.8Electronicground............................................................................................
11
2.2.4.9RunContactor................................................................................................. 11 2.2.4.10Internalfan..................................................................................................
11
2.3Interface.....................................................................................................................
12
2.3.1Connectiondiagram............................................................................................... 12 2.3.2FrequencyinverterInputandOutputterminals(Non-Regenerative)............................... 12 2.3.2.1Mains............................................................................................................
12
2.3.2.2MotorandCables...........................................................................................
12
2.3.2.3Brakingresistor..............................................................................................
12
2.3.2.4Internalvoltage...............................................................................................
12
2.3.2.5Separatelydrivenmotorfan.............................................................................
13
2.3.2.6MotorPTCthermistorconnection....................................................................... 13 2.3.2FrequencyinverterInputandOutputterminals(Regenerative).....................................
13
ii
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL TABLEOFCONTENT 2.3.2.1Mains............................................................................................................
13
2.3.2.2MotorandCables...........................................................................................
13
2.3.4EncoderconnectionandCANcommunication............................................................ 14 2.3.4.1Encoderconnection.........................................................................................
14
2.3.4.2EncodersignalsandCANcommunicationtocontrol............................................. 14 2.3.4.3UsingtheCANinterfacetoconnecttheTCM(orTAC50K)controlsystem…………..
14
2.3.4.4SwitchingsequencechartwithTCMcontrol........................................................
16
2.3.4.5SwitchingsequencechartwithTAC50Kcontrol...................................................
17
2.3.5Interfacetotheliftcontrol.......................................................................................
18
2.3.5.1Readymessage…….......................................................................................
18
2.3.5.2Inputsandoutputs..........................................................................................
18
2.3.5.3Switchingsequencechart.................................................................................
19
2.4Systemperturbations,EMC...........................................................................................
20
2.4.1General................................................................................................................
20
2.4.2MountingInstructions.............................................................................................
20
2.4.3Linechoke............................................................................................................
20
2.4.4Linefilter..............................................................................................................
20
2.4.5Installationofothercables......................................................................................
20
2.5Dimensionsheet..........................................................................................................
21
2.5.1DimensionofCPIKseries........................................................................................
21
2.5.2Externalmodules...................................................................................................
22
2.5.2.1DCchoke…………………………….................................................................
22
2.5.2.2Linefilter(standard,notusedITlines)...............................................................
23
2.5.2.3Linechoke…..................................................................................................
25
3.TRANSPORTANDSTORAGE.............................................................................................................
26
3.1General......................................................................................................................
26
4.PUTTINGINTOOPERATION..............................................................................................................
28
4.1Safetyinstructions.......................................................................................................
28
4.2Operatinginstructions..................................................................................................
28
4.3Pointstobeobservedpriortoinitialpoweringon..............................................................
28
4.4Checkingthevisualdisplaysintheeventoferrors............................................................
28
4.5Inputoflift-specificvalues.............................................................................................
29
4.6Testingthedriveforcorrectfunctioning...........................................................................
29
4.7Driveoptimization........................................................................................................
30
4.8Measuringandsetting..................................................................................................
31
4.8.1LEDandmeasuringpointsonTMI2board…………..................................................
31
4.8.2LEDandmeasuringpointsonRMCboard..............................................................
32
4.8.3LEDandmeasuringpointsonRMBKboard(Regenerativetype).......................
33
iii
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL TABLEOFCONTENT 5.PARAMETERENTRY...........................................................................................................................
34
5.1General......................................................................................................................
34
5.2Operation...................................................................................................................
34
5.2.1Displayandchangeofparameters...........................................................................
34
5.2.2Displayparameters................................................................................................
35
5.2.3SavechangedparameterstoEEPROM.....................................................................
35
5.2.4Allparametersasfactory-set..................................................................................
35
5.2.5Individual parameters as factory-set..................................................................
36
5.3Errorstacks.................................................................................................................
36
5.3.1Displayerrorstack.................................................................................................
36
5.3.2Deleteerrorstack..................................................................................................
36
5.3.3Enderrorstack......................................................................................................
36
5.3.4Errordescription....................................................................................................
36
5.4Parameters.................................................................................................................
36
5.4.1Variableparameters...............................................................................................
36
5.4.2Displayparameters................................................................................................
46
6.SHORT-RUNDEVICE..........................................................................................................................
48
6.1General......................................................................................................................
48
6.2Settings......................................................................................................................
48
7.MODERNIZATION...............................................................................................................................
50
7.1General......................................................................................................................
50
7.2Modernizationbyencodermountedonmotorshaft..........................................................
50
7.2.1Rating..................................................................................................................
50
7.2.2Motoradaptation...................................................................................................
50
7.2.3Settingsforsynchronousmotors.............................................................................
51
7.2.4Settingintooperation.............................................................................................
51
8.ANNEX.................................................................................................................................................
52
8.1DeclarationofConformity..............................................................................................
52
8.2ParameterSetting........................................................................................................
55
8.3MonitoringParameter...................................................................................................
57
8.4Errordescription..........................................................................................................
58
8.5Extrainfoforpulseenablespowerpart(PDPINT)..............................................................
60
8.6Extrainfofor“runcontactorproblems”….......................................................................
61
8.7Connectiondiagram.....................................................................................................
62
8.8HowtousetheHyper-terminal......................................................................................
71
8.9ARDoperationwithGermanCPI-xx&CPI-xxR.................................................................
73
iv
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
1. SAFETY
1. SAFETY 1.1 Explanation of symbols used The following pictographs and designations are used in this operating manual:
Danger This symbol draws attention to an extreme danger to life or risk of injury to persons. Disregard of warning means danger to life !
Danger This symbol draws attention to an immediate impending danger to life or risk of injury to persons caused by electric current. Warning notices must always be observed!
Warning This symbol draws attention to an impending danger. Disregard can cause injury to persons or extensive damage to property. Warning notices must always be observed!
Note This symbol draws attention to important information and instructions for operation. Disregard can lead to damages, hazards or failures.
Inspection This symbol draws attention to inspection sequence. These inspection notices must be observed in any case. Disregard can lead to injury to persons or damage to property.
1
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
1. SAFETY
1.2 General safety information
Information about the operating manual Knowledge of the basic safety requirements is a prerequisite for the safe use and the failurefree operation of this component. This operating manual comprises the most important information how to safely use the component. The operating manual and, in particular, the safety information must be observed by all persons who perform any work on the component. In addition the rules and requirements concerning the regulations for prevention of accidents which apply to the installation location must be observed.
Duties of the owner and / or the installer The owner and / or installer ensures that only persons are authorized to work at the component, who • are familiar with the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents and who were trained how to use the component; • have read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual.
Check the compliance of the employee’s method of working with the safety requirements in regular intervals.
Duties of the employees Persons who are authorized to perform work at the component are obliged • to observe the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents; • to read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual prior to start working.
Training of the employees Only trained and instructed, technically competent persons shall perform work at the component. The competence of the employees must be clearly defined for all tasks concerning putting into service, operation, maintenance and repair work.
Organizational measures The owner or the installer must provide the necessary personal protective gear. All existing safety devices must be checked regularly in accordance with the maintenance plan.
2
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
1. SAFETY
Informal information about safety measures • The operating manual must always be available at the location of the installation. • In addition to the operating manual the general and local regulations for the prevention of accidents and environmental regulations must be made available and observed. • Clearly and easily visible statutory safety instructions must be made available for the users. • See to it that all information concerning safety and hazards is always visibly and legibly made available on the machine.
Use as intended The FREQUENCY INVERTER is exclusively designed for use as controller in lift drives in accordance with EN 112015 or EN 12016 as well as EMC directive 89/336/EC. Installation of the frequency inverter is subject to compliance with the requirements for installation and use of electrically-operated installations (EN 50 178 / VDE 0160 and VDE 0110). Any other use or any use exceeding the scope of the above definitions is regarded as use outside of the intended purpose. ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. cannot be hold liable for any damages resulting from this and for any damages which are caused by any errors of procedure. Use within the scope of intended purpose also comprises • observance of all information of the operating manual • fulfillment of the instructions applying to putting into service, installation description and inspection and repair work.
Guarantee and liability The “General sales and delivery terms“ of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. apply generally. Any claims for guarantee and liability are excluded in the case of injury to persons or damage to property resulting from one or several of the causes below: • use of FREQUENCY INVERTER outside the scope of its intended purpose • inexpert installation and putting into service of the FREQUENCY INVERTER • operating the FREQUENCY INVERTER with defective and/or non-operative safety and protective devices • disregard of instructions of the operating manual • unauthorized constructional modifications of the FREQUENCY INVERTER • unsatisfactory supervision of parts which are subject to wear • inexpert repair work • catastrophes caused by outside influence and Act of God.
3
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
1. SAFETY
Modifications of FREQUENCY INVERTER The FREQUENCY INVERTER is adjusted and sealed at the factory. In case of modifications or damage of the sealing ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. cannot be hold liable. In case of inexpert use there will be the risk of damage to life of the user resp. third parties or impairment of the component or material property. Failures which may affect safe operation must be eliminated immediately.
Use of FREQUENCY INVERTER and possible hazards The state-of-the art frequency inverter complies with the safety requirements in force. The frequency inverter shall only be used • as intended and • with the safety devices in perfect working condition. In case of inexpert use there will be the risk of damage to life of the user resp. third parties or impairment of the component or material property. Failures which may affect safe operation must be eliminated immediately. Works on the frequency inverter shall only be performed with the lift installation protected against unintentional switching on. See instructions in chapters 2.2.4.6 Fault current 5.4.1 Variable parameter (P92: discharge of DC link)
4
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Representation of frequency inverter CPIK
0
Control voltage (1ph AC220V) connection
1
“Ready message“ connection
2
Motor thermo sensor connection
3
DC choke
4
Main voltage (3 ph AC380V) connection
5
Dynamic braking resistor connection
6
Motor connection
7
Parameter Entry Panel interface
8
PC (RS-232C) interface
9
CAN communication and Encoder signal output
10
Encoder connection (Incremental encoder)
11
Encoder connection (Absolute encoder)
☞
Reference of terminals see chapter 8.7 Connection diagram
☞ Notice: control voltage of each models are as following: Control voltage
1 phase AC380V
1 phase AC220V CPIK11M1
CPIK model
CPIK15
CPIK15M
CPIK15M1
CPIK32
CPIK32M
CPIK32M1
CPIK48
CPIK48M
CPIK48M1
CPIK60
CPIK60M1
CPIK105
CPIK105M1
remark
built- in DC choke
Release date
2006.Jan
no built- in DC choke and miniature 2007. Apr
5
changed control voltage 2009.June
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.2 Description of frequency inverter CPIK The description and installation instructions are intended to inform the engineer planning the master lift control about the use of the frequency inverter range CPIK. The frequency inverter is a pulse inverter with DC link, latest microprocessor technology and IPM (Intelligent Power Module) solid state power components. Power vector control and field-oriented motor management by motor-mounted rotary encoder permits maximum dynamic performance and, therefore, load- independent high-quality run performance. The drive system consisting of CPIK frequency inverter and „ThyssenKrupp motor“ is factory-adjusted. The motor shall not be adapted to the frequency inverter prior to powering the lift installation on. Only check whether the adequate motor (see name plate) and encoder type (number of increments) are selected. Display selection of correct values by parameter P 40 (motor) and P 96 (encoder). Try to determine the pulse number per revolution through parameter P 105 if unknown. (See chapter 5.4.2 display parameters). Adaptation in the course of putting the frequency inverter into operation for third-party motors. (See chapter 7. Modernization). The main features of the frequency inverter range CPIK consists of the following points: • PWM control with 16 kHz pulse frequency, i.e. no motor noise. This frequency will be reduced automatically by overload. • Peak current is available for approx. 10 second during operation. Higher current is available for approx. 4sec in case of overload (in particular “release of safety gear operation”). However the switching frequency is reduced to 4 kHz (see chapter 2.2.3.2 Type specification). • Connection of contactors on mains (before the frequency inverter) or motor side (after the frequency inverter). (See chapter 2.2.4.9 Contactors). • No integrated fuses. Therefore adaptation of the installation fuses to inverter output • Regenerative energy is converted to heat by external brake resistor incase of Non-Regenerative. • Presetting of running characteristic by short run computer. Monitoring of reference/actual speed. Monitoring is not effective at “Vi” (inspection speed). • Isolated integrated voltage detection. Therefore devices can also be used for IT mains. • Device connection without removing of covers. All cable terminals are on top side and lower side (motor and brake resister) of device; control terminals are accessible from front side. • Speed to 2.0 m/s with geared drives to 6.0 m/s with gearless drives to 1.25 m/s with third-party motors(modernization jobs) Observe minimum floor-to-floor distances. (see chapter 4.8.3 Diagram for determining the min. permissible floor-to-floor distances). 2.2.1 Warnings • Works on the frequency inverter shall only be performed by trained and qualified personnel. They must observe the appropriate rules for prevention of accidents and shall be informed about the danger of electric current to be considered.(See chapter 1.2 General safety information). • Frequency inverters are electronic devices and, therefore, not fail-safe. The owner of the installation is responsible for the safety of persons and protection of material property. • Requirements for the installation and operation of electric systems (EN 50 178 / VDE 0160 and VDE 0110) must be observed for mounting of frequency inverter. Protective measures to be taken acc. to local conditions and regulations. • Electric energy may still be present after shutting off the inverter. (Charge of DC link capacitors). This applies to defective devices in particular. A warning to this effect is displayed on the device and must also be present in the operating manual of the lift control. • The integrated heat sink or other components, too, may still have a temperature > 60 °C during operation or shortly after powering off the device. • The external brake resistor may have a temperature > 200 °C during operation. 6
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
• The brake resistor should preferably be fitted on the control cabinet roof. Observe that there is no combustible material above the brake resistor. • Wall-mounted brake resistors shall not be fitted on / below combustible materials. These warnings do not claim to be complete.
2.2.2 Mounting instructions The following points are to be observed: The frequency inverter is a building part which is designed in protection class IP20. Mounting dimensions and required free space for ventilation see dimension sheet (chapter 2.5 Dimension sheet). Vertical mounting position is to be observed and free air inlet/outlet at heat sink provided. Ventilation apertures are required with the frequency inverter installed in a control cabinet. Power loss see technical data. Respective measures are required if polluted cooling air impairs the operation of the frequency inverter (installation of air filter and regular cleaning, for example).
< CPIK Installation and connection of motor cable >
7
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.2.3 Technical data 2.2.3.1 General data
Main Power connection, intput Rated mains voltage
[V]
3 phase AC 380, without N
Maximum voltage range
[V]
3 phase AC 380 -15%, AC415 +10%
Mains frequency
[Hz]
Rated 50, range 48 ... 63
System configuration
TN, TT, IT
Power factor cos ϕ1
0.98 with rated input current
Line power factor λ
0.94 with rated input current
Control Power connection, input Power max.
Max. 100VA,
Max. 200VA (R- type)
1 phase AC 220 V - 25%, AC240 +10%, without N, 50/60 Hz Control voltage
1 phase AC 380 V - 25%, AC415 +10%, without N, 50/60 Hz AC380V
CPIK series
15, 32, 48, 60, 105
AC220V 11M1,15M1,32M1,48M1,
15M, 32M, 48M
60M1,105M1
*** Control voltage is changed AC380V to AC220V in case of CPIK xxM1 series Protection class and climatic conditions Protection class
IP 20
Permissible coolant temperature Max. height of installation site Max. relative humidity
[°C]
0 ... 45
[m NN]
1000
[%]
95
No icing
2
Acc. to DIN VDE 0160
Contamination level
Derating for higher temperature Derating for higher heights
System perturbations, EMC Radio-interference level (emission)
EN 12015
Interference immunity (immunity)
EN 12016 < 0.3,
Current harmonic I5/I1 Total harmonic distortion THD- F
2)
< 0.08
(R- type)
≈35%, ≈10%
(R- type)
With rated input current
1)
1) In case of CPIK with operating capacity < 70 % rated output line reactor with higher inductance required, see chapter 2.5.2.2 Line choke 2) Total harmonic distortion (harmonic RMS current) related to fundamental-frequency current. Operating mode, characteristics Alternating duty cycle
S5
Duty cycle and ratio
[c/h], [ED]
240 with 50%
Open circuit, earth-fault proof
yes
Short-circuit proof
Acc. to DIN VDE 0160
8
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.2.3.2 Type specification (Non-Regenerative type) Model CPIK Input data (mains side) Rated input current Peak input current for 10 sec Rated input power Rated input power for 10 sec Cable cross-sectional area Output data (motor side) Range of output voltage Rated output current Peak output current for 10 sec Rated output power Peak rated power for 10 sec Cable cross-sectional area Loss power per current Efficiency Mechanical data Dimensions W Dimensions H Dimensions D Minimum top/bottom clearance Fan power of device (free air flow) Weight DC choke
unit
11M1
15M1
32M1
48M1
60M1
105M1
[A] [A] [kVA] [kVA] 2 [mm ]
15 28 10 18 4
23 43 15 28 4
29 58 19 38 4
46 87 30 57 10
55 119 36 78 16
83 165 54 109 22
[V] [A] [A] [kVA] [kVA] 2 [mm ] [W/A]
16 30 10 18 4 17.3
24 45 15 27 4 17.3
3 phase AC 0 ~ 350 32 48 60 60 90 120 19 29 36 36 55 73 6 10 16 16.2 16.5 13.6 0.97
90 180 55 109 22 13.7
240 450 180
240 450 180
280 555 227
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 3 [m /h] [kg]
138 13
240 240 450 450 180 180 100/100 138 138 138 13 14 14 No built-in
344 523 243
276 276 35 42 Built-in
(Regenerative type) Model (CPIK) Rated input current Peak input current for 10 sec Rated input power Rated input power for 10 sec Cable cross-sectional area Rated output voltage Range output voltage Rated output current Peak output current for 10 sec Rated output power Peak rated power for 10 sec Cable cross-sectional area Loss power per current Total Efficiency Dimensions W Dimensions H Dimensions D Minimum top/bottom clearance Fan power of device Weight EMI filter and AC choke
unit [A] [A] [KVA] [KVA] 2 [mm ] [V] [V] [A] [A] [kVA] [kVA] 2 [mm ] [W/A] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 3 [m /h] [kg]
RM type 15 32 48 20 27 40 38 58 78 15 19 29 27 36 55 4 6 10 3-phase AC340 3-phase AC0~380 24 32 48 45 60 90 15 19 29 27 36 55 4 6 10 17.3 16.2 16.5
18 40 14 30 4 34.6
440 1400 250
440 1400 250
440 1400 250
440 140 250
276
276
414
276
25 21 53 14 30 4
33 28 70 18 40 6
R type 50 100 150 40 81 121 106 186 279 24 48 72 59 117 176 10 25 38 3-phase AC440 3-phase AC0~480 35 70 105 77 154 231 24 48 72 59 117 176 10 16 30 42.8 42.8 42.8
24 53 18 40 6 32.4 0.94 440 440 140 1400 250 250 100/100 276 414
600 1800 290
700 1900 350
300 180 630 125 370 38x2
180 450 140 375 30x2 42.8 1400 2200 600
552
Built in
CPI 300R: To use TKAW product
9
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.2.3.3 External modules DC-link choke (for only CPIK 11M1, 15M1, 32M1 and 48M1) Item Inductance Rated current Model No.
unit [mH] [A]
15M1 2.2 23 HLD23A-2200
32M1 1.8 30 HLD30A-1800
unit [A]
15M1
32M1
48M1 1.4 40 HLD40A-1400
3 phase line filter Item Rated current Model No.
48M1
37 A3W4037-TD
60M1
50 A3W4050-TD
105M1 90 GT3AT-4100
48M1 60M1 3 x 0.29 50 ACL50A290
105M1 3 x 0.15 90 HL-90A-150
3 phase line choke Item Inductance Rated current Model No.
unit [mH] [A]
15M1 3 x 1.2 24 ACL16A1200
32M1 3 x 0.43 34 ACL34A430
Dynamic Braking Resister (Asynchronous/Synchronous) Item
unit
11M1
15M1
32M1
48M1
60M1
105M1
Recommend value
[ Ω]
50 / 28
33 / 28
25 / 20
16 / 14
12 / 10
10 / 8
Minimum value
[ Ω]
28
28
20
14
5
5
Power consumption
[ kW]
2 / 3.6
3 / 3.6
4 / 5.4
6 / 7.2
8 / 10
10 / 12
2.2.3.4 Derating The permissible output current shall be reduced acc. to below charts for installation sites at height > 1000m NN or coolant temperature > 45°C.
2.2.4 General instructions 2.2.4.1 Mains voltage Autotransformer on power input required if mains voltage and permissible mains voltage range differ (AC380V -15% ~ AC415V +10%). Too low mains voltage shall also be adapted due to fixed motor voltage. 10
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.2.4.2 System configuration The frequency inverters are rated for TN, TT or IT systems (see VDE 0100 part 300, November 1985). 2.2.4.3 Mains connection The cables don’t draw connection between frequency inverter and mains supply. (see VDE 0160, chapter 5.2.11.1: April 1998). 2.2.4.4 Isolation of frequency inverter Isolation of frequency inverters is only possible with power and control voltage inputs disconnected since the frequency inverters have separate control voltage inputs. 2.2.4.5 Leakage current It interfere suppression by Y capacitors between phase and protective earth conductor of frequency inverter and line filter. The arising leakage current is > 3.5 mA. Therefore cross-section of the protective earth conductor of supply cable shall be at least 10 mm² Cu in accordance with VDE 0160, chapter 5.3.2.1: April 1998. 2.2.4.6 Fault current Fault current with zero-frequency quantity can arise in case of earth contact in frequency inverter. Therefore the leakage current of the Y capacitors make use of protective equipment against standard fault current (FI) (pulsating current sensitive) impossible. The operation manual shall inform that use of protective fault current equipment only does not fulfill the requirements of VDE 0160, chapter 5.2.11.2: April 1998. AC-DC sensitive fault current protection is recommended. Connection notes of manufacturer are to be observed. 2.2.4.7 Discharge time of DC link capacitors The recommended residual voltage of 60 V after 5 seconds as required acc. To VDE 0113, part 1, chapter 6.2.3: (June 1993) is not complied with. A warning to this effect is given on the frequency inverter. A quick forced discharge by manual short-circuiting is not permissible. 2.2.4.8 Electronic ground Electronic ground (electronic zero) is electrically connected with the protective earth conductor. 2.2.4.9 Run contactors The run contactors can be connected on the line side (before the frequency inverter) or on the motor side (after the frequency inverter). Contactors with 60 Hz AC coil excitation can be used if connected on line side. The shielded motor-cable can also be run to the frequency inverter in accordance with the EMC requirements and the shielded motor cable connected by suitable cable clips. Coils with DC coil excitation shall be used for motor side connection. This guarantees delayed release of contactors. The shielded motor cable can be run to the run contactor in accordance with the EMC requirements and the shielded motor cable connected by suitable cable clips. Short and twisted cabling of the motor lines running to 2 run contactor is recommended. The contactor coils should be provided with overvoltage protection elements (RC element or freewheeling diode). 2.2.4.10 Internal fan The internal fan for cooling the heat sink is turned on during every run. If the heat sink temperature exceeds a certain value, the fan will continue running until the heat sink is cooled down accordingly again. 11
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3 Interface 2.3.1 Connection diagram The connection diagram (see chapter 8.7 connection diagrams) shows an overview of all terminals required for the operation of the frequency inverter. 2.3.2 Frequency inverter Input and Output terminals (Non-Regenerative) Terminals of top side No. Symbol Contents X1.1 PE Input: PE for control voltage X1.2 0 Input: Control voltage, 1 phase AC 220V X1.3 220V X1.15 RD1 Output: CPIK “Ready contact” X1.16 RD2 X1.17 TM1 Input: Motor temperature X1.18 TM2 X1.09 DCL DC-link choke ( in case of CPIK 11M1, 15M1, 32M1 and 48M1) If there are no use this choke, must short X1.09 and X1.10 X1.10 DCL X1.11 X1.12 X1.13 X1.14
L1 L2 L3 PE
Input: Main power, 3 phase, AC 380V, 50/60 Hz Input: PE for Main power
Terminals of lower side No. Symbol Contents X1.19 PE Output: PE for Dynamic Braking Resister X1.20 RA1 Output: IGBT collector terminal for Dynamic Braking Resister X1.21 RA2 Output: DC link P+ terminal for Dynamic Braking Resister X1.23 NOutput: DC link N- terminal X1.24 U X1.25 Output: Motor power V X1.26 W X1.27 PE Output: PE for motor power
2.3.2.1 Mains Line input of frequency inverter L1, L2, L3 without N on terminal strip X1, terminals 11, 12, 13 (PE at terminal 14) 2.3.2.2 Motor and Cables At terminal strip X1, motor output of inverter is terminals 24, 25 and 26 including 27 (PE). The motor must be connected via a four-core screened line. For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the screen must be connected to the mounting plate over a large surface in the control cabinet in the immediate vicinity of the inverter or run contactor (see chapter 2.2.4.9 run contactors). Cable clamps to be made provision for adequateness. The motor cable should not exceed a maximum length of 30 m and the cable should not be run in parallel to signal lines. 2.3.2.3 Dynamic braking resistor The device invariably accommodates a transistor for driving the braking resistor. The braking resistor must be always fitted on the outside (preferably on the control cabinet roof, also see 2.2.1 Warnings). Data for braking resistor refer to 2.2.3.3. Braking resistor to be connected to terminal strip X1, terminals 20 (RA1) and 21(RA2). (see chapter 2.3.2, terminals of lower side) 12
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3.2.4 Internal voltages Voltage to internal fan and the internal electronic voltage is supplied via the separate AC220 V control voltage connection at terminal strip X1, terminals 2 and 3. 2.3.2.5 Separately driven motor fan A separately driven fan on the motor must be switched directly from the lift control. 2.3.2.6 Motor PTC thermistor connection The PTC thermistor accommodated in the motor must be connected to terminal strip X1, terminals 17 and 18. The frequency inverter shall be shut off approximately 30 seconds after motor over temperature is reached or termination of current run. The CPIK ready message at terminal strip X 1, terminals 15 and 16 will be removed (relay contact open). A new run command can be given after the motor has cooled down (ready message present again). Connect terminals 17 and 18 with a wire jumper in the absence of a motor PTC thermistor. 2.3.3 Frequency inverter Input and Output terminals (Regenerative) Magnet Contactor and Connector in RMBK Board Contactor / Connector Q1 or MCCB
K06.1
X515
X512
X516
X514
Pin No. 2 4 6 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Symbol L1 L2 L3 U V W Coil1-1 Coil1-2 Coil2-1 Coil2-2 PE 0 220 220 nc 0 Th1.1 Th1.2 Th2.1 Th2.2 nc +24V LU1 0V LU2 0V
Contents Input: Main power, 3 phase, AC 380V, 50/60 Hz
Output: Motor power
Brake Coil
Input: PE for Control voltage Input: Control voltage Input: Power for K01, K01.1 (Safety line of TAC50K) Brake PTC, if there is no PTC, bridge 1 and 2 Motor PTC
Brake1 contactor Brake2 contactor
In case of RM type and R type, refer to connection diagram in chapter 8 2.3.3.1 Mains Connect main input line of frequency inverter L1, L2, L3 without N on Q1 or MCCB, Connect PE on plate.
13
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3.3.2 Motor and Cables Contact 2, 4 and 6 on magnet contactor K06.1is motor output of inverter The motor must be connected via a four-core screened line. For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the screen must be connected to the mounting plate over a large surface in the control cabinet in the immediate vicinity of the inverter or run contactor (see chapter 2.2.4.9 run contactors). Cable clamps to be made provision for adequateness. The motor cable should not exceed a maximum length of 30 m and the cable should not be run in parallel to signal lines. 2.3.4 Encoder connection and CAN communication 2.3.4.1 Encoder connection The incremental encoder for speed measurement is connected to plug X 907 of TMI2 board (9-pole subconnector / socket). The absolute encoder for speed measurement and magnet pole position is connected to plug X 917 of TMI2 board (15-pole D-sub-connector / socket). For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the screen is placed on the plug casing over a large surface both on the device side and on the encoder side. The maximum length of the encoder cable should not exceed 40 m. The pulse number of the encoder is 1024 or 4,096, 16,384 incremental type for asynchronous motor and 2,048 EnDat absolute type for Synchronous motor. Output signal of incremental encoder use line drive format Output signal of absolute encoder use line drive format Pin assignment of incremental encoder Signal Ua 1 inverted Ua 1 Ua 2 Ua 2 inverted Ua 0 Ua 0 inverted 0 Volt PE / shield + 5 Volt
Pin assignment of absolute encoder
X 907, Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal Ua 1(sinus) 0V(GND) Ua 2 (cosinus) 5V data shield clock Ua 1 inverse(sinus) Ua 1(sinus) Ua 2 inverse(cosinus) data inverse clock inverse
X 917, Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 15
2.3.4.2 Encoder signals and CAN communication to control The encoder signals from the motor encoder are available at TMI2 board on plug X 906 (D-sub, 15-pole, pins) and can be used in the control (path or speed detection, for example). The CAN interface signals from the TCM control or TAC50K control are connected at TMI2 board on plug X 906 (D-sub, 15-pole, pins). They are isolated from the frequency inverter electronics by opto-couplers. Pin assignment: Signal X 906, Pin Signal X 906, Pin Ua 1 5 Ua 1 inverted 13 Ua 2 6 Ua 2 inverted 14 0 Volt 7 CAN-L 8 CAN-H 15 Not used All other pins 2.3.4.3 Using the CAN interface to connect the TCM (or TAC50K) control system The TCM (or TAC50K) interface is used for control command communication and for acknowledge signals between TCM (or TAC50K) and CPIK via CAN bus and for transmission of motor rotary 14
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
encoder impulses from CPIK to TCM (or TAC50K). There is potential separation between TCM (or TAC50K) and CPIK. a) Connection with TCM control system Control commands start and travel direction signal upwards start and travel direction signal downwards run enabled From TCM speed reference value acceleration set point value load weighing signal switch on travel contactors To TCM brake open command start reference value Status signals travel contactor on acknowledgment From TCM brake released acknowledgment motor overtemperature To TCM RPM zero signal collective fault signal b) Connection with TAC50K control system Control commands from TAC50K (0x33) Word0 speed command value Word0 pre-torque reference value
UP DOWN FF Vsoll asoll QLMS ESP EBS STS QSP BR1 MUET N=0 SMR
Vsoll QLMS
Status signals from TAC50K (0x33) Word1- Bit0 speed reference / pre-torque reference Word1- Bit1 the Inverter turns on current to the motor Word1- Bit10 enable for UPS operation Word1- Bit11 drive enable Word1- Bit13 MC1 contactor ON acknowledgment Word1- Bit15 brake released acknowledgment
0/ 1 RUN UPS DE QSP BR1
Control commands to TAC50K (0x01) Word1- Bit0 drive enable Word1- Bit3 when true, CPIK is unable Word1- Bit7 brake open command Word1- Bit8 Acknowledge Motor Contactor1 (Regen type only) Acknowledge Motor Contactor2 (Regen type only) Word1- Bit9 Temperature motor / break / line choke (Regen type only) Word1- Bit10 Acknowledge Break 1 (Regen type only) Word1- Bit11 Acknowledge Break 2 (Regen type only) Word1- Bit12
15
DE K1- FLT EBS RK1 RK2 Tmot BK1 BK2
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3.4.4 Switching sequence chart with TCM control
16
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3.4.5 Switching sequence chart with TAC50K control
17
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2.3.5 Interface to the lift control 2.3.5.1 Ready message A floating operating contact (make contact AC220V / 3 A) is available as “inverter ready“ message on terminal strip X1, terminals 15 and 16. 2.3.5.2 Input and outputs Connect inputs and outputs via plug X 1 of TIC board. Place screen of associated cable over large surface on the control side. The input and output signals are electrically isolated from CPIK. The control voltage for the digital control commands from the lift control to CPIK is made available by the lift control. Control voltage from lift control for digital control commands, plug X1 / TIC 0V
1b, 10a
+24 V
2b, 12a
A three-core cable can be connected as a link to the load-weighing device LMS 1at terminals 10a, 12a and together with 9b.
Digital control signals from lift control to CPIK, plug X1/TIC Start and run direction signal upwards
UP
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
3b
Start and run direction signal downwards
DOWN
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
4b
Rated speed
VN
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
5b
Second operating speed
V2
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
6b
Inspection operation speed
VI
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
7b
Leveling speed
Vo
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
8b
LMS
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
9b
Main contactor ack. alternative to QSP
QSP1
Optocoupler Input
24Vdc 50mA
10b
Main contactor ack. alternative to QSP1
QSP
AC Input
180~250Vac
7a, 8a
-10V ~ +10V
11a
Load-weighing signal from loadweighing device (LMS1, 1 ~10 kHz )
Analog signal from lift control to CPIK, plug X1 / TIC Analog programmable input
PROGANA
Output signals from CPIK to lift control, plug X1 / TIC Activation command for main contactors
ESP
contact K4
250Vac / 5A
4a, 5a
Activation command for brake
EBS
contact K5
250Vac / 5A
1a, 2a
V Act speed 2.5 + -2.5V where : 0 =Act speed 2.5+-2.5V 32 =Signal 'Referenz found' 1 =Act. speed +5V 33 =Speed-rev. in F240 2 =Rev speed 2.5+-2.5V 34 =Speed-act. in F240 3 =Rev speed +5V 35 =El. Position 4 =Torque current 36 =i_q_ref 5 =Flux current 37 =i_d_ref 6 =Feedforward current 38 =u_q_ref 7 =Output speedcontroler 39 =u_d_ref 37
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
8 =+5V reference 40 =u_a_ref 9 =0V reference 41 =u_b_ref 10 =2.5V reference 42 =u_c_ref 11 =Short-run status 43 =i_a 12 =Heatsink temp. 44 =i_b 13 =Overtemperature motor 45 =i_c 14 =Signal 'n=0' 46 =i_alpha 15 =Signal 'Bereit' 47 =i_beta 16 =Signal 'Zk-Bereit' 48 =u_dc 17 =Signal 'controller enable' 49 =theta 18 =Encodercounter 50 =F240 Kanal 1 19 =Signal WU 51 =F240 Kanal 2 20 =Signal WO 52 =AnalogIn X1/11a 21 =Signal vn 53 =Start release 22 =Signal vjuf 54 =Start attain value 23 =Signal vi 55 =a_soll 24 =Signal v0 56 =Switching sequence index 25 =Signal QSP 57 =a_ref_CAN 26 =Signal ESP 58 =v_ref_CAN 27 =Signal EBS 59 =delta_v_ref_CAN 28 =Signal BR1 60 =delta_n_ref 29 =Signal SMR an TCI 30 =No function 31 =VRB The assignment of measuring point to parameter number is: Selection of system values to be effected through parameter P 10..P11. Number Output measuring point P10 MP42 P11 MP43 P 13 ... P 17: Ratio Parameter P 13 to P 16 can be used for computing the ratio between motor speed and car speed. In so doing the maximum motor speed required for reaching the rated speed will be computed. These parameters have a direct effect on the rated speed computed (P 17) and therefore on the speed of the lift. P 13: Gear ratio When a geared drive is used, the ratio of the gear can be set here. The ratio of gearless drives is 1.0. The ratio of gears is often stated as a relation (e.g. 50:2). However, the entry into P13 must be in decimal notation (50:2 => 25.0). P 14: Traction-sheave diameter This parameter can be used for setting the traction-sheave diameter in mm. P 15: Suspension The number of suspensions has a direct effect on the ratio (see gear ratio). The ratio is always indicated as whole number. P 16: Run speed vmax The maximum run speed of the lift can be set here. Setting in m/s. P 17: Calculated maximum speed nrated 38
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
The required maximum speed of the motor is automatically calculated from the values of parameters P 13 to P 16 and then displayed. P 18: Operating point for N=0 End of run will be reached, if the speed falls below the speed set here. Relay EBS will drop out (board TIC / X1 , terminals 1a and 2a). P 19: Acceleration change (jerk) P 20: Acceleration
Set desired acceleration change (jerk) [m/s³]. Set desired acceleration / deceleration in [m/s²].
P 21: Acceleration precontrol ON / OFF Should the drive tend to overshoot or undershoot, the running performance can be improved by activating the acceleration precontrol. This particularly applies to gearless drives. P 22: Acceleration precontrol value For assessment of the correct setting of acceleration precontrol, the actual speed value ( P10 to “0”) should be measured at measuring point 42A and the controller output (P 11 to “7”) should be measured at point 43A. Setting instructions: P 21 = “OFF” (precontrol OFF), Controller output to be measured during a run with recorder
Calculation of necessary precontrol:
P 22 =
100% × Ma 2V
(Ma measured in Volts)
Enter value in P22, P21 = “ON” (precontrol ON) Record further runs and adjust P 22 to such an extend that the speed controller output does no longer show an acceleration torque (Ma approx. 0):
P22 increase
P22 decrease
P22 change sign
If no recorder is available, these measurements can also be made with a digital voltmeter. Parameter for speed setting • One of the five speeds is selected via inputs at connector X1 on TIC board TIC. • When more than one speeds are selected at the same time, the order is as follows: Inspection speed Vi has priority, i.e. as soon as vi is selected, all other speeds will be ignored. Leveling speed V0 can always be selected and will not be effective until all the other speeds are inactive. • After selecting a speed value, a nominal/actual value comparison will be carried out (“tolerance band monitoring”). Excessive variance causes emergency stop to be activated. • Emergency stop at inspection speed Vi or emergency operation speed V3 is only be activated if the 39
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
nominal value exceeds 130% of the respective actual value. • Acceleration and jerk values are the same for all run characteristic sections (acceleration, deceleration, lower and upper rounding). • The stopping distance from leveling speed and V0 to “electrically activated stop” (zero speed) is only dependent on value V0 and the set jerk of the run characteristics. This stopping distance cannot be parameterized separately. Example: V0 = 0.1 m/s, jerk = 0.8 m/s3 -> stopping distance : 35mm. • Short run function only work at rated speed Vn. • Normal leveling speed V0 is 0.1 m/s ; if value V0 is lower the “leveling time” will increase substantially. P 23: Speed V0 P 24: Speed Vi P 25: Speed Vn P 26: Speed V2
Leveling speed V0 [m/s]. Inspection operation speed Vi [m/s] Rated speed Vn [m/s] Intermediate speed V2 [m/s]
P 27: Second intermediate speed Vn2 Second intermediate speed Vn2 [m/s] (To be selected by controlling of Vn and V2 at the same time.) The value ranges of parameters P19, 20 and 23 to 27 are as follows: Setting range Standard P 19
Jerk
0.5 ~ 2.00 m/s³
0.80 m/s³
P 20
Acceleration
0.3 ~ 1.10 m/s²
0.70 m/s²
P 23
Leveling speed
V0
0.01 ~ 0.30 m/s
0.03 m/s
P 24
Inspection speed
Vi
0.20 ~ 0.63 m/s
0.30 m/s
P 25
Rated speed
Vn
0.05 ~ 3.85 m/s
1.00 m/s
P 26
Intermediate speed
V2
0.05 ~ 3.5 m/s
1.00 m/s
P 27
2. intermediate speed
Vn2
0.05 ~ 3.85 m/s
0.5 m/s
Further intermediated speeds are available from software versions TMI V15.3 or V5.5: P 28 : Speed V3 Speed for emergency operation V3 [m/s] Select parameter P48 or P49 “emergency current” to activate. Otherwise parameter P28 can nor be displayed. Corresponding +24V input signals X1.11a (for P48) or X1.9b to be present. P29 to P32 Select “intermediated speed” in parameter P48 or P49 to activate. Otherwise parameters P29 to P32 cannot be displayed. Corresponding +24V input signals X1.11a (for P48) or X1.9b to be present. When selecting Vi or V0 and another intermediated speed at the same time the following will apply: • inspection speed Vi has priority, i.e. as soon as vi is selected, all other speeds will be ignored. • Leveling speed V0 can always be selected and will not be effective until all the other speeds and inactive. P29 : Speed V4 (X1.5b = low and X1.6b = low) P30 : Speed V5 (X1.5b = high and X1.6b = low) P31 : Speed V6 (X1.5b = low and X1.6b = high) P32 : Speed V7 (X1.5b = high and X1.6b = high)
Intermediated speed V4 [m/s] Intermediated speed V5 [m/s] Intermediated speed V6 [m/s] Intermediated speed V7 [m/s]
The value ranges of parameter P28 to P32 are as follow: Setting range P28 Emergency operation speed V3 0.01 ~ 10.0 [m/s] P29 Intermediated speed V4 0.05 ~ 10.0 [m/s] P30 Intermediated speed V5 0.05 ~ 10.0 [m/s] 40
0.20 [m/s] 0.20 [m/s] 0.40 [m/s] ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
P31 Intermediated speed P32 Intermediated speed Table 5.5 Value range
V6 V7
0.05 ~ 10.0 [m/s] 0.05 ~ 10.0 [m/s]
0.60 [m/s] 0.80 [m/s]
Input PROGIN or PROGANA Item Electrical stop Inspection speed Leveling speed Rated speed Intermediate speed 2 Intermediate speed Intermediate speed v4 Intermediate speed v5 Intermediate speed v6 Intermediate speed v7 Emergency operation
V1 V0 Vn V2 Vn2 V4 V5 V6 V7 V3
P24 P23 P25 P26 P27 P29 P30 P31 P32 P28
V1
V0
Vn
V2
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 X 1 X X X X X X X X
0 X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
0 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Intermediate speed 0 X 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Emergency operation X X X 0 X X X X X X 1
“0” means “off”, “1” means “active”, “X” means “irrelevant” Table 5-6 Overview speed selection
P 37 : Operating point v < 0.3 Speed can be set within a range of 0.15 ~ 0.3 m/s. As soon as the speed falls below the set speed, the contact at terminals 11b and 12b on board TIC will be closed. The set operating point is provided with a hysteresis of ±1% of Vn. P 38 : Short-run device Option of enabling / disabling the short-run device. P 39: Correction of short-run distance Description see chapter 6. Short-run device P 40: Selection of motor There is where the respective motor is selected. Motor type can be read from the motor rating plate. Select this motor here. P 44: Speed threshold PROGOUT V < 0.0 ~ Vrat to be set here. P 45: Output PROGOUT default (V < P 44) P 46: Output PROGOUT1 default (motor overtemperature) P 47: Output V < 0,3 default (V < 0.3 m/s), The following signals can be output through P 45, P 46 and P 47 (If number with negative sign are selected the signals will be inverted.) no control 41
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
ESP (run contactor control)l EBS (brake control) n=0 V < 0.3 m/s V < P44 Motor overtemperature Device overtemperature Ready Contactor check P 50: Load specification (OFF/ON) Switch load precontrol on/off. Reverse rotation of a car on disengagement of the brake can be reduced by entering a starting torque. This specification is made either with the help of a load-weighing device or it can be entered for a single specific load condition, if no load-weighing device is available. a) without load-weighing device If no load-weighing device is available, the load specification can be enabled/disabled with P 50 and a fixed value can be entered with P 54. This specification will then be optimal for one load state only. Observe that the values P51 and P52 must be unequal as internal computation is made by formula [(P 51 - P 52) x P 54]. P 51 = 0, P 52 = 45% (default value) is recommended. P 51: Current value / load weighing This is where the current loading state of the car is indicated in % of rated load. (Commonly approx. 45 % in the event of load compensation of car). This implies that the load-weighing device was correctly adjusted beforehand. P 52: Value / load compensation In the event of load compensation, the loading state must be entered here. It can be determined experimentally as follows: 1. Establish load compensation (car shall not start spinning with the brake disengaged) 2. Read current value from P 51 3. Enter value into P 52 or enter any empirical value, e. g. 45 % means that the counterweight is 45 % of rated load. P 53: Adopt load current During a run at constant speed with emergency electrical operation (e.g. empty UP or Down) the momentary load current will be displayed. The load specification will be computed internally from this current value by operating the “+“ or “- “ key during this run at constant speed. The value in P 54 will be overwritten. P 54: Load specification - gain The value (with sign) of gain calculated here will be specified through P 53. A fine adjustment, if necessary, can be made here. Improved starting performance for synchronous motors using load controller P 54: Control position controller gain (without load weighing) Sensor for signaling load weighing is no longer necessary, which improves the staring performance of synchronous gearless drive. Load weighing is electrical through the high resolution load signal from the sine/cosine encoder. A position controller replaces the existing precontrol signal from the load sensor. As soon as the pulses are enabled and the brake opened, the car is hold in its momentary position through the load controller. 42
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
Intervention gain to be set through parameter P 55. The position controller is disabled at the running characteristic start to permit control to be effected by the speed controller. Preparation TMI2 board: EPROM version from V5.5b. FLASH program from F030701. P 0 = 280ms re-adjust reference value start delay P 50 = OFF switch off load weighing P 55 = 5 (start value) enable control of position controller gain Setting When starting from upper-most landing downwards with the car empty, P 55 will be set to a value reverse rotation. Small values to be selected, preferably. Check selected setting during performance in opposite run direction and readjust P 55 to avoid jerk. Values from P 55 = 0.1 to 25 to be selected. Note Retrofitting of existing installation is possible. The method above does not replace use of overload sensor. “Occupied”, ”abuse” and “no-load” conditions cannot be recognized. P55: Position controller gain (only with synchronous machine with EnDat encoder) The precontrol signal supplied through load weigh device is replaced by a position controller computer. After entering pulse enable and release of brake, the car is retained in its momentary position through the position controller. With P55 the position controller gain can be adjusted. Thereby P50 must be switched OFF and P0 must be corrected to 280 ms P 60: Rated frequency motor P 61: Rated voltage motor P 62: Rated speed motor P 63: Rated current motor P 64: Motor cos(phi) P 65: Rotor time constant (Tr) computed P 66: No-load current (Id) computed P 67: Reference rotor time constant (Tr) P 68: Reference no-load current (Id) P 76: Actual motor voltage
See name plate of motor See name plate of motor See name plate of motor See name plate of motor See name plate of motor To be computed from above values To be computed from above values Value of P 65 to be entered Value of P 66 to be entered Display of motor voltage
P 80: Auto tuning Auto-tuning is automatically to optimize of current controller. When choosing “other motor” in motor selection (P 40), four new parameters will be available (P 80 ~ P 83). These parameters permit to set the current controller for the unknown motor. 1
P 80 to “ Tuning start”
Display go to measurement Rs
2
Activate drive by electrical recall operation
3
P 80 shows (2) measurement Rs
4
P 80 shows (3) measurement Ls
5
P 80 shows (4) measurement ended
6
Switch off electrical recall operation, P 80 is automatically reset to (0) normal operation. If measurement is successful. Connect brake, if necessary.
7
P81: measured values displayed
8
P82~P83: manual change of current controller values
Motor is energized. Brake shall not open (disconnect, if necessary) Switch off run time monitoring, if necessary Motor resistance is measured; measuring takes approx. 5 s. Afterwards automatically switching to (3). Inductivity is measured (approx. 2 sec). Afterwards automatically switching to (4).
43
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
Repeat or save parameters. Refer to chapter 7.2.2 in order to fine tuning
P 86: Adjusting encoder for Synch machine Necessary auxiliary devices: Parameter entry panel Synchronous motor should be tuned for the correct rotor initial position using absolute encoder (2048 EnDat) before the shipment. - Preparation
① ② ③
Select correct motor type in parameter P40 Make sure “2048 EnDat” is selected in parameter P96 Enter the number of pole-pair in parameter P97
- Determine correct rotor position It is no longer necessary to align the encoder manually. Align the rotor in pre-determined position then align by storing in encoder EEPROM. The data will be maintained even after disconnecting the supply voltage. If CPIK is connected, “Ready” LED will light on TMI2 board.
①
P86: change operation mode motor, switch from “ normal operation” to “ Rotor Alignment” To confirm the change with key button “P/W” “Ready” LED goes out for some seconds, since DSP reset is carried out After “Ready” LED lights up again wait approx. 2 seconds until initiation starts
②
start adjusting operation by FWD or RVS command Enable pulses (LED lights on right-lower side of CPIK Inverter) The rotor will be aligned with motor current rising Wait until rotor stands still
③
Change P86: operation mode motor, switch from “ Rotor Alignment” to “ Save Offset” To confirm the change with key button “P/W”
④ ⑤
stop adjusting operation by FWD or RVS command P86: Operation mode motor will automatically be reset to “ normal operation” after a few seconds “Ready” LED goes out for some seconds, because DSP reset is be carried out. This indicates that the adjusting procedure is finished.
Check the following entry into error event stack of CPIK: “Rotor Position Stored Encoder”
P 92: Discharge DC link Prior to start working on the frequency inverter or motor connection it is necessary to discharge the DC link for reasons of safety (see chapter 1.2 General safety information and chapter 2.2.1 Warnings)! The DC link voltage in Volt is displayed by this parameter. The external brake resistor is controlled cyclically and the DC link capacitor discharged by pressing the “+“ or “-“ key at the same time. Discharging can be speeded up by pressing the “P/W” key at the same time. Discharge of DC link is only possible with signal “QSP = 0”, i.e. the line contactor released and the brake resistor in perfect working condition. Power supply must be disconnected in case of installations, where the contactors are connected between motor and frequency inverter and not between mains and frequency inverter. However, the control voltage must be connected until DC link is discharged.
44
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
P 96: Encoder pulse number This is where the encoder pulse number is selected. The pulse number of the encoder used can be read from the motor casing near the encoder. If unknown, the encoder pulse number can be determined as described in parameter P 105. P 97: Pole pair number If "third-party motor" is selected at P40 (motor selection) of synchronous motors, the pole pair number of the third-party motor synchronous machine must be entered here. P 98: Id reduced If "third-party motor" is selected at P40 (motor selection) of asynchronous motors, the “Id reduced” can adjust the field current of motor. P 160: Maximum current in % of i-overload Here you can set limit value for torque current. For example: In case of to use DTE140S009 Motor and CPIK 48M Inverter Rated motor capacity 16 kW Rated motor current 37 A- rms Permissible motor starting current 67 A- rms Maximum Inverter current 95 A- rms
Permissibe motor starting current × 1.1 × 100 % Maximum Inverter current 67 = × 1.1 × 100 % = 77 .5[%] 95
Setting value[%] =
P 205: P gain at start Set desired starting P gain P 206: I gain at start Set desired starting I gain P 900: PWM frequency Select PWM frequency one of 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 16 kHz P 901: current limit in % of i_overload Set maximum current limit
45
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
5.4.2 Display parameters These parameters cannot be changed. The values of these parameters are continuously re-calculated by the device and indicated. -1
P 100: Motor speed Display of current motor speed in min (rpm) P 101: Actual speed Display of current speed in m/s The current actual speed of the lift is displayed in m/s. The display will be correct only, if the entries of parameters P 13, P 14 and P 15 are correct! P 102: Motor Frequency Display of motor frequency in Hz. P 103: Binary inputs for TIC card P 104: Binary outputs for TIC card All inputs and outputs of the plug will be displayed. This parameter will be displayed in binary. Every bit of this numerical value corresponds to an input signal at plug X1 of TlC board. P 103: Binary inputs P 104: Binary outputs signal Input binary signal output binary UP X1.3b B00000000 00000001 ESP X1.4a, 5a B00000000 00000001 DOWN X1.4b B00000000 00000010 EBS X1.1a, 2a B00000000 00000010 VN X1.5b B00000000 00000100 V < 0.3 X1.11b, 12b B00000000 00000100 V2 X1.6b B00000000 00001000 Prog X1.13b, 14b B00000000 00001000 V1 X1.7b B00000000 00010000 V0 X1.8b B00000000 00100000 QSP X1.7a, 8a B00000000 01000000 QSP1 X1.10b B00000000 01000000 Prog. X1.9b B00000000 10000000 P 105: Encoder pulse number This parameter permits the function of the pulse number of the incremental encoder to be checked. The content of incremental encoder is displayed continuously. Values between -32768 and 32767 may be encountered. The displayed value must change by the encoder pulse number per motor revolution. (i.e. change of display = encoder pulse number) P 106: Reference Speed P 107: Load current P 108: Load current P 109: Load current
The momentary reference speed is displayed in m/s. The momentary load current is displayed in Ampere (Total current). The momentary load current is displayed in Ampere (Field current). The momentary load current is displayed in Ampere (Torque current).
P 110: Switching sequence index The figures specified by this parameter correspond to the figures stated in the bottom line of the switching sequence diagram and they indicate the current switching state in the frequency inverter. P 111: sv calculated To perform a short run, the distance to be covered by the lift between start of deceleration at rated speed vn and reaching leveling speed (sv). The distance is computed from the data of parameters P19, P20, P23 and P25 and will be indicated in P111 for the purpose of checking. P 112: sv measured During a run in which Vrated is reached, the deceleration distance will be measured and displayed at the end 46
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
5. PARAMETER ENTRY
of the run. The distance is measured from the moment signal Vn is removed until V0 is reached. P 113: Travel distance The distance covered during every run will be measured and displayed. The distance measured last will remain displayed until the next run is initiated. As the distance is measured on the motor shaft, rope slip on the traction sheave may result in deviations from the actual distance covered. P 115: Heatsink temperature The temperature of heatsink is displayed here in degree. P 116: DC link voltage The voltage of the DC link circuit is displayed here in Volts. P 117: PWM operating frequency The current operating frequency is indicated in kHz. P 118: Position of absolute encoder (only with synchronous machines EnDat format encoder) The display parameter “P118” permits to adjust the encoder. 9999 is displayed as long as the absolute encoder position is unknown. As soon as “position recognized” is indicated, the pulse numbers will be displayed in quadruple resolution. –16384 ~ 0 ~ +16384 is displayed for half motor rotation. +16384 to –16384 is displayed for the next half motor rotation. –16384 ~ 0 ~ +16384 is displayed for the motor rotation following next. P 120: System Information The system information is displayed like as Version, CPIK model etc. P 122: CAN Input All inputs of the CAN form Controller will be displayed. This parameter will be displayed in binary. Where: Speed/ pre-torque B 0000 0000 0000 0001 RUN B 0000 0000 0000 0010 ARD B 0000 0100 0000 0000 Enable B 0000 1000 0000 0000 QSP B 0010 0000 0000 0000 BR1 B 1000 0000 0000 0000 P 123: CAN Output All outputs of the CAN will be displayed. This parameter will be displayed in binary. Where: Drive Enable B 0000 0000 0000 0001 Drive Fault B 0000 0000 0000 1000 EBS B 0000 0000 1000 0000 RK1 B 0000 0001 0000 0000 RK2 B 0000 0010 0000 0000 Temperature B 0000 0100 0000 0000 BK1 B 0000 1000 0000 0000 BK2 B 0001 0000 0000 0000 P 124: Speed reference Filter This parameter will be help to reduce vibration and noise.
47
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
6. SHORT RUN DEVICE
6. SHORT RUN DEVICE 6.1 General A short run is present, if the floor-to-floor distance is shorter than the sum from acceleration and deceleration distance for rated speed. Rated speed is not reached during such a run. To arrive in the landing, the car will have to move at leveling speed over a longer period of time. The built-in short-run device recognizes this state and it extends the acceleration phase of the run automatically. The leveling time into the landing is thus the same as with run at rated speed, i.e. no creep or only short creep (operating delay or rope slip). The lift data must be set correctly, so that the short-run device will operate correctly. These are : P13 Gear ratio P14 Traction sheave diameter P15 Suspension P19 Jerk P20 Speed P23 Speed V0 P25 Speed VN The deceleration distance VN will be computed from these parameters and indicated in parameter P111. The deceleration distance will be measured for each normal run (VN is reached) and displayed in P112. However, this measured distance will not be considered in the short-run calculation. Short run with "sharper rounding". This is the case, if the deceleration point is reached during the top rounding of the acceleration phase. If deceleration with the set jerk is performed, the deceleration distance will be too large. The landing will be bypassed. To avoid this, the run will have a "sharper rounding" i.e., a greater jerk. 6.2 Settings P 38 : Short-run computer (ON/OFF) There is the option of enabling or disabling the function of short-run computation. Short-run computation only works if VN is switched to V0. P 39 : Correction of short-run distance In the event of switching delay times of the control or rope slip, it may become necessary to correct the leveling distance in a short run. If higher figures are entered, the creep distance to the landing will become longer, if lower values are entered, the creep distance will become shorter. Values from –40.0cm to +40.0cm are possible. The pattern of running characteristic can be checked at measuring points (MP42A or MP43A). For this purpose, parameter P10 or P11 must be set to value (11) – running characteristic status. A diagram will appear at the respective measuring point and this permits the individual phases of the running characteristic to be seen following Figure.
48
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
6. SHORT RUN DEVICE
Where : MP42A/43A 2.50 V
V = 0 m/s
3.15 V
Rounded from constant speed to constant acceleration
3.45 V
Constant acceleration
3.75 V
Rounded from constant acceleration to constant speed
4.10 V
Constant speed
1.90 V
With sharper rounding to constant acceleration
1.55 V
Constant acceleration extended by short-run device
1.25 V
short-run device
49
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
7. MODERNIZATION
7. MODERNIZATION 7.1 General Frequency inverter CPIK is also designed for use in modernization jobs at elevator installation with thirdparty motor (no ThyssenKrupp motor). Single speed or pole changing motors may be selected. A vector control is used here, too. Max. speed of 1.6 m/s is recommended. The necessary information about modernization jobs is given in the following description. 7.2 Modernization by encoder mounted on motor shaft The following applies: • Operation of single-speed or pole-changing motors, frequency inverter and standard motors is possible. • Motors should be of isolation class F; to reduce the wiring stress a frequency inverter output choke is used. • Inertia is to be reduced to max. 1/3 of the original value. • Devices CPIK 15, 32, 48, 60 and 105 are to be used only. • The encoder on the motor shaft is to be mounted centrally and stiff against torsion. • The encoder must send Line drive format signals with 5 V supply voltage (Connection assignment see chapter 2.3.4 Incremental encoder connection) • Observe min. floor-to-floor distance (see chapter 4.8.3 Diagram for determination of min. permissible floorto-floor distances) (Area A or B). 7.2.1 Rating Standard values for rating: Rated motor current CPIK Line filter Line choke (Name plate) ~ 24 A CPIK 32 30 A 3 x 0.40 mH, 34 Aeff ~ 38 A CPIK 48 50 A 3 x 0.29 mH, 50 Aeff ~ 50 A CPIK 60 50 A 3 x 0.29 mH, 50 Aeff The braking resistor used depends on the type of installation.
Output choke 3 x 0.15 mH, 43 Aeff 3 x 0.12 mH, 60 Aeff 3 x 0.12 mH, 60 Aeff
7.2.2 Motor adaptation To adapt an unknown motor to the frequency inverter proceeds accordingly, by iteration for example. Start with the name plate data. In so doing please note that these data may be incomplete or unequal to the rated working point of the frequency inverter in case of old lift motors as the ratio of maximum current to rated current was limited to special values. This normally results in an excessive no-load current of the frequency inverter. Also see table at the end of this chapter. Release below parameters by selecting “third-party motor” in P 40. a) Automatic current controller optimization (auto-tuning P 80) to be effected. b) The values of P 65 (“rotor time constant Tr“) and P 66 (“no-load current Id“) are calculated from parameters P 60 (“rated frequency of motor“), P 61 (“rated voltage of motor“), P 62 (“rated speed of motor“), P 63 (“rated current of motor“) and P 64 (“motor cos(phi)“). As a rule, the values of P 65 are between 40 ms and 400 ms, and the values of P 66 between 6 A and 30 A (dependent on motor output). Parameter No. Setting range As delivered P 60 30 ~ 70 Hz 50 Hz P 61 300 ~ 500 V 360 V -1 -1 P 62 500 ~ 2000 min 1345 min P 63 10.0 ~ 42.5 A 17.5 A P 64 0.5 ~ 1.0 0.79 Setting for motor adaptation Note: Improved computation of rotor time constant (Tr) and no-load current (Id) is available from program version V 15.4. This means that the fine adjustment described below is not necessary in most cases. Rated motor frequency Rated motor voltage Rated motor speed Rated motor current Motor cos (phi)
Fine adjustment (must do c, d, e) for Asynchronous motor c) Enter computed value of P 65 in P 67 and computed value of P 66 in P 68. An approximate value for motor adaptation will be determined. These are the values to be used by the controller. If negative values are used for P67 or P68, the computed values of P65 and P66 will continuously be adopted. These are default values. 50
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
Rotor time constant (Tr) calculated Field current (Id) calculated Ref. rotor time constant (Tr) Ref. no-load current (Id)
7. MODERNIZATION
Parameter No. Setting range P 65 P 66 P 67 1 ~ 500 ms P 68 0.1 ~ 38.0 A Setting for motor adaptation
As delivered ms A -1 ms -0.1 A
d) These presetting permit an approximate basic setting of the motor. Load compensation is required to ensure that no-load current is present only (load current < 5% of max. current) if the lift runs at constant speed (electric recall operation, for example). Now initiate run at rated speed. A band error may arise during acceleration; disconnect the band monitoring, if necessary, or set slower acceleration value. Now observe the actual motor voltage in parameter P 76. This value should be between 270 and 300 V with the lift running at rated speed. Decrease motor voltage through P 68 (no-load current Id) (the arising motor voltage based on the no-load current from the name plate data is too high, normally). The motor voltage in P 76 should be approx. between 270 to 300 V both for UP and DOWN direction. Increase or decrease the rotor time constant (Tr) in P 67 if the torque required for acceleration phase is insufficient. This value can be changed step by step by 25 %. e) Now move the lift with empty car; This means that motor-driven run under no load shall be performed in DOWN direction and a brake test during run in UP direction. The motor voltage shall increase by the value of the motor slip with the lift running in DOWN direction, i.e. approx. 30 V to 50 V; decrease of the motor voltage shall be less in UP direction (approx. 10 V to 30 V). If this is not the case, change the value of the rotor time constant in P 67 step by step by 25% each. Perform setting when the motor runs at operating temperature (and not with extremely cold or hot motor). f) Check setting of speed controller once again. Set I-gain of controller to 0 ms and increase P-gain until the motor vibrates or hums. Now reduce P-gain to half value. Select I-gain approx. between 10 ms and 100 ms depending on overshooting of running characteristic. Pre-controlling of the speed controller through acceleration precontrol (P 21 und P 22) improves running performance. Check running performance with the car running at no-load, half load and full load. Use below table indicating standard data for values to be entered provided that : • Data on the name plate of the motor are incomplete or • The rated point indicated is not standard (indicated deliberately in case of single-speed, Pole-changing motors to comply with IA / Irated < 2.5). Rated speed Rotor time No-load current Motor type Cos (pi) [U/min] constant(Tr) (Id) Single speed, 0.75 ~ 0.85 1320 ~ 1400 40 ~ 150 ms 0.5 ~ 0.7 x Irat pole-changing motor Frequency inverter motor 0.85 ~ 0.90 1460 250 ~ 400 ms 0.4 x Irat Standard motor 0.8 1450 200 ~ 400 ms 0.5 x Irat Values to be entered 7.2.3 Settings for synchronous motors Parameter P62 (rated motor speed) and P97 (number of pole pairs) to be entered for synchronous motor. Current controller is easy to adapt to motor through P 80~83 (auto-tuning) 7.2.4 Setting into operation Continue in accordance with the instructions in chapter 4, 5 and 6.
51
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8. ANNEX 8.1 Declaration of Conformity
52
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
53
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
54
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8.2 Parameter setting The parameters available for the respective operating modes are marked with S for synchronous or A for asynchronous versions. Operating mode exists, i.e. parameters marked F, only valid if "third-party" motor is selected. The controller which can be supported in CPIK is only TAC50K, TCM and TIC but CPIK cannot support LS2, LS3 and DCP function. Para.
Short description or text displayed on panel
No.
Parameters present for operating modes Parallel CAN interface interface TAC50K
Default value
TCM
TIC
SA
SA
500ms
SA
SA
700ms
P0
Reference start deceleration
P1
Brake application time
SA
P2
Full scale motor speed
SA
P3
Direction of rotation
SA
SA
SA
Inverted/ Not inverted
P4
Control direction
A
A
A
Inverted/ Not inverted
P5
P gain (speed controller)
SA
SA
SA
10.0
P6
I gain (speed controller)
SA
SA
SA
20 ms
P7
Language selection
SA
SA
SA
English
P8
Communication
SA
SA
SA
(0)
P10
Analog output MP42A
SA
SA
SA
(0)
P11
Analog output MP43A
SA
SA
SA
(0)
P13
Gear ratio
SA
SA
SA
35.0
P14
Traction sheave diameter
SA
SA
SA
450 mm
P15
Suspension
SA
SA
SA
1
P16
Run speed V_max
SA
P17
N rat. computed
SA
SA
105.0 1/ min
P18
Operating point for N=0 speed
SA
SA
10.0 1/ min
P19
Jerk
SA
0.80 m/ s3
P20
Acceleration
SA
0.70 m/ s2
P21
Acceleration pre-control
SA
SA
Off / On
P22
Acceleration pre-control value
SA
SA
+100%
P23
Leveling speed V0
SA
0.03m/ s
P24
Inspection speed Vi
SA
0.30m/ s
P25
Rated speed VN
SA
1.0m/ s
P26
Intermediate speed V2
SA
0.30m/ s
P27
Intermediate speed VN2
SA
0.30m/ s
P37
Operating point V < 0.3m/ s
SA
0.30m/ s
P38
Short-run device
SA
Off / On
P39
Correction short-run distance
SA
± 0.0 cm
P40
Motor type
SA
DTE(DKE)
SA
SA
S:100, A:1500rpm
SA
1.00 m/ s
Continue next page
55
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
Para. No.
Short description or text displayed on panel
8. ANNEX
Parameters present for operating modes Parallel CAN interface interface TAC50K
TCM
Default value
TIC
P44
Speed threshold PROGOUT
SA
V < 0.0
P45
Output PROGOUT
SA
V < P44
P46
Output PROGOUT1
SA
motor overtemp.
P47
Output V < 0.3 [ m/ s]
SA
V < 0.3 [ m/ s]
P48
Input PROGANA
SA
emergency 220V
P49
Input PROGIN
SA
load weighing FM
P50
Load pre-setting
SA
SA
SA
Off / On
P51
Actual load measuring value
SA
SA
SA
+ 0%
P53
Adopt load current
SA
SA
SA
000.0A
P54
Load specification gain
SA
SA
SA
+65.0%
P55
Gain position controller
S
S
S
+65.0%
P60
Rated motor frequency
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P61
Rated motor voltage
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P62
Rated motor speed
SAF
SAF
SAF
Modernization
P63
Rated motor current
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P64
Motor cos (phi)
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P65
Rotor time constant computed
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P66
No-load current computed
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P67
Reference rotor time constant
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P68
Reference no-load current
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P76
Actual motor voltage
AF
AF
AF
Modernization
P80
Auto- tuning
SAF
SAF
SAF
Modernization
P81
Comp. values from auto- tuning
SAF
SAF
SAF
Modernization
P82
Manual change current controller
SAF
SAF
SAF
Modernization
P83
Manual change current controller
SAF
SAF
SAF
Modernization
P86
Adjusting encoder
S
S
S
P92
DC link voltage
SA
SA
SA
0.0 V
P96
Encoder pulse number
SA
SA
SA
1024
P97
motor pole pairs
SAF
SAF
SAF
P98
Id reduced
AF
AF
AF
P124
Speed ref. avg. filter
SA
P150
brake on/ off for test
SA
SA
SA
P160
Max. current
SA
SA
SA
P205
P gain (load compensation)
SA
hidden
P206
I gain (load compensation)
SA
hidden
56
100 %
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8.3 Monitoring Parameter Para. No.
Short description or text displayed on panel
Parameters present for operating modes Parallel CAN interface interface TAC50K
TCM
TIC
P100
Motor speed
SA
SA
SA
P101
Actual speed
SA
SA
SA
P102
Motor frequency
SA
SA
P103
Binary inputs
SA
P104
Binary outputs
SA
P105
Encoder pulse number
SA
SA
SA
P106
Reference value
SA
SA
SA
P107
Load current
SA
SA
SA
P110
Switching sequence index
SA
SA
SA
P111
SV computed
SA
P112
SV measured
SA
P113
Distance covered
SA
P116
DC link voltage
SA
SA
SA
P117
PWM operating frequency
SA
SA
SA
P118
Absolute encoder position
S
S
S
P120
System information
SA
SA
SA
P122
CAN- Inputs
SA
P123
CAN- Outputs
SA
57
Default value
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8.4 Error description LCD display Control voltage ON Watchdog error SMR to TCM (only with TCM control) No SMR present
Description
Extra info
Time error in program sequence of C167 processor
R Number of errors
Collective fault message to TCM No collective fault message present Undefined value at AD-channel 14 and 15
EEPROM error
1) Wrong EEPROM cross sum 2) Error in EPROM data set
Over-temperature heat sink
Module temperature over 90 °C
Error stack deleted
Motor PTC thermistor tripped
R
Error deleted message
R
1) Check connections to sensor at motor 2) Measure using ohmmeter
H and DC link R H and DC link delayed CAN: R TIC: H and DC link delayed
Check connections to sensor at heat sink
Error stack was deleted
None
DC link voltage less than 410 V
Actual motor current at error tripping
DC link over-voltage
DC link voltage is greater than 760 V
Actual motor current at error tripping
PDPINT tripped by following errors: 1) Over-current 2) Monitoring saturation voltage of power device 3) Over-voltage DC link 4) Supply voltage error
Overcurrent
Hardware suppressor overcurrent
DSP timeout
Time error in program sequence of F240
DSP reset (event message)
Varying error causes
Actual motor current at error tripping
DC link under-voltage
DSP current controller
R
Electronics does not recognized connected power part of inverter. Check ribbon cable X934 for correct fastening. Exchange complete device. Load default values; set installation dependent parameters; exchange TMI2 board, if unsuccessful.
Actual motor current at error tripping
Power Drive Protection (event message) PDPINT
Exchange TMI2 board, EEPRO
CPIK type is displayed = 0; EPROM 0; EEPROM Actual motor current at error tripping
1) Motor current sum not zero 2) Time error in program sequence of F240 3) Encoder of synchronous machine is defective
Earth Fault
React
Inverter switched on for the first time
No power part recognized
Over-temperature motor
Causes, remedy or notes
circuit
1) H 2) Reset F240
1) Check 3-phase power input 2) Compare DC link voltage displayed at PEP and measuring 3) Exchange device 1) Check chopper resistor 2) Compare DC link voltage displayed at PEP and measuring 3) Exchange device
H and DC link
H and DC link
1) see error “over-current” 2) Power module in CPIK device defective; exchange 3) see error “DC link over-voltage” 4) see error “±15V under-voltage”
H for 10sec after 5 x PDPINT DSP reset
Does error occur in operating phase, “driving” with “empty car up” or “fully loaded car down” or in both case? Measure motor current: check offset load: car clamped in rails? 1) Sin/cos encoder (EnDat) not connected 2) Error message for defective components
recognized
F240 stopped operation of “current controller” program F240 performed reset caused by 1) command given by C167 processor
1) Perform isolation test at motor windings 2) Exchange TMI2 board 3) Exchange synchronous encoder
Actual motor speed at error tripping 128 = Power ON 16 = Illegal address
Program does not work properly: EMC failures Event message output as error message annex.
58
H and DC link DSP reset H DSP reset H DSP reset R
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX (software reset) 2) F240 automatically reset (program failure in F240)
±15V undervoltage or DC link > 850V Vist unequal Vsoll ±10% (not monitored for CPIK with CAN bus) CAN-error Encoder failure (with synchronous machines only)
4 = Software reset 2 = Watchdog
Power supply error or DC link voltage error
Actual motor speed at error tripping
1) Measure supply voltage at TMI2 board; 15V, 5V, 24V 2) Check reference module MAX675CSA808 3) Chopper module, check braking resistor 4) Compare DC link voltage displayed at P116 and actual value using voltmeter
H and DC link DSP reset
Monitoring reference-actual speed values, (“hose error”)
Actual motor speed at error tripping
Error output with CPIK devices not connected to CAN bus only
H
a) Control does not respond to handshake telegram b) Control does not transmit reference value telegrams (CPIK with CAN only)
= 0 (case a)) = 1 (case b))
1) Check wiring of CAN bus connection 2) load "default values" in CPIK device
H
1) Check motor connection lines 2) Adjust pulse encoder (with “hidden P86”)
H
Pulse encoder “EnDat”
Flag set (with CPIK with CAN bus only)
Marking initiated from TCM control through CAN telegram
Flag No. from error stack of TCM control
Flag from TCM control
R
Chopper with pulses disabled
Degree of DC link voltage increase causes chopper connection
DC LINK voltage at error tripping
DC link protection against temporary over-voltage; chopper disconnected again
R
Device size changed
Changed coding resistance recognized with device ON
Extra info important for software development only
Loose contact, 5V reference voltage faulty, A/D conversion faulty. Check ribbon cable X934 for correct fastening. Device out of service until device size recognized during switching on, is recognized again. Perform reset: switching ON/OFF
Standby supply operation active
Standby supply operation is activated. (No further entry in error stack when standby supply operation is ended.)
Extra info relevant for software development only
PWM frequency switched to 4kHz. Lower threshold for DC LINK undervoltage. Energy regeneration unit remains switched off.
120% rated speed exceeded
Actual motor speed at error tripping
P106: check reference value, P101: check actual speed
During DC link charge UDC LINK repeatedly not increased above 200V within 200 ms.
Actual voltage tripping
Short circuit DC link, charging resistor defective; power voltage missing?
Overspeed DC LINK > 200V not reached
DC at
LINK error
Unintended movement a) Re-alien EnDat encoder a) EnDat encoder miss aliened Speed in RPM b) Check controller and brake b) moving without speed command Abbreviations in “response” part (resp.): CAN: CAN Bus operation TIC: Operation with TIC board R: Registration only H: Stop H and DC link: Stop and DC link off H and DC link delayed: Stop and DC link off at nearest stop or after 30 sec
Speed Monitor
59
Error recognized in standstill phase only.
H
H
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8.5 Extra information Power Drive Protection (PDPINT) The extra information displayed must be split up in binary. The meaning of each bit is defined individually. Example: extra info = 402 Decimal
Conversion
Binary number
number
2^8
2^7
2^6
2^5
2^4
2^3
2^2
2^1
2^0
402
256
128
0
0
16
0
0
2
0
110010010
402-256-128-16-2=0. This means that bits 2^8, 2^7, 2^4, 2^1 are set. The software monitoring recognized over-voltage DC link and F240 properly responded that “pulse enable” is “initiated". Furthermore it is clear that this happened with current controller and PWM active. PDPINT cause: Bit number
Binary code
Error description
Bit 2^0=
1
00 0000 0001
SC (from power module)
Bit 2^1=
2
00 0000 0010
F240 signals PDPINT
Bit 2^2=
4
00 0000 0100
Error with supply voltage (24V,-15V or +15V)
Bit 2^3=
8
00 0000 1000
Error with supply voltage +15V
Bit 2^4= 16
00 0001 0000
DC link over-voltage is recognizes by Software
Bit 2^5= 32
00 0010 0000
DC link over-voltage is recognizes by Hardware
Bit 2^6= 64
00 0100 0000
KS over-current (hardware recognition)
Further information: Bit number
Binary code
Bit 2^7=128
00 1000 0000
Bit 2^7=128
00 1000 0000
Bit 2^8=256
01 0000 0000
Bit 2^9=512
10 0000 0000
Error description PDPINT occurred with PWM Off (red LED H99 Off) It is available EPROM version under V17.x and V7.x PDPINT occurred with PWM On (red LED H99 On) It is available EPROM version over V18.x and V8.x PDPINT occurred with current controller ON F240 refuses PWM (LED H99 remains OFF despite pulse enable) It is available EPROM version over V18.x and V8.x
60
OPERATING MANUAL
8. ANNEX
8.6 Extra info for “run contactor problems” Regenerative devices have odd and the remaining devices even error numbers. - Prior to switching on, the contactor contacts are checked for sticking. No.
Input (connector)
possible cause
2
X91/2 (RK1)
K06 does not go off
3
X91/2 (RK1)
K01 does not go off
4
X91/3 (RK2)
K06.1 does not go off
5
X91/3 (RK2)
K01.1 and K06 does not go off ---almost impossible! (and K06.1 as a result of K01.1)
6
RK1 and RK2
K06.1 and K06 do not go off
7
RK1 and RK2
K01.1, K01, K06.1 and K06 do not go off
Non-recurring error entry for error numbers 2...7; new disconnection attempts after 1s
- Relay K1 or K2 switched on, wait for acknowledge RK1: No.
Input (connector)
possible cause
10
K06 does not go on. Safety circuit (X517) interrupted?
11
K01 does not go on. Safety circuit (X517) interrupted?
14
RK2
K06.1 instead of K06 ON.
15
RK2
K01.1 instead of K01 ON
6
RK1 and RK2
K06.1 and K06 ON; K06 expected only
7
RK1 and RK2
K01.1, K01, K06.1 and K06 ON; K06 expected only
Non-recurring stack entry for error numbers 10...17; Connection attempts through FOR(X94/3) and FUR(X94/4) after 1s.
-Relay K3 switched on, wait for acknowledge RK2: No.
Input (connector)
possible cause
20
K06 and K06.1 OFF. Safety circuit (X517) interrupted?
21
K01 and K01.1 OFF. Safety circuit (X517) interrupted?
22
RK1
K06 ON; K06 and K06.1 expected
23
RK1
K01 ON, but K01.1 or K06.1 or K06 not ON.
Non-recurring stack entry for error numbers 20...23 and waiting until it works!
61
8.7 Connection diagram
62
8.7 Connection diagram
63
8.7 Connection diagram
64
8.7 Connection diagram
65
8.7 Connection diagram
66
8.7 Connection diagram
67
8.7 Connection diagram
68
8.7 Connection diagram
69
8.7 Connection diagram
70
8.8 How to use the Hyper-terminal CPIK series have two methods for parameter management a. management by Parameter Entry Panel b. management by Hyper terminal in computer This appendix explains how to manage the Parameter in CPIK using Hyper-terminal.
8.8.1 Installation of Hyper-terminal File name: htpe63.exe Set communication port RS-232C or USB port in box of Connect using Baud rate : 9600 Data bit :8 Parity bit : no Stop bit :1 Flow control : no 8.8.2 HELP menu and instructing character Press “H”, all available instructors will shows in HELP menu and press “R”, available parameter range shows.
8.8.3 Parameter changing and saving Typing parameter number and enter key, and typing the new value like as below picture. After the value changing finish, all parameter is saved by press the “S”.
71
8.8.4 Showing Fault history Fault history shows by press “F” and number of Fault can store 200 items in Fault stack
Message of “Control voltage on” means registered at Power On.
8.8.5 Important notice All information in Hyper-terminal window can store as text file, this text file will use usefully as analysis of CPIK”s status and to find cause of fault. Some parameter is hidden parameter in order to edit conveniently. To appear the hidden parameter, it must enter the password. Press “shift” and “#” key in the same time: ># Enter Password : > GEHEIM
72
8.9 ARD operation with German CPI-xx & CPI-xxR This only use for ARD operation with German CPI series included Regenerative Inverter.
Description of changes concerning Tac50K: The CAN-Bit "self test" had no function in the past. Now it is renamed to "fl_ups_op1" after switching on this Bit, an event entry is generated, that indicates that emergency power supply was activated. The new Parameter P151 shows "on" while ARD operation. New Parameters P152...159 will define the behavior of the Drive in case of ARD operation P152 PWM Frequency in case of ARD operation If P152 = On, PWM will be 4kHz in Motor operation and 10kHz in generator operation. P153 Flux current controller On/Off in case of ARD operation (only asynchronous version) P153 ENDAT-Encoder watches Off in case of ARD operation (only synchronous version) P154 in case of "ARD operation" reduce regenerative power by increasing Flux current. This helps, if the emergency power supply can not take regenerative power. P155 Regenerative unit off while ARD operation (this Parameter is not visible with CPI 150R and 300R) P156 Ignore Load measuring device while ARD operation P158 Reduced DC-Link voltage while ARD operation P159 DC-Link under voltage level in case " ARD operation and P158 = On" The name of the new Version is: TMI V5.7e / 17.07.09 for the synchronous motor TMI V15.7e / 17.07.09 for the asynchronous motor. The latest Flash-Software-Version for all CPIs is F080211.
73
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. Headquarter and overseas sales 55-30, Oryu-dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, 152-100 Korea Tel.: +82 2 2610 7534, 7790 Fax: +82 2 2610 7700 www.thyssenkrupp-elevator.co.kr DEA-09050, Issue July 2009
74
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 1/386
Details for change in design Title: producing D2SB and changing Group connection with Ethernet • From July in 2008, it became reducing production of IBBC, and it became expanding production of CPUA. Comparing with 186C, CPUA have taken a favorable criticism from users in the reason about improvement of excellent IMS connecting ability and various kinds of capacities. However, increasing application of CPUA, a problem is founded, that is break off of Group communication. if it is used Group communication with a CAN system, break off is occurred. Although it was stopped UL2919 cable application have applied in 186C and it became applying 3105A of BELDEN encouraged by TKEUS, it was not improved. As a result, after this point, it is determined that all Group Communication will use not CAN mode but Ethernet Part. This decision is based upon different matters verified in actual scene. •To apply Ethernet mode, it has to be connected Data inputted/ outputted from each CPUA with one another by using Ethernet Switch. Only in case of 2CAR, because it has 2 units of a terminal, it has to be connected directly to the CPUA of CAR 1 and CAR 2 with Cross Cable(marked with blue color) without applying Ethernet Switch which is relatively expensive. •Seeing recent required matters from customers (mainly house constructions in the country), in case of above 2-CAR, if a customer requires, it is expected to be separated instantly from Group with an individual switch sign(SPLX) or Monitoring System(CRT). In the meantime, in case of using CAN as for Group communication, it is separated by a point of contact on the exterior Relay, but in the case of using UTP Cable, it is unreasonable to stop connecting using a exterior relay and so it is produced that PCA named "D2SB". D2SB PCB can be connected and separated from Hall communication lines among Controllers and Ethernet signs needed for connection to Group. At separation of Hall communication lines, the terminal resistance (120ohm) is automatically connected to the No point of contact through J1. •To connect Group, it has to connected that Part in Ethernet Switch and Direct UTP Cable to each CON5 of CPUA. Ethernet Switch will supply G24, P24G and will use 5 Part type. Also, one of matters recently issued in several actual scenes is a problem about Group source Drop. For example, when a power source of 2 elevators is intercepted to economize electric power in 4CAR actual scenes, it is supplied to P24G, is a common line for supplying power source, by SMPS of remaining 2 elevators, in this case, all the power has intercepted because of overload of power source for supplying. Besides, in case of rising lifting road and there is a lantern or a button in establishment, it is prescribed to solve a problem of power source Drop. •All above 2CAR system is applied CTCR now. CTCR has a part of a Repeater as a CAN to CAN Repeater, and also makes dealing a terminal simple. But we determined that CTCR would not be applied to 2-CAR in TK-50G Flat type developed this time. Because the height of a story is relatively low and it would be right if a terminal is held at the lowest layer of 1CAR and 2CAR. Only in when there is a Rear Door, CNHC2 of IOC become a terminal.
1. D2SB PCB D2SB is the abbreviation for Double to Simplex Board. It is applied only when there is an option for 1CAR automatic separation, and in case fo 2-CAR, it is attached only to the number 1 appliance, and in case of Group, it is attached to the all appliances. The composition is following. PCB 사이즈: 80*70(an interval for attached holes: 70*60)
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 2/386 contactor
PIN
CON 1
1-8
CON 2
1-8
Sign
caption Connecting UTP Direct cable fo CON5 of CPUA
2-CAR: Connecting UTP Cross cable with CAR2 CPUA Group: Connecting UTP Direct cable with Ethernet Switch 2-CAR: Connecting by CNLCI of IOC and do not exceed over 300mm of length. CON 3
1-3
CAN Group: Connect to CTCR communication input.
5
D2S
be connected to CN2-A5 of IOC and controlled by CRT or input of SPLX sign. 2-CAR: Connecting with CAR2 IOC CNLC1
CON 4
1-3 Group: Connecting with HC1H/HC1L/SHHC1 of GWRT
CON 5
1
P24G
2
-
of Relay Coil + suppling power source
J1
Jumper to all middle appliances except the final appliance of number 1 appliance
2. Additional composition components in Group To reinforce Hall power source and Group composition applied Ethernet, Components are added as following. SMPS composed additionally is for the situation when power source of 2 to 3 controllers are intercepted among many in Group system to reduce the cost price at the structure side, and if it is occurred, P24G power source enable all halls PCB(HN) running sufficiently. So TK-50L makes power source of SMPS running despite of interception of Min Switch, and TK-50G/M adds another SMPS according to Table below. This is supplied Power of illumination power source and it has to be constructed to be intercepted by another interceptor(CBG) Circuit Breaker(6A), Ethernet Switch(5-Part) have to be attached to the appliances listed below. CAR CB, SMPS, Switch have to be attached to each relevant appliance. quantity/Group 3CAR-5CAR
#1
6CAR-8CAR
#1
#5
9CR-11CAR
#1
#5
#8
12CAR-14CAR
#1
#5
#8
#11
15CAR-16CAR
#1
#5
#8
#11
#14
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 3/386
A way of allotting Ethernet Switch Part according to quantity of CAR
3. A counterplan for voltage Drop of an elevator for high rise building It is coming to rise a serious problem that voltage drop among floors because of consumption of electricity like as Lantern, button in establishments or because the elevator is for high floors. Actually, in the case when there are buttons in the establishment or lanterns, it is reported that voltage drop of about 1V per 10 floors are occurred. To create normal strength of light of Lantern, it is needed power source at least 20V. At early production of TAC-50K, it is applied 24V cable only to 0.75 ². However, rising height of a floor and applying capacities of Lantern and button in establishments, it became a problem that luminous intensity of Lantern by voltage Drop. it is the Voltage Drop by self resistance of electric wire in lifting roads. An applying standard for Cable in lifting roads now is. 1) 1)Separate Cable is applied to every floor of 20th. 2) When Hall Lantern is not applied, 1.5m² is used to which is under 40 floors and 2.5m² is added to which is over 41 floors 3) When Hall Lantern is applied, 2.5 m² is applied. This standard, according to table below, can applied to 60 floors at in-applied, and to 70 floors at Lantern-applied. It is satisfied with an alteration of regulations in arrangement of electric wires(at 27th on November in 2008) for lifting routes to 120 floors because, recently, SMPS with 26V is applying. The table below is made out on standard like next. Refer it. • It is divided in two kinds of 24V applied and 26V applied to SMPS, and is respectively considered 1.7V for Diode Drop. • Cable is calculated in 3 kinds of each 0.75, 1.5, 2.5 and voltage drop for each is calculated with each resistance of M for each 0.026, 0.0195, 0.00798. • Voltage value for maximum numbers of floors standardizes minimum floor and each Node does not excess over 20 units as maximum. • It is only attached B=Button and each B+L means button+ Lantern, B+L+C means Button+Lantern+ Butten in establishment and each flow of ecetricity for consuming is 40mA, 80mA, 92mA for each. • It is marked with green for a floor over 20V of minimum voltage. Refer in selection for thickness of an electric wire for a lifting route after this.
0.75mm², 1.5mm² 2.5mm² 24V It corresponds to (TK-50G,TK-50M/S) Node Maximufloor numbers
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 4/386
26V
It corresponds to (TK-50L, TK-50G integrate type, TK-50G Flat type)
1) 2-CAR Operation (normal)-CPUA Group communication of 2-CAR has to be applied Cross over Cable (blue color).
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 5/386
This regulation, is not applied CTCR in 2-CAR, is applied only to Flat type now. 2) 2-CAR Operation (automatic separation) _CPUA Group communication of 2-CAR has to be applied Cross over Cable (blue color).
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 6/386
It is a table for additional arrangement when it is not applied at production. Hall separation is used as it is of existing circuit. 1 100444285 UTP Direct cable; 1M 1 unit 2
100308511
UTP Cross over cable; 5M
1 unit
3
100487152
D2SB
1 unit
4
It is additionally needed that D2S control line 1M(Blue, 0.5m²) is not defined as Part, P24G supplying Cable 1M(Red, 0.5), BLZ 5.08 2P, D2SB for adhesion Support 4 units.
3) Group Operation (normal)_CPUA
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 7/386
Each appliance has to be connected Hall communication lines and common sign with GWRT. It in unnecessary connecting GPSC, GNSC, GSHC because Group Communication use Ethernet Ethernet Switch would basically use 5-Port type and it has to be adhered being based upon regulations of . It is an additional arrangement table for when it is not applied at production. 1 100292316 Ethernet Switch(Hub) Refer table 2 2 100444286 UTP Direct cable;5M Car numbers + (At addition of Hub, add arrangement 100444288) 3 1M of P24G is not defined as Part, G24 supplying Cable for each(Red(0.5m²), Black(0.5m²)) 4) Group Operation (Automatic separation) _CPUA
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 8/386
Each appliance has to be connected Hall communication line and common sign with GWRT. It is unnecessary connecting GPSC, GNSC, GSHC because Group Communication use Ethernet. Ethernet Switch will use 5-Port type and it has to be adhered being based upon regulations in In D2SB, tt has to be connected control sign D2S and P24G. It is additional arrangement table when it is not applied at production 1 100292318 Ethernet Switch(Hub) Refer table 2 2 100444285 UTP Direct cable; 1M Car number 3 100444286 UTP Direct cable; 5M Car number + (At addition of Hub, Add arrange for 100444288(10M)) 4 100487152 D2SB 1 unit(4 units of support for Panel adhesion) 5 1M of P24G for supplying power source of Switch, G24 supplying Cable for each(0.5m²), Black(0.6m²), D2S control line 1M(Blue, 0.5m²), P29G supplying Cable 1M(Red, 0.5), BLZ 5.08 2P 5) Alteration of load appliances TK-50L is a load appliance has applied with supplying LVDT sensor from TKEUS. This is expensive because it is composed of unnecessary Ass’y. To improve this, it is replaced form of Magnetic Sensor is similar to thing applied to TKAW MC1. The length of Cable is 10M. Magnetic Sensor is established in machine room as usual. Machinery structure of this is a form of decreasing Gap as growing in imposing of load, and it has to be maintained interval from 7 to 14mm between it and Plate. In Basic concept for design, VO-GND of CLW-3A would be 3.5V when the interval is about 12.5mm. It would be right A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 9/386
that 3.5V of voltage in VO-GND at No-load as before. Although the value at Full-Load is determined by an invariable of Spring and capacity of CAR, it would usually have displacement as about 3mm.
5-1) Magnetic Sensor This is KJ14-M30MN80-ANU-F2 of Pulsotronic and main Spec of it is following.
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 10/386
5-2) CLW-3A can be applied to both Magnetic sensor and Potential Meter used mainly to MRL. For this, JP7 has to be connected by 1-2(Potential), 2-3(Magnetic) and input sing for each has to be put in. The difference between V2.0 and V1.0 PCB is that J1 other than sign input circuit of Magnetic sensor is deleted so this makes it do not be connected to terminus resistance.
5-2) Structure of Machine
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
DOC No. : TCA – 09016 Date : Apr 1, 2010 Page : 11/386
A3-100-06(0) A4(210*297mm)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 1/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History It can be confirmed that version/revision of the 186C machinery program by the order “VER” in Remote-fast of IMS.
GENERIC PROGRAM VERSION HISTORY TABLE Registration date: Revision
main contents
Origin(Car/Group/OS) 2006-03-14:v1p00
detection to load of LWx, X11=2, Runbug, addition of announcement equipments of TVA.
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2006-04-14: v1p01a
Auto-tuning
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3
2006-05-19: v1p01b
supplement of function of first,second firefighting, add PI STAT3.
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2006-07-08: v1p01c
development of TAC50K-MRL(EN81 Safety circuit, DZEC, IRTL, MOV/PUP/PDP, DZ)
2006-07-08: v1p01d
supplement of open in Brake before start of Car(complete v1.01g)
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2006-09-13: v1p01g
Prohibition on operation of Hallcall button lamp at INS, deletion of SE stuck, operation of FAN at driving, Second
firefighting alarm.
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3
2006-09-19: v1p01g(1)
supplement about break down at input of power in INS
2006-09-19: v1p01g(2)
supplement of error(1657) of rationality of MRL Brake contactor(Hansung university.)
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2006-11-24: v1p01h
addition of function of SDT/SDB to substitute onETSD vane, Etc
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2007-01-05: v1p01h(1)
arrrow indicating direction and floor at INSdriving(※ Operation to scenes by v1.02 for CN/HN before v28)
V4R4/V4R5/V4R3 2007-02-09: v1p01h(2) v1.01h(2))
developement of Housing construction CRT program (※ Application of CN/HN program above v28 to those from
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
2007-02-23: v1p01J
penetration, application of Anti-Nuisance, 186-1A/2A
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-02-28: v1p01K
fluorescent light of broken down-Car, application of function of 2-Step Speed
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-03-09: v1p01K(1)
condition of D2S-CRT
2007-03-28 v1p01K(2)
remote call in establishment, no apply FSCDB at function of firec ontrol, first and second of independent firefighting
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
driving, HML(=CBS)
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
2007-04-27 v1p01K(3)
Stop to near floor at break down of INSI/FSLMI, BSL, alteration of condition of FALI, Trapped In Car, alter output of
compensation of load, DD V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-04-27 v1p01K(4)
for TEST; prohibition on applying to scenes
2007-04-27 v1p01K(5)
for TEST; prohibition on applying to scenes
2007-05-18 v1p01K(6)
Compensation for Re-level torque and management to supple for KT-Gwanghwamun /SK-Yeoksam-dong
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-05-28 v1p01K(7)
alteration of condition of break down announcement(when the door is opened with break down)
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-04-27 v1p01K(8)
(applications for parts of scenes)
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-06-28 v1p03
addition of Sabbath-day, alteration of Option(Z26
Z28, O45
O46), alteration of Er.Code(1695/1696
1702/1703)
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-07-10 v1p03A
supplement of return after operation of CSTO relay , supplement for wrong operation of Chapter
2007-07-11 v1p03B
supplement of CRT Call lockout, supplement of estimation of
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
Er.1003
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-08-06 v1p03C
alteration of operation of CSTO of KS firefighting driving, supplement of operation of earthquake control
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-08-17 v1p03D
addition of function related to EN81, Er. 2004/1517, Er. supplement of 1656/1653, supplement of UIM condition at return of
power V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
1
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 2/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
※ v1p03D can be applied when a program of CPIK (CPIR) is v7.1D and v17.1D. (2007-08-21) 2007-08-22
v1p03E
deletion of function of 'monitoring of temperature' related to EN81
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-08-28
v1p03F
adjustment to time of O35, re-addition of ‘monitoring’ – addition of O50, supplement for Rope gripper
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2007-09-11 v1p03G
supplement for Rope gripper(M53), supplement for function to examine speed of SDT/SDB
2007-09-21 v1p03H
function of ARD, open-door of INS, return to first firefighting at stop after second fire fighting, application of ST flash memory
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3
V5R1/V4R5/V4R3 2008-01-18
v1p03J
alteration of CPIR SAF3, monitoring over speed of INS, BS fireman, point of time for announcement of firefighting driving,
supplement of Error 1028 V5R1/V4R5/V5R1 2008-01-18 v2p01
handicapped, traffic driving, VIP
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-04-08 v2p01B CPIR interface.
Addition of sign 'DTFR' for cancellation of permanent break down. Addition of condition i/o of CPDO/CPDOI, MROT/ MROTI,
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1
2008-04-15 v2p01C
improvement of function of monitoring of ‘operation of opening and closing of Door’ and ‘condition of DLB/DLT’.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-04-30 v2p01D
manage to DLB/DLT i/o filtering, adjust point of the time for announcement.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-05-21
v2p01E
2008-05-29 v2p01F
adjustment of interface for Monitoring of PC that are kinds of TCM PUBEL
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1
addition of standard compliance.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-06-20 v2p01G
output sign of ENEP.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-06-20 v2p01H-DUQUE
set up Generic for scenes un-standardized allowing opening of door at the same time on penetrate floor
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-07-05
v2p01J
operation of condition of DCL/DOL in second firefighting, delete function of closing door by
car-call button at IDN driving.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-08-22 v2p01K
alteration of DZEC control, CTCM board interface, CRT function (IND, FDBZ, quietness at night), EMCBI, FSH1K, X25
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-10-14 v2p01K-1
supplement of ARD function, add function of detecting rescue hole of car(MLS1).
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-11-12 v2p01K-2
addition of announcement for opening and closing of door
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-11-28 v2p01K-3
Addition of sign of input (MRDO) and output (MRDOI) detecting opening door in machinery room.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-12-09 v2p01K-4
Addition of supplement of control of door zone bypass.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-12-12 v2p01K-5
Rapid update for information of monitor of interface.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2008-12-16 v2p01M
Prohibition on handicapped car-call service at driving of KS first firefighting driving .
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2009-01-09
v2p01P
BC-CARD building cardkey interface.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2009-02-23 v2p01Q
addition of examination of initially stored value of TAC50K Adjustment.
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2009-03-04 v2p01R
addition of ways for Hall call lock out(SHINSEGAE),add Rear VIP, addition of sing of IO1/2/3
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 2009-04-01 v2p01S
adjustment of priority order of TVA announcement (supplement of announcement for Overload)
2009-08-25
supplement of PUBEL Hoistway Interlock Monitoring, sorting input of DTOK, addition of condition for output of FALI
v2p01T
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1
V5R1/V0R23N/V5R1 -♪-
2
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
1.
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 3/40
2006-03-14:v1p00 1) Addition of a program to send load value composed of third steps to CPI by using Switch detecting Car load -
Transmittance of LWA(=8WLS), transmittance of load value as 0%(-1024) when LWB(=3WLS) does not operate.
-
Transmittance of load value as 50%(0) when LWA(=8WLS) operate.
-
Transmittance of load value as 100%(+1024) when both of LWA(=8WLS), LWB(=3WLS) operate .
Necessary items for set up: 3
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History a.
M91=0, M98=1 of 186C
b.
P50=ON of CPIK
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 4/40
2) Addition of Option “X11=02” setting up form of output in Arrow of Position Indicator 3) Addition of Runbug function: In early set up, RUNBUG is made to operate INS driving even without COP board. 4) Addition of interface and development of announcement equipment (TVA1A) for TAC50K. 5) Inclusion of a program for TEST of first.Second firefighting. ※ completion of application to basic functions except function of first.second firefighting driving. 2.
2006-04-14: v1p01a 1) Supplement of problems that 8020 error is occurred during operation of Auto-tuning in CPIK. Way: “M16=0”, It is possible to adjust Auto tuning and motor encoder offset by making "ON of INRB" in IOC board 2) Adjustment to errors of floor announcement in TVA1A equipments for announcement.
3.
2006-05-19: v1p01b 1) Alteration into use sensor detecting load with selection between Discrete IO and CLW according to sorts of DisTAC50K. a. Separate management of applying file for sorts of machine. b. Confirmation of Revision: confirmation by VER order in IMS. 2) Completion of alteration on problems with inability in start of Car at first and second firefighting driving (10-May-2005.) 3) Completion of alteration on un-operated CSTO at fire control driving (18-May-2006.) 4) Solution for problems with inability in FAN OFF first and second firefighting driving (19-May-2006.) 5) Addition of STAT3 of condition Lamp. (Possible to three of STAT1. STAT2. STAT3 now) Items for set up: Z21, Z22, Z24
※ refer “condition Lamp -v00.doc of TAC50K set up-PI”
) See set up: to indicate "examination" on condition lamp3: Make it output when BIT1 and BIT3 BIT5 is set. Input Z24-41 because set up value is 1(00000001)+8(00001000)+32(00100000). Z21=16(emergency), Z22=4(diversion), Z24=41(examination) Meaning of BIT Bit0: Parking Bit1: Overload Bit2: Independent or ATT Bit3: break down Bit4: fire (first and second firefighting) Bit5: Inspection or Door Disconnect Bit6: 80% bypass Bit7: Automatic (it is output if condition does not belong to above. Only, except case of Over load and when it is 80%) ※ DD condition is added at 24th on April in 2007. -
4.
2006-07-08: v1p01c 1) Addition of functions related to development of sorts of MRL based upon sorts of TAC50K. -
Addition of EN81 Safety circuit. Adding of a program for control.
-
Addition of function and IRTL (Ins. Running Top Limit) IO. 4
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History -
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 5/40
Addition of MOV/PUP/PDN/DZ. (control part and IOC Lamps)
MOV twinkles when a movement of pulse input in Governor encoder. 2) Transmittance of Overload data through CN. (Use when there is no condition lamp in COP.) ※ It is possible when TLPI-2A or TSPI-2A is applied.
5.
2006-07-08: v1p01d
※ It is first applied to social welfare center in Cheolsan-dong.
1) It is supplemented by an occurrence of a case when DZ1/DZ2 contactor, lead by operation of DZ1 and DZ2, does not established in Door zone. a.
At initially input of power and a turn into automatic from INS, DZC can normally operate to DZ1/2 by making contactor ON-OFF once.
It is came to have a low reliability because there is no feedback sign to detect
condition of operation.) b.
Supplement of Hardware: addition of a function and addition of feedback with signs of DZ1M / DZ2M in DZ1 and DZ2 contactor.
2) Deletion of conditions because Lamp is output during examination at state of 110%. 3) Improvement to state of Brake-open by opening Brake before receiving an opening sign from CPI : Management to delay of 600mS at brake-open. (it is possible to apply to other scenes for temporary TEST.) 4) Deletion of a function to confirm condition of a point of contact by making ROPE BRAKE into ON from OFF at stop. (in Bupyeong Calvary)
6.
Supplement of problems in scenes of v1p01e, v1p01f: BETA for TEST Reference: A material distributed (v1p01F) at 25 on August has a problem. Hoistway scan is occured.)
7.
2006-09-13: v1p01g 1) Solution to problem with inability of function of Hoistway scans in v1p01f. 2) Deletion of function of making lamp OFF in 3 seconds after when Hall call button is pushed in INS lamp. (HN program has also to be altered into V05 at the same time.) : INS, IND, Parking, application at break down. 3) Deletion of function of forced close-door after time appointed by D28 when SE (safety edge) is operated continuously. (It is required to set up D28=600) 4) Alteration from continuous operation of FAN in control part into operation only at driving.(operation only in 30 seconds after stop.) 5) Addition of a program to make buzzer ring in 3 seconds at start of a car in second firefighting driving. ※ Final application ROM(U4) of TVA2A is V1.3 now. 6) Completion of supplement of problem about Brake-open before receiving a sign of open-confirmation from CPI. (This revision has no forced delaying time to open-brake)
8.
2006-09-19: v1p01g(1) 1) Supplement of problems about break down occurred by DZ error when power turns to on from off in INS. 2) Inclusion of a thing for 1657 error TEST of Hansung university/University of seoul.
9.
2006-09-19: v1p01g(2) 5
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 6/40
1) Solution for 1657 error problem of Hansung university/University of seoul. a.
Cause: Noise is occurred in IO line because TAC50K control part and CPIK inverter box were separated in the distance.
b. Management: 1) delayed time for examining rationality of a control sign 2) management and supplement of chattering of relevant signs in a program. 3) Attachment multi layer 104 capacitor to between number 23 and number 20 in U6(BRKD andG24(=GND)) in IOC.
10. 2006-11-24: v1p01h 1) Addition of a function of Car landing chime. a. Registration of a sign - CUL (Car Up-direction Landing) - CDL (Car Down-direction Landing) b. Operation If a car is implanting in direction of up, CUL becomes to operate and a chime rings as ‘ding~’, if a car is implanting in direction of down, CDL becomes to operate and a chime rings as ‘ding~dong~’. c. Reference If there is announcement Equipments (TVA), chime is not necessary because they substitute a function of Car chime. 2) Relevant matters with the PI arrow: a. Content: supplement of problems that an arrow is reversed when there is a registered call in direction of opposite side at speed reduction of terminal floors. b.
Set up: X11=2
3) Alteration of IND function. IF it is set up as Z12=2, Car can be used with registering many of Calls and it is indicated PI arrow at driving. 4) Addition of a function of “monitoring speed of speed reduction at terminal floors” by using limit switch of SDT or SDB. ■ Way 1:In case of establishing ETSD vane (refer to existing manual) ■ Way 2: In case of establishing limit switch of SDB and SDT a. Registration of signs - SDB (file 9 rank 5, IOC CN2-A7) - SDT (file 9 rank 6, IOC CN2-B7)
※ Slowdown Speed Detection Bottom (=5LS) ※ Slowdown Speed Detection Top (=6LS)
b. Operation 1 (before alteration, v1p01h) If a car has a speed over 85% of regular speed (M52) at a point of time of passing a limit switch of terminal floors, make it be emergent stop. After this, do re-leveling and do normal operation continuously. c. Operation 2 (after alteration, supplement of v1p03G - 09-Sept-2007, Kim Chango) 6
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 7/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
- If a car has a speed over 91% of a regular speed (M52 value adjusted), it has emergently reduced speed at passing switch of SDT in highest floor and does re-leveling to door zone and moves to the lowest floor with low speed again and recovers position data (losted) and return to automatic driving. - If a car detects wrong speed at a point of SDB in lowest floor, it drives with emergent reduced speed at point of SDB in lowest floor and does re-leveling and opens door in Door zone. If the door is closed, moves to DLB and recovers position data and after this, does automatic driving. d. Set up No
Symbol
1
Z28
Arrangem ent range
Set up value by factory
0-1
0
Description Option for speed output of a car at a point of SDT or SDB 0: un-output 1: output of a speed for passage of a car to IMS R.Fast screen.
e. Error code: Top(1695), Bottom(1696) f.
Remark Alteration from Z26 into Z28. (v1.03, 2007-05-31)
alteration(v1.03, 2007-05-31) Top(1702), Bottom(1703)
Reference - In scenes when ETSD is established (also, if there is information is set up to 186C board), this function cannot be used. - It is applied to under 105m/min.
5) Addition a function of PCCS (Priority Car Call Service). ※ A function of Love Hotel a. Registration of signs: PCCS (CN file 7 rank 7 - it can be altered to conditions of scenes) ※ COP toggle switch is needed b. Operation: if PCCS is ON (green color) and Car call is registered, hall call services after managing car calls registered. (It is indicated as automatic driving state even during using this function.) 6) (Addition of a function of automatic detecting of Loadweigher.) The program is applied with classifying it into a case using a switch and another applied CLW board (MRL-potentiometer, Gearless-LVDT) by a detector of Carload. Operation to make programs divided as sorts of TAC50K being used as one through this. 7) (Application of first program of a function of driving with quietness at night.) ※First step: prohibition on announcement output, second step: a function of reducing a speed of driving) a. Registration of signs: registration of NTSR(Night-Time with quietness Running) to IO table. This can be registered to IOC and CN, and connected to where input circuit operates in Low Active. (What is the circuit in Low active? It refers to be in DC24V state ordinary times and operate when signs input and it is fall into OV.) b. Addition of Hardware (a design model at first step) - Addition of an exterior Timer of 24 hours. (Make it input to O[V] in NTSR in time established.) - Car Chime is substituted with announcement equipments. - If there is a Hall Chime, it is prohibited to input of power supplying by a Hall chime in time zone established by using a point of contact in exterior timer. - (Addition of Toggle switch.) c. Operation
7
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 8/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
It is prohibited on operation of announcement equipments in time zone established. Only, announcements appointed like as an emergency announcement is operated continuously. 11. 2007-01-05: v1p01h(1) Addition of output functions for an arrow and a floor in PI at mode of INS driving. ☞ v1p01h(1) is managed by Generic V1.02 of TAC50K for maintenance. (05-June-2007, Cokim)
12. 2007-02-09: v1p01h(2)
※ application to common in
Geared/Gearless/ Roomless of TAC50K - integration-1st
1) Application of development of CRT program.(housing construction) A.
Transmission of DATA about condition
-
Condition of Car/Hall CALL registration
-
Condition of Lockout (=bit pass)
-
Present situation of an elevator
-
Driving direction (up, down, stop)
-
Condition data (parking, fire, bread down, automatic, INS, opening/closing of a door)
-
Error code
-
(Operating conditions of sensors and switches of elevators)
B.
Receiving of control DATA
-
Fire-control (input a sign in point of a contact of Fire of a dong through CRT computer)
-
Parking
-
Registration of Car-call
-
Registration of Lockout (= a function of bit pass)
C.
Etc: An additional content is expected that to be applied by requirements to development.
D.
Set up
No
Symbol
1
O46
Arrangem ent range
Set up value by Factory
0-1
0
Description Option applied with CRT based on Computer 0: un-applied. 1: applied
Remark Alteration from O45 into O46 (v1.03, 2007-05-31)
2) Precautions in application of Generic. E.
A program in CN board has to be applied with a version over V28. ☞ If Generic in prior version is applied to CN, it is indicated as something wrong of communication in CN board. ☞ Ways to confirm CN version It can be confirmed by an order of DCNP 0 0(Enter) at IMS Remote fast. ☞ Ways to upgrade CN Replacement of CN board or upload of latest programs by using MPLAB ICD2.
F.
A program of HN board has to be applied with version over V03(=V28). 8
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History G.
It has to set up Option Z23=0 or 1, according to a scene.
H.
It has to be re-set up to Option Z24=41.
13. 2007-02-14: v1p01h(3)
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 9/40
※ integration
1) (Unrelated with a scene) alteration of define option related to EN81 program (14th-Feb-2007, Kim Chango) 2) 14. 2007-02-23: v1p01J
※After this Revision, it is applied to Geared/Gearless/MRL of TAC50K in common as a single program.
1) Sorting of application of option divided by sorts of 186C-1A/2A boards(07-Feb-2007) Refer: In 186C board, if ETSD vane is applied from production on April in 2007, 186C1A is applied and if it does not be applied, 186C2A is applied. 186C2A is applied with SDT and SDB limit switch. 2) Hospital of nuclear power in seoul: It is supplemented for occurrences of a case when doors in penetrate floors have opened by operation of DOB or DOBR at the same time in penetrate specification. (22-Feb-2007) 3) Application and supplement of a function of Anti-Nuisance. Problem: It is applied Geared using Switch by reversing a LWA sign because designs of software and Hardware is different for each other. Supplement: It is possible to normally apply without Inversion. Reference: It is applied automatically when MRL Potentiometer or GL LVDT is used and only M92 and O10 is set up.
15. 2007-02-28: v1p01K 1) In state of stop by break down, it is always put on for safety of passengers even when the time for fluorescent light-automatic-off(O35=300) is exceeded. Reference: In several cases like as forced cut of safety lines and so on, it has to be off by a switch of fluorescent light in COP because it is on continuously unless this is done.(27-Feb-2007) 2) Application of a function of 2-Step Speed. (28-Feb-2007) ※ Refer materials established of “a function of 2-Step Speed”.
16. 2007-03-09: v1p01K(1) 1) Confirmation sign for ‘D2S: Duplex To Simplex conversion’ received in CRT is output through CRT. (05-Mar-2007) When D2S is ON (Green), Duplex driving is operated. In CRT screen, icon is as DPX. 2) Addition of a function of ARD (It is applied with ARD equipment of Sungam electricity)
completion of a
function in V1P03H at 12th on October in 2007 17. 2007-03-28: v1p01K(2) 1) Addition a function of remote call in establishments (23-Mar-2007) 2) Alteration into that rationality examination to FSCDB relay on IOC is not operated when there is only a function of fire control. (27-March-2007) ☞ Refer to application to scenes: In scenes where there is no function of fire-control function, it is applied to the scene after deletion of FSC2K in IO table. In scenes where there is only a function of fire-control at over 9
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 10/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
v1p01K(2), relay of FSCDB to IOC and related additional operation(move of situation of a sign or forced management of shout)is unnecessary because it confirms condition of FSCDB only when it is used with registration of FSC2K symbol. ☞ Option does not be altered, is still F16=15 on fire-control or first and second fire fighting. 3) Separation of operation in function of first and second firefighting and fire control (28-Mar-2007) -
It is altered into that independent fire fighting driving of first and second is possible without prior operation in a function of fire control (return driving to a standard floor). ※Refer materials in set up a function of “TAC50K: KS’s Fire service and confirmation(Rev.2)”.
-
It is output announcement when first fire fighting Key is put on.
4) Addition of a Call back function by IO or Control part (28-Mar-2007) Name of a sign: HML(Homing Lobby) ※ = CBS, ※ Refer revised items at 14-Aug-2007
18. 2007-04-27: v1p01K(3) : prohibition on application to scenes 1) It is prohibited all announcement during INS driving. (10--Apr-2007) 2) Addition of signs of general-purpose IO (2007-04-12)
3)
-
INSI : Inspection Indicator (It refers to INS driving state in Control part/Car top/run bug/COP)
-
FSMLI: Fire Service Main Landing Indicator (It refers to complete state of return from fire-control)
If a wrong operation of BSL (Brake Switch Lifted) is detected at automatic driving state, stop an elevator to the nearest floor and make it in state of permanent break down.(12-Apr-2007)
a) Operate it in order as following. Automatic
Examination
Automatic.
b) Reset 186C or OFF/ON power of control part. ※ If break down of BSl is occurred during INS driving, immediately make it in state of permanent break down. 4) Alteration of condition to On by FALI (a sign of break down). (13-Apr-2007) In cases of “Completion of return of Parking” or “Opening of Safety string by conversion of INS”, it is maintained state of FALI OFF. 5) (Supplement to an occurrence of "BUSY" in communication lines of PC Monitoring ; 16x3) (It is applied to scenes for test with Rev1.01(2A), 13-Apr-2007) 6) Addition of an error that passengers are confronted during specification of housing construction. (22-Apr-2007) ※ refer Error 2000 in revised items of v1p01K(6).
7) Addition of a function of Hall chime (on work) 8) Adjustment of compensation to load (2007-04-24) a. It is adjusted pre-torque data transmitting from GD to CPIK to
-1024, 0, +1024 as state of LWB and
LWA. b. A function of prohibition on compensation to load is deleted when wrong Pre-torque data is created. 9) It is revised Hall button lamp and a sign of "examining" to do not be ON in state of Door Disconnect. ( 24-Apr-2007) Refer to establishment: BIT5 in condition lamp data is established as '1' on INS or DD (Door Disconnect). 10
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 11/40
19. 18-May-2007: v1p01K(4)-beta : Prohibition on application to scenes 20. 18-May-2007: v1p01K(5) : Prohibition on application to scenes 21. 18-May-2007: v1p01K(6) 1) At alteration of data tansmitted in PC Monitoring, it is output only once. ( 27-Apr/18-May-2007) 2) (KT-Gwanghwamun) Supplement of probelms that BLS error is occurred in Gearless (05-May-2007) 3) (KT-Gwanghwamun) Addition compensation to load at driving of Re-leveling (especially, Wire-stretch) (08/11-May-2007) 4) (KT-Gwanghwamun) Delay of output of a sign annoucing break down(FALI). (14-May-2007) It is output with delay of FALI in 5 seconds after unmovable break down of a car and it is also altered to delay "announcement of break down". 5) (KT-Gwanghwamun) Prohibition on announcement of "driving direction" during Releveling (inclustion of wire-stretch). (15-May-2007) 6) Extansion of delaying time for examination of an Error 1027 to 1 second from 500mS(08-May-2007) 7) Addition UIMI of a sign “Unintended moving” (inclusion of driving with door open) (11-May-2007) 8) Adjustment of numbers of re-try to be answered from communication of CN/HN from twice to four times (14-May-2007-05-14) 9) Classification of a point of time for announcement of floor with below and up of 120m/min.(15-May-2007) 10) (SK-Leaders view in Yeoksam, temporary power source) Error application of a filtering program applied in Han sung university by an occurrence of 1657. (15-May-2007) 11) (SK-Leaders view in Yeoksam, temporary power source) Alteration time for examination of an Error 1021 from 1s to 1.5s(15-May-2007) 12) Addition of Error code 2000 (being confined of passengers-specification of housing construction), 2001(above SDB), 2002(above SDT). (18-May-2007) a. Error 2000: 3 Conditions for occurrences. - Did it be at driving state in condition of registration of CAR CALL just before stop by break down at outside of Door zone? - Did you push down COP Emergency Button at state of stop by break down at outside of Door zone? ※ A name of a sign: EMCB - Is load over 20% at state of stop by break down at outside of Door zone? ※ It is determined as LWA load. b. Error 2001: Operation of SDB limit switch does not be detected when a Car is in the lowest floor. c. Error 2002: Operation of SDT limit switch does not be detected when a Car is in the highest floor.
22. 18-May-2007: v1p01K(7) 1) Alteration of conditions for output to announcement of break down.( 27-May-2007) a. Before alteration: When Hall door is opened at other floors except a floor in which a car is stopped, announcement of break down does not be output. b. After alteration: When Hall door is opened at other floors except a floor in which a car is stopped and Car is implanted to level and it is still in wrong state after try of Re-close in Three times, and 11
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 12/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History then announcement of break down is output twice. c.
Precaution: Announcement of break down is announced only twice even when it is occurred that break down is occurred repeatedly at the same floor. This is for preventing repeating announcement when break down is maintained.
2) Alteration of delaying time of an occurrence of an Error 1519 from 1 second to 2 seconds (29-May-2007)
23. 29-June-2007: v1.03
※Prior registration VERSION: v1.01k(7)
☞ v1.01K(8) is applied to parts of scenes, it is same with v1.03.
V1.03 includes all the items altered in TAC50K. V1.02 is worked to use only for maintenance applied to boards of HN and CN with prior program before HN과 CN기판이 V28이전과 Generic V1.01H(1)-05-Jan-2006. 16-Aug-2007, an added notice about prohibition on use of Generic: It is prohibited at scenes because inability (a state when UIM is occurred) to re-move at return of power in normal state of a program of v1.03C on v1. (Refer details of v1.03D)
1) Items to be re-established and re-confirmed after update of a program Re-confirmation of OPTION establishments
① No
Symbol
Arrangem ent range
Set values factory
up by
Remark
Description
Set up a function of Hall Lantern 0: direction and arrival 1: prediction and arrival Option for set up of contents to output of LAMP3 for 2 Z24 0 ~ 255 41 condition of an elevator ※ Reference to application: For example, when v1.02(or under v1.01h1) is applied, it has to be connected to IMS and 1
Z23
0~1
0
reestablished Z23 and Z24 after uploaded Generic v1.03 in 186C.
② Confirmation about an alteration of an OPTION No
Symbol
Arrangem ent range
Set values factory
1
Z28
0~1
0
2
O46
0-1
0
up by
Remark
Description Output option of a speed of a car at point of SDT or SDB 0: no output 1: output of a passage speed of a car on IMS R. Fast screen. Option applied CRT based on Computer 0: no application 1: application
Alteration from Z26 to Z28 Alteration from O45 to O46
③ Alteration of Error code No
Before alteration
After alteration
1
1695
1702
2
1696
1703
Description
Remark
An occurrence of a forced stop by wrong in speed of a car at highest floor An occurrence of a forced stop by wrong in speed of a car at lowest floor
2) (** Permanent break down by detection of Unintended moving is cancelled only with a command language ‘TFR’.) (29-May-2007) Condition for cancellation before alteration: TFR command or Power Off/On Condition for cancellation after alteration: only possible by TFR command. ☞ Precaution: refer details in v1.03D (16-Aug-2007) ※ Development of machines, requirements by QA (proceeding at 03-may-2007.) (SAFETECH.Co. 12
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 13/40
Rope-gripper: SRJ-S, SRJ-M, SRB-H) 3) Sabbath-day Function (11-Jun-2007) ① What is Sabbath-day function? An elevator is used for a passenger without pushing Call button. If a sign starting a function is input, Dummy Car-call is made, it moves and services automatically to all floors in up and down. ② Operation If each sign of input (SBT1) is operated, according to a function established before, it is operated as following. a. SBT1: It is driven continuously with stopping to all the floors in direction of up and down.
If SBT1 being in active and it is operating, a sign of output (SBT1I) is in active with green. ③ Condition for operation: It lets all floors in state to register car call. That is, there is no floor locked out of Car call. ④ Hardware: It controls IO in CN board by using timer of the daytime. ⑤ Etc: In driving of INS and IND, PARKING, break down, Door-break down, Fire, First. Second fire fighting and so on, it is prohibited to operate. 4) Adjustment of 1653 Error time (15-June-2007) 24. 2007-07-10: v1.03A
※VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03
1) ** ((((Traffic mode is operating control in CRT (02-Jul-2007))))) ※ Deletion of Contents (Cokim, 11-Jul-2007) 2) Supplement to a case occurred that it have ever operated as a mode of Capture driving without operation of Capture IO (02-Jul-2007) 3) Supplement to problem that it have ever unreturned after operation of CSTO relay (Cokim, 03-Jul-2007) 25. 2007-07-11: v1.03B
※ VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03; application of v1.03a to parts of scenes.
1) Supplement of a function of Call lockout of CRT (rearrangement at 11-Jul-2007, 15-Jun-2006) 2) Supplement of prediction related to Error 1003 - PCCS (11-Jul-2007) 26. 2007-08-06: v1.03C
※ VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03B
1) Supplement of KS fire fighting driving; becoming null of hole to rescue a car (07-Aug-2007) 2) Supplement to an error of earthquake-control; addition of confirmation about registration in IO (07-Aug-2007)※ when there is no function of earthquake-control, delete SEIS.
27. 2007-08-17: v1.03D
※ VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03C
1) Supplement of prediction related to Error 1003– Calls (2007-08-07) 2) Additional output of Floor-index to indicate a floor on Screen of CRT Monitoring. (07-Aug-2007) before alteration (Problem): It has a disadvantage that if data is not be in order, It can not indicate a floor on screen because it indicates a position of a car on screen only by using data output from P.I. after alteration: It is altered to an indicate value, Floor index, indicates a floor, corresponding with index on screen as output. Reference: After this, Companies of TKDE and CRT have to manage CRT monitoring product by sharing 13
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 14/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
information about a program applied at scenes each other because it has a problem on compatibility according to existence of using Floor-index. (Unless CRT program is altered to a new program at scenes of maintenance, it can be used without problems because P.I data is always be output.) 3) Management to Error code 1656/1653; supplement of a function of Contact monitoring (01-Aug-2007) 4) In function of Lobby recall (= Call back), a function of return to automatic driving after delay of 3 minutes from end of a sign of operation (HML) is altered to directly return. Return floor is established in O33. (14-Aug-2007) 5) 29-Jun-2007: Contents related to ways for cancellation of Rope gripper (UIM function) revised in v1.03 is deleted by a cause below (14-Aug-2007) Cause: It can be occurred that it is turned to state of detection of driving with door open at return to power (OFF-ON) in state of automatic driving and maintained as a break down state. 2 ways for cancellation after occurrence of the present: ① Re-return of power ② or ‘WRT’ command in IMS ☞Precaution: Generic file is prohibited to be applied at scenes from v1.03 to v1.03C. 6) Delay of an occurrence of 1028 error: 0.5S
1.25S
1.5S
7) 2001/2002 management to error, is operating.(14-Aug-2007) 8) EN81, Addition of a function of -
22-Aug-2007
“Restriction on operating time of motor”. (14-Aug-2007)
Operation: If a car does not show movement in 30 seconds after control of driving, it is made to state of permanent break down. Cancellation is done by re-injection of poser or re-injection of INS and then it is returned by manual operation.
-
Error code: “2003” – No moving, bad encoder (new)
9) EN81, Addition of a function of “temperature monitoring”. (14-Aug-2007, refer to rearrangement in v1.03F) ※ version of CPIK (CPIR) has to be applied with v7.1D and v17.1D.
-
Operation: ① Motor(including Brake coil, Choke coil) and ② when Heat sink temperature is wrong, a car is stopped to near floor and prohibited to drive to cancellation. When it is cancelled it returns to automatic driving and drives in normal state. ※ If a Car drives continuously and 30 seconds passed after CPI is overheated and then it directly be managed as a state of break down.
-
Error code “2004” – Over-Temp. Heart sink (new) Error code “1517” – Over-Temp. Motor, Brake, Choke (alteration)
-
Condition for operation: It has to be provided as 186C through CAN serial with detection of temperature of each part in CPI. (it is required to alter a program of CPI)
-
Summary of operation before alteration of a program: CPI: before alteration- If a car is stopped after overheating is, break down state is directly maintained, if a car is driving, it is maintained break down state after 10 seconds, and if there is no overheating, it is automatically cancelled this state. 186C: Temperate does not be controlled.
28. 2007-08-22: v1.03E
※ VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03D
1) 186C Generic – Deletion of a function of “Temperature monitoring” applied to V1.03D; CPI(CPIR)의 An 14
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 15/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
occurrence of a problem of compatibility for each version of a program, it would be operated after this. (22-Aug-2007) 2) Supplement to 2001/2002 error (14-Aug-2007
22-Aug-2007)
There has ever occurred error code during normal driving or an injection of power, although these errors are things for notice about wrong things to an inspector by monitoring operation of SDB and SDT at stop of a car in terminal floors.
29. 28-Aug-2007: v1.03F
※ VERSION OF PRIOR REGISTRATION: v1.03E
※Operation of TEST at scenes of v1.03E-1, v1.03E-2,
v1.03E-3.
1) Alteration of establishing range of automatic off-time of fluorescent (Option No: O35) from 15 minutes to 60 minutes.(v1.03E-1, 24-Aug-2007, LOTTE construction specification: requirement to set up to 30 seconds) 2) Alteration of delaying time for Error code 1028 from 0.5 second to 1 second – It is altered to 2 seconds as total. (v1.03E-2, 24-Aug-2007) 3) Supplement of a function of Rope gripper. (25-Aug-02007, v1.03E-3) Problem: A function of detection about Un intended movingq1x71 does not operated when a car is leveling with a state that a control power is completely lost by damage of Motor Brake. 4) EN81, Re-addition of a function of “temperature monitoring”. (Refer items revised in v1.03D/v1.03E, 27-Aug-2007) ① If there is a wrong in temperature of Heat sink and Motor(In Gearless, detection of temperature of Brake coil and Choke coil is included), a Car is stopped to near floor and prohibited to drive to be cancelled. When it is cancelled, it is returned to automatic driving and driven in normal state. ※ If a Car drives continuously, CPI is managed as state of break down after 30 seconds from an occurrence of overheating. Error code “2004” – Over-Temp. Heart sink (new)
deletion of 2004 and integration as 1517.
Error code “1517” – Overheat -Motor, Brake, Choke, Heatsink. OR Check CPI ROM ver. (alteration of contents) ② set up of Option No
1
Symbol
O50
Arrangem ent range
0-1
Set values factory
0 (regular)
up by
Remark
Description Selection of application in a function of detection about overheating of temperature. - Sorts of GD and MRL: examination of Motor, Heatsink. - Sorts of GL: examination of Motor, Heatsink, Brake, Choke. 0: applied 1: not-applied
Option to maintain compatibility with CPI already forwarded.
③ Precaution To use a sing delivered with communication from CPI, a sign of ‘DTOK’ has not to be registered in 186C IO table (Addition of details, 08-Jan-2008)
= The End =
Charge Agreement
Kim Chango
Examinatio n Choe Gijun
Approval Yoo Byeongin
15
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 16/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Authorize d approval (9/12)
Information of Generic
No.30
materials: total (
Applying sorts Applying board
)pages
TAC50K controller
Work date
2007.08.28 ~ 2007.09.12
186C
Workman
Electricity Development, Kim Chango
TAC50K
VERSION
V1P03G
Test of development
No.30
TAC50-04 V4R5
V5R1
V4R5
Application
Application to scenes applies with ‘Rope gripper’ or ‘SDT/SDB’.
Factory in Cheonan(Tower/factory-Dongpyeon): Examination of Geared 60m/min, MRL: no examination, Examination of Gearless 180m/min
1. Alteration to input M30=O for an examination of a function of “Restriction on operating time of motor” (31-Aug-2007) When a call is input after M30=0 is set up, the Car does not move. After 30 seconds, it is stopped after an occurrence of Error code 2003. 2. Second Supplement of a function of “Unintended moving” (06-Sep-2007)
※ refer items revised in v1.03F
2.1 Problem If Motor Brake is at a state lost control power completely by a break down and so on and a Car is Leveling, detection about Unintended moving may not operate. 2.2 Improvement ▪ If a Car stops in door zone and a Brake is put Off and Motor encoder input is stopped, it is directly be monitored to Unintended moving. When there is movement over values established in M53 after this without a command of driving, Rope gripper is operated. (Alteration at 25-Aug-2007. – It being applied now) ▪ When a Car stops in door zone and moves to out of door zone with opening of door without a command to drive, Rope gripper is operated. (When first program does not be operated, Second program is added and
they
examine twice.) 2.3 Sing (for reference) No 1
Symbol UIMI
2.4 Set up No
Arrangement
Description
()
Unintended moving indicator
Remark Position can be altered to necessity.
※ Precaution: It has to be confirmed at scenes. Symbol
Arrangem ent range
Set up by factory
Description
1
M53
1 – 256
64
Set up of detecting distance of Unintended moving 64: 60mm
2
M60
0 - 255
255
Activate to examination of rationality in Unintended moving, Position, Speed
3. Supplement of a function of “Monitoring of a speed reduced at terminal floors” (08-Sep-2007)
Remark Set up certainly (Requirement to set up to 64) (Requirement to set up to 255)
※Refer details of
v1p01h 16
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 17/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 3.1 Operation
When a Car has a speed over 91% of a regular speed (adjusted value of M52), it is reduced a speed at a point when a car passes SDT switch in a highest floor and re-level to door zone and moves to the lowest floor with a low speed and restores position data(lost) and turns to an automatic driving. When a Car detects an wrong speed at SDB point in the lowest floor, it turns to drive at lower speed and re-levels and opens a door in the Door zone. When a door closes, it moves to DLB and restores position data and turns to automatic driving. 3.2 Set up No
Symbol
1
M52
2
M89
Arrangem ent range 20 - 2000
Set up by Factory A speed of contact
Remark
Description Set up a speed of contact
Set up a speed in a function of two-stage speed 0: it does not use a function of two-stage speed 1 - 1400: a driving speed between terminal floors in TSVAN/BSVAN ※ If M89 is not ‘0’, an wrong speed is determined by M89 in SDT or SDB. 0 - 1400
0
Arrangem ent range
Set up by Factory A speed of contact
TSVAN BSVAN
3.3 Relevant set up No
Symbol
1
M30
0- A speed of contact
2
M39
75-300
3
M40
4
M51
Remark
Description Maximum speed
120
Acceleration at driving
Under 137
75-300
120
Deceleration at driving
Under 137
0-3000
Motor RPM
Motor encoder RPM
3.4 Established distance classified by speed Speed
Established distance SDT/SDB (from the terminal floors)
30m/min
450mm
45m/min 650mm 60m/min 900mm 90m/min 1500mm 105m/min
2200mm
3.5 Precaution When ETSD system does not be established in 186C and SDT sign is set up in i/o table, this function is operated. Therefore, a scene (or 186C board) where ETSD function has ever been established before has to be reset setting. < No.30 End > D e ci si
Charge
Examinatio n
Kim
Choe Gijun
Chango
Approval Yoo Byeongin
17
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 18/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History o n
Authorize d approval (11/05)
No.31
Information of Generic
No. 31 Materials:
total ( 3 )pages
Applied sorts
TAC50K controller
Work date
2007. 09월 - 2007-11-05
Applied board
186C
Workman
Electricity Development, Kim Chango
VERSION Tests for Development
TAC50K V1P03H
TAC50-04 V4R5
V5R1
V4R5
Application
All scenes applied with CRT Monitoring
1) factory of Cheonan appliance numbered 3 Geared 2) Scenes of Dongtan-Desian Geared 3) Gwangmyeong Cheolsan-dong – Purgio Geared scenes 4) Bucheon terminal – MRL scenes of Sopoooong
1. Management of filtering to receiving i/o of CPI CAN serial (14-Sep-2007) 2. The limited time for Re-level is altered from 20 seconds to 2 minutes (based on height of a floor of regular building). (31-Sep-2007) 3. Addition of a function for Auto Rescue Device (ARD) service (12-Oct-2007)
※ Refer an article 2 of V1.03J.
3.1 Outline of ARD When a car is stopped out of Door zone by Power failure and it is supplied with power of three phases from Back up battery of Auto Rescue Device, and an elevator can move to all and if a carload is under 50% of regular load it moves to near floor in direction of down, if it is over that, if moves to near floor in direction of up and Implants and opens a door in 15 seconds and waits and ends a function of ARD. When a function ends, all emergency power is intercepted. 3.2 Operation of ARD ① In ARD system, If Power failure is detected over 4 seconds, change Backup battery and supply 380VAC of three phases to TAC50K and set(green) ARPW. ② When ARPW is set(green), and a car can move by detecting condition of a Car and a position of a Car, TAC50K operates like below. -
When all Vane sensors are high, Car does not move.
-
When more than a Vane sensor is low, detecting Digital load data or DLW load data, when it is over 50% of regular load, it moves to near floor in direction of down, when it is under that, it moves to near floor in direction of up and implants in 15mm of level error span.
③ When Leveling is completed, it is opened the door and waited 15 seconds and is set(green) ARSTP. (End of ARD driving) ④ When ARD takes ARSTP, power supplied to TAC50K is intercepted. That is, TAC50K maintains a state of Power failure. If ARD does not receive ARSTP in 8 minutes after set of ARPW, power is intercepted. ⑤ When ARFD is set, TAC50K does not operate a function of ARD. When ARD is already operated and ARFD is done, ARD driving is operated continuously. 3.3 Reference in ARD ① In examination of ARD function, examine it by registering ARDY ARUN, ARLDG to i/o table and monitoring 18
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 19/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History the operation of them.
② When a peak current error is occurred in ARD system, it is examined ‘load set up’ or ‘capacity of ARD’. 3.4 Set up of ARD ① Settlement A function is automatically settled only by registration to IO. Set up other matters below. No 1
Symbol M32
2
M95
Arrangem ent range
Set up by Factory
10-349
20
Floor Hunt Speed (Unit of FPM)
50 (%)
.Set up load to automatic start of a car at UP-peak or . Set up balance value to determine a direction of driving at a function of ARD driving. Only, this set up is used digital load weigher applied with CLW board.
20-80
Remark
Description
Common use in two functions.
② IO ARPW, ARFD, ARSTP, DLW(When a switch is established by using detection of load) below sets up ARD function only by setting them. ARD TAC50K
ARPW ARSTP ARFD Load value of DLW, or CLW board
ARPW, ARFD, ARSTP, DLW (only when detection of load using switch is established) below sets up ARD function only by setting them. No
NAME OF
In/Ou
ARRANGEMENT
IO
tput
OF IO
Input
File x rank x
Description Load Weigher Dispatch, When a car load of Up-peak or ARD is
Remark
- (Note1)
1
LWD
2
ARPW
Input
File 4 rank 5
Auto Rescue Device Power Input, ARD power is supplying
-
3
ARFD
Input
File 10 rank 2
Auto Rescue Device Fault Detection, ARD broken down itself.
-
over 45%, it becomes ‘1’.
Outp 4
ARDY
ut
Option File x rank x
Auto Rescue Ready, completion of preparing driving
for
an
examination of a function
Outp 5
ARUN
ut
Option File x rank x
Auto Rescue Running, operation of driving
for
examination of a function
Outp 6
ARLDG
ut
Option File x rank x
Auto Rescue at Landing, Completion of implant
for
an
examination of a function
7
ARSTP
Outp ut
File 10 rank 4
Auto Rescue Stop, end of ARD function
-
19
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 20/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History Outp 8
ARPWI
ut
Option File x rank x
ARPW Indicator
for
an
examination of a function
Outp 9
ARFDI
ut
Option File x rank x
ARFD Indicator
for
an
examination of a function
(Note1)When digital loadweigher applied with CLW board is established, do not register digit LWD i/o, register only when detection equipment of load using switch i/o is applied.(In this case, when Up-peak function is applied in geared group system, condition of start of a car follows to LWD operation.)
3.5 Error code No
Code
Level
1
2005
Info.
2
2006
FALI
3
2007
FALI
Ways
to
Description
cancellation
Detection of break down in ARD system Re-injection of power
It does not be implanted in 6 minutes after driving of ARD.
Remark Refer ARD manual Permanent break down
Re-injection
Battery power does not be off in 4 seconds after end of ARD
Permanent
of power
driving.
break down
3.6 Applied range It is applied to an elevator except subway station. (It is required development for subway station with in-regular specification) 3.7 Applied product It is classified by type supplying power through TAC50K. -
Power supplied from ARD is classified by two as 220VAC of single phase and 380VAC of three phases.
-
To apply ARD of a single phase, 186C has to version over Generic v1.03J of CPI or V17.1d of CPIR은 V17.1d. (It is intercepted a function of detection for low voltage in Drive.)
4. Detection for a program about a function of Capture. (10-Oct-2007) In parts of scenes, it can operate in state of i/o unsettled. (by unknown causes) 5. A function of Door-open in level at INS driving (25-Oct-2007) Door-open: In INS driving mode, when a Car is in level and Door Open Button (DOB) is turned ON, wait after door is opened completely. Door-close: When INS is cancelled automatically, the door is completely closed. (To operate INS driving, turn to INS just after Door-close.) ※ Matters for examination: A problem that when an elevator is opened a door at state of INS, DCU2A door controller does not close door even when Close Door(CD) sign is out put in 186C is found now, and this function can be used when a program of DCU2A is changed. 6. (KS firefighting) Alteration of contents in case of a sudden stop out of Door zone in a function of KS seconds firefighting (31-Oct-2007) 20
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 21/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 1) Contents
Arrangement of operation to be operated after when COP Emergency stop switch is turned ON and a car is suddenly stopped out of door zone during second firefighting. 2) Operation before alteration: when E-STOP is turned OFF, it is maintained second firefighting and done automatic re-level and driven to intended floor. after alteration: When E-STOP is turned OFF, it is turned to firs firefighting and be intercepted to do re-level driving. When a door is opened, stopped state of driving is maintained, when all doors is closed, drives with automatic re-level to near floor and after completion of this, maintained condition of first firefighting driving. 7. Supplement for twinkling states of output of Lockout floor on CRT Screen (01-Nov-007) 8. Application of parts replacing Flash memory (U7) of 186C board. (05-Nov-2007) M28W160 of ST Microelectronics is additionally applied. That is, both flash memory of Micron and ST can be applied.
A p pr ov al
No.32
Charge Kim Chango
Examinatio n Choe Gijun
approval No.
32materials:total( 3 )pages
Applied sorts
TAC50K controller
Work date
Nov-2007 – Jan-2008
Applied board
186C
Workman
Electricity Development: Kim Chango
VERSION Tests for Development
Yoo Byeongin Authorize d
2008-01-1 8
Information about TAC50K Generic
Approval
Car
Group
OS
V1P03J
V4R5
V5R1
Precaution for Application
Tower appliance 3, factory appliance 3, It is taken a test in KB-Myengdong agency.
1. Parts of Electrical load-werigher (21-Nov-2007) Deletion of parts of prohibiting reset of set up of M98 in creation of an wrong pre-torque (it is led by suggestion of Rory Smith and Memphis) 2. Addition of ARD (single phase) interface (27-Nov-2007) ※ Refer details in an article 3 in V1.03H (an article 3.7) Through CPIK or CPIKR, ‘ARD driving’ sign is provided as CAN serial data, and if CPI receives this sign, ‘Under voltage error’ does not be occurred. (This matter revised is applied to emergency power of single phase and three phases.) 3. Addition of signs for cancellation of lock in unintended moving (04-Dec-2007) Deletion of contents:2008-04-08, Kim Chango Refer V2.01B
21
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 22/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
1
UIMR
Input
File x rank x
Un-Intended Moving Reset (when UIM is occurred and 24VDC is input low-active, UIM is canceled maintenance of break down, (if it is automatic state) returned to automatic driving.
2
UIMI
Output
File x rank x
Un-Intended Moving Indicator (It is a sing for occurrence of UIM.)
Remark
For reference
4. Supplement for CPI break down when CPI50R and CPI100R is applied to TAC50K-Gearless sorts (04-Dec-2007) 1) Outline In models applied with CPI50R and CPI100R, hardware be input with SAF3 does not be supplied. In this case, Drive fault information indicates Safety-3 Indicator (SAF3I) condition by using information received through CAN serial. SAF3 sign is deleted in IO table, because it does not be used and instead of this, SAF3I is registered and it confirms condition of Drive. 2) Deletion and Addition of IO No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
SAF3
Input
File 4 rank 3
Safety line-3, when Drive is fault, inactive.
(Note1)
Safety line-3 indicator, when Drive is normally operated, it is ‘1’ (green on IMS) and is broken down, it is ‘0’ (Gray). 2
SAF3I
Output
File 5 rank 5 ※ SAF3I created with CAN serial fault bit, is a sign of Output. (To apply this sign, SAF3 is deleted in IO TABLE.)
(Note2) Addition of new i/o
(Note 1) In I/O table, SAF3 has to be deleted. (Note 2) SAF3I is added to i/o table.
3) Connection in scenes Shorten 122 and 124 on CNHV3 in IOC. 4) Application of Generic v1.xxx is applied with version over ‘V1.03J’ or ‘V2.00M3-beta’ in ‘V2.00M3-beta v2.xxx’ 5) Error code No
1
Code
2008
Level
FALI
Ways for cancellation
Automatic return when condition is cancelled
2
1506
(FALI)
Automatic return when condition is cancelled
3
2013
Info.
-
Description
Remark
Occurrence of Break down in CPI Drive (SAF2 is ‘true’ and SAF3I is ‘false’). When a break down by CPI is occurred, safety line is intercepted It is established to turn on contact of SAF3 of safety line and manage it internally.
Addition of new
※ It is applied to a model without contact for SAF3 in drive like as CPI50Rand CPI100R. Occurrence of Drive break down (Condition: In driving mode, SAF2 is ‘true’ and SAF3 is ‘false’) When fault code is occurred in CPI, information is transmitted through CAN Communication, and TAC50K records it. Massage: "Drive fault via CAN"
Addition from V2.01K1.
2. Related to CRT, A problem of indicating on CRT as ‘cancellation of Group’ at Zoning driving in Group system, is 22
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 23/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History managed (07-Dec-2007)
3. Related to CRT, Addition about information for CRT, type for scenes, mixed sorts of TAC50KandTCM of Germany (Car position index, Top floor) (18-Dec-2007) 4. Related to CRT, Output of sign and condition of independent power control (In CRT, this control does not applied) (18-Dec-2007) 5. Addition of a function of INS driving. 1) Addition of a function of detection for Over-speed during INS driving. (10-Dec-2007, 07-Jan-2008) A. Ways for examination In case of INS driving a. M16 (settled option of Ins speed) when settled value is over 5 and it is over 50%, it is determined as over-speed. b. When M16 is settled under 0 or 5 and it is over 50FPM, it is determined as over-speed. In case of automatic driving When it is over 135%(it can be changed according to regular speed) of regular speed. Only, it is limited to a case when a regular speed is over 58FPM. B. Error code Ways for No
Code
Level
cancellatio
Description
Remark
n
1
1701
Permanent break down
TFR
Detection of over speed
2) Supplement for wrong of i/o related with INS (18-Dec-2007). ※ It is recommended by US. 3) Driving speed of INS is altered from 150 to 75. (04-Jan-2008) 6. Addition of a function of BS, Fireman (21-Dec-2007) 1) Outline BS fireman function is that when fire emergency recall switch, attached to wall of a platform in lobby is operated, car returns to a floor of lobby and opens a door and waits. After about 2 seconds, it turns automatically to a function same with first firefighting of KS and operated a function of fireman. Fire announcement is immediately operated with operation of FSH1 and announces again when a Car arrives floor arrived. 2) Addition of IO No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
FBSS
Output
Set up at scenes
Fireman British Standard Start
Addition of New i/o
It is set up all of i/o and option necessary for first firefighting and fire-control of KS and Added FBSS. (FSC2K is not necessary) 3) Ways for examining operation When FSH1 is in active and a Car returns to a floor of safety and opens a door, confirms whether FBSS is green, be in active. If FSMLI is in active and FBSS is not in active, move FBSS to other i/o port. (If i/o is added to IOC, there can be i/o cell does not operate.) 7. Alteration of a point of time for fire announcement when fire control of KS is operated. (26-Dec-2007) 23
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01D Date: 2008/04/30 Page: 24/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
A point of time for fire announcement: It is announced twice. First, Key switch being in active, Second, completion of return to a floor of safety. 8. Output message becomes clear through being classified by contents of 1028 Error as two kinds. (26-Dec-2007) before alteration: "Selector level outside DZ" after alteration: "Selector level outside DZ"과 "LVU or LVD stuck"; 9. (Relevant with firefighting of KS, Alteration of a name of a function) < No.32 End> 2XX Charge Kim Chango
Examination Yun Gwanchul
Approval Yoo Byeongin
2008-05-07
2008-05-07
2008-05-07
Approval
Information of Generic
No.33
No.
33materials:
total( 2 )pages
Applied sorts
TAC50K controller
Work date
Applied board
186C
Workman
VERSION Tests for Development
Car
Group
OS
V2P01D
V0R23-N
V5R1
Precaution for application
July in 2007– April in 2008 Electricity Development: Kim Chango, James in Memphis When ‘InitShdn’ state is occurred after Upload, input “GET” command in IMS, and confirm Output message and adjust wrong option value and input.
It is tested at Tower number 6,7, Factory number 3, KT-Gwanghwamun, KB-Myengdong agency
In Generic V2.XXX, TAC50-04 code and TAC50K code is merged, contents revised on V1.xxx are included.
1. Arrangement of mutual compatibility of Generic (V2.00) 1) Group generic: V0R23-N is not compatible with Car generic V1.xxx, is only compatible with V2.xxx. 2) Car generic: V2p01 has to be applied with Group generic V0R23-N and OS generic V5R1 and all functions applied before V1P03J is included. (It is possible only when CN and HN has a version over V 28). ☞ V2.xxx is compatible in functional parts, but is altered internally. 3) OS generic: V5R1 is compatible with all former programs. 2. Addition of a function of Handicapped Hall/Car call (V2.00) 3. Addition of traffic driving (V2p00) 4. Addition of VIP function (V2p00) 5. (Arrangement inner programs. V2p01A, 2008-03-04, Cokim) -
Arrangement as lack of Flash memory, and Supplement on UIMR Control sign – delaying time
6. Addition of sings for Door-open of control part. (V2p01A, 2008-03-10) No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
CPDO
Input
Set up in scenes
Input sign of door-open of control part, when a door is opened, it indicates green in IMS (DC24V low active).
Addition of i/o, It has no relation with Control.
2
CPDOI
Output
Set up in scenes
Confirmation sign of door-open of control part, when a door is opened, it indicates green in IMS (DC24V low active). Also, condition is output through PC Monitoring.
Addition of i/o
24
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01J Date: 2008/07/10 Page: 25/40
7. Addition of sign detecting temperature in machinery room. (V2p01B, 2008-04-04) No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
MROT
Input
Set up in scenes
When established temperature by exterior detecting sensor in machinery room is over, it indicates green (DC24V low active) in IMS.
Addition of i/o, It has no relation with Control.
2
MROTI
Output
Set up in scenes
When established temperature by exterior detecting sensor in machinery room is over, it indicates green (DC24V low active) in IMS. Also, condition is output through PC Monitoring.
Addition of i/o
※ This sign has no relation with a function of emergency, only indicates condition of sensor in the present. 10.
Addition of ‘DTFR(Discrete Tach Fault Reset)’ sign same with TFR command, a function of IMS. (08-Apr-2008) 1) Contents: Addition of ways for cancellation preparing against permanent break down by software with a state without Diagnostic tool (IMS). 2) Operation: When a break down state detecting emergency condition (for examples: driving speed, start with door-open etc) in Software is maintaining and ‘DTFR’ sign turn to be active, all condition for maintenance of break down is cancelled. If another break down does not exist after this(INS turns to AUTO), it turns to automatic driving state including RE-LEVELING and drives continuously. 3) Condition for cancellation of break down and appointment applied PORT
If it has a state of INS, and DTFR is maintained DC24V low active over 2 seconds, it has a function same with TFR command. Importance: It has certainly to be applied with PIN of PORT with pull-up resistance of DC24V. (An example: It is possible to use file 9, from rank 2 to rank 8 in IOC io table, file 10, one among from rank 1 to rank 7 In IOC,) 4) Sign No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
Permanent break down by 186C Software is cancelled, File x rank x 1
2
DTFR
UIMI
Input
Output
(Not applied to CN and HN board)
File x rank x
Condition: when it is in INS state, and DTFR is DC24V low active over 2 seconds, it functions as TFR command. ☞ Especially Users have to operate DTFR sign after confirm safety of an elevator. Un-Intended Moving Indicator (It is a sing appointing an occurrence of UIM.)
Same with ‘TFR’ command of IMS. ※ It is deleted UIMR sign.
For reference
8. In CPIR drive, Addition of monitoring of control sign transmitted through 186C. (V2p01B, 2008-04-08) No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
BRKAI
Output
Set up in scenes
Brake
Addition of i/o
2
MC1AI
Output
Set up in scenes
Motor contactor 1 (RK1)
Addition of i/o
3
MC2AI
Output
Set up in scenes
Motor contactor 2 (RK2)
Addition of i/o
4
BSMAI
Output
Set up in scenes
Brake limit switch – main
Addition of i/o
5
BSEAI
Output
Set up in scenes
Brake limit switch - emergency
Addition of i/o
6
DTOKI
Output
Set up in
Drive Temperature OK
Addition of i/o
25
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01J Date: 2008/07/10 Page: 26/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History scenes
※ These signs have no relation with control of 186C, just indicate condition received through CAN serial to CPIR for being determined as CPIR control condition.
9. Improvement of monitoring condition of Door-open and Door-close. (V2p01C, 2008-04-15) 10.
Improvement of monitoring DLB/DLT. (V2p01C, 2008-04-15)
11.
(Alteration of code related with PCCS, V2p01D, 2008-04-30)
12.
(Alteration of code related with Error 2000, V2p01D, 2008-04-30)
13.
Application of filtering for Noise in DLB and DLT i/o. (V2p01D, 2008-04-30)
14.
Alteration each of a scene applied with 2 control of sign output for announcement of a floor into ‘deceleration at regular speed’, of a normal scene into ‘a point for deceleration’. (V2p01D, 2008-04-30)
< No.33 End>
Approval
Charge 5/29
Examination 5/29
Approval 5/29
Kim Chango
Yun Gwancheol
Yoo Byeongin
Information about Generic
No.34
No.
34materials: total( 3 )pages
Applied sorts
TAC50K controller
Work date
May in 2008
Applied board
186C
Workman
Engineering center: Kim Chango
VERSION Tests for Development
1.
Car
Group
OS
V2P01F
V0R23-N
V5R1
Precaution for application
When ‘InitShdn’ state is occurred after Upload, input “GET” command in IMS, and confirm Output message and adjust wrong option value and input.
Tower test No2, Mini-gearless, 5/17 stop.
Alteration parts of interface among crt-car-call for scenes applied with CRT products of Germany to monitoring TAC50K. (V2p01E, 2008-05-21) Problem: Car call is continuously Input and cancelled. Cause: CRT of Germany did not clear data. Supplement: Addition supplement on motivating code for data interface data interface. Result: OK!
2.
TAC50K system adds three functions below for coincidence with PUBEL code of Russia. (v2p01F, 2008-05-29) A.
Hoistway interlock monitoring (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 6.4.12)
B.
Inspection running top limitation (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 6.3.13)
C.
Car door lock (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 5.1.13.1 also car door)
This part is description of parts of and it mentions
……………………………Following is adjusted materials and description and functions of PUBEL ……………………………………… TAC50K system adds three functions below for coincidence with PUBEL code of Russia Hoistway interlock monitoring (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 6.4.12) Inspection running top limitation (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 6.3.13) Car door lock (PUBEL 10-558-03, article 5.1.13.1
This part is description about parts of Landing and 26
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 27/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History mentions car door and hall door together here)
1.
Hoistway interlock monitoring
1.1.
Function
When an wrong open of hall door is detected, car is stopped and appliance being stopped is immediately stopped and store error code 2012. If IMS is connected, a floor detected wrong door-open has to be output through IMS remote fast. However, if IMS does not be connected, information can not be confirmed, so, to manage this, if Hoistway interlock fault door (HIFD) sign turns to be active, a floor detected wrong through Remote fast can be confirmed after this even when it is Output. All monitoring data is deleted by power cycle or turn of a function into Auto from INS except error codes. In case of using DZP contactor circuit, when wrong in rationality of DZP i/o is occurred during driving, all call registered is deleted and a car is automatically implanted to near floor. When It stops completely, then is turns to automatic driving state and waits. Although it drives again by Call service, wrong in i/o is continuously detected, then call is deleted again. And it implants near floor and waits with a state of automatic driving. 1.2.
Difference in structures of Hoistway interlock
According to hardware established in Job site, connection and function is different like following. 1.2.1.
An Interlock switch as a separate structure,
A switch is used for both safety line and interlock monitoring at the same time. A. It is composed a part of safety lines by connecting Hioistway interlock switch of each floor in series and connected to pin number 1 of connector CN1 in HDIR board with a contact of each switch at the same time. B. Extending AC2 lines in control part, it is connected with number 2(AC2) of connector CN1 in HIR board of each floor. C. Finally, DZP is connected with CDXF(/CDXR) contactor by comparing an design for application of PUBEL to control parts in machinery room (7KFEA005-018, -021, -023, -33). 1.2.2.
A structure with two of Interlock switch
A. It is applied to composition for safety line of a switch. B. Another is used for interlock monitoring. A contact a is connected to AC1B, it is AC220V and another contact b is connected to number 1 pin of connector CN1 in HDIR board of each floor. 1.3.
Adjustment of Option No
Symbol
Arrangeme nt range
Set up by Factory
Description
Remark
Pubel compliance type 1
1.4.
O52
0-1
0
Established value: 0 – not applied 1 – applied
IO sign
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
27
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 28/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Contactors (or relays) below have Pubel option ‘O52=1’, and operate only when relevant IO sign is registered. IO, does not be applied, should not be registered to table. If DZP and CDXF/CDXR contactor is applied for a function of “Hoistway interlock monitoring”, DZP/DZPM, CDXF/CDXFM, (CDXR/CDXRM) has to be registered, and if it does not be applied, it has to be deleted. No
Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
Remark Set in Door zone(Low active, Green)
1
DZP
O
IOC, file 10 – rank 1
Door zone pubel – bypass
Reset out of Door zone (Gray)
※ only PUBEL
Application of DC24V contactor. 2
DZPM
I
IOC, file 10 – rank 2
Door zone pubel monitoring – bypass
3
CDXF
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 7
Car door auxiliary contact – front
4
CDXFM
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 8
Car door auxiliary contact monitoring – front ※ only PUBEL
5
CDXR
I
IOC, file 8 – rank 3
Car door auxiliary contact – rear
6
CDXRM
I
IOC, file 8 – rank 4
Car door auxiliary contact monitoring – rear ※ only PUBEL
7
HIFD
I
8
HI(no)
I
IOC, file x – rank x
※ only PUBEL Application of AC220V contactor.
※ only PUBEL
Application of AC220V contactor.
※ only PUBEL
Hoistway interlock fault door
※ only PUBEL
Hoistway interlock fault door
※ only PUBEL
HN car side
For an inspector, If it is Active, floor in wrong door-open stored is output with Remote-fast. (no) indicates a floor and the lowest floor indicates ‘1’.
File x – rank 6 ※ When PUBEL code function is applied with Generic V2.01F, Do not delete DZ1M and DZ2M i/o. (30-Sep-2008, Cokim)
1.5.
It is possible after update to V2.01K1.
Condition for operation ① O52 = 1 ② When it is not condition for prohibiting on operation
1.6.
Condition for prohibiting on operation ① Inspection ② Door disconnect ③ (When Hall CAN-bus communication is wrong
1.7.
not applied)
Fault code No
Code
Description
Remark
1
2010
An error detecting rationality of i/o of DZP contactor
Delaying time 1.5sec, critical – automatic after stop at near floor.
2
2011
An error detecting rationality of CDXF/CDXR contactor i/o
Delaying time 1.5sec, non-critical
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
28
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 29/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
3
2.
2012
Delaying time 2sec, critical – permanent break down
Break down of door-open detecting by Hoistway Interlock
Car door lock
2.1.
Function
To open door by both auto and manual operation, when a car is in landing vane, car door is unlocked and when a car is out of landing vane, car door is locked. 2.2.
Condition for operation
When two i/o of DLE and DUM are registered, CDL control function is operated. (it has no relation with set up of O52) 2.2.1.
Operation of Unlock (feed back sign – DUM) ① When a Car wait to driving in door zone ② Permanent break down ③ Door disconnect (D26=1 or DD signal active) ④ ‘CDLS’ switch ON position ⑤ KS’s second firefighting (This function can be used in Korea market)
2.2.2.
Operation of lock (feed back sign – DLM applied)
※ it has not to be registered to i/o because DLM does not be
① When a Car is out of door zone ② When a car is driving at 0.63m/s in Car door zone ③ Power failure ( ※ It is considered in design of job site by electronic design team) 2.3.
Sing of IO No
1
Symbol
DLE
I/O
O
Arrangement of Sign
CN, file x – rank x (Note1)
Description
Door Lock device – Energized
Remark It is set in Door zone (Low active, Green; it is a state of approval of voltage in CDL) It is reset (Gray) in Door zone
2
DUM
I
CN, file x – rank x (Note2)
Door Unlock Monitoring (feedback sign)
When voltage is approved to solenoid of Lock equipments, it turns to be active (green).
3
(DLM)
I
CN, file x – rank x
Door Lock Monitoring
Voltage in solenoid of Lock equipment does not be approved yet
Note (1), (2): It is recommended that using IO by register and connect it to IOC board better than CN board to improve answering power of signs.
2.4.
Fault code No
Code
Level
Ways
for
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
Remark
29
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 30/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History cancellation 1
2.5.
Info.
2009
An error of detecting rationality of i/o in Car door Lock(CDL)
-
Delaying time 2sec
Etc
2.5.1.
Set up timer of Car door lock (CDL)
When DLE is ‘set’, 24VDC is approved in 10 seconds in the start with an equipment of ‘automatic door lock’, and after this, it maintained a state of unlock. 2.5.2.
Car door lock (CDL) manufactory
Car door lock(CDL) is applied with products by Seon Tech.
3.
Inspection running top limitation
3.1.
Function
When an inspector handles Ins switch in Car top and ‘IRTL’ limit switch attached to rail on lifting roads at driving in direction of highest floor turns to be active, car is immediately stopped. It is for protecting safety of an inspector getting into the upper part of a car by securing appropriate distance with car top from the roof. And in case of driving of Car-top inspection, it can be driven in range from IRTL switch of the highest floor to DLB of the lowest floor. 3.2.
Condition for operation
When ‘IRTL’ sign is registered in IO table. 3.3.
IO sign No 1
Symbol IRTL
I/O
Arrangement of Sign IOC, file 2 – rank 7, CN2-B2
i
Description
Remark When a Car replaced turns switch active, it is green.
Inspection running top limit
…………………………………………End of adjusted materials and description about function of PUBEL …..….……………………………………
Charge 2008-08-22
Examination 2008-08-26
Approval 2008-08-26
Kim Chango
Yun Gwancheol
Yoo Byeongin
Approval
No.35 Applied sorts Applied board
VERSION Tests for Development
Information about Generic
No. material
35: total ( 5 )pages Work date Workman
TAC50K controller 186C Car
Group
OS
V2P01K
V0R23-N
V5R1
Precaution for application
From June to August in 2008 Engineering center, Electronic; Changoh Kim When ‘InitShdn’ state is occurred after upload, input “GET” command in IMS and confirm Output message and adjust wrong value of option and input.
Tower test No2 – Mini gearless, 3BL 4,5 factory area on Composition area in Yongin-si (housing construction)
☞ Contents below altered and added are also applied to Generic of 32bit CPUA.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
30
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 31/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 1.
Alteration from CRT, EPNP into EPEP. (V2.01G, 2008-06-20) When EPEP is ‘0’, normal power. when it is ‘1’, emergency power.
2.
2008 Error (is only applied to CPIR) Supplement (V2.01H, 2008-07-01)
3.
Creation of program unregulated for scenes of DUQUE4 (Job No: E20080113B) (V2.01H- DUQUE4, 02-Jul-2008) Contents: It allows to door-open at a penetrate floor. Etc: this function did not be added to regular program.
4.
Forced alteration of condition of DOL and DCL at condition for driving of KS second firefighting. (V2.01J, 2008-07-10)
5.
Supplement on opening after little closing when pushing car-call button at IND driving. (V2.01J, 2008-07-10, FMEA 08 06 007)
6.
Alteration of PI arrow into being output at first firefighting driving (V2.01K, 2008-08-07)
7.
Addition signs of announcement about break down in observing part (V2.01K, 2008-08-07) When break down is occurred in an elevator, FZBZ turns to be active and it is Output. When FDBZR a turns to be active, it is cancelled. No
8. 8.1.
Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
1
FDBZ
O
CN, file x – rank x
Fault detection buzzer, break down buzzer rings
2
FDBZR
I
CN, file x – rank x
Fault detection buzzer reset, break down buzzer is cancelled to ring
Remark
Extension of a function of PC Monitoring (=CRT) (V2.01K, 2008-08-07) A function of control ① Addition of driving at night with quietness (NTSR) ※ Screen symbol mentions NS . ② Addition of cancellation on Break down Buzzer ring (FDBZR) ③ Addition of Independent (ISC) ※ Screen symbol mentions IND .
8.2.
Output of condition ① Output for supplement on condition related with fire (Fire, First, Second, Completion of return, during driving functions related with Fire) ② Addition of contents directing direction of PI (before alteration: Stop, Driving direction. after alteration: Stop, Direction intended to drive, Driving direction) ③ Break down Buzzer ring (FDBZ) ④ Independent (ISC)
8.3. 9. 9.1.
(Addition of Priority message – Developer) Addition of an interface function of observing part in types connection with N in186C 1:. (V2.01K, 2008-08-07) Contents
A function is extended to apply “A Type of interface of observing part in TAC50K-32bit” in types of connection with 1:N by applying CTCM board to scenes applied with 186C. (For example: 3BL 4/5 factory area on Composition area in youngin-si– scenes of housing construction) ※ N = 8. ※ CTCM includes a function of CTCR, A board added a function of interface of observing part in TAC50K
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
31
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 32/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 9.2.
IO
(Addition of contents. 2008-12-02, Cokim) A.
A way to apply Monitoring system in a type of 1:N (for 32bit CPUA) to scenes of 186C Instead of CTCR, establish CTCM board and turn off to the number 8 of DIPSW1 of it, and register CTCM on car side in direction of IOC by IMS.
No
1
Symbol
CTCM
B.
I/O
I
Arrangement of Sign
IOC, file 7 – rank 4
Description CTCM i/o announces that way of 1:N (way of 1:1 is also possible) is applied by CTCM board to scenes of 186C only applied with way of 1:1 interface by CTCR board, and 186C generic makes TAC50K and Monitoring system in way of 1:N do mutual interface with each other.
Remark
It is not a sign have actually to be connected register is to IO table only when it is needed.
Way for applying Monitoring system in way of 1:1 (for 16bit CPUA) to the scenes of CPUA Establish CTCM board instead of CTCR board, turns number 8 of DIPSW1 of it ON and shorten number 1 and 2 of J1 (watch pin number). (CTCM i/o is not needed) ※ It can be applied to scenes altering 186C established into CPUA
9.3.
Set up CTCM board C.
Jumper -
SH1: Select whether the shield line of communication line of CON2 is earthed or not. If it is Shorten, it is earthed.
-
SH2: Select whether the shield line of communication line of CON4 is earthed or not. If it is Shorten, it is earthed.
-
J1: For extending function
-
J2: For production – For TEST of board (Connect PC and RS232)
-
J3: For production – Open only when a program is recorded. (Shorten on filed at all time.)
-
J4: Set up existence of application of terminal resistance in side of CON2. If it is Shorten, 120 ohm is applied.
-
J5: Set up existence of application of terminal resistance in side of CON4. If it is Shorten, 120 ohm is applied.
-
EARTH1: An earth
D.
DIP switch
1 os LSB, 8 is MSB. > Appoint the own number of an elevator, set up from 1 to 255 units. ※ It is an example of CAR NO established as an appliance of number 16 (0x10). > 8(Bit7): Set up mode of a function (1: for CAN Repeater, 0: for observing part (TAC50K 32bit of interface in observing part)) 7(Bit6): TEST (1: Operation of a function of Test, 0: operation of a function of MODE. It is always – at scenes.) 6(Bit5): number of interface for communication 1 5(Bit4): number of interface for communication 0 4(Bit3): set up of communication speed of observing part and CTCM 1 3(Bit2): set up of communication speed of observing part and CTCM 0 2(Bit1): set up of communication speed of control part and CTCM 1 1(Bit0): set up of communication speed control part and CTCM 0 E.
Connector -
CON1: for production – for a recording program
-
CON2: communication port (connect to control part)
-
CON4: communication port (connect to communication line in side of monitoring)
-
CON5: power (+24V – 0V)
10. (A circuit of approval about EN81 Safety) Alteration of control of door zone bypass module. (V2.01K, 2008-08-07, Cokim)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
32
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 33/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 10.1. Contents To apply “EN Approval Safety circuit”, alter an way of control of circuit of ‘door zone bypass’. 10.2. Applied sorts
When “EN approval Safety circuit” is applied, TAC50K system can be applied, having no relation with sorts. TK50M in a sort of TAC50K MRL and TK50S model. After this, it will be extended to all sorts.
For example
10.3. Way of application After satisfying three conditions for hardware below, update 186C generic (or CPUA). Matters for confirmation about Hardware A.
R-C values of parts arranged in a exterior raw of both sides of coil in DZC contactor (attached to Panel) have to appropriate.
Applicati on of Generic
A point of time of application
Impossi ble
First (before April in 2007)
Values of parts Character Capacitor
Remark
Resistor
Diode
1000uF/50V
1k -2W
UF4007(1 unit)
Equip Contactor in panel.
Apply it after alter values of parts as Second,. (Note1)
Second (after April in 2007)
47uF/50V
250 ohm
UF4007
In case of SR module board
(Note 2)
Second (After December 2008)
330uF/50V
100-3W
UF4007(2개)
Equip Contactor in panel.
(Note 3) ※ It is different with first in values of parts and R-C circuit.
Possible
(Note 1) Although all alteration has done for scenes already forwarded, there can be a scene unmanaged. (Note 2) Whether Contactor or SM module is applied, only when value of parts is appropriate, it can be applied. (Note 3) DZC and DZ1, and contactor of DZ2 have to same with LC1D09BL (A type of low voltage) of Schneider or have to be used products have better capacity than that. A program and circuit (R-C-D) are developed with reflecting specification of this part at controlling to things related to door zone bypass in Safety circuit. (Refer a separate design because connecting way of R-C-D parts is different with before). When additional alteration in circuit is needed, there are various complex points. So, manage it after ask to Engineering center. (Addition of contents 09-Dec-2008 Cokim)
B.
Settlement of Jumper in SR Module board (In case of application of SR module) J1 - J2
No
Sorts of registration IO
Number 1 – number2
Number 3number 4
Reference design
Number 2-number3
1
DZEC – DZ1M – DZ2M
short
short
open
2
DZEC – D1M – D2M – DZECM
open
open
short
7K1EA005 P25, 7K1EA008 P22-4 (Note3)
(Note4) Safety Relay Module can be composed one of “Contactors attached to panel” or “SR module board”. When it is composed with contactors, connection has to be altered when it is needed because there is no Jumper.
C.
IOC board has to be applied to model without DZ1 and DZ2 relay. For example, Only IOC-3A and IOC-3B applied to MRL can be applied. Matters for confirmation about Software (Generic)
In scenes applied with PUBEL code of Generic Revision “V2.01F”, DZ1M and DZ2M i/o can not be altered or deleted. Therefore, to apply DZEC – D1M – D2M – DZECM i/o, apply it after update Generic. (Addition of details, 30-Sep-2008) 10.4. Input/Output A. No 1
Before alteration Symbol
DZEC
I/O O
Arrangement of Sign IOC, file 9 – rank 2
Description
Remark
DZC contactor control sign to control Door zone bypass circuit, Door zone enable control
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
33
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 34/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
DZ1 relay contact feedback sign of IOC(When DZEC does not be applied). 2
DZ1M
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 3 Or DZ1 contactor contact feedback sign of Door zone bypass circuit (When DZEC does not be applied) DZ2 relay contact feedback sign of IOC (when DZEC does not be applied),
3
DZ2M
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 4 Or DZ2 contactor contact feedback sign of Door zone bypass circuit (When DZEC is applied)
B. No 1
After alteration Symbol
DZEC
I/O O
Arrangement of Sign IOC, file 9 – rank 2
Description DZC contactor control sign to control Door zone bypass circuit, Door zone enable control DZ1 relay contact feedback sign of IOC(When DZEC does not be applied)
2
D1M
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 3 Or DZ1 contactor contact feedback sign of Door zone bypass circuit (When DZEC does not be applied) DZ2 relay contact feedback sign of IOC (when DZEC does not be applied),
3
D2M
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 4 Or DZ2 contactor contact feedback sign of Door zone bypass circuit (When DZEC is applied)
4
DZECM
I
IOC, file 2 – rank 4
Remark DZEC != DZECM DZ1 != D1M (Except. When a car is stopped with Ins driving it can be turned to be active as position of a car. But it is recovered to normal when it is changed into automatic) DZ2 != D2M ((Except. When a car is stopped with Ins driving it can occurred as position of a car. But it is recovered to normal when it is changed into automatic)
Contact feedback sign in DZC contactor of Door zone bypass circuit
10.5. Fault code No 1
2
Level
Ways for cancellation
2014
Info.
-
2015
FALI
Code
Description
Remark
Occurrence of wrong in control of Door zone bypass, Although DZC turns to be active, DZECM sign is input continuously.
Ins.change or (Note1) re-injection of power
Permanent break Occurrence of wrong in Contact of DZC contactor(or relay) , DZECM sing does not be input out of Door zone.
down (RUN MONTR)
※ (Note 1) “ins change” is deleted in V2.01K-1.
11. Addition of IO sign for detection of operation of COP emergency button (V2.01K, 18-Aug-2008) No
Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
1
EMCB
I
File x – rank x
A sign detecting COP emergency button– Input, Emergency Cop Button
2
EMCBI
O
File x – rank x
A sign detecting COP emergency button – Output, Emergency Cop Button Indicator
Remark 2007-05-18, 1p01K(6)
12. Addition of “FSH1K”, fire-control sign (V2.01K, 2008-08-22) 12.1. Relevant contents In Group, when FSH1 in at least one appliance turns to be active, relevant appliance and others in group operates fire-control and all appliances return to return floor. 12.2. Supplement Replacing FSH1 using as sign of Fire emergency recall (fir-control), FSH1K available only in independent appliance is
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
34
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 35/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History added. 12.3. Set up of IO No
Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
Remark
1
FSH1
I
HN Car side, file x – rank x
A sign operating fire-control
Car / Group io
2
FSH1K
I
HN Car side, file x – rank x
A sign operating fire-control
Car io
13. Addition of option adjusting point of output of announcement of arrival to a floor (V2.01K, 21-Aug-2008-) intended to alter a function.(14-Oct-2008, Kim Chango)
It is
13.1. Contents Although a point of time for output of announcement in a floor in the present is created in fixed position in range of deceleration, adjusted value is settled to alter a point of time as regular speed or a scene. 13.2. Option No
Symbol
Arrangeme nt range
Set up by Factory
Description
Remark
Adjustment of time for output of announcement in a floor 1
X25
0-100
0
0: Output in a fixed situation appointed in Generic 1-100: Output of announcement for arrival to a floor after adjusted time.
Unit: 100ms
※ When adjusted value of X25 is ‘0’, announcement in a floor in fixed range is automatically output, and it has no effects to scenes forwarded.
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 14. Addition of code for announcing CPI fault detection (V2.01K1, 2008-09-08) No
1
Code
2013
Level
Info.
Ways
for
Description
cancellation
When fault code is occurred in CPI, information is delivered through CAN communication, and TAC50K records it.
-
Remark
Massage: "Drive fault via CAN"
※ Fault code 2013 is applied to both of CPIK and CPIKxxxR, 2008 is applied only to CPIKxxxR. 15. Alteration of condition to cancellation of 2015 fault code (V2.01K1, 2008-09-09) It is altered to that only ‘re-injection of power’ can cancel break down. 16. Addition of ARD (refer matters altered in V1P03H) (V2.01K1, 2008-10-29) 16.1. Addition of description – Addition of contents in option part of a function of ARD in V1P03H. Adjust set up value below. No 1
2
Symbol M32
M95
Arrangeme nt range
Set up by Factory
10-349
20
Floor Hunt Speed (unit of FPM)
50 (%)
. UP-Set up load at automatic start in peak. or . Set up balance value to determine driving direction in ARD driving. Only, this set up is used when digital weigher applied with CLW board.
20-80
Description
Remark
Common use in two functions.
16.2. Supplement of a function
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
35
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 36/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
When compensation condition for position pulse data by slip and so on after supplement: landing by ARD driving is occurred, ARD driving is ended (door is opened completely and waited in 15 seconds) and an elevator is shut -down. After this, when power of Korean Electricity is recovered, it is turned automatically to the lowest floor and restore position data and be state of automatic driving. 17. Supplement of problem in case applied EN81 safety circuit and PUBEL at the same time (3-=Sep-2008) When Russia PUBEL code is applied in Generic v2.01F, DZ1M and DZ1M are needed. Therefore it can be deleted or altered after update it to generic with a version above v2.01K1. 18. Addition of monitoring about condition of lock switch in rescue hole in the upper part of a car (PUBEL code). (V2.01K-1, 01-oct-2008) 18.1. Set up IO No
Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
Remark
1
MLS1
I
CN, file 13 – rank 8
Switch of condition for rescue hole in the upper part of a car– Input
When the door is opened, 24V low active Input
2
MLS1I
O
File x – rank x
Switch of condition for rescue hole in the upper part of a car – Output
When the door is opened, 24V low active Output
18.2. Fault code No
1
Code
2016
Level
Critical
Ways
for
Description
cancellation Power reset
Opening is detected in rescue hole in the upper part of a car. (MLS1)
Remark
RUN MONITR
18.3. Condition for operation Only when O52 is set and MLS1 is registered to io table, it is operated. 19. Announcement of opening and closing of door (V2.01K2, 12-Nov-2008) 19.1. Outline When the door is opened and closed, announcement is operated. 19.2. Adjustment Set up values by factory
No
Description
Remark
Adjustment of contents for announcement. 1) Value (unit of bit) 0 – Inactivate announcement contents of relevant bit. 1 – Activate announcement contents of relevant bit 2) Form CEF=bbbbbbbbbbbb
1
CEF
111011111111
※ Order is Bit0, Bit1 …Bit11 from the left.
3) Contents of announcement BitNo Contents 0 – Fire announcement 1 – (Reservation) 2 – Nudging 3 – Opening and closing of the door 4 – Over load 5 – Automatic rescue (ARD) 6 – Announcement of arrival to a floor 7 – Parking or VIP 8 – (reservation) 9 – break down 10 – driving direction 11 – (reservation)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
※ Announcement of opening and closing of door “The door is opened” “The door is closed”
36
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 37/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 19.3. Information about announcement equipment of TVA
Before alteration: TVA-1A REV2.0 After alteration: Addition of announcement of “opening and closing door” and “Handicapped Call registration” of TVA-1A REV3.0. ※ Announcement of “opening and closing door” ROM is separately managed because Voice ROM(U6) of TVA has to be altered from SM to 8M due to lack of memory.
19.4. Etc General announcement is prior to Car-call (Handicapped) registration announcement. 20. Addition of sign to input and output for detecting opening and closing of machinery room (V2.01K3, 28-Nov-2008) No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
MRDO
Input
Set up in scenes
Machine Room Door Open – input (When the door in machinery room is opened, input DC24V low as active)
Addition of i/o, this sign has no relation with control.
2
MRDOI
Output
Set up in scenes
Machine Room Door Open – indicator
Addition of i/o
21. (Approval circuit of EN81 Safety) Supplement of control in door zone bypass module (V2.01K-4) To manage with selective application of “SR module board” or “DZC-DZ1-DZ2 contactor module attached to control part”, hardware and software is partly altered. That is, both types of circuit is applied in Generic after this. ▪ The table below is description about case when control IO is used as “DZEC – DZECM – D1M – D2M”. Applicati on of Generic Impossi ble
Possible (Note1)
A point of time for application
Values of parts Composition
Remark Capacitor
Resistor
diode
First (before April in 2007)
Contactor is equipped in panel.
1000uF/50V
1k -2W
UF4007 unit)
Second (after April in 2007)
Make SR module as a board
47uF/50V
250 ohm
UF4007
Second (after December in 2008)
Contactor is equipped in panel.
330uF/50V
100-3W
UF4007 (2 units)
(1
(Note2) ※ R-C circuit and value of parts is different with first.
(Note 1) Whether Contactor or SM module is applied, only circuit(Door zone bypass parts and composition of R-C-D) and specification of parts is same, it can be applied. (Note 2) Contactor of DZC and DZ1, DZ2 has certainly to be used thing has same spec with LC1D09BL(type of low voltage) of Schneider or better than that. A program and R-C-D circuit is developed with reflecting spec of this part when control things related with door zone bypass in Safety circuit. When an additional alteration of circuit is needed to scenes, manage it after ask to Engineering center because there are many complex matters. (Addition of contents 01-Dec-2008 Cokim)
22. (Oversea only) Door in the forward and backward in a floor of penetrate hole is allowed to be opened at the same time.(V2.01K-4S) Special version generic V2.01K4S: This function is possible when car adj. D34=0 is set up, and does not be applied to regular generic. 23. Information of an elevator is delivered quickly with PC Monitoring – REMON. (V2p01K5, 12-Dec-2008) Transmitting term is altered from 2 seconds to 1.2 seconds because a condition When a Car drives in regular speed situation of a car passed a floor irregularly on PC screen is occurred. 24. Handicapped car-call service is intercepted at KS firs/second fire fighting driving. (V2p01M, 16-Dec-2008) 25. (Alteration of inside conditions for scenes of penetrate DOOR (V2p01P, 07-Jan-2009)) 26. Addition of a function of cardkey interface of BC-CARD work facilities. (V2p01P, 09-Jan-2009) 27. Addition of examination about condition of initial value of TAC50K Adjustment (V2p01Q, 23-Feb-2009)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
37
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 38/40
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History 27.1. Outline When initial value is not regular at Generic update, return it back to regular range. 27.2. Matters to be examined and Reset Z23=0, Z28=0, O46=0, O50=0, X25=0, O52=0.
※ When a value is not normal, reset as left.
28. Supplement of a function of VIP in Rear side (V2p01R, From 27-Feb-2009 to 03-Mar-2009) Supplement because CB(n) I/O operates VIP function, CBR(n) I/O does not operate. 28.1. Car IO No
NAME OF IO CB1I
In/Outpu t Output
1 CB3I
Output
2 CB5I
Output
3 CB14I
Output
4 CB16I
Output
5
Arrangement
Description
Remark
Set up in scenes
CRT for control, floor 1 VIP Input
Correspond CB1/CBR1
to
Set up in scenes
CRT for control, floor 3 VIP Input
Correspond CB3/CBR3
to
Set up in scenes
CRT for control, floor 5 rear VIP Input
Correspond CB5/CBR5
to
Set up in scenes
CRT for control, floor 14 VIP Input
Correspond CB14/CBR14
to
Set up in scenes
CRT for control, floor 16 VIP Input
Correspond CB16/CBR16
to
Note2: Front and Rear is not different now.
28.2. Group IO No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
1
CBn
Input
Set up in scenes
Code Blue – input - Front
= VIP call
2
CBRn
Input
Set up in scenes
Code Blue – input - Rear
= VIP call
※ Do not register same IO to places more than a place.
28.3. Group Adj. No
Symbol
Arrangeme nt range
Set up by Factory
Description
1
CB1-8
0 - CarNo
1-8
Code Blue priority 1 - 8
2
CBH
0 – 900
20
Code Blue door hold time
Remark
※ There is separate additional set up data.
29. Addition of general IO (V2p01R, 27-Feb-2009) 29.1. Outline Add of three IO available for general type. 29.2. Car IO No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
1
IO1
Input
Set up in scenes
Discrete Input Output 1 - input
2
IO2
Input
Set up in
Discrete Input Output 2 - input
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
Remark
38
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 39/40
scenes 3
IO3
Input
Set up in scenes
Discrete Input Output 3 - input
4
IO1I
Output
Set up in scenes
Discrete Input Output 1 - Indicator
5
IO2I
Output
Set up in scenes
Discrete Input Output 2 - Indicator
6
IO3I
Output
Set up in scenes
Discrete Input Output 3 - Indicator
29.3. Operation and Application When IO1 turns to be active or transmits appointed CAN data as ‘1’ in CRT, IO1I turns to be active. It can be used as general type to a scene where additional IO is required. Precaution: IOx sign can be controlled in discrete or CRT at the same time. Therefore, do not apply same IO to other function by making mutual promise. 30. Alteration of things related to CRT interface (V2p01R, 04-Mar-2009) 30.1. Addition of ways to control Lockout An appointment of ways to classify a Car and a Hall when it is transmitted information about lockout in CRT. (Refer information of BYTE3 of CAN telegram.) Refer: SHINSEGAE department store in Centum City use only information of Car call lockout (There is specification for both holes). And hall call lockout output information of car lockout through CfxI and re-input this sign through FLx. This way is available to all scenes(maximum floor 15) of TAC50K 16bit and especially, scenes of both holes and penetrate hole is applied with this way.
No
Name of Sign
In/Outp ut
ARRANGEME NT OF IO
Description
Remark
Output
Set up in scenes
For control of CRT. Hall-call lockout in floor 1 with information of floor 1 car-call
Correspond to FL1
…
…
…
-
Output
Set up in scenes
For control of CR. Hall-call lockout in floor 15 with information of floor 15 car-call
Correspond to FL15
CF1I 1 2
… CF15I
3
30.2. Output of information about registration of Car call and Hall call Out put with sum of information about registration in a floor of each Front and Rear. That is, there is no difference between Front and Rear. 30.3. Arrangement of priority order about CRT Output: IND > ATT When IND and ATT operate at the same time, IND driving is indicates on CRT screen. 31. Arrangement of priority order of TVA (Supplement of Overload announcement) (V2p01S, 01-Apr-2009) Contents of Supplement: Announcement has to be operated until Overload state is cancelled, but overload announcement can operate irregularly because priority order of announcement is altered as condition of an elevator. Therefore, priority order of announcement is adjusted as below. Power failure > ARD > Fire > OVERLOAD > NUDGING > Opening and Closing of a door > Independent power > Arrival at a floor > PARKING > Break down > Direction of driving
32. PUBEL, Hoistway Interlock Monitoring Supplement (V2p01T, 25-Aug-2009)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
39
■ TAC50K: 186C Generic File Updated History
Doc No:RD1-07146 Revision: 2.01S Date: 2009/04/01 Page: 40/40
32.1. Outline Among requirements of PUBEL, when relevant circuit for a function of Hoistway Interlock Monitoring is applied, operation of HDIF relay is effected by operation of CDX or DZP relay. There is a problem that when this circuit is applied and circuit (safety line) related to Car door and Hall door is shorten optionally in a part of a control part, software can not detect it is a wrong state shorten and therefore it is improved. 32.2. Alteration Hardware: It is altered to delete CDX relay and use only DZP and HDIF relay as door zone bypass. ※ Before alteration of reference design: 7KFEA005-021, after alteration: 7KFEA008-22, 7KFEA008-24 Software: Alteration of relevant control. ※ Refer in basic contents to additional articles in 16bit generic – v2.01f 32.3. Alteration Latest generic can upgrade to control parts in the past because Hardware is operated without effected by alteration. Only, when CDX relay does not be applied, relevant i/o CDX, CDXM has to be deleted in working table.
33. Classification of Input of DTOK Input (V2p01T, 25-Aug-2009) It is classified with Discrete ‘DTOK’ and Serial ‘DTOK’, discrete i/o is input IOC, Serial DTOK receive CAN communication from CPIK(R).
34. Addition of condition for FALI Output (V2p01T, 25-Aug-2009) A case when break down by “wrong communication on COP CN board” with condition of Output of FALI is occurred is added. (Refer: use of inspection invalid i/o)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea
40
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 1/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
▫ version/reversion in Generic, operating in TAC50K 186C/CPUA machinery board, is output on screen by order ‘VER’ in Romote-fast of IMS IMS. ▫ After Generic upload, when ‘InitShdn’ state occurs, input command “GET” in IMS and then cause of problem output as a massage. Confirm contents and reset up and input values of unusual option and restore as command “WRT” then reset. Also, when the problem is not solved, refer “supplement-issues noticed”. ▫ Only lists marked with 168IT in lists altered software of CPUA would be added relevant contents to generic of 186C.
Date
REVISION
DESCRIPTION Add all of revised contents included 186C generic (v2.01k1), etc
Charge
Examination
Approval
CO. KIM
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
CO. KIM
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
CO. KIM
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
CO. KIM
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
CO. KIM
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
GC. YOON
BI. YOO
2008-10-15
v0r32o_1a_beta10
2008-12-30
v0r32o_1a_beta13
2009-03-10
v0r32o_1a_beta15
2009-05-07
v0r32o_1b
2009-07-17
v0r32o_1c
2009-08-20
v0r32o-1d
Add Flat-sill door control
CO.KIM
2009-10-22
v0r32o-1f
Answer 1 to breakdown, both/penetration type CRT Control (32 floor)
CO.KIM
2009-11-10
(v0r32o-1g)
2009-11-27
v0r32o-1h
2009-12-04
v0r32o-1j / -1K
[1J] Supplement capacity for trick Call. Output of [1K] DZ and INSDZ
CO.KIM
2010-01-22
v0r32o-1L
Prohibition of driving immediately after Cartop Ins, Supplement relations BSLx with S-curve
CO.KIM
Supplement Door zone bypass capacity, Car-call registration/cancel announcement, etc Silence at night by low speed, crime prevention, earthquake, add capacity of rescue when open of door goes wrong. Lantern, TVA, Pubel improvement, BS fireman, Lvu/Lvd Stuck improvement Apply Israel requirements, create conditions for open and close of Inspection door, Alter S-curve output
Handicapped hall-call lockout, Answer 2 to breakdown, Pubel compatibility, MC2 inspection CRT Control (F64/R32 floor), Answer 3 to breakdown, GIOx, ARD alteration, Handicapped Lantern
CO.KIM CO.KIM
Table of Contents ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_10 (2008-10-15) ................................................................................................6 1 Addition of door close nuding (DCN) i/o for Discrete interface door ..............................................6 2
1.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 1.2 Car I/O .............................................................................................................................. 6 Addition of EN81 fireman ................................................................................................................6 2.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 2.2 Regulation ............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 2.3 I/O ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.4 Precaution (Add of description 15 on May in 2009)........................................................ 7 2.5 etc ......................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_11 (2008-12-24) ................................................................................................7 3 Addition of opening and shutting door announcement(16bit and 32bit) ..........................................7
4 5 6
3.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 3.2 Regulation ............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 3.3 Information for TVA announcement equipments ............................................................. 7 3.4 etc ......................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Alteration Conditions of “monitering of Encode operation” ............................................................7 Addition of safety bypass Control for preventing effect by pit water at operating KS fire control.8 5.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 5.2 I/O ..................................................................................................................................... 8 Addition sings of opening and shutting door of machinery room (16bit/32bit) ................................8
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
1
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 2/29
7 Addition of 32bit PC MONITOR function “Lobby recall” ..............................................................8 8 Supplement control related to Door zone bypass ............................................................................8 9 Prohibition for Handicapped of car-call service KS at fire fighting driving. (16bit/32bit, 2008-12-16) .............................................................................................................................................9 ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_12 (2008-12-26) ................................................................................................9 10 Addition function of Car-call registration and cancel announcement(2008-12-26, 2008-08-27 Hywon)....................................................................................................................................................9 10.1 10.2 10.3
Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Car adj. option .................................................................................................................. 9 Condition for operation .................................................................................................... 9
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_13 (2008-12-30) ................................................................................................9 11 Alteration safety line(32bit) and regulation io at applying CPIR dirve (CPI50R, CPI100R) of Germany ..................................................................................................................................................9 11.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 11.2 Regulations in actual scenes ............................................................................................ 9 11.3 IO definition ...................................................................................................................... 9 11.4 Error code....................................................................................................................... 10 12 Addition function of Pretorque at Relevel(WIRE-stretch) (16bit/32bit) ........................................11
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_14 (2009-01-15) ..............................................................................................11 13 Expand kinds of indicating conditions of Position indicator(32bit)....... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 13.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 13.2 Car adj. option ................................................................................................................ 11 14 Addition function of Sabbath(32bit) ...............................................................................................11 14.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 14.2 Operation .............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 14.3 Contidions for Operation ................................................................................................ 12 14.4 Car adj. I/O...................................................................................................................... 12 14.5 Car adj. Regulation ......................................................................................................... 12 14.6 Reference.............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
15 (Supplement DZEC Operation(32bit, 16BIT)) ..............................................................................13 ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_15 (2009-03-10) ..............................................................................................13 16 [Information] Car Adjustment – O43.............................................................................................13 17 Function of driving silently at night(NTSR) ...................................................................................13
18
19 20
17.1 Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 17.2 Conditions for Operation ................................................................................................ 13 17.3 Regulation ............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 17.4 Etc ......................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Function of Crime Prevention(Capture) .........................................................................................14 18.1 Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 18.2 Car IO .............................................................................................................................. 14 18.3 Car Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 14 Addition of Conditions for Monitoring ...........................................................................................14 Control Earthquake.........................................................................................................................14 20.1 Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 20.2 Car IO .............................................................................................................................. 15 20.3 Car Adj ............................................................................................................................ 15 Rescue at Door-Open-Failure(Door-Open-Failure Monitoring) ...................................................15 Function of Examination for TAC50K Adjustment Data ...............................................................15
21 22 ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_16 (2009-03-19) ..............................................................................................15 23 Functions of Hall Lantern and Hall Chime(32bit) .........................................................................15 23.1
Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
2
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 3/29
23.2 Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 23.2.1 Lantern of assignment and arrival, Chime of assignment and arrival ..................... 15 23.2.2 Lantern of direction and arrival, Chime of arrival ................................................... 16 23.2.3 Lantern of arrival and Chime of arrival .................................................................... 16 23.3 Car I/O ............................................................................................................................ 16 23.4 Car adjustments .............................................................................................................. 16 24 Regulation TVA announcement order (supplement Overload announcement) (32BIT, 16BIT) ...17 25 Protective time for automatic driving(32BIT, 16BIT) ...................................................................17 25.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 25.2 Car adjustments .............................................................................................................. 17 25.3 Group adjustments .......................................................................................................... 17
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_17 (2009-04-17) ..............................................................................................17 26 (PC Monitoring – Addition contents for Centum city of SHINSEGAE) ......................................17 27 Supplement PUBEL, Hoistway Interlock Monitoring(16 and 32bit) .............................................17 27.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 27.2 Alteration .............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 27.3 Software compatibility.................................................................................................... 17 27.4 Car i/o ............................................................................................................................. 17 28 Apply revision about LVU/LVD stuck fault code ..........................................................................18
▪ V0R32O_1B .......................................................................................................................................18 29 Addition Interface Monitoring IO of TAC50K and transmittible IO of CPI (R) (32bit, 16bit) .....18 29.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 29.2 Addition IO ...................................................................................................................... 18 29.3 Description of Operation (Examples of Geared or MRL actual scenes) ....................... 18 30 Addition function of British Standard (BS) Fireman (32bit, 16bit) ................................................18 30.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 30.2 Car IO and set up ............................................................................................................ 18 30.3 Confirm operation ........................................................................................................... 19 31 Arrangement KS fire/firefighting IO..............................................................................................19
▪ V0R32O_1C .......................................................................................................................................20 32 Addition Hoistway Door Interlock Contactor Monitoring .............................................................20
33 34
35
32.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 32.2 Examination Operations and Cancellation...................................................................... 20 32.3 Car side IO and Set up.................................................................................................... 20 32.4 Error code....................................................................................................................... 20 Addition sign of confined passenger ..............................................................................................20 After check opening of BSLx switch of Brake Arm, output speed data with Drive ......................20 34.1 Watch at application ............................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 34.2 Regulation division ............................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 34.3 Confirm result ................................................................................................................. 21 34.4 Conditon of Danger......................................................................................................... 21 Addition IO for opening function in Inspection mode ...................................................................21 35.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 35.2 Sings for Door sorts ....................................................................................................... 21 35.3 Reference.............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Addition MC contactor monitoring ................................................................................................21
36 37 (fixing Branke type in TAC50K) ...................................................................................................21 38 DTOK (16BIT, 32BIT) ..................................................................................................................21 39 (supplement function of Sabbath) ..................................................................................................22 ▪ V0R32O_1D .......................................................................................................................................22 40 Addition sign SPLX of driving operation separately from Group..................................................22 40.1
Operation .............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
3
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
40.2
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 4/29
Car side IO ...................................................................................................................... 22
41 Addition Control for applying Flat-sill door ...................................................................................22 41.1 Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. 41.2 Lists for establishment in actual scenes ........................................................................ 22 41.3 Crations of adjustment ................................................................................................... 22 41.4 Condition for operation .................................................................................................. 23 41.5 Checking operation ......................................................................................................... 23 42 Supplement Functin of (PUBEL) Hoistway Interlock(16 and 32BIT, 2009-08-20) ......................23
▪ V0R32O_1E .......................................................................................................................................23 43 Addition information related to CRT inteerface .............................................................................23 44 Regulation delaying time for return at cancellation of HML IO ....................................................23 45 Addition PI Inhibition Control by IO .............................................................................................23 46 Addition Hall Lantern Inhibition Control by IO .............................................................................23 47 Supplement Function of Extended Door Time ...............................................................................24 47.1 47.2
Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Regulation ............................................................. 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
▪ V0R32O_1F........................................................................................................................................24 48 Alteration conditions for examination about (PUBEL) CDXF Rationality....................................24 49 Improved tolerance at power failure (1) ........................................................................................24 50 Addition PC Monitoring interface for both/penetration in actual scenes(1/2) ...............................24 ▪ V0R32O_1G .......................................................................................................................................24 51 Application Hall call lockout to Handicapped ................................................................................24 52 Addition description of “clause 34” (2009-11-02) .........................................................................24 53 Improved tolerance at power failure (2) ........................................................................................24 54 Arrangement compatibility of (PUBEL) hardware(2009-11-06) ...................................................25 55Addition examination about operation condition of MC1and MC2 contactor in EN81 Safety circuit25 ▪ V0R32O_1H .......................................................................................................................................25 56 Addition PC Monitoring interface for both/penetration in actual scenes(2/2) ...............................25 56.1 56.2
Outline ................................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Control and output condition of floor numbers .............................................................. 25 57 [Improvement] Improved tolerance at power failure (3) ...............................................................25
58 [Addition] IO for general purpose .................................................................................................25 59 [Alteration] ARD Function ............................................................................................................25 60 [Addition] Hall Lantern Function of Hall-Call for Handicapped (2009-11-24) ............................26 ▪ V0R32O_1J ........................................................................................................................................26 61 [Change] Function of preventing trick call ....................................................................................26 ▪ V0R32O_1K .......................................................................................................................................26 62 [Alteration] Condition for output sign of DZ, DZINS ...................................................................26 ▪ V0R32O_1L .......................................................................................................................................26 63 [Addition] Function of “Prohibition of driving immediately after Car-Top Ins cancellation” for protecting an inspector(CPUA) .............................................................................................................26 63.1 63.2 63.3
Function ................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다. Cancellation of operation, release moving-hold latch .................................................. 26 Establishment ....................................................... 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
64 [Alteration] Alteration conditions for S-Curve output into CPI(R) ...............................................27 ▪ Supplement .........................................................................................................................................28 65 Details for TAC50K 16bit Alteration ............................................................................................28 66 32BIT issues noticed ......................................................................................................................28 66.1 66.2 66.3
Problems occrued after Generic update ........................................................................ 28 Unstorage Specific(=job)file in USB after order ‘UDLS’ .............................................. 29 About deletion of registered hall-call at being distrubed automatic driving, refer “AST”.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
4
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 5/29
29 66.4 Happening of Car departure delaying ............................................................................ 29 66.5 PUBEL: Problem that it can not be exemined at applying fucntion of hoistway interlock monitoring to both/penetration specifications ................................................................................. 29 66.6 End ........................................................................ 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지 않습니다.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
5
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 6/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_10 (2008-10-15) 1
ADDITION OF DOOR CLOSE NUDING (DCN) I/O FOR DISCRETE INTERFACE DOOR
1.1
Outline
DCN discrete i/o is used when it has to be applied Reduced-reopen speed in door controller (for example, S8-K8) connecting by TAC50K controller and discrete. 1.2
Car I/O No
1
2 2.1
Symbol
DCN
I/O
Arrangement of signs
O
CN, file xx– rank x
Description
Remark
It becomes output (24V low active) at operation of Door Close Nudging, Nudging.
ADDITION EN81 FIREMAN Outline
Refer EN81 fireman spec. 2.2
Regulation No
2.3
Symbol
Range of regulatio n
Factory regulatio n
1
F16
0 or 18
18
2
F29
0–1
1
3
F10
0 – floors
1
4
F11
0 – floors
1
Description
Remark
Fire service type
0: No fire service 18: EN81 ※ reference: set up F16=15 as KS. EN81 fire Fireman type < Regulation value > If 0: EN81 fire return elevator, If 1: EN81 fire return (PH1) and fire-fighting(PH2) elevator all Regulate fire main landing ※ Regulate floor for return at operation of fire sensor FSX or Fire switch FSH1 (FSH1K). Regulate fire alternative landing ※ Regulate floor for return at operation of Fire sensor FSM
☞ After regulating Data, reset CPUA machinery board.
I/O No
Name of IO
I/O
1
FSH1
I
2
FSC1
I
3
FSM
I
4
FSX
I
Arrangement HN, file xx rank x (CN6-4) CN, file 03 rank 7 (CN9-A8)
Description
Remark
Fire service recall switch
Situated in Main landing
Fire fire-fighting switch
COP
IOC, file 08 rank 3
Fire sensor main
Return to F11 regulation floor
IOC, file 08 rank 4
Fire sensor auxiliary
Return to F10 regulation floor
CN, file 04 rank 7 (CN9-B3 or CN17-7B) CN, file 04 rank 5 (CN9-B1 or CN17-5B)
CSTO (Car Stop Switch Override) relay ON
5
CSTO
O
6
CSTOM
I
7
FSDD
O
CN, file 03 rank 8
8
FSMI
O
IOC, file 08 rank 4 (CNL9-4)
9
FSXI
O
XX, file XX rank X
9
FSI
O
IOC, file 10 rank 3 (CN2-A11)
Fire service indicator
10
FSRI
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service indicator
11
FS1I
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service phaser1 mode indicator
Active during PH1 operating
12
FS2I
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service phaser2 mode indicator
Active during PH2 operating
CSTO relay OFF monitoring Apply to only Fire service door delayed; fire-fighting mode Complete the implant to return floor (regulation value of F10) by Fire service Complete the implant to return floor (regulation value of F11) by Fire service
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Prohibition DOB when it becomes be active
※ Activation during operation of PH1 or PH2 ※ Activation after being active of PH1 active and until completed.
6
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 7/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
2.4
Precaution (Addition description at 10th on May in 2009)
① CSTO and CSTOM io have to be deleted in the scenes with not-applied of CSTO relay. ② To operate car in Phase2(fire-fighting), is next step after complete of return to Phase 1(control fire) through FSM or FSX sign, FSH1 has to be operated. ③ When FSM or FSX and FSH1 are operated together, return floor is applied as created in F10. ④ Fire sensor signs(FSM or FSX) does not be latched. ⑤ Phase2 Driving can only when it is regulated in F29=1. ⑥ To convert elevator from Phase2 driving to automatic driving elevator, it is possible only when car is moved to return floor and opend the door. That is, it would be maintain state of car in driving for firefighting even the power has changed to OFF/ON or fire sign become be in inactivation at floor except retrun floor. ⑦ When car can not close the door over 2 minutes in not-return-floor at phase1 active of FSDD, it become being active so it maintains untill doore is closed and at this time, DOB is prohibitted to be operated. Speed of closing door is reduced with taking this sign through discrete i/o in Door controller. 2.5 Etc ① It does not applied 2ER relay in IOC.( 2ER is only applied in KS.) ② To alter from KS fire/fire fighting function into BS fire/fire fighting function, FBSS is applied. (refer v0r32o-1b description) ③ TAC50K is equipped with KS, BS, EN81 fire/fire fighting function. ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_11 (2008-12-24) 3 3.1
ADDITION ANNOUNCEMENT OF OPENING AND SHUTTING OF DOORM (16BIT AND 32BIT) Outline
It is operated announcement when the door is opened and closed. 3.2
Regulation Factory regulation
No
Description
Remark
Regulate contents of announcement. 1) value (unit in bit) 0 – inactivate contents of announcement of relevant bit. 1 – activate contents of announcement of relevant bit. 2) Form CEF=bbbbbbbbbbbb
1
3.3
CEF
111011111111
※ Order is Bit0, Bit1 … Bit11 from the left.
3) Contents of announcement BitNo Contents 0 – Fire announcement 1 – (reservation) 2 – Nudging 3 – Opening and shutting of door 4 – Excess in load 5 – Automatic rescue (ARD) 6 – Announcement of arrival floor 7 – Parking or VIP 8 – (reservation) 9 – Break 10 – Driving direction 11 – (Reservation)
※ Opening and Shutting announcement. “The door is opened.” “The door is closed.”
Information about TVA announcement equipment
Before atleration: TVA-1A REV2.0 After alteration: Addition TVA-1A REV3.0 “registration CALL for Handicapped” and “Opening and shutting of door” announcement. ※ The voice “Opening and shutting of door” ROM (U6) of TVA can be managed separately because it has to be altered from 4M into 8M due to lack of memory.
3.4
Etc
Operation of announcement of Car-call (Handicapped) registration has lower rank than general statement announcement. 4
ALTERATION CONDITIONS OF “MONITERING OF ENCODE OPERATION”
At driving Run-bug and INS in machinery room, it is changed into possible to drive without relation with input.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
7
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 8/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
5
ADDITION SAFETY BYPASS FOR PREVENTING EFFECT FROM PIT WATER AT FIRE CONTROL OF KS
5.1
Outline
In firefighting appliance, it is operated as usual with bypass parts of safety lines established near PIT even when PIT is overflowed with water. < Composition and Control of Bypass> CASE1: Unnecessary to control software when waterproof equipments is applied CASE2: When it is bypassed using FS relay point of contact with intercepting pit safety point of contact, It is controlled relay appropriately only if car stopped. (It does not be encouraged) CASE3: When it is bypassed using relay of FSPSB and FSPSC with intercepting pit contact, do not make a temporary interception in safety lines by controlling instantly ON/OFF appropriately. 5.2
I/O Name of IO
No
6
7
I/O
1
FSPSB
O
2
FSPSC
O
3
FSPSD
O
Arrangement
Description
XX, file XX rank X XX, file XX rank X XX, file XX rank X
Remark
Fire service pit safety bypass
CASE3
Fire service pit safety cut
CASE3
Fire service pit safety delayed
CASE2
ADDITION SIGN OF OPENING OF DOOR IN MACHINERY ROOM (16BIT/32BIT) No
Name of IO
In/Outp ut
Arrangemen t of IO
Description
Remark
1
MRDO
Input
Set up in scene
Machine Room Door Open – input (when the door of machinery room is opened, it is input as DC24V low active)
Addition i/o, it is sign does not related with control.
2
MRDOI
Output
Set up in scene
Machine Room Door Open – indicator
Addition i/o
ADDITION FUNCTION OF 32BIT PC MONITOR “LOBBY RECALL”
Addition “Lobby recall” function (And alteration start parts of Monitoring.) 8
SUPPLEMENT CONTROL RELAVANT TO DOOR ZONE BYPASS Alteration of parts on software and hardware is to deal with selective application of “DZC-DZ1-DZ2 contactor module adhered to control part” or “SR module machinery board”. That is, both forms of circuits is applied in Generic after this. ▪ Next table is description for using “DZEC – DZECM – D1M – D2M” as Control IO Value of parts
Generic applying
Applying point
Impossi ble
First (before April in 2007)
Establishing Contactor in pane
Second (After April in 2007) Third (After December in 2008)
Possible (Note 1)
Composition
Remark Capacitor
Resistor
diode
1000uF/50V
1k -2W
UF4007( unit)
Make SR module as machinery board
47uF/50V
250 ohm
UF4007
Establishing Contactor in pane
330uF/50V
100-3W
UF4007 (2 units)
1
(Note2) ※ Different values of parts and circuits with the First.
(Note 1) Both Contactor and SM module, no matter which one is applied, it is possible to apply when specification of parts are equal with Circuit (Door zone bypass parts and R-C-D Composition). (Note 2) It has to be used product has better capacity than spec of LC1D09BL (type of low electric power) of Schneider as contactor of DZC and DZ1, DZ2. At control related to door zone bypass of safety circuit, it is developed that R-C-D circuit and programs with reflecting spec of this part. When additional alteration of circuit is needed in actual scenes, please ask for information to Engineering center and take a step because there are various complex factors. (Addition contents Cokim at 9th on December in)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
8
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 9/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
9
PROHIBITION CAR-CALL SERVICE FOR HANDICAPPED AT FIRE DRIVING OF KS. (16BIT/32BIT, 16-12-2008)
KS class 1.2. Alteration into CALL for Handicapped is prohibited from being registered and only general car-call is registered during fire driving, (Reference: 16bit generic is altered in V2.01M.) ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_12 (2008-12-26) 10
ADDITION FUNCTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT OF CAR-CALL REGISTRATION AND CANCELLATION (26-12-2008, 27-08-2008 HYWON)
10.1 Function According to revision of laws relevant with Handicapped, when the Car-call is registered and cancelled, it is announced to passengers through TVA announcement equipments. 10.2 Car adj. option Factory set up
No
Description
Remark
Regulate contents of Car call registration/cancellation announcement in Bit units. 1) Value (bit unit) 0 – In-actuate announcement contents of relevant bit. 1 – Actuate announcement contents of relevant bit. 2) Form CCV=bbbbbbbb 1
CCV
11010000
2
O43
9
※ The order is Bit0, Bit1 … Bit7 from the left.
3) Announcement Contents BitNo Contents 0 car-call announcement for Handicapped – “xx floor” (note) 1 car-call announcement for general - “xx floor” 2 Call registration announcement - “registration” 3 Call cancellation announcement - “cancellation” 4 Door direction announcement at registration and cancellation of call - “the front” or “backward” 5 Cancellation announcement for All calls - “all calls are cancelled” 6 (reservation) 7 (reservation)
Examples of Announcement: - “Second floor” - “Registration of Second floor” - “Cancellation of Second floor ” - “Registration of the front second floor” - “Cancellation of the front second floor”
Fixtures and Monitoring type
9: CAN interface fixtures
(Note) Announcement contents controlled by CCV has to be set based on 0-bit. 10.3 Condition for Operation -
Have to be O43=9, and CCV=1xxxxxxx. Program (both of CPU and ROM) of announcement equipment TVA-1A has to be over Rev3.0.
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_13 (2008-12-30) 11
ALTHERATION SAFETY LINE AND REGULATION IO AT APPLYING CPIR DIRVE (CPI50R, CPI100R) OF GERMANY(32BIT)
11.1 Outline In model applied CPI50R and CPI100R, hardware input as SAF3 is not applied. In this case, CPUA has to determine wheather anything unusual is occured in drive by using Drive fault information received through CAN serial instead of discrete i/o. 11.2 Regulation in Actual scenes When SAF3 sign does not be registered in i/o table, SAF2 would be deleted because CAN fault bit is used instead of SAF2 sign. To check the present condition of fault bit of CAN communication it is registered that Safety-3 Indicator (SAF3I) sign. Short 122 and 123 of CNHV3 in IOC 11.3 Definition of IO No
Name of sign
in/outp ut
Arrangemen t of IO
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark
9
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 10/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
1
SAF3
Input
File 4 rank 3
2
SAF3I
Output
File 5 rank 5
Safety line-3, Inactive when Drive is in fault.
(Note 1)
Safety line-3 indicator ‘1’ (green on IMS) when Drive is driving in normal state, ‘0’ (Gray) when it is broken.
(Note 2) New
※ SAF3I is a state of fault bit transmitted by Drive (CPIR)
Addition i/o
(Note 1) SAF3 has to be deleted in I/O table. (Note 2) SAF3I has to be added in i/o table. This sign is just for seeing state of fault bit. Reference IO: Sign for controlling CPIR and safety line at applying CPIR of Germany (Watch: Possible to regulate location of IO registration, Only, there are locations can not be operated)
■ Main monitoring sign of IO transmitted through communication with TAC50k in CPI (or CPIR) Korean/German) No
Name of sign
In/outp ut
Arrangement of IO
1
BRKAI
Output
Set up at scenes
Brake Acknowledge indicator(In case of CPIR) or Brake Lift OK indicator (In case of CPI)
2
MC1AI
Output
Set up at scenes
Motor contactor 1 (RK1) Acknowledge indicator
Only CPIR
3
MC2AI
Output
Set up at scenes
Motor contactor 2 (RK2) Acknowledge indicator
Only CPIR
4
BSMAI
Output
Set up at scenes
Brake limit switch Acknowledge indicator – main
Only CPIR
5
BSEAI
Output
Set up at scenes
Brake limit switch Acknowledge indicator - emergency
Only CPIR
6
DTOKI
Output
Set up at scenes
Drive Temperature OK indicator
7
DFLTI
Output
Set up at scenes
Drive fault indicator. ‘0’ when Drive(CPIR) goes well, ‘0’ (green) when it goes wrong.
8
DRVAI
Output
Set up at scenes
Drive Enable Acknowledge indicator V0R32O_2A
9
DRUNI
Output
Set up at scenes
Drive Run indicator
10
BRKEI
Output
Set up at scenes
Brake Energized indicator
Addition contents (24
th
Description
Remark
※Addition from
※ Addition from V0R32O_2A ※ Addition from V0R32O_2A
Common in CPI and CPIR
Common in CPI and CPIR Common in CPI and CPIR Indication opposite to SAF3I Common in CPI and CPIR Common in CPI and CPIR Only CPI
on 04 in 2009, Cokim)
11.4 Error code No
1
2
Code
2008
1506
Level
FALI
(FALI)
Way of cancel
When conditions are canceled automatic return
When conditions are canceled
Description
Remark
Break down (When SAF2is ‘true’ and SAF3I is ‘false’) of CPI Drive Occurs. When break down is occurred by CPI Safety line is cut off. Æ Being established to OPEN SAF3 contact of Safety line in HARDWARE and to deal with it in SOFTWARE.
Addition new
※ It is applied to mode without contact for SAF3 in drive like as CPI50R and CPI100R. Break down of Drive (Condition: when SAF2 is ‘true’ and SAF3 is ‘false’ in driving mode)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
10
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 11/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
automatic return 3
12
2013
Info.
When fault code is occurred in CPI, TAC50K records by taking information through CAN communication. Massage: "Drive fault via CAN"
-
Addition from V2.01K1.
ADDITION FUNCTION OF PRETORQUE (16BIT/32BIT) AT RELEVEL (WIRE-STRETCH)
In this function, 16bit generic is applied from 18-05- 2007: v1p01K (6) and 32bit generic is applied from v0r320_1a_beta_13. ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_14 (2009-01-15) 12.1 Outline Driving information of an elevator is output through square lamp of each Position Indicator. 12.2 Car adj. option No
Symbol
Regulatio n rage
Factory set up
Description
Remark
Set up of state information to output on the first square lamp of Position indicator.
1
Z21
0 - 65335
16
1) Activate output (unit of bit) 0 – In-activate state information of relevant bit 1 – Activate state information of relevant bit 2) State information for each BIT BitNo Contents Bit0 Parking Bit1 Overload Bit2 Independent, or ATT ※ diverting or moving Bit3 Out of service (break down) Bit4 Fire (fire, first/second firefighting) Bit5 Inspection, or Door Disconnect (Checking) Bit6 80% bypass Bit7 Automatic (Note) Bit8 Nudging Bit9 Sabbath Bit10 (the rest reservation)
Refer Z22, Z24
3) Establishing value In output, it is input by converting the sum of a bits for each bit into denary numbers.
2
Z22
0 - 65335
4
3
Z24
0 - 65335
41
※ Examples of outputting “examination” in state lamp3: To output “examination” when BIT1 and BIT3 BIT5 is set, establishing value is 1(00000001)+8(00001000)+32(00100000) and so, Z24=41. Creating state information at output on second square lamp of Position indicator. Creating state information at output on third square lamp of Position indicator.
Refer set up in Z21 Refer set up in Z21
(Note) When ‘Automatic` bit is unset, it is Parking and Independent/ATT, Out of service, Fire, Inspection/Door Disconnect, Nudging, Sabbath. 13
ADDITION FUCTION OF SABBATH (32BIT)
※ This function is different with function of Sabbath of 186C generic because it is according to specification of Sabbath of Israel. 13.1 Outline In certain culture, operating elevator on the Sabbath and so on, it can be operated automatically without touching by a person directly. 13.2 Operation 1) Make Sabbath key switch active in COP (or platform) of assigned Sabbath appliance.(SBTE = SBTEI = active) 2) The function starts when SBT1 (or SBT2, SBT3) being active on operation time of Sabbath established by Timer for 24hours.(SBT1 active) 3) Sabbath appliance is separated from group and so, hall call service is prohibited, EE is ignored. 4) If Car does not be in homing floor, it would be returned to homing floor. (Homing floor is arranged to H10) 5) It would be waited during H16 time established in homing floor with opening door. After time established is
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
11
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 12/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
passed, the door would be closed. 6) Car-call is automatically registered according to Sabbath function mode (Set up as SBT1 and SBT2, SBT3). Only, Lockout floor is except. -
Sabbath mode 1(SBT1): automatic car call registers registration in direction of up/down and service to each floor.
-
Sabbath mode 2(SBT2): automatic car call is registered in direction of up and direction of down goes straight till lowest floor.
-
Sabbath mode 3(SBT3): automatic car call is registered in direction of down and direction of up goes straight till highest floor.
7) Time for opening and closing door for each floor is followed by establishment on D36 and when the door is closed Buzzer bell(bi-b-bi) would be rang. 8) If Safety edge (SE) being in active during being closed door Safety edge (SE), it would be re-opened. 9) If Sabbath function is canceled, it would be returned to group after to service all of car-call registered now and would be converted into general driving. 13.3 Condition for operation 1) In case of applying SBTE I/O When SBTE and SBT1 (or SBT2, SBT3) are registered in I/O table, both being in active, Sabbath would be operated. 2) In case of not applying SBTE I/O When SBT1 (or SBT2, SBT3) is registered in I/O table, SBT1 being in active, Sabbath would be operated. ※ Priority order: SBT1 > SBT2 > SBT3 13.4 Car adj. I/O No
Name of Sign
In/O utput
Arrangement of IO
1
SBT1
I
CN, file x – rank x
2
SBT2
I
CN, file x –rank x
3
SBT3
I
CN, file x – rank x
4
SBTE
I
CN, file x – rank x
5
SBT1I
O
CN, file x – rank x
6
SBT2I
O
CN, file x – rank x
7
SBT3I
O
CN, file x – rank x
8
SBTEI
O
CN, file x – rank x
Sabbath Enable indicator.
9
SBTI
O
CN, file x – rank x
Sabbath Control Active 1 or 2 or 3 indicator
Description
Remark
Sabbath Control Active Signal 1 – Automatic registration call in direction of Up and Down Sabbath Control Active Signal 2 – Automatic registration call only in direction of Up and direction of down goes straight and moves to lowest floor. Sabbath Control Active Signal 3 – Automatic registration call only in direction of Up and direction of down goes straight and moves to highest floor. Sabbath Enable. Sabbath Control Active 1 indicator. When sign of SBTE is used, it is set if SBTE and SBT1 sign are input. Sabbath Control Active 2 indicator. It is set if SBTE and SBT2 sing are input. Sabbath Control Active 3 indicator. It is set if SBTE and SBT3 are input.
13.5 Car adj. Arrangement Arrangeme nt range 5 – 900 seconds
Factory Set up
Description
100
Sabbath door open time
H10
1 - 128
1
Homing return landing 1
H16
0 - 600
150
Homing door time
No
Symbol
1
D36
2 3
Remark
Common of establishing value of H10 Common of establishing value of H10
13.6 Reference Set up of lockout floor for Sabbath cannot be applied.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
12
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 13/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
14
(SUPPLEMENT OPERATION OF DZEC (32BIT, 16BIT))
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_15 (2009-03-10) 15 No
[INFORMATION] CAR ADJUSTMENT – O43 Symbol
Facto ry set up
Regulatio n rage
Description
Remark
Set up output of information for Fixture.
1
O43
0 - 65335
BitNo Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3
Content 0 = disable CE fixture, 1 = enable CE fixture 0 = disable Vista monitoring, 1 = enable Vista monitoring 0= creating Vista as RS485, 1 = Vista is created as RS232) 0 = CE fixtures to 485, 1 = CE fixtures to CAN
Bit4
0 = CE fixtures to CAN channel 2 (when it is not RS485), 1 = CE fixtures to CAN channel 1 0 = no DSC present, 1 = DSC present 0 = enable CE ADA audible announcements, 1 = disable CE ADA audible announcements (for DSC) 0 = enable CE normal audible announcements, 1 = disable CE normal audible announcements (only if DSC bit is set)
9 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7
16
CE fixture refers to exterior equipment adhered to TAC50K like as TVA, DSC.
FUNCTION OF NIGHT DRIVING AT SILENCE (NTSR)
Update description of contents and extension of functions on 2009-09-02. 16.1 Function To reduce noise of driving elevator at night, it is prohibited announcement output except for urgent (general announcements and buzzer). According to establishment operation is provided in driving at low speed. 16.2 Condition for operation Function of night driving at silence operates at “Time zone for establishment using inner clock” or “active of NTSR”. If NTSR being in active and Z41 = 0, Sound (announcement) output is prohibited and driving speed is regular speed and NTSRI being in active. If NTSR being in active and Z41 is not 0 , Sound (announcement) output is prohibited and driving speed is applied with speed established in Z41. In this case, NTSLI would be in active. ※ Alteration of speed has a prohibition condition. 16.3 Regulation a.
Car IO
No
Name sign
of
In/Out put
1
NTSR
I
2
NTSRI
O
3
NTSLI
O
Arrangement of IO CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x
Description
Remark
Night-time silence running; Control sign
16/32bit common
Indicator - Night-time silence running; restriction on sound (announcement) or active in case of driving at low speed. Indicator - Night-time silence low running; being in active only when it is operated with driving at low speed.
32bit only 32bit only
b. Car adjustment No
Symbol
1
M30
2
Z41
Regulation range 0-Speed of Contact
Factory set up Speed of Contact
0 - 1400
0
Description
Remark
Highest speed Set up speed at night driving at silence
c.
0: Driving in regular speed at night driving at silence 1 - 1400: Speed at night driving
Set up of inner time zone (refer v0r32o_1e)
16.4 Etc ① Operation of NTSR can be operated by creating time zone for operation by using inner clock of CPUA machinery board or canceling and operating by hand with adhering switch (or io of exterior timer) to CDP.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
13
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 14/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
② Only prohibition on output of announcement output(general announcement or buzzer) is possible in function of night driving at silence of 186C. 17
FUNCTION OF CRIME PREVENTION (CAPTURE)
17.1 Function If the function of crime prevention being operated, it would be gone straight to return floor without opening door after canceling car-call registered instantly and waited with being in closed door. Until ‘waiting with closing door (CAPTD)’ being in active, it has to be waited with closed door. To cancel function of crime prevention, it has to be re-thrown all of control parts or make sign of ‘cancel of a function of crime prevention (CAPTR)’ active. < Operation and Cancellation> If a CAPT sign being active, a function of crime prevention is operated. At cancel of function, it is canceled with CAPTR being in active by applying with registration of CAPTR i/o and it is also canceled by only CAPT sign being in inactive when it did not be registered. ※ A function of crime prevention is provided in discrete i/o or PC Monitoring (CRT). 17.2 Car IO No
Name sing
of
In/Out put
Arrangement of IO CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x
1
CAPT
I
Capture recall input
2
CAPTR
I
3
CAPTD
I
CN, file x – x
Capture door open Capture operation - indicator Capture car at return landing ※ If return floor does not being established, it would be active in stop at optional floor.
4
CAPTI
O
CN, file x – rank x
5
CAPTF
O
CN, file x – rank x
Description
Remark
Capture recall reset
Option
17.3 Car Adjustment No 1
18
Symbol O36
Arrangeme nt range
Factory set up
1-128
1
2
O37
0-2
0
3
O38
0-1
0
4
O39
0-1
0
5
O40
0-1
0
Description
Remark
Establishing return floor of crime prevention Selection direction of door open at return floor of crime prevention 0 = Front 1 = Rear 2 = Front and Rear Selection way of door open at return floor of crime prevention 0 = waiting with closed door until CAPTD is input 1 = waiting with opened door until function of crime prevention is cancelled Selection whether or not you ignore function of crime prevention at operation IND function 0 = No 1 = Yes Selection whether or not you ignore function of crime prevention at Car Stop Switch (CST) being in active 0 = No 1 = Yes
ADDITION STATE FOR MONITORING
Output state of ‘completion of return’ and ‘driving’ of ARD. 19
CONTROL EARTHQUAKE
19.1 Function If an earthquake being occurred by earthquake sensor, it would be implanted near floor and waited with opened door. After this it has to be canceled to drive automatically. If a fire being occurred during controlling earthquake, it is done fire control operation at speed of examination.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
14
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 15/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
※ Function of an earthquake is provided in discrete i/o or PC Monitoring (CRT). 19.2 Car IO Name of Sing
No
In/Out put
1
SEIS
I
2
SEISR
I
3
(SCWD)
I
4
SEISI
O
5
SEISF
O
6
(SCWDI)
O
7
SEIOI
O
Arrangement of IO CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x CN, file x – rank x
Description
Remark
Seismic switch input Seismic reset switch input Seismic cwt derailed – input
☜ watch: Inversion sign
Option ; possible to select Option ; possible to select
Seismic - indicator Seismic landing - indicator seismic counterweight derailed – indicator seismic other active options (Ind Srv) - indicator
19.3 Car Adj No
20
Symbol
1
M76
2
-
Arrangeme nt range
Factory set up
0-200
0
Description
Remark
Appointed reducing speed when counter weighter is broken at controlling earthquake
RESCUE AT DOOR-OPEN-FAILURE (DOOR-OPEN-FAILURE MONITORING)
If Door-Open-Failure being occurred at floor registered Car call, car would be moved automatically to direction operated finally and the floor can be stopped in and allow passengers to get off by opening door. It is operated only once. 21
FUNCTION OF TAC50K ADJUSTMENT DATA EXAMINATION
If a value being out of range being existed when checking early value at Generic update, it would be make regular value into minimum value and it would be initial state. ※ If X25 being established over 3, it would be altered to 0 with re-input of power. (Watch: X25 is for temporary action and so it is not desirable because ways of arrangement would be altered after this.) ▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_16 (2009-03-19) 22
FUNCTION OF HALL LANTERN AND HALL CHIME (32BIT)
22.1 Outline Hall Lantern and Hall Chime have three functions like following. z z z
Assignment and arrival lantern, assignment and arrival lantern chime Direction and arrival lantern, arrival lantern chime Arrival Lantern and Arrival chime
22.2 Function 22.2.1 Assignment and arrival lantern, assignment and arrival chime Set up: Z23 = 1, X15 = 2, (X21 = 2), X18 = X19 = 4 ①
Lanterns of relevant floor of machinery appliance assigned Hall call is lighten in a lantern is appropriate for call direction, (if there is a hall chime) and hall chime is rang once at assignment of hall call.
②
If Car arrives in direction of up answering to hall call, lantern in direction of up from relevant floor would be twinkled periodically until the door closed, and hall chime is rang once at reducing point. If Car arrives in direction of down, the lantern in direction of down from relevant floor would be twinkled periodically until the door is closed, hall chime is rang twice at reducing point.
③
If assigned machinery appliance of Hall call being altered Hall call, assigned hall lantern and assigned hall chime of a car operates like when they are assigned at first.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
15
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 16/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
22.2.2 Direction and arrival lantern, arrival chime Set up: Z23 = 2, X11 = 2, X15= 2, (X21= 2), X18 = X19 = 4 ①
When the car moving, lantern for each floor indicates direction of driving. When the car driving in direction of down, lantern (HLD) for each floor would be on and when the car driving in direction of up, lantern (HLU) for each floor would be on.
②
At arrival of the car to the floor, relevant lantern of relevant floor would be twinkled and it is kept until an arrow in direction of driving of HPI is turned off or the door is closed. Operation of Lantern is in accord with point of On/OFF for an arrow of HPI in direction.
③
If the Car arriving in direction of up with answering to hall call, hall chime rings once at point or reducing speed. If the Car arriving in direction of down, hall chime rings twice at point of reducing speed.
22.2.3 Arrival lantern and arrival chime Set up: Z23 = 3, X15= 2, (X21= 2), X18 = X19 = 4 ①
When the car arriving the floor by hall call, lantern (HLU/HLD) of relevant floor in direction of driving would be twinkled.
②
Lantern of relevant floor would be twinkled periodically until the door closed.
③
When the Car arrives in direction of up answering to hall call, hall chime rings once at point of reducing speed. When the Car arrives in direction of down, hall chime rings twice at point of reducing speed.
22.3 Car I/O No
Name of sign
In/Output
1
HLUn
O
2.
HLDn
O
3
HLURn
O
4
HLDRn
O
5
HGn
O
6
HGRn
O
Arrangement Of IO HN, file x – rank x HN, file x – rank x HN, file x – rank x HN, file x – rank x HN, file x – rank x HN, file x – rank x
Description
Remark
Indicating in direction of up of Hall lantern in front side of n floor Indicating in direction of down of Hall lantern in front side of n floor Indicating in direction of up of Hall lantern in backward of n floor Indicating in direction of down of Hall lantern in backward of n floor Hall chime in the front side of n floor Hall chime in the backward of n floor
22.4 Car adjustments No
Symbol
Regulation range
Factory set up
1
X11
0-2
2
2
X15
0-4
2
3
X18
0 – 20
4
4.
X19
0 - 20
4
5
X20
0-4
3
6
Z23
0-3
0
Description Arrow type 0 = Direction arrows 1 = Preference arrows 2 = Direction and Preference Type of lantern in front side– set up type of lantern used in front side door 0 = no lantern 1 = car lantern 2 = hall lantern 3 = car lantern and hall lantern Off time of lantern– regulate the off-time in on-and-off operation of lantern and chime On time of lantern– regulate the on-time in on-and-off operation of lantern and chime Type of lantern in backward – regulate type of lantern in backward door 0 = no lantern 1 = car lantern 2 = hall lantern 3 = car lantern and hall lantern Set up function of Hall lantern 0 = arrival lantern and arrival chime 1 = assignment and arrival lantern, assignment and arrival chime
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark If it is set up as Z23=2, it has to be set up as X11=2.
If it is set up as Z23=2, it has to be set up as X11=2.
16
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 17/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
2 = direction and arrival lantern, arrival chime 3 = arrival lantern (be twinkled periodically) and arrival chime
23
REGULATION OF PRIORITY ORDER OF TVA ANNOUNCEMENT (SUPPLEMENT OF OVERLOAD ANNOUNCEMENT) (32BIT, 16BIT)
Laws: Overload announcement has to announce continuously until the carload is under overload. Supplement: There can be situations when overload announcement is operated discontinuously because of alteration of priority order of announcement according to change in condition of an elevator, the priority order of announcement is set up as following. z
24
Power failure > ARD > Fire > OVERLOAD > NUDGING > Opening/closing of Door > Self motor > Arrival to floor > PARKING > Break Down > Direction of Driving
PROTECTING TIME FOR AUTOMATIC DRIVING (32BIT, 16BIT)
24.1 Outline If the Car could not be driven automatically due to activation of SE or DOB and etc over establishing time of AST, it is stopped to operate (delete registration of hall call) and returned to automatic driving when the condition is reversed. 24.2 Car adjustments It is set up D11 = 1 as a standard. 24.3 Group adjustments Regulation AST
Unit 1/16
Regulation range
Factory set up
600 62400
1000 Æ 62400
Decimal or 0 – FFFF(h) hexadecimal
0H Æ 0400H
Description
Remark
Time for protecting automatic service– If the driving could not be done over established time, operation would be stopped and returned to automatic driving when the condition is reversed. Control State – 1
Set up from 38 seconds to 65 minutes.
Set up unit of Bit Bit10: If it is ‘1’ (Automatic Service protection Time), AST would be in inactivate. Description: If it is established CS1 = 0H , AST = 1000, and it is passed about 1 minute with condition when the car at automatic stop can not be driven in regular state, all of hall call registered would be cancelled. Moreover, AST does not be related to yes or no of application of Nudging and it affects only to time. ※ Alter alteration of Data, do WRT command in Group remote fast. CS1
▪ V0R32O_1A_BETA_17 (2009-04-17) 25
(PC MONITORING – ADDITION CONTENTS FOR CENTUM CITY OF SHINSEGAE)
26
PUBEL, SUPPLEMENT HOISTWAY INTERLOCK MONITORING(16 AND 32BIT)
26.1 Outline The problem when CDX or DZP relay, added for the function of Hoistway Interlock Monitoring among reguirements by PUBEL, operated with effecting HDIF relay and it is managed Hall door circuit and Car door as short in part position of control part optionally, software could not detect that it is short state is improved and numbers of additional relay is reduced. 26.2 Alteration Hardware: CDX relay is deleted and door zone bypass circuit is composed of only DZP and HDIF relay. ※ Reference map before alteration: 7KFEA005-021, after alteration: 7KFEA008-22, 7KFEA008-24 Software: alteration of relevant control software. ※ Refer additional matters in 16bit generic – v2.01f about basic matters 26.3 Software compatibility Enable apply to both of before and after alteration of Hardware. Only, If CDX relay does not be applied, it has to deleted CDX(F/R), CDX(F/R)M in working i/o table. 26.4 Car i/o Symbol
I/O
Arrangement sign
of
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark
17
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 18/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
In Door zone, Set (Low active, Green) DZP
O
IOC, file 10 – rank 1
Door zone pubel – bypass
※ only PUBEL
Out of Door zone, Reset (Gray) Applying DC24V contactor
DZPM
I
IOC, file10 – rank 2
Door zone pubel monitoring – bypass
˙ ˙ ˙˙ CDXF
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 7
Car door auxiliary contact – front
˙ ˙ ˙˙ ˙ CDXFM
I
IOC, file 9 – rank 8
Car door auxiliary contact monitoring – front ※ only PUBEL
˙˙˙˙ CDXR
I
IOC, file 8 – rank 3
Car door auxiliary contact – rear
˙˙˙˙ ˙ CDXRM
I
IOC, file 8 – rank 4
Car door auxiliary contact monitoring – rear ※ only PUBEL
HIFD
I
IOC, file x – rank x
Hoistway interlock fault door
※ only PUBEL
For an inspector, If it being in Active, it is output opened floor with something wrong stored through Remote-fast.
HI(no)
I
HN car side, file x – rank 6
Hoistway interlock fault door
※ only PUBEL
(no) indicates a floor and the lowest floor is indicated by ‘1’.
※ only PUBEL
※ only PUBEL
※ only PUBEL
Applying AC220V contactor
Applying AC220V contactor
˙ ˙ ˙ ˙˙ CDXFM, ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ CDXR, ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ CDXRM ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ are not applied anymore because CDXF(R) contactor is not applied from now. (17-APR-2009) ※ I/O of CDXF,
27
IMPROVED APPLICATION ABOUT LVU/LVD STUCK FAULT CODE
▪ V0R32O_1B 28
ADDITION INTERFACE MONITORING OF TRANSMITTING IO OF TAC50K AND CPI (R) (32BIT, 16BIT)
28.1 Outline When an elevator is driven, with information transmitted with TAC50K and CPI®, it could easily be detected problems as incapability and driving delay and so on. (16bit generic can only confirm information transmitted in CPI®) 28.2 Additional IO Addition of DRVAI, DRUNI, BRKEI ☞ Refer relevant description in V0R32O_1A_BETA_13 (2008-12-30) 28.3 Description of Operation (Examples in Geared or MRL scenes) Preparation for driving (DRUNI) Æ brake open possible (BRKAI) Æ brake open operation (BRKEI) Æ start of driving ① To prepare driving, it is transmitted through DRUNI sign CPI in TAC50K. ② If CPI is taken DRUNI, it would throw excitation current to motor and send BRKAI to TAC50K at completion. ③ If TAC50K is received BRKAI in CPI, it would open brake and send BRKEI to CPI. ④ Car start. 29
ADDITION FUNCTION OF BRITISH STANDARD (BS) FIREMAN (32BIT, 16BIT)
Added it because a part of code for function of BS fireman to CPUA is omitted. 29.1 Outline When the fire emergency recall switch adhered to wall of platform in lobby, Car would be driven and returned to lobby floor and then BS fireman have to open the door and wait. After about 2 seconds, it is changed automatically into function of first firefighting is equal function with first firefighting of KS and it is waited to the fireman. Fire announcement is started immediately with operation of FSH1, re-announced at arrival of Car to return floor. 29.2 Car IO and set up Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark
18
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 19/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
FBSS
Output
IOC, file 10 – rank 2
Fireman British Standard Start
It is only registered to IO table, and any connection with hardware is done.
FSH1
Input
HN, file x – rank x
Sing of fire-control-operation
Car / Group io
FSH1K
Input
HN, rile x – rank x
Sing of fire-control-operation
Car io
Set up F16=15, F10=1 (Lobby floor), application of CSTO relay is an option, do not use 2ER relay. 29.3 Confirmation of operation When FSH1 be in active and Car return to floor for shelter and open the door completely, it has to be confirmed that FBSS be in active with green. If FSMLI be in active and FBSS does not be in active, move FBSS to other i/o port. (If you added i/o to IO, some of i/o cell may not be operated.) 30
ARRANGEMENT IO OF KS FIRE/FIREFIGHTING No
Name of IO
I/O
Arrangement
Description
1
FSH1
I
HN, file xx rank x
Fire service recall switch
2
FSH1K
I
HN, file xx rank x
Fire service recall switch
3
FSC1
I
4
FSC2
I
5
FSM
I
6
FSX
CN, file 03 rank 7 (CN9-A8) CN, file 03 rank 8 ( )
Remark Be situated in Main landing ; it can be registered in IOC or CN ; Car or group side i/o Be situated in Main landing ; ; can be registered in IOC or CN ; Car side i/o
KS First fire-fighting switch
COP
KS second fire-fighting switch
COP
IOC, file 08 rank 3
Fire sensor - main
Return to F11 established floor
I
IOC, file 08 rank 4
Fire sensor - auxiliary
Return to F10 established floor
Car Stop Switch Override ; CSTO relay
For COP E.stop bypass. Active at fire driving or firefighting driving, cancel is possible only when the car is stopped.
7
CSTO
O
CN, file 04 rank 7 (CN9-B3 or CN17-7B)
8
CSTOM
I
CN, file 04 rank 5 (CN9-B1 or CN17-5B)
Car Stop Switch Override Monitoring
9
FSCDM
O
IOC, file 04 rank 6
Fire service car door (bypass) monitoring
10
FSCDB
I
IOC, file 04 rank 7
Fire service car door bypass
11
FSI
O
XX, file XX rank X
Control fire or firefighting driving
12
FSRI
O
XX, file XX rank X
Control fire or firefighting driving
13
FSMLI
O
XX, file XX rank X
Output announcement of completion of fire return
14
FS1I
O
XX, file XX rank X
Control fire operating
15
FS2I
O
XX, file XX rank X
First, second firefighting operating
16
FSMI
O
XX, file XX rank X
17
FSXI
O
XX, file XX rank X
18
FSPSB
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service pit safety bypass
CASE3
19
FSPSC
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service pit safety cut
CASE3
20
(FSPSD)
O
XX, file XX rank X
Fire service pit safety delayed
CASE2
Control fire operating and returning to Min floor (intended) announcement Control fire operating and returning to altered floor (intended) announcement
Operation same with FSI Active at fire control and brake closed state in DZ of return floor. Active at fire control and not in first and second fire
Set up of F10 Set up of F11 (Note1)
(Note2)
(Note1), (Note2) v032o_1a_beta11 refer alteration details
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
19
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 20/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
▪ V0R32O_1C 31
ADDITION HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK CONTACTOR MONITORING
31.1 Outline When only one of HDFR1 and HDFR2 contactor, are composements to EN81 Safety circuit is fused, it is announced through producing fault code because it can not be detected immediately. 31.2 Examination operation and cancellation Only when HDIF(x) i/o have registered function is operated, and at stopped state, when the door in front side and rear side is opened and contactor point is in active, register fault code and break down it permanently. Cancellation of break down is done by reset of machinery board. 31.3 Car side IO and set up I/O
Arrangement of Sign
HDIF1
Input
IOC, file xx – rank x
Hoistway Door Interlock contactor 1 – Front
24V low active
HDIF2
Input
IOC, file xx – rank x
Hoistway Door Interlock contactor 2 – Front
24V low active
HDIR1
Input
IOC, file xx rank x
Hoistway Door Interlock contactor 1 – Rear
24V low active
HDIR2
Input
IOC, file xx – rank x
Hoistway Door Interlock contactor 2 – Rear
24V low active
Symbol
–
Description
Remark
These signs takes A contact of HDFR2 contactor and HDFR1 composing EN81 Safety circuit with IOC. 31.4 Error code Code 2017
32
Level FD
Way to Description
cancellation -
Hoistway Door Interlock contactor stuck (HDIF1, HDIF2)
Remark Cancel by reset CPUA board.
승객갇힘 신호 추가 I/O
Arrangement of Sign
Description
EMCB
Input
CN, file xx – rank x
Sing detecting COP emergency button – Input, EMergency Cop Button
EMCBI
Output
xxx, file xx – rank x
Symbol
Sing detecting COP emergency button – Output, EMergency Cop Button Indicator
Remark
DC24V low active
DC24V low active
Operation: active when EMCB is in active. Sing detecting COP emergency button – Output, EMergency Cop Fault Indicator EMCFI
Output
Opeartion: active when EMCB is in active and it is broken down.
33
DC24V low active
xxx, file xx – rank x ※ no 16bit
MAKE SPEED DATA OUTPUT WITH DRIVE AFTER CONFIRM OPEN OFBSLX SWITCH IN BRAKE ARM
33.1 Watch at application
‼ Addition content: v0r32o_1L.
If generic over this version is applied, it can be taken place unnecessary starting delay by kinds of machines, so confirm starting condition of driving and regulated values of Car side adjustment - M43. Also, if there is an application error in signs of BSLM and BSLE, car cannot be start after generic update.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
20
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 21/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
33.2 Adjustment classification a. Structures or kinds of machines with actually machinery limit switch (BSLM, BLSE) in break arm of Motor: Æ Set up M43=0. b. Structures without Limit switch (It includes a product feedbacks BSLM signs with monitoring current of Output line by solenoid in board.): Æ Regulate in actual scenes or set up M43= above15. In this structure, matters to be attended to are set up with considering pick current time in which brake solenoid can operate obviously. 33.3 Confirmation of Results Before and after of start of Car and before open of brake arm, If the motor rotates, Make M43 larger to delay Output of speed data until the arm is opened completely. ※ Refer in development: Tower number6appliance – brake during taking 600m/min test is output with gray when it is stopped. (it have not confirmed yet whether it is A Contact or B Contact) 33.4 Condition of danger Feedback sign of Brake limit switch can be applied only for three cases below. a. In case of applying both of BSLM and BSLE b. In case of applying only BSLM※ If only one between them is applied, it is needed BSLM is applied, Unless it did not done, Accident can occur because break down in related circuit can not be detected.) c. In case of not-applied both of two signs either. 34
ADDITION IO FOR FUCNTION OF DOOR-OPEN IN INSPECTION MODE
34.1 Outline If Car is stoppeed at floor level with INS state, the door can be opend by pushing ‘door-open-button’(or additional equipment has same function like that) adhered to car-top box. 34.2 Sign for kinds of Door a. Symbol INSDZ
Type of Discrete IO: DLL or S8-K8 Open the door by mixing of INSDZ sign and ‘door-open-button’ together. I/O
Arrangement of sign
Output
CN, file xx – rank x
Description Inspection and Door-zone ※ Active when it is in state of INS, car is in door zone
Remark DC24V low active
b. Type of CAN serial Open the door by mixing of Communication (CAN serial flag) is output from CPUA and ‘Door-Open-button’ together. 34.3 Reference There is alteration of hardware and software of DCU2C door controller. 35
ADDITION MC CONTACTOR MONITORING
After Car is stopped, confirm whether the MC contactor is separated well, if it does not separated in 2 seconds, produce falut code 1087 and cut off safety lines. (refer: it is applied only to CPI(K)) Code 1087
36
Level FD
Way for Description
cancellation TFR or reset
After Car is stopped, MC contactor does not separated. Output massage: MCD Contact Fail- Not Running
Remark Estimate state of MCE and MCD
(FIXING BRAKE TYPE IN TAC50K)
Set up brake type automatically in discrete in TAC50K 32bit. (If M88 is 0, CAN brake type, 1 then, it is Discrete type) 37
DTOK (16BIT, 32BIT)
Classify it Discrete ‘DTOK’ and Serial ‘DTOK’, input IOC as discrete i/o, Serial DTOK takes it through CAN communication from CPIK(R) ※ Supplement in 186C is applied to generic v2p01T.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
21
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 22/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
38
(SUPPLEMENTATION OF FUNCTION OF SABBATH)
Supplement it because automatic call does not created when first return floor is established as highest floor. ▪ V0R32O_1D 39
ADDITION SPLX IS SIGN OF INDEPENDENT OPERATION SEPERATED FROM GROUP
39.1 Operation If one of them, “D2S of CTR” or “SPLX of COP(simple supervisor)”, is true, D2S would be in active (24V low active) and so, D2S relay would ON. ※ According to characters of scenes, selet A contact, B contact as connection of D2S relay, apply to change into Group driving from Simplex, or into Simplex from Group. ※ In CRT screen, icon for this is DPX. 39.2 Car side IO I/O
Arrangement of sign
SPLX
Input
CN, file xx – rank x
After separating Group, simplex operation
D2S
Output
IOC, file xx – rank x
Duplex (or Group) to Simplex operation
Symbol
Description
Remark DC24V low active DC24V low active
㈜
(Note) 16bit is added in generic v1.01k(1), it can be operated only in PC Monitoring (CRT).
40
ADDITION CONTROL FOR APPLICATION OF FLAT-SILL DOOR
40.1 Outline Control items for applying products appropriate for “applying range and a standard for subsitute examination of Flat sill of FUJITEC Korea” is classified with three parts as below.
① Control over an error of implant ② Control over Re-leveling ③ Control over Pre-opening 40.2 Items for establishments in actual scenes ① Application of Governor encoder ② Application of New Landing vane and support ③ Application of New Landing sensor ④ Application of Load-weigher (Applying digital load weigher instead of three of load switches in Geared scene) 40.3 Adjustment set up A. I/O (Car side) Symbol
IO
LVRQ
Input
RLVRQ
Input
IO Table
Description
IOC, file 10 –rank 2 IOC, fiel 10 – rank 3
Remark
Leveling request
CN2-B10
Note1
Re-leveling request
CN2-A11
Note2
(Note1) (Note2) A demand for asking to engineering center if it is applied to IO out of appointed positions -> To minimize effects by Noise, lead it to apply to placed applied with RC filter and 24V low active. Flow of signs: Car-top Æ T-cable Æ IOC CN2
B. Adjustment Adjustment
Unit
Adjustment range
Factory set up
M72
FPM
0-20
3
Re-level speed
M31
FPM
0-20
6
Leveling speed
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark
22
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 23/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
M35
FPM/sec^2
100-800
100
P16
CPF
0-65535
xxxx
P23
-
0 - 65353
0 Æ xxxx
Final Stop Rate
It is distance value between Photo sensor LVU and LVD and floor vane edge, four times of count number of motor encoder
< P23 calculating formula: Tower number1appliance uppdiaer side – MRL >
PR (Pulse Rate) =
Tm diameter*3.14 TM직경*3.14 Ratee of deceleration*Velocity_encoder_resolution 감속비 *Velocity _ encoder _ resolution
330mm *3.14159 2 ( ) * 2048 pulse 1
=
PR is 0.253, so P23 = ((25mm / PR) * 4) = ((25 / 0.253) * 4) = 395
= 0.253 (mm/pulse)
※ refer: deceleration rate is TM or can be different to Roping.
40.4 Condition for Operation Only when LVRQ and RLVRQ is registered in IO table precision control function of re implant of 10mm and implant of 5mm is operated. 40.5 Examination in Operation Examination in Leveling sign: when it is set up as M16=5(only to adjust to low speed) and when the car is out of door zone then LVRQ and RLVRQ sign is output gray in IMS, when it entered to door zone, LVRQ and RLVRQ sign is output with changing into green in IMS. Just before implant RLVRQ is output with gray in 10mm, LVRQ is output with gray in 5mm.
In condition of 0% and 100% of load, it is done driving in direction of up and down with automatic driving, and VANE is fixed to appropriate position and it made be set in ± 5mm. 41
SUPPLEMENT FUNCTION OF (PUBEL) HOISTWAY INTERLOCK (16 AND 32BIT, 2009-08-20)
In controller flowing PUBEL code, Applying function of hoistway interlock examination, apply above v0r32o-1d to scenes of both/panetrate hole. ※ Supplement in 186C is applied to generic v2p01T. ▪ V0R32O_1E 42
ADDITION INFORMATION RELATED TO CRT INTEERFACE a. To deal with System “power-standby” , Output information of ‘CLFS’. b. Make into initial state once about lockout data and call registered by CRI in Fire mode.
43
ADJUSTMENT RETURN DELAYING TIME AT CANCELLATION OF HML IO
Altered delaying time into 10 seconds from 3 seconds when Homing Lobby (HML) operation is cancelled (inactive). 44
ADDITION CONTROL OF PI INHIBITION BY IO
Function of prohibition or allowance of output of Position indicator(PI) in rear side or front by using Discrete i/o. I/O (Car side) Symbol
I/O
Arrangement of sign
Description
Remark
PIBHF
Input
xxx, file xx – rank x
Position Indicator Blank Hall - Front
DC24V low active
PIBHR
Input
xxx, file xx – rank x
Position Indicator Blank Hall - Rear
DC24V low active
Watch at application: A board added this function is applied because software alteration is also in HN machinery board. 45
ADDITION CONTROL OF HALL LANTERN INHIBITION BY IO
Function of prohibition or allowance of output of hall lantern in rear side or front by using Discrete i/o.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
23
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 24/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
I/O (Car side) Symbol
Arrangement of sign
I/O
Description
Remark
LTIF
Input
xxx, file xx – rank x
Lantern Inhibition - Front
DC24V low active
LTIR
입력
xxx, file xx –rank x
Lantern Inhibition - Rear
DC24V low active
Addition content below 24-Sept-2009: 46
SUPPLEMENT FUNCTION OF EXTENDED DOOR TIME
46.1 Outline Function of extending time for open-door in appointed floor. Extended time for open-door is sum of basic time for open-door and extended time for open-door. Open-door Nudging function is prior to function of extending open-door. 46.2 Set up
ADJ.
UNIT
RANGE
DEFAULT
DEFINITIOIN
D29
-
0–1
0
D30
100ms
10-300
30
Extended Door Time Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Extended Door Time
D31
floor
1-128
1
Extended Door Time Landing
REMARK
▪ V0R32O_1F 47
ALTERATION CONDITION FOR EXAMINATION OF RATIONALITY OF (PUBEL) CDXF
Before alteration: examine at all times After alteration: except INS. ※ CDXF and CDXR contactor, applied at PuBEL code, does not be applied from a product produced after on April in 2009.
48
IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BREAK DOWN AT POWER FAILURE (1)
IMPROVED TOLERANCE AGAINST BREAK DOWN THAT OCCURS WHEN AN ELEVATOR IS STOPPED SUDDENLY BY PROWER FAILURE DURING DRIVING, MINIMIZE CONDITION FOR CONFINED PESSENGERS. (1/3차) 49
ADDTION PC MONITORING INTERFACE FOR BOTH/PENETRATE HOLE IN CHENES(1/2)
Refer application: It is restricted to interface to 32 floors through problems of interval time in transmitting by subdivided control of TAC50K and CRT Communication, it is applied temprarily as “GENERIC Corresponding to power failure”. (It is possible to front64floors in former generic) ※ normalize in ‘v0r32o_1h’ (2009-11-13). ▪ V0R32O_1G 50
APPLYING HALL CALL LOCKOUT FOR HANDICAPPED
Applying function of ‘handicapped Hall call lockout’ 2009-11-09 51
By PC Monitoring or FL(xx) IO. ※ Final compeleted date:
ADDITION DESCRIPTION “ARTICLE 34” (2009-11-02)
Title: Output speed data by Drive after confirm open in BBLx switch of Brake arm. 52
IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BREAK DOWN AT POWER FAILURE (2)
MINIMIZE CONDITION FOR CONFRONTED PESSENGERS BY IMPROVING TOLERANCE AGAINST BREAK DOWN OCCURRINGIN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OF AN ELEVATOR DURING DRIVING BY POWER FAILURE OR SOMETHING. (SECOND/THIRED)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
24
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 25/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
53
ARRANGEMENT OF COMPATIBILITY OF (PUBEL) HARDWARE (2009-11-06)
Arrangement and examination about compatibility between softewares in case of applying only DAP contactor or both of DZP / CDXF(R) (possible to apply in any of both cases and no alteration in function). ※ precaution 1: refer “article 27” ※ precaution 2: certainly delete signs of CDXF and CDXR IO when there are no sing of CDXF and CDXR relay (contactor). 54
ADDITION EXAMINATION OF STATE OF MC1 AND MC2 CONTACTOR OPERATION IN EN81 SAFETY CIRCUIT
In products for EN81, MC contactor is applied with two as MC1 and MC2, and examine condition of eah contactor and if irretional state is occurred, record it to ‘1088’ as break down and maintain state of permanent break down. ※Refer description in “article 36 addition of MC contacotr monitoring” Code
Level
Way for Description
canclleation
1087
FD
TFR or reset
1088
FD
TFR or reset
Remark
When Car is stopped, Contact point of MC or MC1 contactor does not separated. Output message: MCD Contact Fail- Not Running When Car is stopped, Contact point of MC or MC2 contactor does not separated. Output message: MCD Contact Fail- Not Running
Value condition of MCE and MCD. Value condition of MCE and MCPD.
Arrangement of COK: Completion of Lockout of Handicapped call, completed to 32 floors of both/penetrate type CRT ※ To solve partial problem, v0r32o_1f and 1g have vision applied parts of scenes, it may different with v0r32o_1g created in 10소 on November in 2009. ▪ V0R32O_1H 55
ADDITION PC MONITORING INTERFACE FOR BOTH/PENETRATE TYPE IN SCENES (2/2)
55.1 Outline In/Output each information about condition and control related with Front and rear side. ① Classify Lockout and Call registration as Door-side, and Output condition, Control as Car, Hall-Up, Hall-Down ② Output by classifying Call assignment information with Door-side and Hall-Up, Hall-Down 55.2 Number of floors of Control and Condition Output It is possible to output that control input from CRT to 128 floors, condition Output front door side to 64 floors, rear side to 32floors. (Condition Output is depended necessity after this) 56
[IMPROVEMENT] IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BREAK DOWN AT POWER FAILURE (3)
MINIMIZE CONDITION FOR CONFRONTED PESSENGERS BY IMPROVING TOLERANCE AGAINST BREAK DOWN OCCURRINGIN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OF AN ELEVATOR DURING DRIVING BY POWER FAILURE OR SOMETHING. (THIRD/THIRD) ※ Above Generic version has to be applied to scenes where temporary power failure can be occured. 57
[ADDITION] IO FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
ADD (GIOA/ GIOAI, GIOB/ GIOBI, GIOC/ GIOCI, GIOD/ GIODI. Å APPLYING AFTER KNOWING WELL ABOUT IT ACCURATELY) 58
[ALTERATION] ARD FUNCTION
FIRST, IF 30 SECONDS AFTER ARRIVAL TO NEAR FLOOR BY ARD DRIVING PASSED, THE DOOR DOES NOT OPEND COMPLETELY OR BE IN DOOR-DISCONNECTED, TURN TO OFF MODE FROM ARD DRIVING MODE AFTER 4 SECONDS. SECEND, WHEN CLW BOARD IS APPLIED, IT IS APPLIED M99 AS A COMPARE STANDARD OF DRIVING DIRECTION. (THIRD, WHEN TAC50K IS IN MODE OF INS DRIVING, SEND ARD DRIVING CONDITION AS ’0’ BY CAN COMMUNICATION.) Set up automatically only by IO registration. set up contents below for others. No
Symbol
Arrangeme nt range
Factory set up
Description
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
Remark
25
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 26/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
1
M32
10-349
20
If it is apllied to synchronous motor, It has to be set up under 20.
Floor Hunt Speed (Utni of FPM)
Percent Counterweight (Æ It is used as a standard valance for determining driving direction at function of ARD driving.) It is used only when ※ Decision about driving direction is applied DLW sign when 2 M99 0 - 100 CLW is applied. CLW board does not be applied, and is applied M99 when CLW (Note2) is applied and in this case, determine by comparing M99 with load of the present. (Note1) (Note1) Before V0R32O_1H: It was applied fixed variable appointing 50% of regular load, not applying settled variable to standard of balance load 45 (%) ot 48(%)
in actual scenes applied CLW board. But from V0R32O_1H, M99 is applied. (Add content 23-Nov-2009) (Note2) Set up standard value accurately according to elevator system.
59
[ADDITION] ADDITION FUNTION OF HALL LANTERN AND HALL-CALL FOR HANDICAPPED (2009-11-24)
Without general hall-call registration, in an optional floor, when only handicapped hall-call is, hall lantern and hall chime are operated as when they are set up ‘arrival’ function. This fuction is valid only when Z23=1 is set up. ▪ V0R32O_1J 60
[ALTERATION] FUNTION OF PREVENTING TRICK CALL
Normalize from function of prevention trick call. (It was reversed numbers of Car call and condition of load sign) ※ To apply function of preventing trick call in 32bit change generic. ▪ V0R32O_1K 61
[ALTERATION] CONDTION FOR OUTPUT OF SING OF DZ, DZINS
DZ = (DZ1 & DZ2), INSDZ = (INS & BRAKE & LVU & DZ1 & DZ2 & LVD) ▪ V0R32O_1L 62
[ADDITION] FUNTION OF “PROHIBITION OF DRIVING JUST AFTER CANCELLATION OF CAR-TOP INS” FOR AN INSPECTOR (CPUA)
62.1 Function Just after changing into automatic driving from Car-top INS driving, maintain condition of ‘prohibition on driving’(normal or releveling) for safety until an inspector at car-top open the hall door in lifting road and come out to hall. Also, warn of state by ways below during operation of this function of ‘prohivition on driving’. ① In chime of Cartop ‘bi – bi – bi ……’ rings ② In announcement equipment ofTVA1A ‘bi – bi – bi ……’ rings
※When it is applied
③ On sign ‘examining’ for P.I ※ relevant to INS Output bit ④ Active in ‘MVHLD’ sign 62.2 Cancel of operation release moving-hold latch When Car-top INS mode is cancelled, front or rear hall door is once opened and closed completely and then car-top INS mode turn into automatic mode. In this case, if hall door interlock being shorten artificially, function operating can not be cancelled. Another way is Off/On of power source in control part. 62.3 Set up z
Parameter No
z
IO
I/O (Car side)
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
26
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 27/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
Symbol MVHLD
63
I/O Output
IO Location xxx, file xx –rank x
Description Moving Hold - output
Remark DC24V low active
[ALTERATION] ALTERATION CONDITION S-CURVE OUTPUT INTO CPI(R)
Improvement of problems about speed control of ‘V0R32O_1C’.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
27
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 28/29
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ▪ SUPPLEMENT 64
DETAILS OF ALTERATION IN TAC50K 16BIT
Refer details of separate “TAC50K 16bit software history” 65
32BIT ISSUES NOTICED
65.1 problems occurred after Generic update After Update, examine whether each article below is adjusted appropriately. CAR Adjustment: ADJ.
UNIT
RANGE
DEFAULT
J23
-
0–9
8
M53
-
0 – 10
5
M88
-
0–1
1
O26
-
0–1
1
O43
-
0-256
9
O51
-
0-1
1
DEFINITIOIN Controller type: 7 = TAC50-04 8 = TAC50K Lack of stability in Motor Rotation. This adjustment is used to detect unintended motion of the motor encoder when the brake is separated. Brake type: 0 = CAN brake 1 = Discrete brake ASME A17 safety code 0 = disable 1 = enable Fixture type and communication type Bit0: enable fixture Bit3: CAN bus type Car call toggle service 0 = disable 1 = enable
REMARK New (Note1) New
(Note2) New
(Note1) M53 is set up under 64 in TAC50K controller applied with 186C board, set up under 10 in TAC50K applied with CPUA. (Note2) If CPUA is applied to TAC50K by option setting up their communication way and existence of establishment of equipment attached exterior of control part, O43=9 is set up. According to exterior equipments of communication added after this, value can be altered in range interchangeable.
After operating Upload: -
function of announcement for floor can goes wrong. Æ Confirm X25 car adj. (X25=0)
-
In scene where it does not applied of driving in silence at night with low speed, it could be set up Z41 as other values are not 0.
After operating Recover: -
When O52 and X25 can be set up optional values.
In WRT command, when OBJ (1082) fault code is occured, operate RECOVER.
Although it is depended to equipment for confirming open of Brake, Car start delay can be occuredÆ manage content in Mtov0r32o_1c (11-Jun-2009).
refer
When the power failure is occured, passengers can be confronted.
unable function of preventing trick call.
- If design problems of hardware related with INS open-door function Æ needed to alteration in related connection. ※ Although it is directly with Generic, Update is required for meeting conditions in actual scenes.
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
28
■ TAC50K: CPUA Software Updated History
Doc No:RD1-08087 Revision: v0r32o_1L Date: 2010/01/22 Page: 29/29
-When an error of BSLM/BSLE sign at Car driving is occurs, passengers can be confronted. 65.2 After order ‘UDLS’, it does not stored Specific (= Job) file in USB. Cause: In case of badness of SBL No (Name of code in scene) of Job file or other unknown causes. Counterplan: Confirm directly backup of job file in USB memory after Backup command, although repeated operation is done, it did not be stored, then backup by directory of computer by using ‘Service - Transfers’ menu of IMS. 65.3 Refer “AST” about cancellation of hall-call registered at situation when the automatic driving being. 65.4 Car start delay a.
Confirm parameter about sorts of motor or badness of TMI board when start delay occurred from 2 to 4 seconds after closing of door. (Refer way of confirmation in details of V0R32O_1B.) b. Refer alteration matters in v0r32o_1c_beta2 (11-Jun-2009). 65.5 PUBEL: Problem when it can not be confirmed at applying function of hoistway interlock monitoring to specification of both/penetrate hole It is improved in CPUA generic, V0R32O_1D. 65.6 End :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
29
Overseas Engineering Team
CPUA USB Host port
Flash Memory
USB
Ethernet
CPU 32bit MPC5200
Backup Battery
RS232
Reset Button
Up/Down LoadButto
Overseas Engineering Team
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
1
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1. Difference things of Hardware Function
186C
CPUA
CAN Local Bus (CPI-K)
Y
Y
CAN Car (CN)
Y
Y
CAN Hall (HN)
Y
Y
CAN Controller - Controller
N
Y
SDLC
Y
N
485 for Vista
Y
Y
485 Diagnostic Link to Car
Y
Y
RS-232 for IMS
Y
Y
UIT
Y
Y
Real Time Clock
Y
Y
10-pin header for Vista
Y
Y
CPU Watchdog
External
External
Persistent Data NV Storage
Battery – Backed SRAM
Unique ID number
DS2401 ID Chip
Flash ID
Ethernet
N
Y
USB Host
N
Y
USB Device
N
Y
RS-232 for debug
N
Y
1.1
Flash and Battery – Backed SRAM
Main CPU
Main CPU has been changed from 16Bit to 32Bits. ITEM
Main CPU
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
Name
80C186
MPC5200B
Manufacturer
Intel
Freescale
Data Bits
16 Bits
32 Bits
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
2
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.2 External Memory ITEM
16 Bit(186C) -
External RAM
1.3
64 MB SDRAM MT48LC16M16A2*2
Battery-
512KB
128KB
Backed
CY7C1041BV33L
IS62WV1288BLL
Flash ITEM
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
8MB-MT28F800B3
flash
1.4
32 Bit(CPUA)
16MB-M28W160CT
16MB JS28F128J3D-75 or S29GL064M90
Main power supply
186C receive 5V from IOC and create 3.3V and 1.5V and create 3.0V from Battery power. Battery of 186C is external Battery and it was connected with Interphone, Emergency lamp and IOC so that it can be affected surge. But CPUA has independent Battery in the PCB. CPUA receive 5V, 24V from IOC and this 24V create 3.3V and this 3.3V create 1.5V.
ITEM
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
5V
IOC 5V
IOC 5V
3.3V
5V
24V
1.5V
5V
3.3V
3.0V
External Battery – 14V
Internal Battery – 3.0V
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
3
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.5 Communication No more use Hyper-terminal for File upload. There is only one way to connect with 186C by RS-232, but CPUA has 3 kind of connection method, it is RS-232, USB Memory Stick and Ethernet.
A. Ethernet There is IP address and it is able to connect and manage maximum 225 units of elevator. It is able to Group communication and connect with 16 units of IMS at the same times with RJ45 connector. And also with Ethernet switch, it is able to connect with other Group system and building network system. Each CPUA and connected IMS has their IP address.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
4
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
B. USB Host USB 1.1 is supported. It is use for File Upload without Hyper terminal and save time of File upload. You can File Upload without IMS PC.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
5
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.6 CAN BUS ITEM
CAN Channel
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
1. Local CAN
1. Local CAN
2. Car CAN
2. Car CAN
3. HALL CAN
3. Hall CAN
4. Group SDLC
4. Group CAN
1.7 RS-232 Port There are 2 units of RS-232 Port. First one is for connecting IMS and PC and another one is for Debug mode with 4 Pin MTA connector.
1.8
RS-485 Port
There are 2units of RS-485 Port. First one is for Car Diagnostic and another one is for CE monitoring which was installed at Controller.
1.9
Vista
Long distance Monitoring port with Modem connection. ITEM
RS-232
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
IMS Port
IMS Port
-
Debug Port
Diagnostic
Diagnostic
RS-485 CE monitoring Modem
Vista(RS-485)
Vista
1.10 ETSx (Emergency Terminal Stop Device) Terminal Floor Monitoring ETSx system is exactly same as 186C. Therefore, it was applied SDB and SDT sensor for 105m/min below and ETSD for 120m/min above.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
6
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.11 Real Time Clock (RTC) 186C has external RTC, but there is no internal Battery so that if disconnect PCB from IOC, time re-setting required. But CPUA has internal Battery. After finishing installation work, insert Battery into socket and set date by DAT command and set time by TIM in IMS remote Fast.
ITEM
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
RTC IC
BQ4845
DS1338Z
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
7
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
2. IP Address In order to connect IMS by Ethernet, there is necessary to each IP address setting at Start/Controlpanel/Network connection/Local area connection 2/Properties/TCP IP. Setting IP Address should be same as IMS at File/System configuration/Communications/IP Address and if connect several IMS at the same time, PC node setting also distinguish with other IMS. As changing of Group No.(J13), Car No.(J11) in IMS Remote Fast, CPUA IP Address determine automatically. Therefore, when connect several Group by Ethernet switch, should set Group No.(J13) differently.
ITEM
IP Address
32 Bit(CPUA) IMS
192.168.0.1-16
Group1 Car1-15
192.168.0.17-31
Group2 C1-15
192.168.0.33-47
Group3 C1-15
192.168.0.49-63
Group4 C1-15
192.168.0.65-79
Group5 C1-15
192.168.0.81-95
Group6 C1-15
192.168.0.97-111
Group7 C1-15
192.168.0.113-127
~
~
Group15 C1-15
192.168.0.241-255
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
8
16 units of IMS are able to connect at same time. 15 cars are able to connect a Group.
Maximum 15 Groups.
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
2.1 PC IP Address setting method Click Start/Control-panel/Network connection/Local area connection 2/ Properties /TCP IP.
(Picture 1 – When click “Local area connection 2”)
(Picture 2 – When click “Properties”)
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
9
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
(Picture 3 - – When click “Internet protocol TCP IP”)
Click “Using the below IP adress(S) ” and input IP address 192.168.0.1 and then click (U) subnet mask, it will be created automatically to 255.255.255.0.
2.2 IMS IP setting method Click File/System Config.
(Picture 4 – When connect IMS)
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
10
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
(Picture 5 – When click File and System Config)
(Picture 6 – When click Communications and input IP Address)
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
11
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
3. Files communication time improvement TIME
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
WD ON time after POWER ON
34 sec
7 sec
IMS connection time after POWER ON
72 sec
9 sec
File reload time including Group
50 sec
3 sec
Car file Reload
45 sec
3 sec
JOB Image download time by IMS
121 sec
4 sec
3 min 18 sec
Not applied
Not applied
20 sec
Job Config, Car, Group & OS Upload by Hyperterminal Job Config, Car, Group & OS Upload by USB Stick
4. Maximum capacity TIME
16 Bit(186C)
32 Bit(CPUA)
64
128
100(Standard HN)
256
Group
8
15
Car numbers / Group
8
15
Landing (Stop floor) I/O Port
5. Replacement with IOC It is able to use with IOC (IOC-A, IOC-B) which apply for 186C. Therefore, if there are any problems of floor numbers and Group communication, CPUA can be used instead of 186C. This case, download job file (specific file) from 186C and create New job file by Configurator to match CPUA. But 186C and CPUA can not be used together in same Group.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
12
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
6. Software 6.1 Software Configuration Job file (Specific file)
Jobkrp00029.cfg
Generic
tac-cpua.vxry
Recover
recover.vxry
Vxry is software version/revision and format can be changeable. Generic file (tac-cpua.vxry) is included OS, Group, Car, FPGA, Boot loader. Recover file (recover.vxry) is use for backup if Generic file and Job file Upload impossible.
6.2
USB Stick
CPUA use USB memory stick for software update and doesn’t use exist Z-modem(Hyper-terminal) type. Make folders at USB memory stick. tke/update tke/backup tke/recover a.
When upload new Generic file or Job file, save Generic(cpua.vxry) and (or) Job(jobxxxxx.cfg) files at “tke/update” folder.
b.
Insert USB memory stick to USB Host at CPUA PCB.
c.
Press RST(Reset) button and press UDL button until STAT LED flickering for file uploading.
d.
Files at “tke/update” folder will be unzipped automatically and ALL files of Generic file except OS will be updated to Flash. Os file was uploaded only if version is difference with Flash memory.
e.
After finishing update, existed Job file at “tke/update” folder will be disappeared.
f.
Input “UDLS” in IMS Remote Fast, Generic file and Job file will be saved at “tke/backup/jobnumber” folder. “Backing up software, please wait….” and “Backup completed” will display in IMS Remote Fast.
g.
If update is failed, STAT LED will be flickered every 100ms and if update is successful, STAT LED will be flickered 3 times and reset automatically and WD will be ON.
h.
Generic file was existed at “tke/update” folder.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
13
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
6.3
IMS Commands
Files management Commands in IMS Remote Fast at USB memory stick. a. “UDLD(Display)” – Display files at “tke/” folder of USB memory stick. b. “UDL tac-cpua.vxry” – Copy Generic file at “tke/” folder and move it to “tke/update”. Not use. c. “UDL jobxxnnnn.cfg” – Copy Job file at “tke/” folder and move it to “tke/update”. Not use. d. “UDLS(Save)” – Generic and Job files from CPUA will be saved at “tke/backup/jobnumber” folder of USB memory stick. e. “UDLR(Reload) jobnumber” – Copy the files at “tke/backup/jobnumber” and move it to “tke/update”. Ex)UDLR KRS00542 “Restoring software…” “Restore complete Now reset and hold UDL” will display.
6.4
Flash File System Recover (Format)
If Flash file system was damaged and software can not work properly, there is the way to recover. CPUA PCB has MPC5200 CPU and there is Boot High or Boot Low function. Generally jumper JP1 at CPUA PCB to “L” side, but if Flash file system was damaged and software can not work properly, change JP1 from “L” side to “H” side.
H
L
a. While JP1 is “H” side, press RST button and press UDL button until STAT LED become Z(MOS) mode (Flickering). b. Boot loader find recover.vxry at “/tke/recover” folder of USB memory stick. c. Recover Device re-set damaged file system format, partition and copy the files for file system to recover damaged software. d. While it is processing, STAT LED is flicking. If there is any problem, STAT LED will be flickered every 100ms continuously and success the recover, STAT LED will be flickered 2 times 300ms interval at every 2 sec.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
14
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
e. Move JP1 to “L” side. Finish format procedure of CPUA. f.
Check whether there is Generic and Job file at “/tke/update” of USB memory stick.
g. Press RST and UDL button to file upload.
6.5
Parameter
Parameter
Explanation
O51
CAR call toggle
M88
Brake type
J23
Controller type
M53
O43
O26
6.6
Set
Remarks
0: Not use
1 touch registration
1: Toggle set
2 touch cancel
0: Regulator Brake(USA) → CAN type 1: Discrete Brake(KOREA) 7: USA IOC (IOC 19Port )→TAC50-04 8: KOREA IOC(IOC 10Port) →TAC50K
UnSafe Motor
Default=05
186C=64
Rotation
Range: 0-10
CPUA=05
Fixture and
Bit0: enable fixture
communication type
Bit3: CAN bus type
ASME A17 safety
0 = disable
code
1 = enable
09
Ethernet and Switch connection in Group system
If there is necessary to connect each Group, it is able to connect by Ethernet as below drawing. This case, it should be set Group No. As below drawing, if connect IMS more than 1 unit by Ethernet Cable, it should be set IP address differently. Generally it is not necessary to connect by Ethernet if no need communication between each Group.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
15
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
J13=2 J11=2
Ethernet Switch
G2
IP: 192.168.0.1
G1 J13=1 J11=3
IP: 192.168.0.2 G3 J13=3 J11=1
6.7
Jumper
HC1C HC1T CCC CCT RCC RCT
Name
Explanation
Set method
HC1C
Hall CAN shield
1CAR=on, Group=on only for first and last lifts.
HC1T
Hall CAN end register
1CAR=on, Group= on only for first and last lifts
CCC
CAR CAN shield
1CAR, Group = on,
CCT
CAR CAN end register
1CAR, Group = on,
RCC
Group CAN shield
1CAR=X, Group= on only for first and last lifts
RCT
Group CAN end register
1CAR=X, Group= on only for first and last lifts
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
16
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
6.8
PCB Replacement
a. Input “UDLS“ command in IMS Remote Fast. b. PCB files (tac-cpua file; Generic file and Job file) were copied to “tke/backup/jobnumber” folder of USB memory stick. c. Replace CPUA PCB by new one. d. Input UDLR jobnumber. e. Upload by RST and UDL button. Some USB stick can not upload, this case USB stick have to hardware format by FAT32 as follow. 1) Backup USB stick files and delete all files at USB stick. 2) Click Start/Control-panel/Management tool/Computer management/Disk management. 3) Select USB in volume column and Right click of Mouse and select Format and Yes. 4) Select File System(F) to FAT32 type. (FAT32: File Allocation Table, 32bit) Check “v” at Fast Format Executive(P) to fast format -> “Confirm” button click.
7. Cable application When connect IMS by Ethernet Switch without switch, use Direct Cable (1:1) and use Cross Cable for 2 CAR and GROUP connection.
8. Note How to format USB drive by Window. a.
While connect USB memory, select Control panel → System.
b.
Open "System registered information”, select "Hardware" tap, open "Device manager", check "Disk Drive" whether there is your USB memory or not.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
17
Modified by June,
Overseas Engineering Team
c.
Double click your USB memory then Registration window will be appeared as below.
d.
Select "정책" tap and there is 2 option, click "성능을 위해 최적화(P)" and click confirm.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator 2008
18
Modified by June,
OverseasEngineering
Chapter11Chapter11-1
ARDoperationManual ARDoperationManual 1-1.ARDCONTROLwiring 1-1.1Causewhenwiringwork 1)BATTERYS/W,ARDMAINS/WmustoffatARDpanel. 2)NFBmustOFFatMainpowersupplypanel. 3)ConnectARDR,S,TterminalfirstandconnectittoNFBatMainpowersupplypanel. 4)ConnectARDsignalswithcablesbetweenELAVATORcontrolpanelandARDsignalterminal. (TERMINALspec;Y-3.4,Cable;0.75SQabove) 5)ConnectU,V,W,NofARDtoR,S,T,Nofelevator. 6)Checkwhetherallwiringsarecorrectornot. 1-1.2MAINPOWERwiring
-Figure1.POWERSOURCECIRCUITS– 1) Asabovewiringdiagram,connectR,S,T,NatMAINPOWERtoR1,S1,T1,NatARDCP. 2) ConnectU,V,W,NatARDCPtoelevatorcontroller. 1-1.3BATTERYlineconnectionandsignallineamendment 1)BATTERYlineconnection -RedcolorcablefromBATTERY connecttoB+andblackcolorcable connecttoB-. 2)Signallineamendment. -Input/OutputterminalNo.4 (ARFD;ARDfaultsignala)ofARD CONTROLinternalsignalchangeto connectterminalNo.5(ARFD;ARD faultsignalb) “d”
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
OverseasEngineering 1-2.E/LControllerwiring 1-2.1Checkpointbeforewiringwork 1)BeforeControllerconnection,checkwhetherthereisARSTP(AutoRescueStop)relayincontrollerornot. “a” 2)IfthereisARSTPrelay,checkrelaywiringasbelowwiringdiagram. “b” -Powersupplysectionwiringcheck No.14:P24(DC24V) No.13:CheckwhetheritwasconnectedCN2-B11atIOCPCB. 3)CheckwiringbetweenMIC9PconnectorfromControllerandMIC9PconnectorfromARDCONTROL. “c” WiringcheckrequiredasbelowARDwiringdiagram. “c” IOCPCB “a” “d” “b” “b” -Figure3.ARDwiringdiagram-
※
1-2.2 CARDUCTandCOPwiring 1)RemoveCOPinternalconnectorCN23-4(Interphonesignal1)andconnectittoCNPCBCN17-A9. 2)CARDUCTinternalLWD(4WLS)signallinewiring
①IfCARDUCTterminalisHarmonicatype
-Connectyellowcolorcable(LWD)ofLOADS/WtoHTB2-43(Terminalname:1).
②IfCARDUCTterminalisBaidmullarterminalandTerminalblock.
-Connectyellowcolorcable(LWD)ofLOADS/WtoTH3-3(Terminalname:1).
③IfLOADswitchlineconnecttoCN22connectorandthereisLWDatHarmonicaterminal. -ChangeHTB2-43(Terminalname,signalname:1)cabletoLWDatHarmonicaterminal.
※Afterfinishingallwiringwork,turnonMainpowersupplyandcheckwhetheritisnormalornot andchangeMAPasfollow.
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
OverseasEngineering 1-2.3IMSARD-MAPNAMEamendment 1)LWDsignal(ARDloaddetectionsignal50%) -ColumnNo.12androwNo.8:ChangemapnamefromHIO1toLWD. 2)ARDsignal -ColumnNo.4androwNo.5:ChangemapnamefromARDtoARPW(AutoRescueDevicePowerInput) -ColumnNo.10androwNo.2:ChangemapnamefromARDFDtoARFD(AutoRescueDeviceFaultDetection) -ColumnNo.10androwNo.4:ChangemapnamefromPDNtoARSTP(AutoRescueStop) 1-2.4ARDTEST 1)BeforeARDTEST,checkwhetherGENERICFILEis1.03Hversionornot. Lessthan1.03HversioncannotbeoperatedARDoperation. 2)ChecktheARDoperationwithFLOWCHART. 1-3.I/OandERRORCODE 1-3.1I/O Input/
NO
I/Oname
1
LWD
Input
12column8row
2
ARPW
Input
4column5row
AutoRescueDevicePowerInput
-
3
ARFD
Input
10column2row
AutoRescueDeviceFaultDetection
-
4
ARDY
Output
XcolumnXrow
AutoRescueReady
Functioninspection(option)
5
ARUN
Output
XcolumnXrow
AutoRescueRunning
Functioninspection(option)
6
ARLDG
Output
XcolumnXrow
AutoRescueatLanding
Functioninspection(option)
7
ARSTP
Output
10column4row
AutoRescueStop
-
8
ARPWI
Output
XcolumnXrow
ARPWIndicator
Functioninspection(option)
9
ARFDI
Output
XcolumnXrow
ARFDIndicator
Functioninspection(option)
Output
I/Olocation
Explanation OperationsignalfromSwitchloadweigher. Ifcarloadmorethan50%inARD,itwillbeset“1”.
Remarks
-(Note1)
(Note1)IfthereisnoCLWboardandrelateddevice,installLimitswitchforloaddetectionandthissignalisLWD.
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
OverseasEngineering 1-3.2ERRORCODE NO
CODE
LEVEL
Release
Expanation
1
2005
Info
2
2006
FALI
Powerreset
3
2007
FALI
Powerreset
REMARK
ARDSystembreakdowndetection
After starting ARD operation, lift can not arrive at floor level during 6
Permanently
minute.
breakdown
AfterfinishingARDoperation,Batterypowercannotcutduring4sec.
Permanently breakdown
1-3.3ARDOPERATOR.
ARD OPERATION MONITORING
Under ARD operation
Under BATTERY charging
BATTERY voltage[V]
BATTERY voltage[V]
Displayed by 1 sec alternately
C-- : Chanring/stop Cc- : Constant current high speed charge Cc_ : Constant current low speed charge Cu- : Contant voltage charging Uu- : ARD operation (Voltage)
BATTERY current[A]
Ua- : ARD operation (Ampere)
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
OverseasEngineering
ERROR MONITORING Flickering
ERROR MODE
History No.
ERROR MODE
MODE SET
Before ERROR RESET JOG ON
ERROR CODE
KEY pushing 5 sec
until stopping History No. flicker then all error will be
E-10 : Fuse broken
cleared.
E-11 : Current sensor broken E-12 : IPM fault E-13 : Overcurrent E-14 : Overload E-15 : Battery fault E-16 : Battery low-voltage E-17 : Charge circuit fault
MODE SET
E-20 : Input over-voltage
Present ERROR
E-21 : Input low-voltage RESET
E-30 : Specification fault
Flickering
Flickering
OTHER MONITORING ARD input siganl
MOD SET
ARD finishing signal [‘1’] ARD starting signal [‘1’] Power failure signal [‘0’]
RESET
Program Version No.
Flickering
The quantities of ARD operation JOG ON
KEY pushing 5 sec
until displayed “0”, it will be cleared.
BATTERY output capacity [kW] MODE SET
Flickering
MODE SET
Input voltage for charging [Vdc] Flickering
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
OverseasEngineering 1-3.4OPERATIONFLOWCHART
START
ARDY : Auto Rescue Ready (output) ARUN : Auto Rescue Running (output) ARLDG : Auto Rescue Landing (output) ARSTP : Auto Rescue Stop (output) ARPWI : Auto Rescue Power Indicator (output) ARFDI : Auto Rescue Fault Detection Indicator (output)
ARFD input ARD Breakdown? ARFDI on ARPW input
ARFDI off Recorded Error code – 2005 Power failure? ARPWI off
ARPWI input Initialization of ARD operation Door close and lift can be operated?
Finish Car sill and Hall sill level is difference 25mm? ARDY on
Car was stopped in level. Door will be opened during 15sec
Lift stop condition?
ARDY off ARUN off ARLDG on
ARUN on Start ARD announcement Moving Limitation Time Setting (6 minutes)
Door opened fully during 15sec
ARSTP on Car is heavy more than 50% of rating load? Monitoring ARD Main Power Supply cut or not. Delay time setting (4sec)
Move to nearest floor with upward
Move to nearest floor with downward ARD Main Power Supply to be cut within 4sec? Note 2.
Exceed “Moving Setting Limitation Time” 6 minutes? ARDY off ARUN off ARLDG off ARSTP on
Recorded Error code – 2007
Recorded Error code – 2006 Note 3.
Safety line off (Breakdown permanently)
ARD operation is finish normally Finish
Note 1. CPU recognize 50% load with CLW board detection or LWD switch activation. Note 2. ARD cut Main Power Supply to TAC50K immediately if ARSTP signal on. Note 3. ARD cut Main Power Supply if the time of Main Power Supply more than 8 minutes for self-protection function.
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator ModifiedbyJune,2008
ARD-300 (Automatic Rescue Device)
Operating Manual
Contents 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Use of ARD System configuration and futures Explanation of major part Installation Monitoring Error List. ARD Power Off
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual
Printer’s imprint All rights reserved © Copyright by: ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. 55-30, Oryu-dong, Kuro-Ku, Seoul Printed in Korea, October 2009
The right of reprint or reproduction, even in the case of only partly exploitation, is subject to express, written permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.. Any reproduction, copying or storing in data processing machines in any form or by any means without prior permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. is regarded as infringement of the current Copyright Act and will be prosecuted. Technical modifications for reasons of improvement or higher safety standard are subject to decisions of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. without prior notice.
The responsibility for the content lies with the editor: ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
Preface We are pleased that you decided to purchase a quality product from ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
This operating manual assists you in getting familiar with the frequency inverter and its intended possibilities of use. Important information concerning safety and hazards helps you to safely use the frequency inverter as intended. Subject to technical alteration.
1
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual TABLE OF CONTENT
1. SAFETY............................................................................................................................
3
1.1 Explanation of symbols used.......................................................................................
3
1.2 General safety information...........................................................................................
3
2. Introduction …………………………………………….....................................................
5
2.1 Operation ……………………………….......................................................................
5
2.2 Standard delivery includes ……….............................................................................
5
2.3 ARD installation instruction ………….........................................................................
5
2.4 ARD Functional description …....................................................................................
5
2.5 System futures and configuration..............................................................................
5
3. ARD control diagram ……….……………………...........................................................
7
4. Installation wiring and Install checking procedure......................................................
8
5. ARD operation …….........................................................................................................
9
5.1 Stand alone test...........................................................................................................
9
5.2 Testing ARD operation with elevator controller............................................................
10
5.3 Observe the ARD operation test..................................................................................
10
6. Display of ARD status in mini consol …..……………...................................................
11
7. Procedure of ARD Power Off …….................................................................................
11
8. Confirmation of parameter set in CPI 150R and CPI 300R Inverter …………………..
12
9. Harness diagram of ARD................................................................................................
13
2
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual
1. SAFETY 1.1 Explanation of symbols used The following pictographs and designations are used in this operating manual:
Danger This symbol draws attention to an extreme danger to life or risk of injury to persons. Disregard of warning means danger to life !
Danger This symbol draws attention to an immediate impending danger to life or risk of injury to persons caused by electric current. Warning notices must always be observed!
Warning This symbol draws attention to an impending danger. Disregard can cause injury to persons or extensive damage to property. Warning notices must always be observed!
Note This symbol draws attention to important information and instructions for operation. Disregard can lead to damages, hazards or failures.
Inspection This symbol draws attention to inspection sequence. These inspection notices must be observed in any case. Disregard can lead to injury to persons or damage to property.
1.2 General safety information
Information about the operating manual Knowledge of the basic safety requirements is a prerequisite for the safe use and the failurefree operation of this component. This operating manual comprises the most important information how to safely use the component. The operating manual and, in particular, the safety information must be observed by all persons who perform any work on the component.
3
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual In addition the rules and requirements concerning the regulations for prevention of accidents which apply to the installation location must be observed.
Duties of the owner and / or the installer The owner and / or installer ensures that only persons are authorized to work at the component, who • are familiar with the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents and who were trained how to use the component; • have read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual.
Check the compliance of the employee’s method of working with the safety requirements in regular intervals.
Duties of the employees Persons who are authorized to perform work at the component are obliged • to observe the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents; • to read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual prior to start working.
Training of the employees Only trained and instructed, technically competent persons shall perform work at the component. The competence of the employees must be clearly defined for all tasks concerning putting into service, operation, maintenance and repair work.
Organizational measures The owner or the installer must provide the necessary personal protective gear. All existing safety devices must be checked regularly in accordance with the maintenance plan.
Informal information about safety measures • The operating manual must always be available at the location of the installation. • In addition to the operating manual the general and local regulations for the prevention of accidents and environmental regulations must be made available and observed. • Clearly and easily visible statutory safety instructions must be made available for the users. • See to it that all information concerning safety and hazards is always visibly and legibly made available on the machine.
4
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual 2. Introduction 2.1 Operation When the main power supply of an elevator is interrupted for more than 10 or 40 seconds while it is in operation, the ARD operate in order to safely rescue the elevator passengers, the ARD System comes into operation and drives the car to the nearest floor and opens the door 2.2 Standard delivery includes: - ARD panel - ARD battery panel and Battery cable - Power cable between ARD unit and TAC50K control panel - Control cable between ARD unit and TAC50K control panel 2.3 ARD installation instruction This instruction includes information for TAC50K control system. 2.4 ARD Functional description Step
If main supply fails:
1
ARD detects control panel is not powered
2
ARD switches the ARD battery supply on through contactors
3
Control panel come into ARD mode, drives the car the lightest way to the landing and opens doors
4 5
Control panel gives end message to ARD ARD switches the emergency battery drive off and starts wait for the return of main power
WARNING: A waiting time of 20 minute is inserted after each rescue operation performed by the ARD device. This is to ensure proper cooling of internal components and to prevent possible failures. 2.5 System futures and configuration (1) Futures ARD-300 is for high speed elevator that is CPI300R Inverter and TAC50K elevator controller that employed the PWM converter of high capacity, it needs to flow big peak current when initial boost charge and it must satisfy range of over/under voltage. ARD-300 is developed to corresponds a moment high peak current and high capacity (30 kVA) - Main input voltage
: 3 phase 380V, 50/60 Hz
- ARD output voltage
: 3 phase 380V, 50/60 Hz
- Output capacity
: 30 kVA
- Battery capacity
: 18 cells, 12V-40AH, 230V~232V in series
(2) System configuration (a) Battery stack This configured the separated panel, it contains 18 cells battery of 12V-40AH in series and a circuit breaker for On / Off (b) Capacitor bank and pre-charge control This part located top of ARD panel, it connected 32 capacitors of 5600㎌-400V in parallel, it will charge though RC when connected with battery. Initial charging time take about 1 minute, this capacitor bank connect in parallel with battery as closed M3 after initial charging. During initial charging cannot operate
5
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual battery charging and ARD operation. (c) ARD power generation The main power R-S-T is transfer to terminal U-V-W through contactor M1 in the normal operation status, if main power occurs electric power interruption, the contactor M1 open and the ARD power will supply to terminal U-V-W through a contactor M2 that close after about 4 second. (d) Battery charger The battery is charged fully around 230V~232V in during normal operation. (e) System control - ARD stop signal: rescue completion signal from elevator control panel Terminal 2 and 3 open normal operation, close when rescue completion - Fault signal: ERA, ERB and ERC on terminal 4, 5 and 6 Terminal 4 and 6 open, terminal 5 and 6 close when occurred error - ARD operation signal: ARD OUT1and ARD OUT2 on terminal 7 and 8 This signal is normal open state and it close when ARD operation
ARD-300 side
TAC50K side
signal
terminal
Pin
Pin
ARD stop ARD stop ARD fault_nc ARD fault_no ARD fault_com ARD run ARD run
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable
signal
ARSTP COMMON ARFD G24 ARPW G24
PLUG CAP MIC-9 Pin
Fig. 1 ARD-300 control interface definition (f) Monitor The ARDP1 board display to monitor the battery voltage, charging status and error status. (g) Contactor (M1, M2) of exchanging normal power to ARD power (h) Terminal block for connection with external cables
6
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual 3. ARD control diagram
Fig. 2 control diagram
7
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual
BAT. SWITCH
mini consol
test switch
B+ B- N E
R
power terminal S T U V
signal terminal W
to TAC50K connector
to TAC50K terminal
from distribution panel
from battery panel
Fig. 3 location of switch and display in ARD panel
4. Installation wiring and Install checking procedure (1) Circuit breaker on battery panel must be turned-OFF (2) Main circuit breaker on distribution box must be turned-OFF (3) Main switch on elevator control panel must be turned-OFF (4) Connect battery cables from battery panel (B+ and B-) to ARD panel (B+ and B-)
8
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual (5) Connect external power cables as below: refer Fig.2 control diagram Earth line (E) and neutral line (N) in distribution panel connect to elevator control panel directly Power cables (R, S, T) in ARD connect to distribution panel (R, S, T) Power cables (U, V, W) in ARD connect to elevator control panel (U, V, W) Earth line (E) and neutral line (N) in ARD connect to elevator control panel (6) Connect connector (MIC 9-pin) located on right-hand-lower-side on elevator control panel (7) After confirming wiring check is correct, turn-ON circuit breaker on battery panel and circuit breaker (labeled as BAT. SWITCH) located on left-hand-side of M1 contactor on ARD panel (8) Wait about 1 minute, M3 contactor located on left-hand-upper-side will be closed automatically. (Condenser bank initial charge time) (9) Turn-ON test SW on ARD panel (right-hand-side of power terminal block) and main circuit breaker on distribution panel (10) Turn on main switch located on top-side on elevator control panel (11) Momentary monitor show E.16 and will disappear soon (12) Next monitor will show “Cc-xxx”, then ARD is ready to operate * Attention to opposite battery polarity.
5. ARD operation 5.1 Stand alone test
Fig.4 output terminal and ARD operation test switch (SW)
Fig.5 Signal terminal
(1) Confirm the main switch turn-OFF on elevator control panel (2) Check the battery charging voltage, it display in mini consol (3) Wait for the battery voltage is charged over 225 volts (4) Turn-OFF the circuit breaker on distribution panel or switch (SW) on ARD panel in order to test ARD operation (5) ADR will operate as ARD mode after about 4 seconds (6) Measure the ARD output voltage output about AC380V at output terminal (U, V, W) with using digital volt meter (7) Check signal terminal 7 and 8 is close (this is open statue in normal operation) with using digital volt meter, it will measure 0 volt (it will measure 24 volts in normal operation) (8) Confirm the ARD operation is stop when signal terminal 2 and 3 is shorted with using jumper cable (9) Confirm the ARD is operating in charging mode after turn-ON the circuit breaker on distribution panel or test switch (SW) on ARD panel
9
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual
5.2 Testing ARD operation with elevator controller (1) Turn-ON the main breaker on elevator control panel (2) In inspection operation mode and under empty cabin, do move the elevator and stop the elevator between floor and floor, and after, it turn back normal operation mode the elevator (3) Confirm the battery voltage, ARD operation can operate when battery voltage have to charge over 225 volts (4) Turn-OFF the circuit breaker on distribution panel or switch (SW) on ARD panel in order to operate ARD operation (5) Confirm the ARD operation as below: The ARD supply to TAC50K ARD power after 4 seconds from turn-OFF the test switch and then TAC50K reboot it take about 20 seconds and then the elevator start to move toward light-load way and then the elevator stop the nearest floor and then open the door and then TAC50K send to ARD the end of ARD operation signal and then the ARD receives the end of ARD operation signal via signal terminal 2 and 3 and then ARD stop the ARD operation (6) Turn-ON the circuit breaker on distribution panel or switch (SW) on ARD panel in order to operate charging mode of ARD and operate normal operation of elevator (7) For retesting ARD operation: ARD operation can operate when battery voltage have to charge over 225 volts
5.3 Observe the ARD operation test (1) Observing, error occur IPM error, over-current, and battery low-voltage in ARD (2) Observing, error occur DC-link under-voltage, over-voltage, or repetitious initial charging with error in CPI300R Inverter (3) Observing, the elevator move toward light-load way or not (4) At testing ARD operation, if open and reverse phase relay is worked in TAC50K, output cables (U, V, W) in ARD should change over V phase and W phase
10
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual 6. Display of ARD status in mini consol (1) While charging: displayed charging voltage of battery (2) While ARD operation mode: displayed battery voltage (3) When Error occurred: displayed error code in below code
contents
action
E-06
M1 contactor is abnormal
Check, the AC110V power of TR2
E-07
M2 contactor is abnormal
Check, 24V on J5 connector voltage of ARDP board
E-10
FUSE broke
Check, FUSE broke on rear side of ARDQ board
Check, the cable connection stauts of M1 contactor coil
Check, power supply for M1 contactor
Check, connection status of power cables E-13
Over current
Check, is elevator speed over 3m/min. in ARD operation mode? Check, does elevator move toward heavy-load way?
E-14
Over loaded
E-15
Disconnected battery
E-16
Low battery voltage
E-17
Charging circuit is abnormal
E-20 E-21 E-30
Over-voltage of main input Low-voltage of main input SPEC
Check, is elevator speed over 3m/min. in ARD operation mode? Check, does elevator move toward heavy-load way? Check, battery switch ON status (It is possible supplied building power) Check, battery voltage after charged battery Check, charging resister on above J8 connector on ARDP board (upper side resister is 200 ohm, lower side resister is 100 ohm) If the resister is correct value, check ARDM and ARDP board Check, Is main input voltage over +15% in 380V? Check, Is main input voltage over -15% in 380V? Specification is difference between ARD and Elevator
7. Procedure of ARD Power Off (1) Turn-OFF the circuit breaker (BAT. SWITCH) in ARD panel (2) Turn-OFF the circuit breaker in battery panel (3) Turn-OFF the test switch (SW) in ARD panel, at this time, the ARD supply output a moment (4) Turn-OFF the main circuit breaker in distribution panel (5) If necessary, separate external power cables
11
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual 8. Confirmation of parameter set in CPI 150R and CPI 300R Inverter This parameters available after version xxxx in TMI2 Parameter P152...159 will define the behavior of the Drive in case of "ARD operation" = 1 Parameter P151 P152
contents shows "on" while "ARD operation mode" PWM Frequency in case of "ARD operation mode" If P152 = On, PWM will be 4kHz in Motor operation and 10kHz in generator operation Flux current controller On/Off in case of "ARD operation mode"
P153
(only asynchronous version) ENDAT-Encoder watch Off in case of "ARD operation mode" (only synchronous version)
P154
P155
in case of "ARD operation mode" reduce regenerative power by increasing Flux current. This helps, if the emergency power supply can not take regenerative power Regenerative unit off while "ARD operation mode" (this Parameter is not visible with CPI 150R and 300R)
P156
Ignore Load measuring device while "ARD operation mode"
P158
Reduced DC-Link voltage while "ARD operation mode"
P159
DC-Link under voltage level in case "ARD operation mode" and P158 = On"
12
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual 9. Harness diagram of ARD
13
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD-300 Manual
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. Headquarter and overseas sales 55-30, Oryu-dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, 152-100 Korea Tel.: +82 2 2610 7534, 7790 Fax: +82 2 2610 7700 www.thyssenkrupp-elevator.co.kr DEA-09106, Issue December 2009
14
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea)
ARD (AutomaticRescueDevice)
OperatingManual Outputvoltage:1-phase220V ARDK-S08-01B-MRL MachineRoomLess ARDK-S08-02B-MRL ARDK-S08-03B-MRL ARDK-S08-01B MachineRoom ARDK-S08-02B ARDK-S08-03B
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
Printer’s imprint All rights reserved © Copyright by: ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. 55-30, Oryu-dong, Kuro-Ku, Seoul Printed in Korea, October 2009
The right of reprint or reproduction, even in the case of only partly exploitation, is subject to express, written permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.. Any reproduction, copying or storing in data processing machines in any form or by any means without prior permission of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. is regarded as infringement of the current Copyright Act and will be prosecuted. Technical modifications for reasons of improvement or higher safety standard are subject to decisions of ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. without prior notice.
The responsibility for the content lies with the editor: ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
Preface We are pleased that you decided to purchase a quality product from ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd.
This operating manual assists you in getting familiar with the frequency inverter and its intended possibilities of use. Important information concerning safety and hazards helps you to safely use the frequency inverter as intended. Subject to technical alteration.
1
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual TABLEOFCONTENT 1.SAFETY................................................................................................................................................
3
1.1Explanationofsymbolsused.........................................................................................
3
1.2Generalsafetyinformation............................................................................................
3
2. Introduction …………………………………………….....................................................
5
2.1 Operation ……………………………….......................................................................
5
2.2 Standard delivery includes ………............................................................................. 5 2.3 ARD installation instruction …………......................................................................... 5 2.4 ARD Functional description …....................................................................................
5
2.5 ARD Model… ……....................................................................................................
5
2.6 ARD Specification …….............................................................................................
6
2.7 ARD Part Number and description ……..................................................................... 6 2.8 ARD control diagram ………………………................................................................. 7 3. Installation of ARD ………………………......................................................................
8
3.1 Preparations ……………………................................................................................. 8 3.2 Fixing of ARD and ARD battery Box ……..................................................................
8
3.3 Cable connections at the ARD unit …………………................................................... 9 3.4 ARD DIP Switch definition ………...............................................................................
10
4. Note Debugging ………………………..........................................................................
10
4.1 Check to confirm before the operation and inspection ………………….…..................
10
4.2 The confirmation of ARD output …………..................................................................
10
4.3 ARD function test …..………………………..................................................................
11
4.4 The LED of ARD status...............................................................................................
11
4.5 ARD fault finding …..…………………..........................................................................
12
5. ARDK Circuit Diagram ……………………………………..………………….…..................
13
2
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
1. SAFETY 1.1 Explanation of symbols used The following pictographs and designations are used in this operating manual:
Danger This symbol draws attention to an extreme danger to life or risk of injury to persons. Disregard of warning means danger to life !
Danger This symbol draws attention to an immediate impending danger to life or risk of injury to persons caused by electric current. Warning notices must always be observed!
Warning This symbol draws attention to an impending danger. Disregard can cause injury to persons or extensive damage to property. Warning notices must always be observed!
Note This symbol draws attention to important information and instructions for operation. Disregard can lead to damages, hazards or failures.
Inspection This symbol draws attention to inspection sequence. These inspection notices must be observed in any case. Disregard can lead to injury to persons or damage to property.
1.2 General safety information
Information about the operating manual Knowledge of the basic safety requirements is a prerequisite for the safe use and the failurefree operation of this component. This operating manual comprises the most important information how to safely use the component. The operating manual and, in particular, the safety information must be observed by all persons who perform any work on the component.
3
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual In addition the rules and requirements concerning the regulations for prevention of accidents which apply to the installation location must be observed.
Duties of the owner and / or the installer The owner and / or installer ensures that only persons are authorized to work at the component, who • are familiar with the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents and who were trained how to use the component; • have read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual.
Check the compliance of the employee’s method of working with the safety requirements in regular intervals.
Duties of the employees Persons who are authorized to perform work at the component are obliged • to observe the requirements concerning safe working and prevention of accidents; • to read the safety information and the warning notices in this operating manual prior to start working.
Training of the employees Only trained and instructed, technically competent persons shall perform work at the component. The competence of the employees must be clearly defined for all tasks concerning putting into service, operation, maintenance and repair work.
Organizational measures The owner or the installer must provide the necessary personal protective gear. All existing safety devices must be checked regularly in accordance with the maintenance plan.
Informal information about safety measures • The operating manual must always be available at the location of the installation. • In addition to the operating manual the general and local regulations for the prevention of accidents and environmental regulations must be made available and observed. • Clearly and easily visible statutory safety instructions must be made available for the users. • See to it that all information concerning safety and hazards is always visibly and legibly made available on the machine.
4
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
2. Introduction 2.1 Operation If the main power supply of the elevator is interrupted for more than 10 or 40 seconds the ARD System comes into operation and drives the car to the nearest floor and opens the door. 2.2 Standard delivery includes: ARD unit ARD battery cabinet and Battery cable Power cable between ARD unit and TAC50K control panel Control cable between ARD unit and TAC50K control panel 2.3 ARD installation instruction This instruction includes information for TAC50K control system. 2.4 ARD Functional description Step
If main supply fails:
1
ARD detects control panel is not powered
2
ARD switches the ARD battery supply on through contactors
3
Control panel come into ARD mode, drives the car the lightest way to the landing and opens doors
4
Control panel gives end message to ARD
5
ARD switches the emergency battery drive off and starts wait for the return of main power
WARNING: A waiting time of 20 minute is inserted after each rescue operation performed by the ARD device. This is to ensure proper cooling of internal components and to prevent possible failures. 2.5 ARD Model No.
Model
Applying
Output
Battery
Motor
Voltage
Modle
1
ARDK-S08-01B-MRL
Under 13KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES04- 12- 4- MRL)
2
ARDK-S08-02B-MRL
Under 20KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES07- 12- 4- MRL)
3
ARDK-S08-03B-MRL
Under 30KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES12- 12- 4- MRL)
4
ARDK-S08-01B
Under 13KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES04- 12- 4)
5
ARDK-S08-02B
Under 20KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES07- 12- 4)
6
ARDK-S08-03B
Under 30KW
1-phase 220V
ARD(ES12- 12- 4)
5
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
2.6 ARD Specification classification
ARDK-S08-01B
ARDK-S08-02B
ARDK-S08-03B
Max travelling distance
≤20 meters
≤20 meters
≤20 meters
Correction speed of elevators
≤0.2 m/s
≤0.2 m/s
≤0.2 m/s
Max output power for 105 sec.
1200 W
1600 W
2000 W
Max power peak for 1.5 sec.
2400 W
4000 W
4000 W
Output voltage
220VAC(±15%)
220VAC(±15%)
220VAC(±15%)
Battery type
ES0412 x 4pcs
ES0712 x 4pcs
ES1212 x 4pcs
(12V, 4AH)
(12V, 7AH)
(12V, 12AH)
*** Battery is serial connection with 4 pcs (12V x 4 pcs = 48V) 2.7 ARD Part Number and description For MRL (Machine RoomLess) Part No
Parts name
unit
100489508
ARDK- S08- 01B- MRL with cables
set
100489509
ARDK- S08- 02B- MRL with cables
set
100489510
ARDK- S08- 03B- MRL with cables
set
100489511
ARD(ES04- 12- 4- MRL); Battery
set
100489512
ARD(ES07- 12- 4- MRL); Battery
set
100489513
ARD(ES12- 12- 4- MRL); Battery
set
Motor Capacity ≤13kW
≤20kW
≤30kW
1 1 1 1 1 1
For MR (Machine Room) Part No
Parts name
unit
100489516
ARDK- S08- 01B with cables
set
100489517
ARDK- S08- 02B with cables
set
100489518
ARDK- S08- 03B with cables
set
100489519
ARD(ES04- 12- 4); Battery
set
100489520
ARD(ES07- 12- 4); Battery
set
100489521
ARD(ES12- 12- 4); Battery
set
Motor Capacity ≤13kW
≤20kW
≤30kW
1 1 1 1 1 1
The cables configured control cable and power cable
6
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
2.8 ARD control diagram
Fig. 1 control diagram
Fig. 2 ARDK control interface definition
7
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
3. Installation of ARD 3.1 Preparations Step 1
Action
Note
Check that the batteries in the ARD unit are not connected.
This is to ensure that the power is not turned on by the batteries.
3.2 Fixing of ARD and ARD battery Box Step 1
Action
Note
Before working inside the ARD unit, make sure ARD main switch and mains power is OFF.
2
The ARD battery box is located in suitable position. For machine roomless elevator Fix the ARD battery box on the top of the lift well wall above the door line. For machine room elevator Fix the ARD battery box near the control panel. Fix the ARD device above the battery box.
，
For fixing holes and position see (Figure 3)
，
For fixing holes and position see (Figure 3)
Anchor bolt 2-M12
200
25
250
16 0
Battery unit 12V 12AH x 4 450
D
3
ARD Unit size for MRL elevator model ARD-S08-01B ARD-S08-02B ARD-S08-03B
W 565 565 565
W1 455 455 446
H 360 360 465
D 160 160 160
Fig. 3 Installing guide for ARD unit and Battery unit on the wall (for MRL)
8
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
Fig. 4 Installing guide for ARD unit and Battery unit on the floor (for MR) 3.3 Cable connections at the ARD unit Step 1
2 3 4 5 6
Action
Note
Connect the main supply cable source to the ARD unit. Fix the cable to the wall using cable fixings. Remove cover of the terminals. Connect the cable to the terminals R0,S0,T0,N, And PE inside the ARD unit. Connect power cable from ARD output R, S, T, PE to TAC50K Input L1, L2, L3, PE. Connect 220V cable from ARD output N (220V) to TAC50K. Connect MIC-9P connector of control line of the start and finish signal in TAC50K. Check wiring is correct, fastening to ensure that the correct line, no short circuit. Connect the red cable from ARD A main switch to positive (+) terminal of the battery cabinet, connect the black wire from screw terminal of ARD-01 board to negative(-) terminal of the battery cabinet.
9
See Fig. 1 See Fig. 1 See Fig. 2
In case of MLR
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
3.4 ARD DIP Switch definition
DIP switch No
ARD delay time (second)
ARD continuous running time (second)
1
2
3
1
ON
OFF
OFF
2
ON
ON
OFF
3
ON
ON
ON
300
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
105
5
OFF
ON
OFF
6
OFF
ON
ON
105 10
180
40
180 300
4. Note Debugging 4.1 Check to confirm before the operation and inspection Step Action 1 Emergency switch of ARD should be in the normal state. 4.2 The confirmation of ARD output Step Action 1 Switch On the ARD unit main switch S1 2 The battery voltage to confirm: More than 53V. 3 Confirm power supply output voltage. L1 L2 L3 PE N(220V), 220V. 4 Turn on the elevator main switch.
， ， ， ，
10
description The ARD continuous running time is 105, 180 or 300 second when the main power fails for longer than 10 second. The ARD continuous running time is 105, 180 or 300 second when the main power fails for longer than 40 second.
Note Press the emergency switch, ARD will not run.
Note The lift switch (1S) off The lift switch (1S) off The lift switch (1S) off The elevator should be running good, otherwise, in accordance with the relevant examination and control check ARD wiring.
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
4.3 ARD function test Step 1 2
3 4
Action In the normal operation status of the Elevator Elevator stopped between floor and floor due to interrupt of power source. The ARD supply electric power to Elevator automatically after about 10 seconds. The Elevator move to leveling position, elevator stop and then open the door. ARD stop to supply electric power when receive the finish signal from the TAC50K controller. ARD completion of the rescue efforts, If the ARD did not receive the finish signal from TAC50K, ARD operate during 105 seconds then ARD system turn off.
，
Note Delay time of 10 second is decides by ARD DIP Switch. It can select one of 10 and 40 second
continuous running time of 105 second is decides by ARD DIP Switch. It can select one of 105, 180 and 300 second
4.4 The LED of ARD status. (ARD status lights H2, H3, H4) LED working status LED
LED working status
DS2
Always lighting in normal operation after reset
DS3
Blinking when control logic is running
DS4
Lighting 1 second after reset
Note: ARD normal operation mode, DS2 is always lighting, DS3 is Blinking, DS4 is lighting 1 second after reset. Fault LED:, the DS5 is always lighting when ARDK normal work, the DS5 is off when ARDK fault
11
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
4.5 ARD fault finding step
Fault and possible cause
Actions
1
ARD start, but TAC50K is not supplied Possible cause: Wrong cable connections.
Check the connections TAC50K to ARD.
2
Elevator does not move in normal mode. Possible cause: ARD switch S1 OFF
Check ARD power switch S1.
3
ARD start, but it does not drive elevator to leveling position Change battery. Possible cause: battery is discharged.
4
ARD does not start when power supply Disappears. Check the connections control Possible cause: wrong cable Connections panel to ARD or change ARD. or ARD has been damaged
5
The others fault
。
，
Check TAC50K system
12
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
5. ARDK Circuit Diagram
13
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
ARD Manual
ThyssenKrupp Elevator (Korea) Ltd. Headquarter and overseas sales 55-30, Oryu-dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, 152-100 Korea Tel.: +82 2 2610 7534, 7790 Fax: +82 2 2610 7700 www.thyssenkrupp-elevator.co.kr DEA-09097, Issue October 2009
14
ThyssenKruppElevator(Korea)
Chapter1 Chapter16-1
DestinationDispatch
ThyssenKruppDongyangElevator
Every attempt has been made to ensure that this documentation is as accurate and up-to-date as possible. However, ThyssenKruppDongyangElevatorassumesnoliabilityforconsequences,directlyorindirectly,resultingfromanyerroror omission.Thematerialcontainedhereinissubjecttorevision,andThyssenKruppDongyangElevatormakeseveryeffortto inform its product users of these revisions as they occur. Please report any problems with this manual to ThyssenKrupp DongyangElevator. @2007ThyssenKruppDongyangElevator PublishedSeptember,2007 PrintedinRepublicofKorea
2
ThyssenKruppDongyang
TABLEOFCONTENTS THESYSTEMS................................................................................................................................... 4 HOWTHESYSTEMSWORK ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
SAFETYPRECAUTIONS....................................................................................................................... 7 ARRIVALOFTHEEQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................. 8 RECEIVING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8 STORING ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................ 8 SERVERINSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 9 WIRING ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9 DSCSERVER ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11 DSCSERVERSET-UP .............................................................................................................................................................. 11 JOBPARAMETERDEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................. 11 OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 12 SYSTEMCONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 13
KIOSKSETUP.................................................................................................................................. 15 WIRING ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 CALIBRATINGTHETOUCHSCREEN ............................................................................................................................................. 15 NETWORKCONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................................... 16 KIOSKIPADDRESSASSIGNMENT ............................................................................................................................................... 17 KIOSKCONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 19 STARTINGKIOSKMOVIE ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
KIOSKSCREENDEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................. 21 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 24 KIOSK ................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 DSCSERVER ....................................................................................................................................................................... 25
AppendixI.WiringDiagram AppendixII.SmartTouchScreenUser’sManual AppendixIII.SmartTouchScreenSpecification 3
ThyssenKruppDongyang
DestinationDispatch™ ThyssenKruppElevator’sDestinationDispatchfamilyofcontrolsystemsaredesignedtooptimizedispatchingperformance in order to reduce waiting times, time spent riding in elevators and energy consumption. All systems are based upon a patenteddispatchingalgorithm. The Destination Dispatch (DD) algorithm is not just an upgrade to an existing Group Supervisory Control System; it is a completelynewapproachtoelevatorcontrolbasedonArtificialIntelligence. Thesystemsarebasedonminimizingthetotaltimeneededforapassengertoreachhisdestination.Whilewaitingtimeis important, the time spent riding in the car is also important. Additionally, DD considers the impact that making a call assignmenthasontheexistingcallsinthesystem.
TheSystems DestinationDispatchBasic Thissystemisdesignedforbuildingsthatdonothavethetraditionalmorninguppeaksuchashotelsandhospitals.These systemshavethetraditionalupanddownbuttonsateachfloorandfloorcallbuttonsinthecabins.
DestinationDispatchwithUpPeakBoost Destination Input Touch Screens are located in the main lobbies of the building. Conventional up and down buttons are located at other floors. Standard call buttons are located in the cabin. The system economically delivers a 40 to 60% increaseintraffichandlingduringuppeakperiods.Thesystemisidealforofficebuildingswithtwoentrylobbies.
FullDestinationDispatch DestinationInputTouchScreensarelocatedatallfloors.Callbuttonsarenotneededinthecabin.Thissystemisdesigned forbuildingswithchallengingtrafficthroughouttheday. Thethreesystemsprovidedifferenttypesoftraffichandlingperformancefordifferentapplicationswithdifferentcosts.All threesystemsprovideAdvancedNoticeofCarArrival.Usingsimulation,wecanevaluatetheperformanceofeachofour systemsinyouruniquebuildinganditstraffic.Youcanthendecidewhichsystemdeliversthemostperformanceforyour money.
4
ThyssenKruppDongyang
HowtheSystemsWork Thesystemsuseahighlyintelligentdispatchingalgorithmthatseamlesslyadaptstoanytrafficpattern.Olderdispatching systemsmustapplyadifferentalgorithmforeachtrafficconditionsuchasuppeak,downpeak,lunchtime,andinterfloor. Great amounts of computing power are used by these simpler systems to determine which traffic type is occurring. However,DD’suniversalalgorithmrespondsequallywelltoalltraffictypes.Thealgorithmissoadvancedthatitmustrun onahighspeed32bitprocessor. Whenacallforserviceisentered,thedispatchercalculatesthetimerequiredforeachelevatortotakethepassengertohis destination which is called Estimated Time to Destination (ETD). At floors with up and down buttons the destination is calculatedstatisticallybasedupontheorigin,andthesetofallpossibledestinations.AtfloorsequippedwithDestination InputTouchScreensthepassengerdirectlyinputshisdestination. Afterthetimetodestinationiscalculatedforeachelevatortheimpactofthecallassignmentontheotherpassengersinthe system is evaluated. For example, if a car with five people aboard must make a an unplanned stop to pick up a new passengereachofthefivepassengerswillbedelayedapproximately10secondsforatotalcostof5x10secondsor50 seconds. If however, a car had planned to stop at the same floor then there is no cost. This cost is known as System DegradationFactor(SDF). Thecarwiththelowestcost,ETD+SDF,isassignedthecall.Thisapproachinherentlyplacespassengerswithcommon destinationsinthesamecars,whichisthemostefficientwayoftransportingpassengers. ArtificialIntelligence,AI,isusedtoenhancethealreadyintelligentDDalgorithm.Severalenhancementsareused. PeopleperCall:Whenacallisentered,whetherfromatouchscreenorabutton,thenumberofpassengersrepresented bythatcallinitiallyisunknown.Overtimethesystemlearnshowmanypeoplearerepresentedbyacall.Thisinformation is learned by floor and by time period. For example, an up call from the third floor at 9:15 in the morning will usually represent2passengers.Armedwiththisinformationthecallwillbeassignedtoanelevatorwithspacefor2passengers. Additionally,loadingandunloadingtimecanbebetterforecast. Cultural Car Load: All people like to have personal space, the distance between us and the next person. This is particularlytruewhenridinginelevatorcars.Carsrarelycarrymorethan60%oftheircapacityforthisreason.However, the amount of personal space people require varies from culture to culture. It also varies by the time of day in some cultures.Forexample,inNewYork,peoplearewillingtocrowdmorecloselytogetherinanelevatorintheeveningwhen theyareleavingforhomethaninthemorningwhentheyaregoingtotheiroffice. DDlearns using,FuzzyLogic,howfullypassengers willloadacarforeachspecificinstallationandkeepstrackofthisby timeperiod.Itwon’tsendacarwitheightpassengersaboardtoansweracallifithaslearnedthattheninthpersonwon’t enterthecarbecauseitappearstoofull.Thiseliminateswastedstops. Body Mass: Body mass varies by country and by culture. If everyone weighed 68 kilo grams, determining how many passengers were in an elevator car would be easy. Using information such as the change in car load when passengers enter and the length of time the doors are obstructed during loading and unloading, the average body mass of the passengers at a particular installation is learned. If this value changes over time it is also learned. This Body Mass informationisusedbytheCulturalCarLoadingalgorithm.
5
ThyssenKruppDongyang
VariableOptimizationParameters:Regardlessoftrafficlevel,DDdeliversalowertimetodestinationthansystemsthat optimizeonwaitingtime.Duringheavytraffic,DDdeliverslowerwaitingtimealso.However,duringlightertraffic,waiting times on some of our competitor’s destination selection systems may be longer than traditional systems. TKE DD overcomesthisbycontinuouslymonitoringtrafficlevelsandgivingwaitingtimeanincreasinglyhigherpriorityastrafficlevel falls.
6
ThyssenKruppDongyang
SafetyPrecautions This page should be read BEFORE any work is performedonElevatorEquipment.
Important! The Procedures Contained In this manual are intended for the use of qualified elevator personnel.Intheinterestofyourpersonalsafety and the safety of others, do NOT attempt ANY ProcedurethatyouareNOTqualifiedtoperform.
UsetheProperFuse To avoid fire hazard, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage rating and current rating as specified in the parts listforyourproduct.
ElectricalHazards Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches and fuses may NOT disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams.WhethertheACsupplyisgroundedornot,high voltagewillbepresentatmanypoints.
AllProceduresinthismanualmustbedoneinaccordance withtheapplicablerulesofthelatesteditionoftheKorean ElectricalCodeandanygoverninglocalcodes.
PrintedCircuitCards
When printed circuit Cards are involved, do NOT remove connections or cards from the equipment while power is applied.Thiscandamageequipment. Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate staticbags.
TermsinThisManual CAUTION statements identify Conditions that could result in damage to the equipment or other property if improper procedures arefollowed.
WARNING statements identify Conditions that could result in personal injury if improperproceduresarefollowed.
GeneralSafety
MainlineDisconnect AlwayslockoutandtagouttheMainlineDisconnectwhen powerisremovedfromequipment.
TestEquipmentSafety
ElectricalSafety
Alwaysrefertomanufacturers’instructionbookforproper operationandadjustmentsoftestequipment. Meggering or buzzer type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of devices such as voltmetersoncertainlowlevelanalogcircuitsmaydegrade performance of an electronic system. Always use a voltmeterhavingaminimumimpedanceof1MOhm/Volt.A digitalvoltmeterisrecommended.
All wiring must be in accordance with the Korean Electric Codeandbeconsistentwithallstateandlocalcodes.
WhenPowerIsOn
Specific warnings and cautions will be found throughout the manual where they apply and do NOT appear in this summary.
Dangerous voltages exist at several points in some products.Toavoidpersonalinjury,doNOTtouchexposed electricalconnectionsorcomponentswhilepowerisON.
7
ThyssenKruppDongyang
ArrivaloftheEquipment
Receiving
Storing
Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage and promptly report all visible damage to the carrier. All shippingdamageclaimsmustbefiledwiththecarrier.
During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator jobsite, precautionsshouldbetakentoprotectthecomponentfrom dust,dirtandmoisture.
Overview Destination Dispatch is an Elevator system that replaces conventional hall calls with the new Estimated Time to Destination system. The system allows calls to similar
floors to be grouped together to save power and improve efficiency. Grouping of calls also allows improved power savings.
8
ThyssenKruppDongyang
ServerInstallation Tobegintheinstallationoftheserver,chooseallocationin the machine room that the server rack will be out of the way but convenient to access. Place the rack close to the incoming Network/CAN cables from the kiosks, and verify there is adequate access to the front and the rear of the rack.Seefigure1.
NOTE:Ifdesired,theswitchcanbemountedoneunitlower andtheEthernetcablingcanbedirectedovertheswitch.
Figure2-EthernetSwitchMounting
Figure3–MainandBackupSwitchesconnection Figure1–Servermountingrack NOTES: • Installcomponentsintherackfromthebottomup • FollowthedirectionsprovidedwiththeUPSonsetting upthedevice. • OncetheUPSisreadytobeinstalled,placetheUPSin thebottomoftherack. 1. Secure the UPS in the bottom of the rack and unpack theBackupDSCServer. 2.Positionthebackupserver2”to3”abovetheUPS. 3.MounttheMainServerontotopoftheBackupServer. 4.RemovetheEthernetswitchesfromthepackaging. 5.MounttheEthernetswitchinthetopmostlocationinthe rack.SeeFigure2.
9
Wiring 1.Plug the UPS into a rated 120VAC unswitched source. VerifytheUPSpowersupandischargingthebattery. 2. Using the supplied power cords with the servers, plug both servers into the connections labeled ”Battery Backed”. This will allow the server store main operationalifmainpowerhasbeenlost. 3. Once both servers have power; connect the keyboard, mouse, monitor, and Ethernet cable to the back of the server.
ThyssenKruppDongyang
NOTES: • IfaKVM(Keyboard/Video/Mouse)switchwassentwith the job, follow the instructions provided to install and configure the switch. If none was provided, it will be required to manually move the keyboard, video, and mouse connections between the Main and Backup Serverswhensettingthemup. • If CAN communication is required, connect the CAN adaptertotheinstalledPCICancard.
4. Onceallconnectionshavebeenmade,pressthepower buttontopowertheserveron. 5. Check the rear of the server where the power connectionsareandverifybothpowersupplieshavea greenLEDindicatingtheyarebothworkingproperly. 6. Once the server has booted, continue to the Server setupprocedures.
10
ThyssenKruppDongyang
DSCServer The Destination Dispatch (DSC) server contains software that has custom Estimated Time to Destination Algorithm
aswellasthespecialgroupcontrollingsoftware.Tosetup thisserver,youmustfirstassignan IPaddresstothecomputer.Youcanfollowthesamesteps asoutlinedintheKioskSetup,toassigntheIPaddress.
Figure4–MainDSCScreen
DSCServerSet-up
3.EdittheJobParametersasrequired:Seefigure4.
1.CreateaNET,aGROUP,andCARSfortheelevatorswe willbeusing.RefertotheIMS User’s Guide.
JobParameterDefinitions • GroupNumber:Thegroupnumberwhichthisinstanceof DSCwillcontrol. • NumberofFloors:Thenumberoffloorsthegroupserves. • NumberofCars:Thenumberofcarsinthegroup.
Kiosk 2. Click (tap) on Job Parameters> Edit to open the Job Parameterswindow.
11
Timeouts: The length of time a screen is displayed on a Kiosk. Operation: DSC or Hall calls. The Destination Dispatch Screen is displayed on the kiosk when in DSC operation.
ThyssenKruppDongyang
Standard up and down hall calls will be displayed on the Kioskswheninhallcalloperation.
Car Parameters: Car specific adjustments. Select the differentcarsbyusingtheleftandrightarrowstowardthe toprightcornerofthepane.
Operations •
•
•
Service: Service car operation adjustments. The First and Second car adjustments are for selecting a backup car if the primary car is busy. The Pin is the number thatmustbeentered inonthe Kioskto have SpecialServiceOperation.Thisfeatureisusedwhena carisspecificallydesignatedafreightcarandmovers ordeliverycompanieswillusethiselevatorspecifically. NOTE: Service Operation is only available during business hours (7 am to 6 pm); Therefore, the time settingfortheDSCservershallbekeptgood. Express:Thisfeaturerunsacartocyclebetweentwo landingsforaspecificperiodoftime. Capture: This feature allows users to capture a specific elevator to take them to their destination. Accessed via a hidden button on the main call entry screen, it displays a pin entry screen to validate access to the operation. Once access is granted, a screen displaying the elevators in the group will be displayedandtheusercanselectthedesiredelevator. That elevator will be taken out of normal service, complete any calls currently assigned to it, and then go to the kiosk floor and open its doors. If the car is not takenoutofservicebeforethedoorsclose,itwill bereturnedtonormalgroupoperation.(Notused)
DSC Adjustment Table: The table displays car and DSC adjustments. Serve: X in this box determines if a car serves a specificfloor.Ifunchecked,DSCwillnotassigncallsto acarthatdoesnotservethefloorrequested. F.Door/R.Door: Determines if the car serves the front/rearorbothopeningsofalanding.
•
• •
CE Fix: Ifchecked,thecarhasCEFixturesinthe hall showingassignedcallstothatgivenelevator.
•
HC: If checked, the specified landing will only display hall calls, when unchecked the normal Destination DispatchKioskscreenwillbeshown.
•
F.Kiosk/R.Kiosk: Determines the amount of Front or RearKiosksatalanding.
•
Time: This adjustment determines the walking time fromthekiosktotheelevatoropening.Thisadjustment playsintotheDSCETDalgorithm. Height:Thisisadisplayofthefloorheights,thisisnot changeable.
Conversion:Usedifmetricinformationisrequired.
• BackupPC:Notused.
12
ThyssenKruppDongyang
SystemConfiguration Click(tap)File>System>Communications Setup toeditthe SystemConfiguration.Seefigure5. Kiosk Communication: Determines whether Ethernet or CAN communication is used to communicate with the Kiosks.Ethernetshallbechecked. CanChannel1:UsedtodeterminethelocationoftheCAN adapter. If PCI is selected, DSC will use the PCI Can adapterinstalledintheserver.IfSerialisSelected,DSCwill use the can adapter connected to the serial Port at the givenCOMPortNumber. CanChannel2:SameasCanChannel1.
Connect: Determines the connection settings for connectingtothegatewayrouterthatcommunicatestothe group.Directisthestandardconnectionmethod. PC Node: This number must not conflict with any other devicesonthelink.i.e.,aMachineroommonitorcomputer, or a Field Trouble shooting Laptop. As for the type of connection, neither Server nor Client should be checked. Forexample,if1isenteredinthemainserver,itmustbe2 inthebackupserver. Direct Connect Options: The settings DSC uses to communicate with the Gateway/Router. Baud Rate should be set to Auto, and the COM Port set to whichever COM portisusedtoconnecttotheGateway/Router.
Figure5–SystemConfiguration–CommunicationsSetupTab (IPAddressesofMainandBackupDestinationDispatchServers)
13
ThyssenKruppDongyang
Kiosk Diagnostics: This screen can be accessed by clicking Monitor > Kiosk Diagnostics. It displays a list of knownKiosksthatareconnected.Seefigure6.
Figure6-KioskDiagnostics *Agreendotindicatesarecognizedkiosk.
14
ThyssenKruppDongyang
KioskSetup Wiring ConnectUTPCAT5toeachkiosktoRJ45portintheback ofeachkiosks.Seefigure7.
Figure7–Ethernetconnection
CalibratingtheTouchScreen 1. Click (tap) on the “IR” in the task bar and setup. See figure 8. This will open Smart Touch setup program. The touch screen information under device information is shown.Seefigure9. IR – Green color: Normal condition of Touch screen / Graycolor:AbnormalconditionofTouchscreen.
Figure9-TouchScreenProperties
Figure8–IRinthetaskmenu 2.Thetouchscreencalibrationisautomatic,soitdoesnot needtobecalibratedmanually.
NOTE: Touch screen may not work if USB slots are occupied.Inthiscase,rebootthetouchscreenandremove any devices connected to USB slots during rebooting process.
Figure10–KioskTouchScreen
15
ThyssenKruppDongyang
NetworkConfiguration If your installation of Destination Dispatch requires an IP based network, use the following steps and examples to completethesetup. Networked computers communicate via the TCP/IP protocol This setup requires each computer on the network to be givenanIPAddress. 192.168.0.XXX is the most popular local IP address scheme.Inthisscheme,only thelast3numberschange. Valid ranges for these numbers are 1 through 254. Meaning the network is capable of 255 devices. More devices are capable, but we will not have more than 255 devicesonourDestinationDispatchNetwork. The following scheme will be used when assigning IP addressestoyourDestinationDispatchKiosk/Servers.The MainandBackupDestinationDispatchServerswilluse theIPaddress192.168.0.1and192.168.0.2,respectively. The kiosk IP address will begin at 192.168.0.10 and will be assigned from the bottom floor to the top. Figure 10 givesanexampleoftheIPaddressnamingscheme. NOTE:OnlycomputerswithinthesameIPaddressscheme can talk to each other. 192.168.0.50 can talk to 192.168.0.88,butnotto10.0.0.4.
16
Figure10–IPAddressScheme
ThyssenKruppDongyang
3. Double click (tap) the Local Area Connection icon to opentheLocalAreaConnectionStatuswindow.SeeFigure 13.
KioskIPaddressAssignment AUSBkeyboardisrequirecompletingthefollowingtasks. Theseproceduresmustbecompletedonallkiosks. You can use either the touch screen or a USB Mouse to completethefollowingsteps. 1. Click (tap) Start at the bottom left of the screen. Now click(tap)thecontrolpanelicon.Seefigure11.
Figure13–LocalAreaConnection 4.Click(tap)onProperties,andthendoubleclick(tap)the InternetProtocolTCP/IPtexttoopentheInternetProtocol TCP/IPSettingsDialog.SeeFigure14. Figure11–WindowsStartMenu 2. Double click(tap)theNetwork ConnectionsIcon.This willopenawindowdisplayingallavailablenetworkdevices. SeeFigure12.
Figure12–NetworkConnections
17
Figure14-ConnectionSettings
ThyssenKruppDongyang
5.Click(tap)”UsethefollowingIPAddress”radiobutton. SeeFigure15.
Figure15–TCP/IPSettings 6.EntertheIPaddressforthekioskbeingsettingup.The Subnet Mask should always be set to 255.255.255.0. ThisshouldbesetonallKiosksaswellasonallserverson the Destination Dispatch network. The DNS settings and theDefaultGatewaydonothavetobeset.
18
7. Click the OK button and close all windows. You have nowconfiguredaKioskwithitsIPaddress. NOTE:TheKiosksuseaCompactFlashcardintheplaceof atypicalharddrivefoundinmostcomputers.Thecompact flashcardsrequirelesspower,andaremorereliablethan typicalplatterbasedharddrives.InorderfortheCompact Flash cards to last, the cards were setup to a read-only state,meaningthecardscannotbewrittentoundernormal circumstances.Forthesettingstobesaved,thepartitionto be written to when the computer shuts down must be flaggedtostoreallconfigurationstotheflashdisk.Thisis similar to the controllers and the WRT command used in RemoteFasts. NOTE: It is very important that you do not select the Shutdown option in this window. Shutting down the kiosk requires you to take off the rear cover of the kiosk and disconnect/reconnect power supply cable to power it backup.
ThyssenKruppDongyang
KioskConfiguration
1. Click (tap) Start at the bottom left of the screen and selectPrograms,andTKE.SeeFigure16.
DestinationDispatchInformation • Landing:Selectswhichlandingthiskioskislocatedat. • Kiosk Number:Thisoptiondetermineswhichkioskthis is in the layout of the floor. Refer to your job configurationinformationtodeterminewhichkioskgoes in which location. This can be obtained by contracting FieldEngineering.SeeFigure18.
4
3 4
Figure16-KioskConfigurator 2. Now click (tap) Kiosk Configurator to open Kiosk Configuratordialogue.Seefigure17.
3
5
2 2
1 1
6
Figure18–KioskNumber • Side:Front/Rear.This option selectswherethiskioskis located.RefertoJobConfigurationfordetails. • CommunicationType:Selectswhichtypeofconnection yourkioskswillbeusing.Ethernetisthestandardsetting, butCANisacommonmethodaswell. • ScreenSize:Selectswhichkioskscreensizeyouwillbe using. The size determines which software will be used foryourspecificscreensize. • Movie:SelectswhichFlashmovieyouwillbeusingwith thekiosks. 3. After entering proper values into the kiosk configurator Figure17–KioskConfiguratordialogue screen,click(tap)onSaveandExitbutton. NOTE:SecurityModealwaysremainsinNONE,andKiosk IDversionin0.
19
ThyssenKruppDongyang
StartingKioskmovie
1.Click(tap)Startatthebottomleftofthescreenand selectStartup,andMflashframe.SeeFigure19. This will open a command window. Type the command PING followed by a space and then the IP address of the knownkiosk.Thecommandshouldlooklikethefollowing: Ping192.168.0.35 Press ENTER. As the ping command is executed, the command screen should return valid ping information. If thePINGcommandreturnserrorconditions,performsteps toresolveconnectionissues.SeeFigure21.
Figure19–StartingKioskScreen
CommunicationCheckofeachKiosk 1.VerifythattheIPaddressandtheSubnetmaskonallof theKiosksandtheDSCserverfollowthesamescheme.To verify that you are properly configured, take note of a known IP address of a kiosk, for example, we will use 192.168.0.10.ClickStart>RunandtypeCMDandpress ENTER.SeeFigure20.
Figure21–CommunicationCheckofeachKiosk
Figure20–CommunicationCheckofeachKiosk
20
ThyssenKruppDongyang
KioskScreenDefinitions Active Calls – Accessible through the main kiosk screen, andshowsallcallsthatareassociatedwithanycargoing toorfromthecurrentfloor.
ETAScreen–DisplaysstandardUPandDOWNhallcalls. ThismodeisselectablefromtheDSCServer,andturnson automaticallyduringspecifiedtime.
Figure19–ActiveCallsScreen
Figure21–ETAScreen
Boot Screen – Connecting Screen. This screen is displayedwhenDestinationDispatchisthefirststartedand waitingtoestablishaconnectionwiththeDSCServer.
Instruction Screen – Displayed when the help button is pressed on the main kiosk screen. This screen displays contractsetuphelpinformation
Figure22–InstructionScreen
Figure20–BootScreen
21
ThyssenKruppDongyang
ETD Screen – Main Destination Dispatch Kiosk Screen. This is a contract specific screen that displays all of the landingsthegroupofelevatorsserveaswellasanyspecial features.
Figure23–ETDScreen Security – Displayed when the elevators have gone into security,specificallywhena hallcallatagivenlocation is lockedout
No Communication – Displayed when a kiosk has lost communication with the DSC Server, or when the DSC Server has lost communication with the group. See the troubleshootingsectionforresolution.
Figure25–NoCommunicationScreen Pin Entry-Passwordentry screenforanyofthe contract specificfeaturesthatrequireapinnumber.
Figure24–SecurityScreen
22
Figure26–PinEntryScreen
ThyssenKruppDongyang
Pin Entry Denied – Displayed with the incorrect PIN numberisentered.
Pin Timed Out – This error is displayed when a Pin numberisrequested,butoneisnotenteredintheallotted time.
Figure27–PinEntryDenied
Figure28–PinTimedOutScreen
23
ThyssenKruppDongyang
TroubleShooting
KIOSK TOUCHSCREEN Issue:Whentappingthetouchscreen,thecurserselectsa differentareaofthescreenmakingselectionshard. Resolution:ExittheKioskscreenbypressingCtrl+Alt+ Delandcheckthetaskbarmenu.PressIRinthetaskbar, andconfirmifthekioskisproperlysetup.Iftouchscreen is not shown in the dialogue windows, reboot the kiosk. Touchscreenwillbeautomaticallyrecognized. NOTE:GreenIRinthetaskbarmenuindicatestouchscreen is recognized and functioning, and Gray IR indicates not recognized.IfUSBslotsareoccupied,thetappingmaynot function. Remove any USB devices and restart the touch screen.Seefigure29.
Figure29–USBslots
KIOSKDSC: Issue:DSCcallsarelockedout,eventhoughthegroupis notonsecurity. Resolution: Incorrect Group # in Job Parameters on the DSCserver. Issue:Kioskdisplays“UnabletoDispatchElevator”whena DSCcallisplaced. Resolution: The Job Parameters on the DSC Server state theincorrectnumberoflandingsthegroupserves. The Job Parameters on the DSC Server state that no car servicesthatfloor. No elevators are in group automatic and available to actually assign the call to. If all elevators are on independentservice,thiserrorcanresultorifallelevators areshutdownonvariousfaults Issue:AllKioskcallsareonlybeingassignedtoonecar.
24
Resolution: The Job Parameters on the DSC Server state anincorrectnumberofcarsinthegroup. Issue:ThekioskisonlyshowingUpandDownhallcalls. Resolution: The Job Parameters state that the kiosks shouldonlybedisplayingHallCalls. The JobParametertableontheDSCServerisconfigured toonlyuseHallCallsonthespecifiedlanding. Issue:ThekioskisonlyshowingUpandDownhallcalls. Resolution: The Job Parameters state that the kiosks shouldonlybedisplayingHallCalls. The JobParametertableontheDSCServerisconfigured toonlyuseHallCallsonthespecifiedlanding. Issue: Kiosk is showing up in the wrong location in the lobby. Resolution: The kiosk was setup to reflect the wrong location in the lobby. Refer to your Job Configuration Information on the layout scheme of the kiosks. Once the proper number has been located for kiosk, use the followingstepstochangetheKioskAssignment. Click (tap) the Start button at the bottom of the screen. SelectPrograms>TKE,andselectcorrectkiosknumber. Issue:WhentheKioskpowersup,ithangsatthe“Please Wait,StartingDestinationDispatch”Screen,buteventually connects. Resolution: When the kiosk was setup using the Kiosk configurator, the wrong connection method was selected (CanorEthernet).Thesoftwaredoeschecktoseeifavalid connectionisavailable,andifnotwilltrytheothermethod. Issue:WhentheKioskpowersup,ithangsatthe“Please Wait,StartingDestination Dispatch”Screen, andmake no connection. Resolution: Click Start > Run and type regedit and press ENTER.Thiswillopenaregistryeditorwindow.Navigateto HEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ThyssenDover\DSC\Setting. KioskIDversionshouldbe0.
ThyssenKruppDongyang
DSCSERVER Issue: I have created a net, a group, and the cars associatedwithmyelevator,butIdonotreceivethePlugs andLightbulbsstatingthatIamconnected. Resolution:AtthebottomoftheDSCserverwindow,DSC givesseveralindicationsifitisconnected. Ifyousee“DirectConnection”andtheBaudratedoesnot change, then you are properly connected and communicatingwiththeGateway/Router.Seefigure30.
Figure30–Directconnection If these indications are not present, refer to the Server setup section to verify your communications port (serial port)settingsunderthesystemconfigurationwindow. If the status bar does show connection to the Gateway/Router, the issue is between the gateway router and the group. The gateway router should be either assembly 2107AC5, and verify that the JXX connection is goingtothegroup. NOTE: Same JXX connections must be used in main and backupgatewayrouter(2107AC5). Verifythatdipswitch6and7areuponanAC5andproper resistanceschemeisused. Refertotheindividual controllermanualontheresistance informationofthecommunicationbus.Alsonotetheblink rate on the LED on the gateway router. If the gateway/router’s LED is blinking very quickly, the
gateway/router either needs to have software installed, or Dip switch 8 was left on and power was applied to the router.Ifthelateriftrue,removepowerfromthegateway router,changethepositionofswitch8todownandreapply power. The addressing dip switch of the gateway router mustalsobeintheproperposition. Issue:TheKioskdiagnosticscreenshowsallkiosksoffline. Resolution: If using Ethernet for kiosk connection, take note of the Ethernet switch that connects all of the kiosks and servers together. There should be visual indication of communication and activity. If there is none, using a CAT5E cable tester, verify all cabling has been properly terminatedandinstalled. VerifythattheIPaddressandtheSubnetmaskonallofthe Kiosks and the DSC server follow the same scheme. To verify that you are properly configured, take note of a known IP address of a kiosk, for example, we will use 192.168.0.10. Click Start > Runandtype CMD and press ENTER. This will open a command window. Type the command PING followed by a space and then the IP addressoftheknownkiosk.Thecommandshouldlooklike thefollowing: Ping192.168.0.10 Press ENTER. As the ping command is executed, the command screen should return valid ping information. If thePINGcommandreturnserrorconditions,performsteps toresolveconnectionissues.
25
ThyssenKruppDongyang
1
Chapter16Chapter16-2 DSCConfigurationatMachine-room DSC Back-up PC
DSC Main PC
Back-up Ethernet Switch Gear
Main Ethernet Switch Gear
GPSC, GNS of CNGC1 at IOC
Gateway Router
Gateway Router
Jack Box
Wiring Shield cable
Refer to wiring diagram of Jack Box 7KFEA005-051
Jack Box
2
1. 2107AC5 Gateway Router
(Changing LON protocol)
Main power 12VDC
Caution: Dip switch 1 setting is difference between Main (Dip S/W 1=Down) and Back-up Gateway Router (Dip S/W 1=Up), refer to diagram 7KFEA005-051.
Inside of Gateway Router (2107AC5)
Caution: End resistor R5 only install at Back-up Gateway Router, remove End resistor R5 at Main Gateway Router. If communication has some problem, please check it.
3
2. Jack Box
Caution: Do not wiring shield cable at Jack Box, wiring shield cable at Control-panel only.
4
Jack Box Wiring diagram
5
3. 3COM Ethernet switch
Connect UP port of Main Ethernet switch to UP port of Back-up Ethernet switch. Connect DOWN port of Main Ethernet switch to Down port of Back-up Ethernet switch.
6
Chapter16-3
Jan.2008,1/32
I. Elevator Control Type II. TAC50K Group Control 1. System Configuration 2. TAC50K Car & Group Control Function List III. TAC50K DSC 1. System Configuration 2. FULL DSC - The Efficiency of DSC - Equipment 3. Boost DSC IV. Caution when DSC sales V. 32 bit TAC50K VI. CRT Monitoring VII. Artificial intelligence Control-panel ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
TAC50K&DSC
Jan.2008,2/32
I. Elevator Control Type Selective-Collective – General Passenger Elevator Collective – Old Control Type, DY20 Cargo Lift SAPB (Single Automatic Push Button) – General Cargo Lift
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
1. 2. 3.
Jan.2008,3/32
II. TAC50K Group Control 1. System Configuration Minimization of ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) •
When Hall call occurred, calculate ETA for all lifts and send shortest ETA lift with Hall call allocation.
Responding time of Hall call (ETA)
Hall call responding of Car
Arrive at registered floor.
Flight time
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Time 시간
ThyssenKrupp
Passenger arrived
Jan.2008,4/32
TAC50K
TAC50K
TAC50K
GroupControlConfiguration
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Total8 carGroup Control
Jan.2008,5/32
2.TAC50KCar&GroupControlFunctionList
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
TAC50K 그룹기능 목록
ThyssenKrupp
TAC50K 카 기능
Jan.2008,6/32
III. TAC50K DSC (Destination Selection Control) 1. System Configuration Minimization of ETD (Estimated Time to Destination) •
Apply ETD + SDF algorism and not affect others floor passengers and minimize of ETD.
•
It is totally difference concept with General Hall/Car call and is able to install max 8 units of DSC input terminal (Kiosk) at entrance. Hall call responding time (ETA)
Passenger arrived
Hall call responding of Car
Arrive at registered floor.
시간 Time 시간
ETD to destination floor of passenger
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Flight time
Jan.2008,7/32
GeneralGroupControlCallInputDSCCallInput
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
+
Jan.2008,8/32
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
DSCInputTerminal(TouchScreenType)
Jan.2008,9/32
PassengerLift FiremanLift
TAC50K
2.FullDSCSystem 1.
InstallDSCinputterminalforallfloors.
2.
DonotinstallCOPCarCallinthecabin. *Forfiremanemergencylift,installhidden COPtopreventaccessgeneralpassengers.
3.Handlingcapacity:8cars/64stops,250 numbersInputTerminal.
EmergencyCallButton
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
DoorOpen/CloseButton
Jan.2008,10/32
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
TheEfficiencyofDSC
Jan.2008,11/32
General Group Control vs. DSC
General Group Control When punch-in time - Many numbers of stop floor -
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Small numbers of stop floor
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 L
DSC is able to service to combine passengers who goes to nearest floor.
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 L
Jan.2008,12/32
General Group Control
DSC
There is possibility to change lift to goes to destination floor.
I want to go to B2 floor!!
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Good!
B2
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
B2
Goes to destination floor directly.
Jan.2008,13/32
General Group Control
Maria (8F) Acosta (6F) Jose and 7 Persons (All persons goes to 1F)
Park “I want to go to 2F”
8
15sec +
7
10sec 5sec
10sec
2 ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
6
Jan.2008,14/32
Artificial Intelligence
Maria (8F) Acosta (6F) Jose and 7 Persons (All persons goes to 1F)
Park “I want to go to 2F”
8 7
15sec +
10sec
10sec
5sec
2 ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
6
Jan.2008,15/32
Maria (8F)
ETD + SDF
Acosta (6F) Jose and 7persons (All persons goes to 1F) Park
8 7
15sec +
10sec
•Park’s ETD : 5sec (ETA) + 25sec (Flight time) = 30sec 25sec
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
5sec
10sec
6
2
10sec
•Jose and 7 person’s System Degradation Factor (Σ SDF) = 80sec + 80sec = 160sec Total cost (ETD + Σ SDF) = 190 sec
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
“I want to go to 2F”
Jan.2008,16/32
ETD + SDF
Maria (8F)
- 계속
Acosta (6F) Jose and 7persons (All persons goes to 1F) Park “I want to go to 2F””
8 7
15sec +
10sec 5sec
10sec 10sec
6
2
•Acosta’s System Degradation Factor (Σ SDF) = 10sec Total cost (ETD + Σ SDF) = 55 sec
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
25sec
•Park’s ETD : 10sec (ETA) + 25sec (Flight time) + 10sec = 45sec
Jan.2008,17/32
ETD + SDF
Maria (8F)
-계속
Acosta (6F) Jose and 7 persons (All persons goes to 1F) Park “I want to go to 2F”
8 7
15sec +
10sec 5sec
10sec
6 •Park’s ETD : 25sec (ETA) + 25sec (Flight time) = 50sec 25sec
2 ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Total cost (ETD + Σ SDF) = 50 sec
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
•Maria’s System Degradation Factor (Σ SDF) = 0sec
Jan.2008,18/32
ETD + SDF
Maria (8F)
-계속
Acosta (6F) Jose and 7 persons (All persons goes to 1F) Park “I want to go to 2F”
8 7
15sec +
10sec 5sec
10sec
DSC
6
Artificial Intelligence
General Group Control
2 ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
25sec
Jan.2008,19/32
Time Table while Punch-in Time Control Type
Standby time of Hall call responding (sec)
Arrival time to destination floor (sec)
General Group Control
27.8
107.3
ETD-SDF w/ Boost
24.1
74.7
Full ETD-SDF
21.4
71.4
Control Type
Standby time of Hall call responding (sec)
Arrival time to destination floor (sec)
General Group Control
19.3
71.6
ETD-SDF w/ Boost
24.1
64.8
Full ETD-SDF
26.9
63.7
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Time Table while end of Lunch Time
Jan.2008,20/32
DSC advantage • 15~30% more higher traffic efficiency than General Group Control when Punch-in or end of Lunch time operation. • 25% more faster ETA than General Group Control. • High technology marketing
DSC Disadvantage
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
• Cost • Installation Space
Jan.2008,21/32
DSC Machine-room Equipment
TAC50K
TAC50K
Back-upRouter
MainDSCServer
Back-upDSC Server
MainRouter
MainEthernetSwitch
BackEthernetSwitch
DSC Input Terminal DSC Input Terminal MainUPS Repeater(CAT5cable/80meter)
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Back-upUPS
ThyssenKrupp
DSC Input Terminal
Jan.2008,22/32
TAC50K 32bit Version (From Feb 2009)
TAC50K
Embedded DSC
Back-up Router
Main DSC Server
Back-up DSC Server
Main Router
Main Ethernet Switch
Back-up Ethernet Switch
DSC
DSC
DSC Repeater(CAT5 cable / 80 meter)
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Back-up UPS
ThyssenKrupp
Main UPS
Jan.2008,23/32
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
2.
InstallDSCInputTerminal atcertainfloorwithheavy trafficjamonly. InstallCOPatcabin.
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
1.
InstallTouchscreenDSC Inputterminalatlobby.
2.
Install10keypadtypeDSC Inputterminalatotherfloors.
ThyssenKrupp
TAC50K
1.
TAC50K
3.BoostDSC&NewtypeofFullDSC
Jan.2008,24/32
TAC50-04(Under Developing) ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
TKEBrazil
ThyssenKrupp
DSCInputTerminal(KeypadType)
Jan.2008,25/32
ExampleofBoostDSC
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
Lobby&Restaurantfloor
ThyssenKrupp
Lobbyfloor
Jan.2008,26/32
IV.CautionwhenDSCsales DSCofMRLisveryexpensive. TemperatureofHoist-wayandM/R. Repeaterinstallation/cable80m. LiftIDinstallattopoftheHalldoor. InstallHPI(underdeveloping). Terminalrequired2set/floor.
KEYPAD
초안
HPI
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
• • • • • •
Jan.2008,27/32
Pending Group Function of Current DSC System No
Case
1
Attendant Operation
2
O10 (Antinuisance call)
Hall call controlled by DSC (Peters algorithm)
Hall call controlled by Group (Peters Algorithm)
Notes
No good
When ATT mode, it will be out of Group mode.
No good
Conflict between O10 data and KIOSK input call number (Boost system)
3
VIP
No good
• When VIP Hall call input, DSC call will be cancelled. • Exist allocated Hall call problem when VIP Hall call input.
4
Handicap Operation
No good
Additional handicap COP and Hall call station are required.
5
Punch-in Operation
No required.
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
Table 1 - Boost DSC test result
Jan.2008,28/32
DSCSpecialOptions
1.
ServiceOperation:Oneofthestandbyliftserveatfloorwhichpushcallinput floor.ButthisliftstillinGroupoperationmode.
2.
ExpressOperation:Allliftsareoperatebetweenspecified2floorsduring settingtime.
3.
CaptureOperation:ExactlysameasServiceOperation.Butthisliftwillbe changedtooutofGroupoperationmode.
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
InputpasswordatDSCandtheliftcanbe operatedforthefollowingspecialoptions.
Jan.2008,29/32
186C(16bit)
CPUA(32bit)
8
15
No.ofI/OPort
100
256
Poweruptime
34sec
7sec
IMSreloadtime
50sec
3sec
Veryslow
Nodelayisexpected
No.ofcarinagroup
IMSresponse
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
V.CPUA(32bitTAC50KController)
Jan.2008,30/32
VI. CRT monitoring system Function which can be operated at current DSC 1. Parking 2. Fireman 3. Punch-in/out operation – It is able to operate for day and time. 4. Beginning and end of Lunch-time operation – Operated for day and time. 5. Call registration & masking (Lock-out) 6. Independent 7. Separate 8. Sabbath 9. VIP
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
•
Jan.2008,31/32
VI. Artificial Intelligence Control Panel • •
Estimated lunching date : Sep 2008 DSC server using
MainAIserver
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
CGA
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
TAC50K With Embedded DSC
Jan.2008,32/32
VIII. Q&A
ACompany of ThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
END
Overseas Engineering Team
1. CTCR (CAN To CAN Repeater) 1.1 CTCR summany TAC-50K elevator uses the CAN communications which is sensitive to improper resistive load. Improper resistive load may cause the communication trouble by excessive error at CAN BUS in a certain CAN channel. In CAN network, it is very important to keep the balance of load at terminals of each riser. In the circular structure where an elevator group has one or more risers which connect other CAN network each other, it is impossible to make the resistive load of ideal structure required for good communication, and difficult to keep the balance of load resistance. This CAN Repeater(CTCR) takes the role of amplification and insulation between the risers of CAR network, and makes the terminal of multiple riser CAN system keep proper load.
However, in the single riser system, CTCR is not required. Riser can be easily balanced by setting 120Ω at the last HN connector and setting the jumper on the CPU board. In case that the system has two or more risers, CTCR is required for independent operation of each riser.
Controller interconnects HC1H/HC1L, so both terminals of controller group are only terminated. Since CTCR output has equivalent load(resistance), independent risers keep proper load at both terminals. In some group, the number of CTCR is equal to the number of risers in use in the group. In case of 2 or more cars in TKDE, CTCR should be attached to the controller through which it should be connected with Hall Node(HN).
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
1
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.2 Functions: Conversion of communication speed, amplification of communication, extension of node, impedance matching. In TAC-50K, CTCR is applied for the following uses: 1) For HALL CAN Impedance Matching a. 1 Car:
Not applicable – CTCR is not required.
b. 2 car & Group : 1 set / controller 2) CAN communication at Monitoring Panel (Node fix, communication speed change) 3) Signal Amplification a. Communication trouble by long hoist-way (above 80 floors) 1.3 Jumper 1) J1: Input terminal resistance (120 ohm) (off) 2) J2: Input terminal communication speed (on: 100Kbps, off: 50Kbps) 3) J3: Output terminal resistance (120 ohm) (on) 4) J4: Output terminal communication speed (on: 50kbps, off: 20kbps), 5) J8: WD, on all the time. 6) SH1: Input terminal shield (off) 7) SH2: Output terminal shield (on)
Method of Hoist-way Impedance Matching and Shielding for Multi-car
CAR1, 186C Rt=120 GCT, CANBT, CANBC, CANCT, CANCC
CTCR CNHC1
HN #n
Rt=120 CON2
HN #2
HN #1
CON4
(J3,J4,J8)
Rt=120
CNGC1 CNLC1 CAR2, 186C
CTCR
X
Rt=120
HN #n
CANCT, CANCC
(J3,J4,J8)
HN #2
HN #1 Rt=120
CNGC1 CNLC1 CAR3, 186C
J1 : x
J2 : x
Rt=120
J4 : o
GCT, CANBT, CANBC,
J8 : o
CANCT, CANCC
CNHC1 (for HN Node Communication) = CNLC1
SH1 : x
J3 : o SH2 : o
x: do not jump, o: jump
CNCC1 (for CN Node Communication) = CNLC2
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
2
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
1.4 Group parameter setting 1) Car Remote Fast (Input each lifts) J11 = Lift ID (1, 2, 3, … 8) DHNM (Define HN Master) = 1 SPACE BAR lift No. Ex) DHNM = (#1; DHNM = 1_1, #2; DHNM = 1_2, #3; DHNM = 1_3,….) 2) Group Remote Fast MID = 20 sec (Minimum Dispatch Time) MXD = 20 sec (Maximum Dispatch Time) REE = 1, REE = 2, REE = 3 – Reference Elevator SPE = 18 (The flight time of 1floor) Unit (1/16 sec), Range = 4~48, SPE = (Height(H) ⅹ 16) (Speed/60) LER = Total number of standby Elevator at LOBBY floor LBY = Lobby floor setting GRP = GROUP ID (1~8), KOR = 1 (Korea option) If set 0, “HCIEK“ (Hall call enable signal) will be Disable in GROUP I/O MAP. 3) Generic file application Apply generic file Version “2.01D (Last version)”.
CRT Wiring and Shielding without CN4A
CAR1 186C Rt=120 (CANCT)
CNLC2
CON2
CTCR Rt=120 (J3)
J1 : x
CON4
J2 : x
J4 : x(20K) SH1 : x
CN Voice CLW
Door Rt=120
Mux for CRT Rt=120
CRT
J3 : o SH2 : o
J8 : o
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
3
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
SW2
SW1
SW3
ON – 50kbps OFF – 20kbps
CRT Wiring and Shielding with CN4A CAR1 186C Rt=120 (CANCT)
CTCR Rt=120 (J3)
J1 : x
J2 : x
J4 : o(50K) SH1 : x
Door Rt=120
Mux for CRT
CRT
CN4A for Parallel Input Rt=120
J3 : o SH2 : o
J8 : o
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
CN Voice CLW
4
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
Wiring diagram for 2 car
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
5
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
2. PCB JUMPER TABLE Position
Jump CANBT CANBC
186C
Jump/open
In case of 3car above, JUMP lift No. 1 and last one. CAR CAN shield, Jump all the times
Jump
Group Terminal resistor
Jump/open
In 3car above, JUMP lift No. 1 and last one.
JP2
Boot block Write Protect
open
NP
Normal Power (in case of no self power generation)
Jump
When using the Motor Encoder only = JUMP When using the Motor Encoder + Gov Encoder = Open When applying INS/NOR switch in PCB = JUMP
Jump/open Jump/open
When entering the signal (option) into CNL9-3(FSM position)
open
FSCDM
open
CCS
CAN Cable SHIELD
Jump
JP1
CAN Terminal resistor
open
JP2
CAN SHIELD
open
JP3
CAN SHIELD
open
JP4
GND Å-> SHIELD
FS
CLW
HALL CAN SHIELD
CANCC
JSW
JP5 JP6 J1 J2 J3
Check
Jump/open
In case of 3car above, JUMP lift No. 1 and last one.
Jump
J9, J3 IOC-A/B
HALL CAN Terminal resistor
CAR CAN Terminal resistor, Jump all the times
JPV1, JPV2 IOC-B
Jumper
CANCT
GCT
IOC-A/B
Use
open
When applying CLW-2A to MRL (Potential meter)= OPEN CAN CH1 terminating resistance
CLW-1A;OPEN CLW-2A;JUMP
open
CH1 communication speed:
open
open=50K, jump=100K CAN CH2 terminating resistance
Jump
CH2 communication speed: CTCR
J4
open=20K(CRT only)
Jump/open
When applied to HALL CAN, it must be jump=50K. J5, J6 J8
JP1
open
Hardware WDT
Jump
SH1
CAN CH1 Cable SHIELD
open
SH2
CAN CH2 Cable SHIELD
Jump
HN
CN1~4A (when CNs use for
TEST
JP7,6,5,4
CAR CAN)
Program uploading at factory = open, CN sequence
JP7
JP6
JP5
JP4
CN1(0)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CN2(1)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CN3(2)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
CN4(3)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CN5(4)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Jump/open
|| CN12(11)
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
Jump
Jump at site
6
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
CN1~4A (When CN use for Hall
JP3,2,1,8
CAN in Group)
CAR No.
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP8
CAR1
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CAR2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CAR3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CAR4
OFF
ON
ON
ON
CAR5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
|| CAR8 JP9,12
CN1~4A
Connected to PCB pattern
JP10 JP11
J1
Jump/open
AUTO-ANNA
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
open open
Program upoad at factory = open At field = Jump all the time. CAN terminating resistance
7
Jump/open open
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
3. Rules for C/P Installation for Synchronous Motor (Before hanging the rope on the sieve)
1. Even when using the temporary power supply, make sure to connect the earth cable of building to the points listed below:
- C/P earth terminal outside of the hoistway - C/P earth terminal in the hoistway (including Shaft Package) - Earth terminal of motor (using Shield Cable) - The thickness of used earth cable should be same as the thickness of the power cable.
2. When all wirings are completed, turn on the power switch for the first time.
3. Input the elevator data necessary for 186C and CPIK.
** In case of using temporary power supply, minimize the noise generation by setting the parameter P900 of CPIK (switching frequency) at “1” (8 kHz).
4. Before hanging the rope on TM sieve, make sure that the motor rotates normally during INSP operation.
If the motor
doesn’t rotate normally, confirm its normal rotation after finding the cause and taking the troubleshooting measure. Normal rotation can be checked with the parameters of CPIK listed below: - P100: Motor speed - P101: Elevator speed - P106: Speed command value - P107: Load current
5. Even when turning off and then on the power switch, confirm that movement of the car is normal outside the hoistway before riding the car (inside or top).
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
8
Modified by June, 2008
Overseas Engineering Team
4. Importance of Pole Position at Synchronous Motor In operation of synchronous motor, the information on the initial pole position is very important. This information (encoder zeroing data) is stored in the encoder, the inverter imports and uses this information when the power is switched on. If the encoder zeroing data is damaged or lost by noise, the synchronous motor may have abnormal functions as below:
1. It may not rotate due to generation of big noise; 2. It may rotate in reverse direction slowly or quickly; 3. The motor may have over-current exceeding the rated current, and etc.
In operation of the synchronous motor, earth cable wiring is most important to minimize the influence of noise.
Thyssenkrupp Dongyang Elevator
9
Modified by June, 2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
Chapter1 Chapter14-1
ElevatortoCRT,CableConnection 1. Communicationline CRT PC CTCR
OPT8A C168HPCI
RS2 32
OPT8A Cable
CAN MUX 케 이 블
o r U U T L P 2 9 1 9
#1
#2
#3
#4
[ TK50 ELEVATOR CRT ]
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 1 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
2.CANMUX Cablewhatistheelevator’scommunicationlinepluggreencolorconnector(low8pin)intherearof theCANMUX’s T+,R+ From Elevator T-,R-
T+,R+
1CH_R+
T-,R-
1CH_R-
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 2 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
REAROFTHECANMUX 1BOARD CAN1CH(Connect cableof #1Elevator) CAN2CH(Connect cableof #2Elevator) CAN3CH(Connect cableof #3Elevator) CAN4CH(Connect cableof #4Elevator) 2BOARD CAN5CH(Connect cableof #5Elevator) CAN6CH(Connect cableof #6Elevator) CAN7CH(Connect cableof #7Elevator) CAN8CH(Connect cableof #8Elevator)
PlugCOM1endoftheRS-232cable’sDB9connector,andOPT8A’s1 Connectorplugotherendof RS-232cable’sDB25connector. st
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 3 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
3.OPT8ACONNECTOR PlugoneendoftheDB62cableintoSmartioC168H/PCI’sDB62bracketconnector, andthencarefullytightentheattachmentscrews.Afterthat,plugtheotherendof thecableintotheRS-232connectionbox'sDB62connector.Notethatbothendsof thecableareidentical.
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 4 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
4.C168H/PCI(multiport)
OTP8ACABLE
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 5 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
5.Allconnectorlist C168H/PCI OPT8A
CANMUX
DB25NO
COMNO
CARDNO
ELEVATORNO
1
COM1
1
#1~#4
2
COM2
2
#5~#8
3
COM3
3
#9~#12
4
COM4
4
#13~#16
5
COM5
5
#17~#20
6
COM6
6
#21~#24
7
COM7
7
#25~#28
8
COM8
8
#29~#32
DB62
6.StateofMUXboard
SW1 Default:ON(upside) 50KHz
LEDD4&D2 Itisflickeringat200mswhencommunicatingbetween PCandMUX. Noconnection,theyareoff.
*CTCRJumper:J3,J4,J8andSH2 ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 6 ModifiedbyJune2008
OverseasEngineeringTeam
RUN(Blue) 1. Communication check between PC and MUX => Do not connect cable between MUXandC/Pandifthereisnoproblemat communication, it will be flickering by 500ms. 2. Communication check between MUX and CP => Do not connect cable between PC and MUX and if there is no problem at communication, it will be flickering by 500ms. Note) No any connection, it will be flickeringby2sec.
PWR Power ON
TX1(lightBlue) Receive any signal (Command such as parking, fireman…)fromPC,itwillbeflickeringtwotimes. RX1(Yellow) It will be flickering when communicating between MUXandC/P.
*Setthedataas“O46”=1byIMS
‘ApplicationofCRTmonitoring
ThyssenkruppDongyangElevator 7 ModifiedbyJune2008
Chapter 14-2
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
CRTMonitoring SystemUserManual
Contents
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
ThyssenKrupp
1. Summary......…................................................... 1 2. Start Screen.......………………............................. 2 2.1 Total CAR........................................................... 3 2.2 Single CAR........................................................ 4 3. CAR Control......................................................... 5 4. Report........................................................... 6 4.1 Elevator State Report ..........................................7 4.2 Elevator Error Report...........................................7 4.3 Elevator Control Report...................................... 7
1.Summary
As nowadays, buildings are going to High-Rise & Land-Marks, therecameoutmanyelevators`relatedequipmentswhichsoshould bemonitored&controlledandpeopleareusingelevatorsmoreoften, in a day. Of course we need now more persons & money for management of whole elevators & its` related equipments. From these reasons, to minimize the cost & man-power in controlling & monitoring the elevators, essential is need for development of such Supervisory Control System. So TKDE developed, by cooperation special IT programming sub-contractor, “CRT Monitoring Control System for Elevator’ applying CRT to the previous simple “Display Panel” controlsystem,whichenablingmoreefficientlygivingvarious usefulinformationtoBuildingmanager.
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
1
ThyssenKrupp
WithinthisCRTMonitoringSystem,Buildingmanagerisable,not onlytolooktheelevators`realtimeoperationinformationandsogrip alloperationstatusbyhislook,becausealltheinformationcouldbe showninCRTmonitorbyGraphicScreen,butalsoabletocontrol all the system by key switch, from an immediate warning, when emergency situation (out-of-order, fire). For this efficient controlling, RS-485Interfaceis beingconnectedbetweenMachineRoom & CRT Supervisory and because of Serial Communication method, it gives advantages for easy installation & maintenance and higher cost reductiontousers.
2.StartScreen
Whenuseroperatethemonitoringprogram,thestartscreenisoperating. 1)StartScreenMENU Functions
Description Monitoringallcarsatonescreen.
Controlallelevatorunits. Providestatusanderrorreportorprintoutthereports. Exittheprogram. ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
2
ThyssenKrupp
Monitoring4carsatonescreenwithfloor’sgraphic.
2.1TotalCAR
MonitoringallcarsononescreenfromTotalCAR. WhenuserclickiconontheMenu,itmonitorselevatorspresent operationdirection(Up-Green,Down-Red),operatingfloor&statusofeachDoors&Cars. Operation Status
PAK (Parking)
Normal Operation. The elevator is deactivated for energy saving.
FD (Fault Detect)
Error is detected on elevator.
IND (Independent)
A elevator is isolated from group.
AUT( Automatic)
Automatic operation in normal condition.
INS (Inspection)
The elevator is under Inspection operation.
DPX (Duplex) FC (Fire Control) FCF (Fire Control Finish)
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
The elevators are under group operation. Fireman Emergency Operation. The elevators are dispatched to the assigned floor by FC.
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
3
ThyssenKrupp
RUN (Run)
description
2.2SingleCAR
Monitoring4carsasonegroupfromSingleCAR. WhenuserclickiconontheMenu,itmonitorselevatorspresentoperation Direction(Up-Green,Down-Red),operatingfloor&statusofeachDoors&Cars. Operation Status
PAK (Parking)
Normal Operation. The elevator is deactivated for energy saving.
FD (Fault Detect)
Error is detected on elevator.
IND (Independent)
A elevator is isolated from group.
AUT( Automatic)
Automatic operation in normal condition.
INS (Inspection)
The elevator is under Inspection operation.
DPX (Duplex) FC (Fire Control) FCF (Fire Control Finish)
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
The elevators are under group operation. Fireman Emergency Operation. The elevators are dispatched to the assigned floor by FC.
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
4
ThyssenKrupp
RUN (Run)
description
3.CARControl 3.1Password Whenuserclickicon,theuserhavetoentercorrectpasswordfirst. FactoryDefaultPassword:1111
3.2ElevatorControl Pleaseselectelevatorcontrolfunctions. • PAK– Thecarcanbedeactivatedonfixedfloorforenergysaving. • BITPASS– Setupnon-servicefloors. • DUMMYCALL– Registercallsonfixedfloor.
Buttons • Set:Setuptheselectedcontrolfunctions.
(PAKfunctiononly) • Close:Closethedialogbox.
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
5
ThyssenKrupp
• Reset:Releasetheselectedcontrolfunctions.
4.Report
ThispictureshowsuseroptionsforElevatorReport. Pleaseselectbelowreports • ElevatorState • ElevatorError • ElevatorControl
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
6
ThyssenKrupp
Reportdatebydailyormonthlybased. Previewbyscreenreport. Printbypaperrepot.
4.1ElevatorStateReport
Itshowsstatelistofelevatorsby selectedtimeperiodalsousercan printoutthisreport.
4.2ElevatorErrorReport
Itshowserrorlistofelevatorsby selectedtimeperiodalsouser canprintoutthisreport.
4.3ElevatorControlReport
ACompany ofThyssenKrupp Elevator
ThyssenKrupp Dongyang Elevator
7
ThyssenKrupp
Itshowscontrollistofelevatorsby selectedtimeperiodalsousercan printoutthisreport.
[Appendix 1] ◈ C168 PCI Card Driver Software Installation Mount the C168H/PCI into the PC and turn the computer on. As shown in [Figure 1], “Found New Hardware” alert will appear on the task bar. This means that your computer OS has found a new hardware mounted into the PCI Serial Port. The OS will then automatically locate the new hardware’s software driver (if it is already installed) and enable that application. If the driver is not found, the image shown in [Figure 1] will appear. Proceed to the software installation guide as shown below.
[Figure 1] Found New Hardware Indicator In [Figure 2] select “A” then click the “Next” button.
A
[Figure 2] Driver Update Select Method In [Figure 3] click “A” then the “Next” button.
Page 1 of 17
A
[Figure 3] Driver Install Method Select Select “B” as shown in [Figure 4]. The “D:＼” (pointer “C”) represents the CDROM disk drive. Click on the Browse button (pointer “A”) to locate the relevant software. Insert the MOXA CD that comes with the C168H/PCI into the CDROM disk drive.
B
C
A
[Figure 4] Driver Install File Search Location Assignment Select MSB V2.1 (D:) as shown in [Figure 5] then find pointer “A” ( C168HPCI >
Page 2 of 17
Software > WindowsXP_2003 > x86 ) from sub-folders. Click on the “OK” button.
A
[Figure 5] Driver Install File Folder Location Browse As shown in [Figure 6], once you have selected the corresponding folder, press the “Next” button.
A
[Figure 6] Driver Install File Search Location Assignment [Figure 7] shows that the search for the driver is in progress (approx. 5sec ~ 2min. time delay). Once found, [Figure 7-1] will appear. Select C168H/PCI Series … in “A” then press the “Next” button.
Page 3 of 17
[Figure 7] Driver Installation File Search in progress
A
[Figure 7-1] Driver Select [Figure 8] will appear then click “Continue Anyway” as in [Figure 8-1].
Page 4 of 17
[Figure 8] Window prompting the user whether to proceed with the installation or not
[Figure 8-1] An enlarged window of Figure 8 above
Page 5 of 17
[Figure 9] shows that the software driver is being installed
[Figure 9] Driver installation in progress As shown in [Figure 10], click on the “Finish” button. The “MOXA C168H/PCI Card software driver” will be installed. The installation process will continue for each communication port (RS-232C) embedded in “MOXA C168H/PCI Card”.
[Figure 10] Driver installation complete
Page 6 of 17
◈ C168H/PCI Card Comport Driver Installation [Figure 1] shows that the RS-232C Comport has been found for the first time.
[Figure 1] Comport found for the first time. Select “A” in [Figure 2] and press the “Next” button.
A
[Figure 2] Driver update preferences
Page 7 of 17
Click “A” in [Figure 3] then click “Next”.
A
[Figure 3] Selecting the driver installation method
Select “B” from [Figure 4]. The “D:＼” (pointer “C”) is the CD-ROM disk drive. Press the “A” (Browse) to locate the relevant software driver. Insert the MOXA CD provided with the C168H/PCI into the CD-ROM disk drive.
Page 8 of 17
B
C
A
[Figure 4] Driver Install File Search Location Assignment
As shown in [Figure 5], select MSB V2.1 (D:) and “A” ( C168HPCI > Software > WindowsXP_2003 > x86 ) from its sub-folders. Click on the “OK” button.
Page 9 of 17
A
[Figure 5] Locating the folder containing the installation file Once the installation folder has been selected as shown by “A” in [Figure 6], click the “Next” button.
A
[Figure 6] Driver Install File Search Location Assignment
Page 10 of 17
[Figure 7] shows that the driver search is in progress (approx. 5sec ~ 2min time delay). Once found, [Figure 7-1] will appear. Select C168H/PCI Series … in “A” then click the “Next” button.
[Figure 7] Driver installation file search in progress
A
[Figure 7-1] Driver Select
Page 11 of 17
Press “Continue Anyway” when [Figure 8] appears.
[Figure 8] Window prompting the user whether to proceed with the installation or not [Figure 9] shows the installation progress.
[Figure 9] Driver search progress
Page 12 of 17
Press the “Finish” button in [Figure 10]. The MOXA Port 0 driver is now installed. To install Port1, Port2, Port3 … Port 7, repeat the procedures in [Figure 3] to [Figure 10].
[Figure 10] Driver installation complete
Page 13 of 17
◈ Verfiying the newly installed software When “C168H/PCI Card Driver Install” and “C168H/PCI Card Comport Driver Install” is completed then do the following starting with the start up menu.
[Figure 1] Windows start button screen 1. Press Windows Start on the bottom left of the screen. As shown in [Figure 1], right-click on “My Computer” to show the pop-up menu. Click on Properties at the bottom of the menu. [Figure 2] will then appear.
Page 14 of 17
[Figure 2] System Properties window 2. In [Figure 2], select the “Hardware” tab.
[Figure 3] Hardware tab in the System Properties window
Page 15 of 17
3. Select “Device Manager” in [Figure 3].
A
[Figure 4] Device Manager Screen 4. Look inside the oval shape indicated by “A” in [Figure 4] for the list of installed communication ports.
A
B
[Figure 25] Port list from the Device Manager window 5. In [Figure 5] the “Communications Port (COM1)” indicated by “A” is the communication port on the PC while the “MOXA Communications Port 1 (COM2)” indicated by “B” is the communication port added after the installation of C168H/PCI Card.
Page 16 of 17
It is evident that 8 ports have been added. The latest Office PC includes only one COM1 port as default. In the event that Industrial PC is used, then COM Port may not be available or may include only two ports. In this case, the “MOXA Communications Port” is either “MOXA Communications Port 1 (COM1)” or “MOXA Communications Port 1 (COM3).”
Note:
If you need further information regarding installation, refer to the following documentations included in the MOXA CD: C168HPCI\Document\C168HPCI Quick Install_v1.pdf C168HPCI\Document\ C168HPCI(3 edition).pdf C168HPCI\Document\ WinXP Installation.pdf
Page 17 of 17
Code 100 110 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031
ErrMsg PositionSensorSequenceerror LoadweigherCommError OScouldnotcreateatimerforaclient OScouldnotcreatethememoryrequiredforaclient FScheduleroverran-Internalsoftwareerror. GateandLocksopenedduringarun DOLdetectedwhileHWclosed. Hoistwayinterlockfailedtoclose. SafetyStringopenedduringrun MotorContactorAlreadyEnergized MotorContactorerror MotorContactorFailedToEnergize SerialIOtimeouterror NVHardwarefailure NVChecksumerror SoftwareErrormakinginvalidNVrequest Softwareerror-NVFull,cannotholdanotherclientstructure Softwareerror-ChangeinRunTypeduringrun NormalLimitError NormalLimitsandcarpositiondonotagree Softwareerror-IOdatabasehasbeencorrupted InspectionindicatesanInvalidI/OCondition RunMonitor-Runprotecttimerexpired RunMonitor-Wrongdirectionrun Excessivenumberofre-levels BPParityError?InvalidBPinputcombination DoorZoneSequenceError DoorZoneMonitorError Selectorshowsleveloutsidedoorzone LUandLDactiveatsametime Levelingsequenceerror Selectorset-uperror?Selectornotsetupproperly
1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1044 1045 1046 1049 1050 1051 1052
Selectorpositionerror ExpansionBoardError ImproperTargetRunReq Impropercontrolledrundirchange Impropercontrolledrun ImproperFindFloorrun TargetRunDirectionError DoorWatchDogclosingfailure DoorWatchDogopeningfailure BothactivateandinactivateinputsforFireServicePhase1 BothactivateandinactivateinputsforFireServicePhase2 FailedtoaddI/Otohardwareassignmentslist Opendoorprotectionfailure Closedoorprotectionfailure StuckDoorOpeningdeviceerror StuckDCBerror
1053 1054
Downruntimeexceeded5minutes
1055 1056 1057
Floortablesofencodercountsnotsetupwhenattemptinganautorun Encoderoutoftoleranceatfloorlevel
1058 1059 1060
BadEncoderRe-calibration Selectorsetupnotcompleted
1061 1062
EncoderInterruptFailure
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070
FalsePower-FailureError LVU-LVDError
1071 1072 1073
Gate-LocksMonitorError CarGate-DoorOpenLimitError
1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081
CarStopSwitchOverrideError FreightDoorInterlockStuckError LossofEncoderPulseTrainError LowBatteryError DownRunAttemptedbutvelocitystayedzero BadGroupJobData BadInitializationofNon-Volatilememory
1082 1083 1084
BadRecallofNon-Volatilememory Caristoofaroutoflevelforare-level
1085 1086 1087 1088 1089
ValveContactOFFError MotorContactorOFF CarGateandDoorLocksmadeandDCLnotactivated
1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099
CDCFFailure-CDCFandCDCFMwereinthesamestate CDCRFailure-CDCRandCDCRMwereinthesamestate HDIFFailure-HDIFandHDIFMwereinthesamestate HDIRFailure-HDIRandHDIRMwereinthesamestate
1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107
FrontGatemadeandDCLdidnotactivate RearGatemadeandDCLRdidnotactivate Doorcommunicationlosswasdetected Clippedhoistwayinterlockduringarun CDL-CardoordidnotclosewhenDCLwasmade AbortedRun Excessivelevelingtime
1108 1109 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504
Startretryshutdown FSCDBrelayerror DriveFailedtoenergize MCDFailedtoOpen MCEdroppedduringrun BrakeContactorfailedtopick BrakeContactordroppedduringDriveRunning
1505 1506
DriveFault
1507 1508 1509
DrivefailedtoechoDRVEoverCAN
1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612
Loadweigherloadlineslopenegative PTQcurrentlineslopenegative PTQpullingthroughbrake Loadweigherdevicesaturated ETSDfailedtoechooverCAN ETSDsystemfault.TheETSDDSPhasaninternalfault TheDriveTempOKsensorhasdetectedanovertemp BrakeLiftSwitchbad CanBusChannelturnedOFF CANchannel1didnotcommunicate CANchannel2didnotcommunicate CANchannel3didnotcommunicate InvalidCANhandle BadFuseFoundonHN Noresponsefor60secfromCANbuschannel1 Noresponsefor60secfromCANbuschannel2 Noresponsefor60secfromCANbuschannel3 MotorSpeedtooslowvs.Demand Encodervelocitiesdisagree Motorencoderviolatesvelocitywindow Motorencoderwiredbackwardstothe186CPUboard Motormovedgreaterthan6inches
1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619
1656
PositionEncoderLosserror Carvelocitywaswithin10fpmofvelocitywindow MonitorFailed Unintendedmotiondetected RGOKinputdeactivated Ropegrippermonitorfault
1657 1658
BRKCFailed CANbusbufferoverrun
1659
DEMsliperror
1620 1652 1653 1654 1655
1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678
DEManyfault 186DEMcommlossCAN 186DEMdetectedbadDEMencoders 186DEMdetectedbadDEMSPI DEMLOSTTRACTIONPE(Lpos.Encoder)trig-InitSdn-TFR DEMEncoderSpeed>5%-InitSdn-TFR DEMSPIwarning DEMRO1relay DEMRO2relay EOBPMFailedtodeactivatewhenEOBPActivated INEOMfailedtodeactivatewhenINEOActivated UPSBatteryBad/Overloaded/Hasafault Carisnotmovingwhenbrakeshouldbepicking RunAbort2 INVALID_LOAD_READING MCEdroppedoutatendofarun MCEdroppedoutwaitingforbraketopick MCEdroppedoutinthemiddleofarun MCEdroppedoutduringfinalstopstateindigitizer
1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 9999
RunAbort-DigitizerlostfMovingduringarun RunAbort-Digitizerhadinvalidruntypeafterstartdelay RunAbort-Failedtogetdriveenabledatstartofarun RunAbort-Failedtogetdriverrunsignalatstartofarun PreviousCNsoftwareversion PreviousHNsoftwareversion NoresponsefromCN NoresponsefromHN ToomanyCN/HNNode InvalidmappingCNconfiguration InvalidmessageIDonchannel1 InvalidmessageIDonchannel2 InvalidmessageIDonchannel3 InvalidCANmessagelength SDThighspeed SDBhighspeed S-CurveShotthefloor
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
Elevator Coupling Equipment Manual
Ver 1.1.1
Thyssenkrupp
Page 1 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
Table of Contents 1. Parts List ....................................................................................................... 3 2. CAN MUX....................................................................................................... 4 2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 4 2.2 System Specifications ...................................................................................................... 4
3. C168H/PCI (multi port) ................................................................................. 6 3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 6 3.2 Operating System Support............................................................................................... 6 3.3 Features ........................................................................................................................... 7
4. OPT8A ........................................................................................................... 8 4.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 8 4.2 OPT8A Connector ............................................................................................................ 8 4.3 Features ........................................................................................................................... 9
5. Elevator to CRT, Cable Connection .......................................................... 10 5.1 Communication line........................................................................................................ 10 5.2 CTCR to CAN MUX Line Connection ............................................................................ 11 5.3 CAN MUX to OPT 8A Line Connection .......................................................................... 12 5.4 Complete list of connectors............................................................................................ 12
6. CAN MUX Installation, Setting................................................................... 13 6.1 CAN MUX Installation .................................................................................................... 13 6.2 CAN MUX Setting .......................................................................................................... 14
7. Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 16
Page 2 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
1. Parts List Part
Specification
MXC168HP
8 PORTS ASYNC BOARD(PCI TYPE)
MXOPT8A
8 PORTS RS-232 CONNECTION BOX
4U Subrack
CAN_MASTER SET TYPE CASE
4CH CAN MAS TER MODULE RS232 CABLE
4CH CAN MASTER MODULE 25M/9M CABLE 2M
MXC168HP
MXOPT8A
4U Subrack / 4CH CAN MUX Card
RS232 CABLE
[Figure 1] Itemized Parts LIST
* Note - Applicable parts’ quantity may vary according to installation site. Attention to this detail is needed!
Page 3 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
2. CAN MUX
[Figure 2] CAN MUX
2.1 Introduction -
Current industrial work sites require a system that can monitor the site status and control equipments from a centralized location. The system being described here is designed specifically to satisfy these types of requirements by allowing simultaneous monitoring and control of up to 40 sets of elevators or escalators within 1km distance.
2.2 System Specifications ◈ Components - Set Type Module (hereinafter referred to as
『CANMUX』): 10 sets
- 19inch chassis with 10 sets of CANMUX mounted (hereinafter referred to as
『chassis』)
Page 4 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
◈ Electrical Specifications Item
Value
chassis input voltage (10 set installation)
220
[VAC]
chassis input voltage (10 set installation)
8
[W]
◈ Mechanical Specifications
▣ CAN MUX Item
Specification
Size
30 * 166 * 173 [mm]
Weight
0.22[kg]
▣ CHASSIS (10 sets of CANMUX installed) Item
Specification
Size
482 * 200 * 177 [mm]
Weight
5.420[kg]
▣ ENVIRONMENTAL Item
Specification
℃
Operating Temperature
0 ~ 70
Humidity
0 ~ 95%
◈ Communication Specifications - CANMUX ⇔ CP (control panel) CAN 25kbps, 50kbps, ThyssenKrupp Elevator Korea Protocol - CANMUX ⇔ Monitoring Center RS232, 115200bps (default)/ N/ 8/ 1, MODBUS RTU
Page 5 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
3. C168H/PCI (multi port)
[Figure 3] C168H / PCI CARD
3.1 Introduction -
Smartio products represent smart, multiport, serial I/O solutions for the modern technological world. Smartio C168H/PCI is designed for a 32-bit PCI bus with the plugand-play feature. It offers 8 serial ports for connecting terminals, modems, printers, data acquisition equipment, and other serial devices to a PC. Smartio C168H/PCI is a welldesigned, fine-tuned device driver, and as such makes full use of the 32 byte Tx/Rx FIFO and on-chip H/W flow control, making it possible to transfer data, without loss, at speeds of up to 921.6 Kbps. This product offers a reliable and high performance solution for serial multi-port communications.
3.2 Operating System Support -
Smartio C168H/PCI supports Windows NT, Windows 95/98, and DOS, with user-friendly installation, configuration, and performance.
Page 6 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
3.3 Features Contents * Compact Board Size (half-size) * Plug and Play, no switches or jumpers * Surge/isolation protection option * High speed 16C550C Communication Controller with on-chip hardware flow control; no data loss, even at high transmission speeds * Windows NT/95/98 device drivers and PComm serial comm tool * Bus interface: 32-bit PCI * Number of ports: 8 * I/O address: assigned by PCI BIOS * IRQ: assigned by PCI BIOS * Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8 * Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2 * Parity: none, even, odd, space, mark * UART: 8 x 16C550C or compatible * Speed: 50 – 921.6 Kbps * Connectors: 8 x DB25/DB9, male or female
－
* Data signals: RS-232 TxD, RxD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, GND * Operating temp: 0 – 55
℃
* Power requirement: 180 mA max. (+5V) 110 mA max. (+12V) 160 mA max. (-12V) * Dimensions: 123 x 100 cm * Popular OS supported: Windows NT / Windows 95/98
Page 7 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
4. OPT8A
[Figure 4] OPT8A / Connector Cable
4.1 Introduction -
OPT8A is a terminal block that allows to distribute up to 8 ports depending on the number of terminals allotted by ComPort in the C168H/PCI card. Communication status of each port is identified easily with LED indicators to help quickly recognize the equipment condition on-site.
4.2 OPT8A Connector -
Plug one end of the DB62 cable into Smartio C168H/PCI’s DB62 bracket connector. Carefully tighten the attachment screws. Plug the other end of the cable into the RS-232 connection box's DB62 connector. Note that both ends of the cable are identical.
[Figure 4-2] OPT8A to C168H/PCI Connection
Page 8 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
4.3 Features - Connector Type
: Female DB25 (OPT8A/S)
- Dimensions (W x D x H)
: 247 x 108 x 35mm (9.7 x 4.3 x 1.4 in)
- Specs
: TxD, RxD LED Indicators (OPT8A/B/S)
50bps to 921.6Kbps transmission speed (OPT8A/S) Surge protection w/25 KV ESD, 2 KV EFT (OPT8S)
Page 9 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
5. Elevator to CRT, Cable Connection 5.1 Communication line CRT PC
CAN MUX
OPT 8A
CRT PC
OPT8A C168HPCI
RS2 32
OPT8A Cable
CAN MUX 케 이 블
o r U U T L P 2 9 1 9
CTCR #1
#2
#3
[ TK50 ELEVATOR CRT ]
Page 10 of 16
#4
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
5.2 CTCR to CAN MUX Line Connection -
Cable is the elevator’s (CTCR) communication line plug green color connector ( low 8 pin ) in the rear of the CAN MUX ’s
From CT CR Elevator Line
T+,R+
T-,R-
T+,R+
1CH_R+
T-,R-
1CH_R-
[Figure 5-2-1] Backside of CAN MUX
CH1 +
CH1 CH3 + CH2 + CH3 CH2 CH4 +
CH4 [Figure 5-2-2] CAN MUX LINE CONNECTING AREA
Page 11 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
5.3 CAN MUX to OPT 8A Line Connection -
st
Plug COM1 end of the RS-232 cable’s DB9 connector, and OPT8A’s 1 Connector plug other end of RS-232 cable’s DB25 connector
R S 2 3 2 C a b le
O PT8A
[Figure 5.3] OPT8A to CAN MUX Connection
5.4 Complete list of connectors C168H/PCI
DB62
OPT8A
CAN MUX
DB25 NO.
COM NO.
CARD NO.
ELEVATOR NO.
1
COM1
1
#1~#4
2
COM2
2
#5~#8
3
COM3
3
#9~#12
4
COM4
4
#13~#16
5
COM5
5
#17~#20
6
COM6
6
#21~#24
7
COM7
7
#25~#28
8
COM8
8
#29~#32
Page 12 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
6. CAN MUX Installation, Setting 6.1 CAN MUX Installation
2. Bolt
1. Handle
2. Bolt
[Figure 6-1]
1. As shown in [Figure 5-1], insert the CAN MUX card into the slot then push in the direction of the arrow. 2. Once the card is mounted, tighten the bolts on top and bottom (marked ‘2’) as shown in [Figure 5-1] to secure the card. 3. Turn ON the CAN MUX power switch. The card power LED illuminates when the card is mounted properly.
Page 13 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
6.2 CAN MUX Setting 1. Unscrew 2 bolts (marked ‘2’) in [Figure5-1] and pull on the handle (marked ‘1’) to disconnect the CANMUX from the chassis. 2. With [Table 5-2-1] as reference, operate the DIP SW1 for CH1 elevator mode setting
Mode
For CH1 operation only.
ON
KSD04H
CAN
SW1
20 Kbps 1
2
3
4
CAN 50 Kbps
[Table 6-2-1] For CH1 operation only
3. After the mode setting, re-install the CANMUX and screw in the bolts that were removed. 4. Operate CH2, 3 and 4 in the same manner as CH1.
※ Contents added to Ver 0201 2007—5-11 - SW3-6 Reserved - SW3-7 product delivery initial setting reset - SW3-8 Loop back self test
Page 14 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
Added in Ver 0201 2007—5-11
Initial Set Value Select . SW2-1 ON , EV Model Initial Set Value . SW2-1 OFF, TAC Model Initial Set Value
Communication Speed Added
. Turn ON SW3-5 when CAN communication speed set value is set to 100K and 50K. . Turn OFF SW3-5 when CAN communication speed set value is 50K and 20K.
[Table 6-2-2] Ver 0201 2007—5-11
Page 15 of 16
Thyssenkrupp Elevator Hardware User’’ s Guide
7. Troubleshooting CAN MUX card PWR LED does not light on - Check the power cable connection on the backside of the chassis. - Ensure that POWER SWITCH at the front of the chassis is ON.
CAN MUX card RX and TX LEDs of each CH do not blink - Check power cable connection on the backside of the chassis. - If the problem persists even after performing the above countermeasure, press the
RESET button located on the front side of the CANMUX card.
Elevator status cannot be verified in CRT - Check if RUN LED of CANMUX is blinking. - Check if each CH LED of CANMUX is blinking. - Check the elevator mode setting of CANMUX. - CANMUX RUN LED blinks once every 2 seconds when operating properly.
(When normal packets are received via CAN and RS232C ports, the LED blinks every 0.5 seconds. To check for proper communication of either CAN or RS232C, investigate by connecting only the port to be checked.)
Page 16 of 16
TKEK OFFICE R&D CRT Monitoring System Ver 1.1.1
Thyssenkrupp
Page 1 of 19
Table of Contents 1. Program Installation..................................................................................... 3 2. Communication Cable Information (Option) .............................................. 8 2-1. Elevator CRT Cable Communication Method ............................................ 8 2-2. Specifications of Communication Cable........................................................... 8
3. Screen Configuration & Operating Method................................................ 9 3-1. CRT MAIN Screen Description ........................................................................ 9 3-2. Total CAR ...................................................................................................... 10 3-3. Single CAR.................................................................................................... 12 3-4. Control .......................................................................................................... 14 3-5. Report ........................................................................................................... 15 3-5-1. Elevator State List............................................................................................... 16 3-5-2. Elevator Error List............................................................................................... 17 3-5-3. Elevator Control List ........................................................................................... 18
4. Sensing Signal............................................................................................ 19 4-1. Elevators` Operation State ............................................................................ 19 4-2. Emergency Operation ................................................................................... 19
5. Appendix 1 (C168 PCI CARD Device Driver Install Method) 6. Appendix 2 (TAC50KCarErrorCodes)
* Note Some functions described in this manual may vary according to the model of the elevator installed at the site.
Page 2 of 19
1. Program Installation Prior to elevator CRT program installation, the C168H/PCI card must be installed. Refer to the following installation guide:
Multi Port Driver installation manual is included in the "MOXA" CD: MSB V2.2 ([Drive:]) > C168HPCI > Document > WinXP Installation.pdf, and the Device Driver is included in MSB V2.2 ([Drive:]) > C168HPCI > Software > Windows XP_2003 > x86.
OS must be Windows XP Home or Windows XP Pro, and the version must be higher than Service Pack 2. OS must be installed and no other application programs other than C168H/PCI is installed.
Note:
Refer to contents of “Appendix 1” for C168 PCI CARD Device Driver installation method.
1) Insert the Elevator CRT Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive then double-click the OfficeCRT.MSI file to execute.
☞ Figure 1-1 When setup program is executed, the computer will begin the necessary preparations prior to installation.
1
2) When installation is readied, the following window will appear. Click the “Next” button. 3) Select the Elevator CRT installation folder. 4) After selecting the installation folder, press the “Next” button.
☞ Figure 1-2 Assign Installation Folder.
1
2
Page 4 of 19
5) Press the “Next” button to start INSTALLATION.
☞ Figure 1-3 Window that appears after the installation folder has been selected.
1
☞ Figure 1-4 Window showing installation progress.
6) When installation is completed, a phrase “OfficeCRT has been successfully installed” will appear on the screen. This means that the installation has been properly completed. Press the “Close” button to end the installation program.
Page 5 of 19
☞ Figure 1-5 Installation progress screen.
1
7) When the installation is completed, the “OfficeCRT” icon will be created on the desktop.
☞ Figure 1-6 Desktop Execute File
Page 6 of 19
8) Office CRT installation folder can be found in the “OfficeCRT” folder in “Program Files”.
☞ Figure 1-7 OfficeCRT Folder Location
Page 7 of 19
2. Communication Cable Information (Option) 2-1. Elevator CRT Cable Communication Method 1) Communication Cable: STP UL2919-AMESB 2) Electrical transmission Distance: ~ 1.2 ㎞ 2-2. Specifications of Communication Cable 1) Model: UL2919-AMESB 2) Dimension: 2P × 22AWG ․ No. of Cores: 2 Pair ․ Conductor: 22AWG, 7/0.254 (0.35 ㎟) ․ Thickness of Insulator: 0.55 ㎜ ․ Earth wire: 7/0.254 ․ Al/Mylar Tape: 0.025 ㎜ 3) Characteristic ․ ․ ․ ․ ․
Conductor`s Resistance: ~ 59Ω/㎞ Voltage: 500V Stand-up 1 min. Insulation resistance: 1000 ㏁/㎞ Capacitance: 45 ㎊/m Impedance: 120Ω
Page 8 of 19
3. Screen Configuration & Operating Method -
Double-click on the “office CRT.exe” shortcut icon on the desktop. An initial screen shown below will appear:
[ Figure 3-1 ]
3-1. CRT MAIN Screen Description (1) Program Title – Indicates ‘Elevator CRT Monitoring System” program. (2) ThyssenKrupp Elevator Logo appears. (3) Total Cars – Simplified display of all elevators (4) Single Car – Sets of 6 elevators are displayed starting with #1. (5) Single Car direction button PRE 6 sets of elevators are displayed in one screen. If there are more than 6 sets, use the direction key to view next set of numbered elevators. (6) Single Car direction button NEXT (7) Control Item – PARKING, Floor Lock … . (8)
Page 9 of 19
(9) Program Type – Elevator CRT Monitoring System (10) Exit – Terminates the program (11) Close Screen – Terminates the program or shrinks/enlarges the screen
3-2. Total CAR -
State of all elevators may be monitored from one screen. Current floor data, door open/close, up/down state and elevator state (RUN, PAK, FD, IND, AUTO, INS) data may be acquired.
[ Figure 3-2 ]
Page 10 of 19
Elevator Numbered Name Current Floor Data
Up/Down State Display
Current State Data Display
Door Open/Close Condition Display
[ Figure 3-3 ]
Page 11 of 19
3-3. Single CAR -
Maximum of 6 elevator sets per group is monitored. Elevator name, up/down data, current floor marking, current elevator state (RUN, PAK, INS, FD, IND), elevator control (PAK, BIT PASS), Hall Call Up/Down, Car Call, Door Open/Close, and non-stopping floor (BIT PASS) data are displayed.
[ Figure 3-4 ] (1) Displays current floor data. (2) Displays elevator operating direction. RUN State is also displayed with the operating direction. (3) Displays each elevator state. (4) Indicates Hall button pressed condition from each floor. (5) Indicates a condition of pressing buttons inside the Car. ( Car Call )
Page 12 of 19
(6) Displays non-stopping floor (BIT PASS) state. When non-stopping floor is set then the Car will not stop at the corresponding floor and the marking of the floor will change color to gray. (7) Displays elevator door open/close state. The condition shown in the screen indicates that the door is closed. When the door is opened, the color changes to yellow and the icon also changes to door open condition.
* Single CAR – State A B C D
(A)
Floor marking – Displays the current and non-stopping floors. During non-stopping floor setting, floor marking changes color from blue to gray.
(B)
Car Call marking – Displays state of when the call button is paged from within the elevator.
(C)
Hall Call Up/Down marking – Displays the Up/Down button that is pressed inside the hall.
(D)
Door Open/Close marking – Displays Elevator door state.
Page 13 of 19
3-4. Control -
Select the “Control” button. A window asking for password will appear. Enter password then click OK.
[ Figure 3-5 ] -
When the “Control” button is selected, the following screen will appear for controlling each elevator.
[ Figure 3-6 ] (1) Indicates a “Single Elevator Control” screen. (2) In addition to a single car, cars belonging to a group are also available for
Page 14 of 19
selection and control. Controlling elevators affiliated to a group, however, may affect the group control. (3) Control command selection domain. (4) Set –Selected from ‘2’, ’3’, ’7’, and ’8’ are given to each car in the form of a command. (5) Reset – Selection permitted according to operating conditions of the elevator and the button commands a release if command is in operation. (6) Close –Exit screen. (7) Select a floor(s). (8) Scroll bar - scrolls the floor data upward or downward
3-5. Report -
Select the Report button. The ‘Elevator Report’ window appears.
1
2
3
8 7
4
5
[ Figure 3-7 ]
Page 15 of 19
6
(1) Indicates Report screen. (2) Select elevator car. (3) Select report type. (4) Preview as report screen (5) Print report. (6) End Report (7) Select report data ending time. (8) Select report data starting time.
3-5-1. Elevator State List -
Elevator State List information is displayed. (When no contents are found then the details shown in Figure 3-8 will not be printed.)
[ Figure 3-8 ]
Page 16 of 19
3-5-2. Elevator Error List -
Elevator Error List information is displayed. (When no contents are found then the details shown in Figure 3-9 will not be printed.)
[ Figure 3-9 ]
Page 17 of 19
3-5-3. Elevator Control List -
Elevator Control List information is displayed. (When no contents are found then the details shown in Figure 3-10 will not be printed.)
[ Figure 3-10 ]
Page 18 of 19
4. Sensing Signal 4-1. Elevators` Operation State EMG (Emergency) RUN (Run) - Normal Operation PAK (Parking) AUT (Auto) GRP (Group) FD (Fault Detect) - with Alarm. INS (Inspection) ATT (Attendant) IND (Independent) KP (Key switch Parking) CBS (Call Back Service) VIP
4-2. Emergency Operation FC (Fire Control) - Fireman Emergency Operation FCF (Fire Control Finish) PC (Power Control) - Emergency Power Operation PCF (Power Control Finish)
Page 19 of 19
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
Preference Setting Manual
Ver 1.1.1
Thyssenkrupp
Page 1 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
1. Click on the Windows “START” button (#1). Position the mouse cursor over “All Programs” (#2) to display the extended menu window. Position the mouse cursor over “Accessories” to view “Windows Explorer” (#3).
2
3
1
[Figure 1] Windows Menu window
2. Select “Windows Explorer” (#3).. 3. Once “Windows Explorer” is opened, go to the “Office CRT” installation folder. (Office CRT installation folder is included in the “OfficeCRT” folder under “Program Files”)
Page 2 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
[Figure 2] Windows Explorer screen & Office CRT installation folder contents 4. There is a file called “English.INI” (indicated by the arrow in [Figure 2]) in the OfficeCRT installation folder. 5. Double-click on the “English.INI” file. 6. As shown in [Figure 3], the “English.INI” file will be opened in NotePad.
[Figure 3] “English.INI” file opened in NotePad
Page 3 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
▣ English.INI Content Description [SITE INFO] Section * BASE_PORT -
“BASE_PORT” sets the starting port in the computer.
[Figure 1] Device Manager
-
To view the “Device Manager” window, hold the “Windows Logo” key then press the “PauseBreak” key. A window shown in [Figure 2] will appear. Select the “Hardware” tab then click on the “Device
Manager” button.
Page 4 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
[Figure 2] System Properties window
-
Normally the PORT number in the “MOXA Communications Port 1” as shown in [Figure 1] is registered.
-
If “MOXA Communications Port 1” is set to “COM2” as shown in [Figure 1] then input BASE_PORT =2.
* ELEVATOR_NO
-
“ELEVATOR_NO” is for the total number of ELEVATORS.
-
If there are 5 elevators, input ELEVATOR_NO=5.
Page 5 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
[ELEVATOR INFO] Section
-
This is where individual elevator data is entered.
-
Following details are described in the contents of the “ELEVATOR INFO”:
Ex) E/L #1=L1, TAC, 24 , B3, 21F, COM3, 1, 0, 0
-
“E/L #1” represents the elevator number. As shown in the contents, “E/L #1” represents the No. 1 elevator and “E/L #2” represents the No. 2 elevator. Create identifications equivalent to the number of actual elevators in this manner.
-
“L1” is where the name of the elevator is entered. At the actual work site, input each elevator name.
-
“TAC” is where the elevator model is entered.
-
“24” is where the elevator floor step count is entered. Twenty-four (24) means there 24 stages of elevator floor steps.
-
“B3” is the input of the lowest floor. “B3” means the lowest floor is 3 floors below ground floor.
-
“21F” is the input of the highest floor. “21F” means 21 is the top most floor.
-
“COM3” is the PORT number assigned to a numbered elevator communication. “COM3” means the communication PORT number is “COM3”. (Should not be altered by worker.)
-
“1” is the channel number assigned to communication by the numbered elevator. “1” means the communication channel number is “1”. (Should not be altered by worker.)
Page 6 of 7
Hardware User’’ s Guide
Thyssenkrupp Elevator
[FLOOR] Section
-
This is where elevator floor data is entered.
-
The following will be displayed as “FLOOR” contents.
Ex) E/L#1=B3,B2,B1,BM,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,
-
“E/L #1” represents the number of each elevator. As shown in its contents, “E/L #1” represents the No. 1 elevator and “E/L #2” represents the No. 2 elevator. Create identification numbers equivalent to the number of actual elevators in this manner.
-
Contents following “E/L #1” are inputs of the floor data of the actual building and in reference to the contents, floor data of B3 (3rd floor below ground) to 21 (21st floor above ground) are entered. If floor marking is displayed differently at the site then modify the corresponding floor data.
Page 7 of 7
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
TKEK OFFICE R&D CRT Monitoring System
Thyssenkrupp
Page 1 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
Table of Contents 1. Program Installation..................................................................................... 3 2. Communication Cable Information (Option) .............................................. 7 2-1. Elevator CRT Cable Communication Method ............................................ 7 2-2. Specifications of Communication Cable........................................................... 7
3. Screen Configuration & Operating Method................................................ 8 3-1. CRT MAIN Screen Description ........................................................................ 8 3-2. Total CAR ........................................................................................................ 9 3-3. Single CAR.................................................................................................... 11 3-4. Control .......................................................................................................... 13 3-5. Report ........................................................................................................... 14 3-5-1. Elevator State List............................................................................................... 15 3-5-2. Elevator Error List............................................................................................... 16 3-5-3. Elevator Control List ........................................................................................... 17
4. Sensing Signal............................................................................................ 18 4-1. Elevators` Operation Status........................................................................... 18 4-2. Emergency Operation ................................................................................... 18
* Appendix: Hardware Components * Note Some functions described in this manual may vary according to the model of the elevator installed at the site.
Page 2 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
1. Program Installation Prior to elevator CRT program installation, the C168H/PCI card must be installed. Refer to the following installation guide:
Multi Port Driver installation manual is included in the "MOXA" CD: MSB V2.2 ([Drive:]) > C168HPCI > Document > WinXP Installation.pdf, and the Device Driver is included in MSB V2.2 ([Drive:]) > C168HPCI > Software > Windows XP_2003 > x86.
OS must be Windows XP Home or Windows XP Pro, and the version must be higher than Service Pack 2. OS must be installed and no other application programs other than C168H/PCI is installed.
Page 3 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
1) Insert the Elevator CRT Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive then double-click the OfficeCRT.MSI file to execute.
☞ Figure 1-1 When setup program is executed, the computer will begin the necessary preparations prior to installation.
2) When installation is readied, the following window will appear. Click the “Next” button. 3) Select the Elevator CRT installation folder.
☞ Figure 1-2 Assign Installation Folder.
Page 4 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
4) Press the “Next” button to start INSTALLATION.
☞ Figure 1-3 Window that appears after the installation folder has been selected.
☞ Figure 1-4 Window showing installation progress.
Page 5 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
5) When installation is completed, a phrase “OfficeCRT has been successfully installed” will appear on the screen. This means that the installation has been properly completed. Press the “Close” button to end the installation program.
☞ Figure 1-5 Installation progress screen.
Page 6 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
2. Communication Cable Information (Option) 2-1. Elevator CRT Cable Communication Method 1) Communication Cable: STP UL2919-AMESB 2) Electrical transmission Distance: ~ 1.2 ㎞ 2-2. Specifications of Communication Cable 1) Model: UL2919-AMESB, FTP 2) Dimension: 2P × 22AWG ․ No of Cores: 2 Pair ․ Conductor: 22AWG, 7/0.254 (0.35 ㎟) ․ Thickness of Insulator: 0.55 ㎜ ․ Earth wire: 7/0.254 ․ Al/Mylar Tape: 0.025 ㎜ 3) Characteristic ․ ․ ․ ․ ․
Conductor`s Resistance: ~ 59Ω/㎞ Voltage: 500V Stand-up 1 min. Insulation resistance: 1000 ㏁/㎞ Capacitance: 45 ㎊/m Impedance: 120Ω
Page 7 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
3. Screen Configuration & Operating Method -
Double-click on the “office CRT.exe” shortcut icon on the desktop. An initial screen shown below will appear:
[ Figure 3-1 ]
3-1. CRT MAIN Screen Description (1) Program Title – Indicates ‘Elevator CRT Monitoring System” program. (2) ThyssenKrupp Elevator Logo appears. (3) Total Cars – Simplified display of all elevators (4) Single Car – Sets of 6 elevators are displayed starting with #1. (5) Single Car direction button PRE 6 sets of elevators are displayed in one screen. If there are more than 6 sets, use the direction key to view next set of numbered elevators. (6) Single Car direction button NEXT (7) Control Item – PARKING, Floor Lock … .
Page 8 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
(8) (9) Program Type – Elevator CRT Monitoring System (10) Exit – Terminates the program (11) Close Screen – Terminates the program or shrinks/enlarges the screen
3-2. Total CAR -
State of all elevators may be monitored from one screen. Current floor data, door open/close, up/down state and elevator state (RUN, PAK, FD, IND, AUTO, INS) data may be acquired.
[ Figure 3-2 ]
Page 9 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
Elevator Numbered Name Current Floor Data
Up/Down State Display
Current State Data Display
Door Open/Close Condition Display
[ Figure 3-3 ]
Page 10 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
3-3. Single CAR -
Maximum of 6 elevator sets per group is monitored. Elevator name, up/down data, current floor marking, current elevator state (RUN, PAK, INS, FD, IND), elevator control (PAK, BIT PASS), Hall Call Up/Down, Car Call, Door Open/Close, and non-stopping floor (BIT PASS) data are displayed.
[ Figure 3-4 ] (1) Displays current floor data. (2) Displays elevator operating direction. RUN State is also displayed with the operating direction. (3) Displays each elevator state. (4) Indicates Hall button pressed condition from each floor. (5) Indicates a condition of pressing buttons inside the Car. ( Car Call )
Page 11 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
(6) Displays non-stopping floor (BIT PASS) state. When non-stopping floor is set then the Car will not stop at the corresponding floor and the marking of the floor will change color to gray. (7) Displays elevator door open/close state. The condition shown in the screen indicates that the door is closed. When the door is opened, the color changes to yellow and the icon also changes to door open condition.
* Single CAR – Status A B C D
(A)
Floor marking – Displays the current and non-stopping floors. During non-stopping floor setting, floor marking changes color from blue to gray.
(B)
Car Call marking – Displays state of when the call button is paged from within the elevator.
(C)
Hall Call Up/Down marking – Displays the Up/Down button that is pressed inside the hall.
(D)
Door Open/Close marking – Displays Elevator door state.
Page 12 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
3-4. Control -
Select the “Control” button. A window asking for password will appear. Enter password then click OK.
[ Figure 3-5 ] -
When the “Control” button is selected, the following screen will appear for controlling each elevator.
[ Figure 3-6 ] (1) Indicates a “Single Elevator Control” screen. (2) In addition to a single car, cars belonging to a group are also available for
Page 13 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
selection and control. Controlling elevators affiliated to a group, however, may affect the group control. (3) Control command selection domain. (4) Set –Selected from ‘2’, ’3’, ’7’, and ’8’ are given to each car in the form of a command. (5) Reset – Selection permitted according to operating conditions of the elevator and the button commands a release if command is in operation. (6) Close –Exit screen. (7) Select a floor(s). (8) Scroll bar - scrolls the floor data upward or downward
3-5. Report -
Select the Report button. The ‘Elevator Report’ window appears.
1
2
3
8 7
4
5
[ Figure 3-7 ]
Page 14 of 20
6
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
(1) Indicates Report screen. (2) Select elevator car. (3) Select report type. (4) Preview as report screen (5) Print report. (6) End Report (7) Select report data ending time. (8) Select report data starting time.
3-5-1. Elevator State List
[ Figure 3-8 ]
Page 15 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
3-5-2. Elevator Error List
[ Figure 3-9 ]
Page 16 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
3-5-3. Elevator Control List
[ Figure 3-10 ]
Page 17 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
4. Sensing Signal 4-1. Elevators` Operation Status EMG (Emergency) RUN (Run) – Normal Operation PAK (Parking) AUT (Auto) GRP (Group) FD (Fault Detect) - with Alarm. INS (Inspection) ATT (Attendant) IND (Independent) KP (Key switch Parking) CBS (Call Back Service) VIP
4-2. Emergency Operation FC (Fire Control)- Fireman Emergency Operation FCF (Fire Control Finish) PC (Power Control) – Emergency Power Operation PCF (Power Control Finish)
Page 18 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
* Appendix 1. Hardware Components 1) Parts List
Part
Specification . Make in DELL . Pentium Dual Core 2.53GHz or higher
1
PC
. DVD/RW
Included as part of a full set
. 2MB or more . HDD 250GB or more . Make in DELL 2
MONITOR
. Type : LCD 17 inches . Resolution : 1280 x 1024
Included as part of a full set
3
MXC168HP
8 PORTS ASYNC BOARD(PCI TYPE)
Always included
4
MXOPT8A
8 PORTS RS-232 CONNECTION BOX
Always included
5
4U Subrack
CAN_MASTER SET TYPE CASE
Always included
4CH CAN MASTER MODULE
Always included
6
4CH CAN MAS TER MODULE
7
RS232 CABLE
25M/9M CABLE , Length 2[M]
Always included
8
Install CD
Installer for the EL CRT Program
Always included
PC
Page 19 of 20
Proposal for Thyssenkrupp Elevator Monitoring
MONITOR
MXC168HP
MXOPT8A
4U Subrack / 4CH CAN MUX Card
RS232 CABLE
[ Figure 1 ] Parts List
* Note: -
Please note that the number of parts required may vary according to installation location!
Page 20 of 20
![TK50 Commissioning Manual Rev1 PDF [PDF]](https://pdfs.asia/img/200x200/tk50-commissioning-manual-rev1-pdf.jpg)
